MultiTech MTC-LNA4-B01-US Cellular Modem Guide

MultiTech MTC-LNA4-B01-US Cellular Modem Guide
LE910 V2 SERIES
AT COMMANDS
REFERENCE GUIDE
[01.2017]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5 – 2018-10-11
Mod. 0805 2017-01 Rev.6
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
NOTICE
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Telit assumes no liability
resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein.
The information in this document has been carefully checked and is believed to be reliable. However, no
responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies or omissions. Telit reserves the right to make changes to any
products described herein and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to
time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Telit does not assume
any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither
does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Telit products (machines
and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or
information must not be construed to mean that Telit intends to announce such Telit products, programming,
or services in your country.
Copyrights
This instruction manual and the Telit products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe
copyrighted Telit material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media.
Laws in the Italy and other countries preserve for Telit and its licensors certain exclusive rights for copyrighted
material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works
of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Telit and its licensors contained herein
or in the Telit products described in this instruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed,
merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Telit. Furthermore, the purchase
of Telit products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Telit, as arises by operation of law in the sale
of a product.
Computer Software Copyrights
The Telit and 3rd Party supplied Software (SW) products described in this instruction manual may include
copyrighted Telit and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or
other media. Laws in the Italy and other countries preserve for Telit and other 3rd Party supplied SW certain
exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any
form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Telit or other 3rd Party supplied SW
computer programs contained in the Telit products described in this instruction manual may not be copied
(reverse engineered) or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Telit or the 3rd
Party SW supplier. Furthermore, the purchase of Telit products shall not be deemed to grant either directly
or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Telit or other 3rd Party supplied SW, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that
arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 2 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
I.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Telit and its licensors. It is furnished by express
license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.
II.
Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No
part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior
written permission of Telit
III.
High Risk Materials
Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and
are NOT designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous
environments requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft
Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities"). Telit
and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk
Activities.
IV.
Trademarks
TELIT and the Stylized T Logo are registered in Trademark Office. All other product or service names are
the property of their respective owners.
V.
Third Party Rights
The software may include Third Party Right software. In this case you agree to comply with all terms and
conditions imposed on you in respect of such separate software. In addition to Third Party Terms, the
disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provisions in this License shall apply to the Third Party Right
software.
TELIT HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED FROM ANY THIRD
PARTIES REGARDING ANY SEPARATE FILES, ANY THIRD PARTY MATERIALS INCLUDED IN THE
SOFTWARE, ANY THIRD PARTY MATERIALS FROM WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS DERIVED
(COLLECTIVELY “OTHER CODE”), AND THE USE OF ANY OR ALL THE OTHER CODE IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION) ANY WARRANTIES OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
NO THIRD PARTY LICENSORS OF OTHER CODE SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS), HOWEVER CAUSED AND WHETHER MADE UNDER
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY, ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR
DISTRIBUTION OF THE OTHER CODE OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED UNDER EITHER
OR BOTH THIS LICENSE AND THE LEGAL TERMS APPLICABLE TO ANY SEPARATE FILES, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 3 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
APPLICABILITY TABLE
PRODUCTS
PRODUCTS
SW RELEASE
LE910-SV V2
20.00.004
LE910-SV1
20.00.014
LE910-SVL
20.00.034
LE910-NA V2
20.00.504
LE910-NA1
20.00.524
LE910-EU V2
20.00.402
LE910-AU V2
20.00.102
LE910-EU1
20.00.412
LE910B1-EU
20.00.422
LE910-JN1
20.00.203
LE910B4-NA
20.00.534
LE910B1-NA
20.00.544
LE910B1-SA
20.00.514
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 4 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Contents
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
License Agreements ......................................................................................................... 3
Copyrighted Materials ....................................................................................................... 3
High Risk Materials ........................................................................................................... 3
Trademarks ....................................................................................................................... 3
Third Party Rights ............................................................................................................. 3
1.
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................. 16
Scope ................................................................................................................................ 16
Audience ........................................................................................................................... 16
Contact Information, Support ............................................................................................ 16
List of acronyms ................................................................................................................ 17
Text Conventions .............................................................................................................. 20
Related Documents .......................................................................................................... 20
2.
OVERVIEW ...................................................................................................................... 21
3.
3.3.1.
AT COMMANDS .............................................................................................................. 22
Definitions ......................................................................................................................... 23
AT Command Syntax ........................................................................................................ 24
String Type Parameters .................................................................................................... 24
Command Lines ................................................................................................................ 25
ME Error Result Code - +CME ERROR: <err> ................................................................ 26
Message Service Failure Result Code - +CMS ERROR: <err> ....................................... 31
Information Responses And Result Codes....................................................................... 33
Command Response Time-Out ........................................................................................ 33
Command Issuing Timing ................................................................................................. 34
Storage ............................................................................................................................. 34
Factory Profile And User Profiles ..................................................................................... 34
4.
AT COMMANDS AVAILABITY TABLE........................................................................... 37
3.2.1.
3.2.2.
3.2.2.1.
3.2.2.2.
3.2.3.
3.2.4.
3.2.5.
5.
AT COMMANDS REFERENCES ..................................................................................... 39
Command Line General Format ....................................................................................... 39
5.1.1.
Command Line Prefixes ................................................................................................... 39
5.1.1.1.
Starting A Command Line - AT ......................................................................................... 39
5.1.1.2.
Last Command Automatic Repetition - A/ ........................................................................ 39
5.1.1.3.
Repeat Last Command - AT#/ .......................................................................................... 39
5.1.2.
General Configuration Commands ................................................................................... 40
5.1.2.1.
Select Interface Style - #SELINT ...................................................................................... 40
5.1.3.
Hayes Compliant AT Commands ..................................................................................... 41
5.1.3.1.
Generic Modem Control.................................................................................................... 41
5.1.3.1.1.
Set To Factory-Defined Configuration - &F ...................................................................... 41
5.1.3.1.2.
Soft Reset – Z ................................................................................................................... 41
5.1.3.1.3.
Select Active Service Class - +FCLASS .......................................................................... 41
5.1.3.1.4.
Default Reset Basic Profile Designation - &Y ................................................................... 41
5.1.3.1.5.
Default Reset Full Profile Designation - &P ...................................................................... 42
5.1.3.1.6.
Store Current Configuration - &W ..................................................................................... 42
5.1.3.1.7.
Store Telephone Number - &Z ......................................................................................... 42
5.1.3.1.8.
Display Stored Numbers - &N ......................................................................................... 42
5.1.3.1.9.
Manufacturer Identification - +GMI ................................................................................... 43
5.1.3.1.10. Model Identification - +GMM............................................................................................. 43
5.1.3.1.11. Revision Identification - +GMR ......................................................................................... 43
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 5 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.1.12.
5.1.3.1.13.
5.1.3.1.14.
5.1.3.1.15.
5.1.3.1.16.
5.1.3.1.17.
5.1.3.1.18.
5.1.3.1.19.
5.1.3.1.20.
5.1.3.2.
5.1.3.2.1.
5.1.3.2.2.
5.1.3.2.3.
5.1.3.2.4.
5.1.3.2.5.
5.1.3.2.6.
5.1.3.2.7.
5.1.3.2.8.
5.1.3.2.9.
5.1.3.2.10.
5.1.3.2.11.
5.1.3.2.12.
5.1.3.3.
5.1.3.3.1.
5.1.3.3.2.
5.1.3.3.3.
5.1.3.3.4.
5.1.3.3.5.
5.1.3.3.6.
5.1.3.4.
5.1.3.4.1.
5.1.3.5.
5.1.3.5.1.
5.1.3.5.2.
5.1.3.5.3.
5.1.3.5.4.
5.1.3.5.5.
5.1.3.5.6.
5.1.3.5.7.
5.1.3.5.8.
5.1.3.5.9.
5.1.3.5.10.
5.1.4.
5.1.4.1.
5.1.4.1.1.
5.1.4.1.2.
5.1.4.1.3.
5.1.4.1.4.
5.1.4.1.5.
5.1.4.1.6.
5.1.4.1.7.
5.1.4.1.8.
5.1.4.2.
Capabilities List - +GCAP ................................................................................................. 43
Serial Number - +GSN ...................................................................................................... 43
Display Configuration And Profile - &V ............................................................................ 43
Display Configuration And Profile - &V0 .......................................................................... 43
S Registers Display - &V1 ................................................................................................ 44
Extended S Registers Display - &V3 ................................................................................ 44
Display Last Connection Statistics - &V2 ......................................................................... 44
Single Line Connect Message - \V ................................................................................... 44
Country Of Installation - +GCI .......................................................................................... 45
DTE - Modem Interface Control ........................................................................................ 46
Command Echo - E .......................................................................................................... 46
Quiet Result Codes - Q..................................................................................................... 46
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Control - &C ........................................................................... 46
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Control - &D ........................................................................ 47
Flow Control - &K .............................................................................................................. 47
Data Set Ready (DSR) Control - &S ................................................................................. 48
Response Format - V........................................................................................................ 48
Extended Result Codes - X .............................................................................................. 49
Identification Information - I .............................................................................................. 49
Fixed DTE Interface Rate - +IPR ...................................................................................... 50
DTE-Modem Local Flow Control - +IFC ........................................................................... 50
DTE-Modem Character Framing - +ICF ........................................................................... 51
Call Control ....................................................................................................................... 52
Dial D ................................................................................................................................ 52
Tone Dial - T ..................................................................................................................... 53
Pulse Dial - P .................................................................................................................... 54
Answer - A ........................................................................................................................ 54
Disconnect - H .................................................................................................................. 54
Return To On Line Mode - O ............................................................................................ 54
Modulation Control............................................................................................................ 54
Line Quality And Auto Retrain - %E ................................................................................. 54
S Parameters .................................................................................................................... 55
Number Of Rings To Auto Answer - S0............................................................................ 55
Ring Counter - S1 ............................................................................................................. 55
Escape Character - S2 .................................................................................................... 56
Command Line Termination Character - S3 ..................................................................... 56
Response Formatting Character - S4 ............................................................................... 56
Command Line Editing Character - S5 ............................................................................. 57
Connection Completion Time-Out - S7............................................................................. 57
– Carrier Off With Firm Time - S10 ................................................................................... 57
– Escaper Prompt Delay - S12 ......................................................................................... 58
Delay To DTR Off - S25.................................................................................................... 58
3GPP TS 27.007 AT Commands ..................................................................................... 59
General ............................................................................................................................. 59
Request Manufacturer Identification - +CGMI .................................................................. 59
Request Model Identification - +CGMM ........................................................................... 59
Request Revision Identification - +CGMR ........................................................................ 59
Request Product Serial Number Identification - +CGSN .................................................. 59
Select TE Character Set - +CSCS.................................................................................... 59
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) - +CIMI.................................................... 60
Multiplexing Mode - +CMUX ............................................................................................. 60
Read ICCID - +CCID ........................................................................................................ 60
Call Control ....................................................................................................................... 61
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 6 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.2.1.
5.1.4.2.2.
5.1.4.2.3.
5.1.4.2.4.
5.1.4.2.5.
5.1.4.2.6.
5.1.4.2.7.
5.1.4.3.
5.1.4.3.1.
5.1.4.3.2.
5.1.4.3.3.
5.1.4.3.4.
5.1.4.3.5.
5.1.4.3.6.
5.1.4.3.7.
5.1.4.3.8.
5.1.4.3.9.
5.1.4.3.10.
5.1.4.3.11.
5.1.4.3.12.
5.1.4.3.13.
5.1.4.3.14.
5.1.4.3.15.
5.1.4.3.16.
5.1.4.3.17.
5.1.4.3.18.
5.1.4.3.19.
5.1.4.3.20.
5.1.4.3.21.
5.1.4.3.22.
5.1.4.4.
5.1.4.4.1.
5.1.4.4.2.
5.1.4.4.3.
5.1.4.4.4.
5.1.4.4.5.
5.1.4.4.6.
5.1.4.4.7.
5.1.4.4.8.
5.1.4.4.9.
5.1.4.4.10.
5.1.4.4.11.
5.1.4.4.12.
5.1.4.4.13.
5.1.4.4.14.
5.1.4.4.15.
5.1.4.4.16.
5.1.4.4.17.
5.1.4.4.18.
5.1.4.4.19.
5.1.4.4.20.
5.1.4.4.21.
5.1.4.4.22.
Select type of address - +CSTA ....................................................................................... 61
Hang Up Call - +CHUP ..................................................................................................... 61
Cellular Result Codes - +CRC .......................................................................................... 61
Radio Link Protocol - +CRLP............................................................................................ 62
Service Reporting Control - +CR ...................................................................................... 62
Extended Error Report - +CEER ...................................................................................... 63
Voice Hung Up Control - +CVHU ..................................................................................... 63
Network Service Handling ................................................................................................ 64
Subscriber Number - +CNUM........................................................................................... 64
Read Operator Names - +COPN ...................................................................................... 64
Network Registration Report - +CREG ............................................................................. 65
Operator Selection - +COPS ............................................................................................ 66
Select Wireless Network - +WS46.................................................................................... 68
Facility Lock/Unlock - +CLCK ........................................................................................... 68
Change Facility Password - +CPWD ................................................................................ 70
Calling Line Identification Presentation - +CLIP ............................................................... 70
Calling Line Identification Restriction - +CLIR .................................................................. 71
Connected line identification presentation - +COLP......................................................... 72
Connected line identification restriction status - +COLR .................................................. 73
Call Forwarding Number And Conditions - +CCFC .......................................................... 73
Call Waiting - +CCWA ...................................................................................................... 74
Call Holding Services - +CHLD ........................................................................................ 76
Call deflection - +CTFR .................................................................................................... 76
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data - +CUSD....................................................... 77
Advice Of Charge - +CAOC .............................................................................................. 77
List Current Calls - +CLCC ............................................................................................... 78
SS Notification - +CSSN ................................................................................................... 79
Closed User Group - +CCUG .......................................................................................... 80
Preferred Operator List - +CPOL ...................................................................................... 80
Selection of preferred PLMN list - +CPLS ........................................................................ 81
Mobile Equipment Control ................................................................................................ 82
Phone Activity Status - +CPAS......................................................................................... 82
Set Phone functionality - +CFUN...................................................................................... 83
Enter PIN - +CPIN ............................................................................................................ 84
Signal Quality - +CSQ ...................................................................................................... 85
Extended Signal Quality - +CESQ .................................................................................... 87
Indicator Control - +CIND ................................................................................................. 88
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting - +CMER .................................................................. 90
Select Phonebook Memory Storage - +CPBS.................................................................. 91
Read Phonebook Entries - +CPBR .................................................................................. 92
Find Phonebook Entries - +CPBF .................................................................................... 93
Write Phonebook Entry - +CPBW..................................................................................... 95
Clock Management - +CCLK ............................................................................................ 96
Alarm Management - +CALA............................................................................................ 97
Delete Alarm - +CALD ...................................................................................................... 98
Postpone alarm - +CAPD ................................................................................................. 99
Setting date format - +CSDF ............................................................................................ 99
Setting time format - +CSTF ............................................................................................. 100
Time Zone reporting - +CTZR .......................................................................................... 100
Automatic Time Zone update - +CTZU ............................................................................ 100
Restricted SIM Access - +CRSM...................................................................................... 101
Generic SIM access - +CSIM ........................................................................................... 101
Alert Sound Mode - +CALM .............................................................................................. 104
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 7 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.23.
5.1.4.4.24.
5.1.4.4.25.
5.1.4.4.26.
5.1.4.4.27.
5.1.4.4.28.
5.1.4.4.29.
5.1.4.4.30.
5.1.4.4.31.
5.1.4.4.32.
5.1.4.4.33.
5.1.4.4.34.
5.1.4.4.35.
5.1.4.4.36.
5.1.4.5.
5.1.4.5.1.
5.1.4.6.
5.1.4.6.1.
5.1.4.6.2.
5.1.4.7.
5.1.4.7.1.
5.1.4.7.2.
5.1.4.7.3.
5.1.4.7.4.
5.1.4.7.5.
5.1.4.7.6.
5.1.4.7.7.
5.1.4.7.8.
5.1.4.7.9.
5.1.4.7.10.
5.1.4.7.11.
5.1.4.7.12.
5.1.4.7.13.
5.1.4.7.14.
5.1.4.7.15.
5.1.4.7.16.
5.1.4.7.17.
5.1.4.7.18.
5.1.4.7.19.
5.1.4.7.20.
5.1.4.8.
5.1.4.8.1.
5.1.5.
5.1.5.1.
5.1.5.1.1.
5.1.5.1.2.
5.1.5.1.3.
5.1.5.2.
5.1.5.2.1.
5.1.5.2.2.
5.1.5.2.3.
5.1.5.2.4.
5.1.5.2.5.
Ringer Sound Level - +CRSL ........................................................................................... 105
Loudspeaker Volume Level - +CLVL ................................................................................ 105
Microphone Mute Control - +CMUT.................................................................................. 105
Silence command - +CSIL ................................................................................................ 106
Accumulated Call Meter - +CACM.................................................................................... 106
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum - +CAMM .................................................................. 106
Price per Unit and Currency Table - +CPUC .................................................................... 107
Call meter maximum event - +CCWE............................................................................... 107
Set voice mail number - +CSVM ...................................................................................... 108
Available AT Commands - +CLAC ................................................................................... 108
Master reset - +CMAR ...................................................................................................... 108
Open Logical Channel - +CCHO ...................................................................................... 109
Close Logical Channel - +CCHC ...................................................................................... 109
Generic UICC Logical Channel Access - +CGLA............................................................. 110
Mobile Equipment Errors .................................................................................................. 111
Report Mobile Equipment Error - +CMEE ........................................................................ 111
Voice Control .................................................................................................................... 112
DTMF Tones Transmission - +VTS .................................................................................. 112
Tone Duration - +VTD ...................................................................................................... 112
Commands for Packet Domain ......................................................................................... 113
GPRS Mobile Station Class - +CGCLASS ....................................................................... 113
GPRS Attach Or Detach - +CGATT ................................................................................. 113
Packet Domain Event Reporting - +CGEREP .................................................................. 114
Network Registration Status - +CGREG .......................................................................... 115
EPS network registration status - +CEREG ..................................................................... 116
Define PDP context- +CGDCONT .................................................................................... 117
PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters - +CGCONTRDP ............................................ 118
Quality Of Service Profile - +CGQMIN ............................................................................. 120
Quality Of Service Profile (Requested) - +CGQREQ ....................................................... 121
3G Quality Of Service Profile (Requested) - +CGEQREQ ............................................... 122
Define EPS quality of service - +CGEQOS ...................................................................... 125
EPS quality of service read dynamic parameters - +CGEQOSRDP ................................ 126
3G Quality Of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) - +CGEQMIN ................................ 127
PDP Context activate or deactivate - +CGACT ................................................................ 130
3G Quality Of Service Profile (Negotiated) - +CGEQNEG ............................................... 130
Show PDP Address - +CGPADDR ................................................................................... 131
Modify PDP context - +CGCMOD .................................................................................... 131
S Printing IP Address Format - +CGPIAF ....................................................................... 132
Set Mode of operation for EPS - +CEMODE .................................................................... 132
Voice domain preference - +CEVDP ................................................................................ 133
Commands for Battery Charger ........................................................................................ 134
Battery Charge - +CBC ..................................................................................................... 134
3GPP TS 27.005 AT Commands for SMS and CBS ........................................................ 135
General Configuration....................................................................................................... 135
Select Message Service - +CSMS ................................................................................... 135
Preferred Message Storage - +CPMS .............................................................................. 136
Message Format - +CMGF ............................................................................................... 137
Message Configuration ..................................................................................................... 138
Service Center Address - +CSCA .................................................................................... 138
Set Text Mode Parameters - +CSMP ............................................................................... 138
Show Text Mode Parameters - +CSDH ........................................................................... 140
Select Cell Broadcast - +CSCB ........................................................................................ 141
Save Settings - +CSAS .................................................................................................... 141
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 8 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.2.6.
5.1.5.2.7.
5.1.5.3.
5.1.5.3.1.
5.1.5.3.2.
5.1.5.3.3.
5.1.5.3.4.
5.1.5.4.
5.1.5.4.1.
5.1.5.4.2.
5.1.5.4.3.
5.1.5.4.4.
5.1.5.4.5.
5.1.5.5.
5.1.5.5.1.
5.1.5.5.2.
5.1.5.5.3.
5.1.5.5.4.
5.1.5.5.5.
5.1.5.5.6.
5.1.5.5.7.
5.1.5.5.8.
5.1.6.
5.1.6.1.
5.1.6.1.1.
5.1.6.1.2.
5.1.6.1.3.
5.1.6.1.4.
5.1.6.1.5.
5.1.6.1.6.
5.1.6.1.7.
5.1.6.1.8.
5.1.6.1.9.
5.1.6.1.10.
5.1.6.1.11.
5.1.6.1.12.
5.1.6.1.13.
5.1.6.1.14.
5.1.6.1.15.
5.1.6.1.16.
5.1.6.1.17.
5.1.6.1.18.
5.1.6.1.19.
5.1.6.1.20.
5.1.6.1.21.
5.1.6.1.22.
5.1.6.1.23.
5.1.6.1.24.
5.1.6.1.25.
5.1.6.1.26.
5.1.6.1.27.
5.1.6.1.28.
5.1.6.1.29.
Restore Settings - +CRES ................................................................................................ 142
More message to send - +CMMS ..................................................................................... 142
Message Receiving and Reading ..................................................................................... 143
New Message Indications - +CNMI .................................................................................. 143
New message acknowledgement - +CNMA ..................................................................... 147
List Messages - +CMGL ................................................................................................... 149
Read Message - +CMGR ................................................................................................. 151
Message Sending And Writing ......................................................................................... 153
Send Message - +CMGS .................................................................................................. 153
Send Message From Storage - +CMSS ........................................................................... 155
Write Message To Memory - +CMGW ............................................................................. 155
Delete Message - +CMGD ............................................................................................... 158
Select service for MO SMS messages - +CGSMS .......................................................... 158
Message Sending And Writing (3GPP2 mode) ................................................................ 159
Send Message From storage - +CMSS .......................................................................... 159
Set Text Mode Parameters - +CSMP ............................................................................... 159
Save Settings - +CSAS .................................................................................................... 160
Restore Settings - +CRES ................................................................................................ 161
Send Message (3GPP2) - +CMGS................................................................................... 161
List Messages (3GPP2) - +CMGL .................................................................................... 163
Read Message (3GPP2) - +CMGR .................................................................................. 166
Write Message to Memory (3GPP2) - +CMGW ............................................................... 169
Custom AT Commands .................................................................................................... 172
General Configuration AT Commands ............................................................................. 172
Hang Up Call - #CHUP ..................................................................................................... 172
USB Configuration - #USBCFG ........................................................................................ 172
Connect physical ports to Service Access Points - #PORTCFG...................................... 173
MBIM Configuration - #MBIMCFG .................................................................................... 173
NCM Configuration - #NCM .............................................................................................. 174
NCM Disable - #NCMD..................................................................................................... 175
Initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol - #SPIOPEN............................................ 175
De-initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol - #SPICLOSE .................................... 176
Writes a buffer to the SPI and prints the read data - #SPIRW ......................................... 176
Network Selection Menu Availability - +PACSP ............................................................... 176
Manufacturer Identification - #CGMI ................................................................................. 177
Model Identification - #CGMM .......................................................................................... 177
Revision Identification - #CGMR ...................................................................................... 177
Product Serial Number Identification - #CGSN ................................................................ 177
Request International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Sw Version - +IMEISV ..... 177
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) - #CIMI .................................................... 177
Read ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identification) - #CCID ........................................... 178
Service Provider Name - #SPN ........................................................................................ 178
Extended Numeric Error report - #CEER ......................................................................... 178
Extended Numeric Error report - #CEERNET .................................................................. 180
Extended error report for Network reject cause - #CEERNETEXT .................................. 182
Display PIN Counter - #PCT ............................................................................................. 183
Software Shut Down - #SHDN ......................................................................................... 184
Fast shutdown configuration - #FASTSHDN .................................................................... 184
Extended Reset - #Z ......................................................................................................... 185
Periodic Reset - #ENHRST .............................................................................................. 186
Wake From Alarm Mode - #WAKE ................................................................................... 186
Temperature Monitor - #TEMPMON ................................................................................ 187
Temperature monitor configuration - #TEMPCFG ........................................................... 189
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 9 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.30.
5.1.6.1.31.
5.1.6.1.32.
5.1.6.1.33.
5.1.6.1.34.
5.1.6.1.35.
5.1.6.1.36.
5.1.6.1.37.
5.1.6.1.38.
5.1.6.1.39.
5.1.6.1.40.
5.1.6.1.41.
5.1.6.1.42.
5.1.6.1.43.
5.1.6.1.44.
5.1.6.1.45.
5.1.6.1.46.
5.1.6.1.47.
5.1.6.1.48.
5.1.6.1.49.
5.1.6.1.50.
5.1.6.1.51.
5.1.6.1.52.
5.1.6.1.53.
5.1.6.1.54.
5.1.6.1.55.
5.1.6.1.56.
5.1.6.1.57.
5.1.6.1.58.
5.1.6.1.59.
5.1.6.1.60.
5.1.6.1.61.
5.1.6.1.62.
5.1.6.1.63.
5.1.6.1.64.
5.1.6.1.65.
5.1.6.1.66.
5.1.6.1.67.
5.1.6.1.68.
5.1.6.1.69.
5.1.6.1.70.
5.1.6.1.71.
5.1.6.1.72.
5.1.6.1.73.
5.1.6.1.74.
5.1.6.1.75.
5.1.6.1.76.
5.1.6.1.77.
5.1.6.1.78.
5.1.6.1.79.
5.1.6.1.80.
5.1.6.1.81.
5.1.6.1.82.
General Purpose Input/Output Pin Control - #GPIO ........................................................ 190
STAT_LED GPIO Setting - AT#SLED .............................................................................. 192
Save STAT_LED GPIO Setting - #SLEDSAV .................................................................. 192
SMS Ring Indicator - #E2SMSRI ...................................................................................... 193
Event Ring Indicator - #E2RI ............................................................................................ 193
Read Analog/Digital Converter input - #ADC ................................................................... 194
V24 Output Pins Configuration - #V24CFG ...................................................................... 194
V24 Output Pins Control - #V24 ....................................................................................... 195
Battery and charger status - #CBC ................................................................................... 196
GPRS Auto-Attach Property - #AUTOATT ....................................................................... 196
Multislot Class Control - #MSCLASS ............................................................................... 196
Cell Monitor - #MONI ........................................................................................................ 197
Compressed Cell Monitor - #MONIZIP ............................................................................. 201
Serving Cell Information - #SERVINFO............................................................................ 204
Read current network status - #RFSTS............................................................................ 205
Query SIM Status - #QSS................................................................................................. 209
Delete all phonebook entries - #CPBD ............................................................................. 210
ATD Dialing Mode - #DIALMODE .................................................................................... 210
Automatic call - #ACAL ..................................................................................................... 210
Extended automatic call - #ACALEXT .............................................................................. 211
Extended Call Monitoring - #ECAM .................................................................................. 211
Circuit Switched Fallback - #CSFB ................................................................................... 212
SMS Overflow - #SMOV ................................................................................................... 213
Mailbox Numbers - #MBN................................................................................................. 214
Message Waiting Indication - #MWI ................................................................................. 214
Network Emergency Number Update - #NWEN .............................................................. 216
Update PLMN List - #PLMNUPDATE............................................................................... 216
PLMN List Selection - #PLMNMODE ............................................................................... 217
Periodical FPLMN cleaning - #FPLMN ............................................................................. 217
Show Call Timers - #SCT ................................................................................................. 218
#Show Call Information - #SCI ......................................................................................... 218
Packet Service Network Type - #PSNT ............................................................................ 219
SIM Presence status - #SIMPR ........................................................................................ 220
Call Forwarding Flags - #CFF .......................................................................................... 220
GSM and UMTS Audio Codec - #CODEC ....................................................................... 221
Network Timezone - #NITZ............................................................................................... 222
Clock management - #CCLK ............................................................................................ 223
Clock Mode - #CCLKMODE ............................................................................................. 224
Calculate and update date and time - #NTP .................................................................... 225
Enhanced Network Selection - #ENS ............................................................................... 226
Band Selection - #BND ..................................................................................................... 226
Automatic Band Selection - #AUTOBND.......................................................................... 228
PPP-GPRS Connection Authentication Type - #GAUTH ................................................. 228
PPP-GPRS Parameters Configuration - # GPPPCFG ..................................................... 229
Skip Escape Sequence - #SKIPESC ................................................................................ 229
Subscriber number - #SNUM............................................................................................ 230
SIM detection mode - #SIMDET ....................................................................................... 230
SIMIN pin configuration - #SIMINCFG ............................................................................. 231
Alarm Pin - #ALARMPIN................................................................................................... 231
Show Address - #CGPADDR ........................................................................................... 231
Call Establishment Lock - #CESTHLCK ........................................................................... 232
Write to I2C - #I2CWR ...................................................................................................... 233
Read to I2C - #I2CRD....................................................................................................... 234
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 10 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.83.
5.1.6.1.84.
5.1.6.1.85.
5.1.6.1.86.
5.1.6.1.87.
5.1.6.1.88.
5.1.6.1.89.
5.1.6.1.90.
5.1.6.1.91.
5.1.6.1.92.
5.1.6.1.93.
5.1.6.1.94.
5.1.6.1.95.
5.1.6.1.96.
5.1.6.1.97.
5.1.6.1.98.
5.1.6.1.99.
5.1.6.1.100.
5.1.6.1.101.
5.1.6.1.102.
5.1.6.1.103.
5.1.6.1.104.
5.1.6.1.105.
5.1.6.1.106.
5.1.6.1.107.
5.1.6.1.108.
5.1.6.1.109.
5.1.6.1.110.
5.1.6.1.111.
5.1.6.1.112.
5.1.6.2.
5.1.6.2.1.
5.1.6.2.2.
5.1.6.2.3.
5.1.6.2.4.
5.1.6.2.5.
5.1.6.3.
5.1.6.3.1.
5.1.6.3.2.
5.1.6.3.3.
5.1.6.3.4.
5.1.6.3.5.
5.1.6.3.6.
5.1.6.3.7.
5.1.6.3.8.
5.1.6.3.9.
5.1.6.3.10.
5.1.6.3.11.
5.1.6.3.12.
5.1.6.4.
5.1.6.4.1.
5.1.6.4.2.
5.1.6.4.3.
I2C Combined Format - #I2CCF ....................................................................................... 234
Power Saving Mode Ring - #PSMRI ................................................................................ 235
Control Command Flow - #CFLO ..................................................................................... 235
Report concatenated SMS indexes - #CMGLCONCINDEX............................................. 236
Codec Information - #CODECINFO ................................................................................. 236
Select language - #LANG ................................................................................................. 238
Swap 4G RX from main to diversity - #RXTOGGLE ........................................................ 239
Set Encryption algorithm - #ENCALG .............................................................................. 240
Escape Sequence Guard Time - #E2ESC ....................................................................... 241
No Carrier Indication Handling - #NCIH ........................................................................... 241
Digital/Analog Converter Control - #DAC ......................................................................... 242
Change and insert file system password - #FILEPWD .................................................... 242
User Determined User Busy - #UDUB ............................................................................. 244
Enable Test Mode command in not signalling mode - #TESTMODE .............................. 244
HSDPA Channel Quality Inication - #CQI......................................................................... 247
Ciphering Indication - #CIPHIND ...................................................................................... 248
CMUX Mode Set - #CMUXMODE .................................................................................... 248
Fast Dormancy - #FDOR............................................................................................... 250
IMS PDP APN Name Set - #IMSPDPSET .................................................................... 251
PDP authentication parameters - #PDPAUTH .............................................................. 252
User Determined User Busy - #CREJ ........................................................................... 252
Reboot - #REBOOT ...................................................................................................... 252
File System Change Current Directory - #CHDIR ......................................................... 253
File System Make Directory - #MKDIR ......................................................................... 254
File System Remove Directory - #RMDIR..................................................................... 254
Set Active Firmware Image – AT#FWSWITCH............................................................. 254
Selective master reset - #CMAR ................................................................................... 255
Change maximum TX power level for a supported band - #TXCAL4G ........................ 256
Security Keys management - #SECKEY ...................................................................... 256
Configure the MTU Size - #MTUSIZE ........................................................................... 258
Easy Scan® Extension AT Commands ............................................................................ 259
Network Survey - #CSURV............................................................................................... 259
Network Survey (Numeric Format) - #CSURVC............................................................... 265
Network Survey Format - #CSURVF ................................................................................ 269
<CR><LF> Removing On Easy Scan® Commands - #CSURVNFL ................................ 269
Extended network survey - #CSURVEXT ........................................................................ 270
AT Run Commands .......................................................................................................... 271
Enable SMS Run AT Service - #SMSATRUN .................................................................. 271
Set SMS Run AT Service parameters - #SMSATRUNCFG ............................................. 271
SMS AT Run White List - #SMSATWL ............................................................................. 272
Set TCP Run AT Service parameter - #TCPATRUNCFG ................................................ 273
TCP Run AT Service in listen (server) mode - #TCPATRUNL......................................... 275
TCP AT Run Firewall List - #TCPATRUNFRWL .............................................................. 275
TCP AT Run Authentication Parameters List - #TCPATRUNAUTH ................................ 276
TCP AT Run in dial (client) mode - #TCPATRUND ......................................................... 277
Closing TCP Run AT Socket - #TCPATRUNCLOSE ....................................................... 277
TCP AT Run Command Sequence - #TCPATCMDSEQ ................................................. 278
TCP Run AT service to a serial port - #TCPATCONSER ................................................ 278
Run AT command execution - #ATRUNDELAY ............................................................... 279
Consume Commands ....................................................................................................... 280
Configure consume parameters - #CONSUMECFG ........................................................ 280
Enable consume funztionality - #ENACONSUME ............................................................ 281
Report consume statistics - #STATSCONSUME ............................................................. 282
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 11 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.4.4.
5.1.6.4.5.
5.1.6.4.6.
5.1.6.5.
5.1.6.5.1.
5.1.6.5.2.
5.1.6.5.3.
5.1.6.5.4.
5.1.6.5.5.
5.1.6.5.6.
5.1.6.6.
5.1.6.6.1.
5.1.6.6.2.
5.1.6.6.3.
5.1.6.6.4.
5.1.6.6.5.
5.1.6.6.6.
5.1.6.6.7.
5.1.6.6.8.
5.1.6.6.9.
5.1.6.6.10.
5.1.6.6.11.
5.1.6.6.12.
5.1.6.6.13.
5.1.6.6.14.
5.1.6.6.15.
5.1.6.6.16.
5.1.6.6.17.
5.1.6.6.18.
5.1.6.6.19.
5.1.6.6.20.
5.1.6.6.21.
5.1.6.6.22.
5.1.6.6.23.
5.1.6.6.24.
5.1.6.6.25.
5.1.6.6.26.
5.1.6.6.27.
5.1.6.7.
5.1.6.7.1.
5.1.6.7.2.
5.1.6.7.3.
5.1.6.7.4.
5.1.6.7.5.
5.1.6.7.6.
5.1.6.7.7.
5.1.6.7.8.
5.1.6.7.9.
5.1.6.7.10.
5.1.6.7.11.
5.1.6.7.12.
5.1.6.7.13.
5.1.6.7.14.
Block/unblock a type of service - #BLOCKCONSUME .................................................... 283
#SGACT/#SSENDLINE configuration - #IPCONSUMECFG ........................................... 284
Open a connection, send data, close connection - #SSENDLINE ................................... 285
Event Monitor Commands ................................................................................................ 286
Enable EvMoni Service - #ENAEVMONI.......................................................................... 286
EvMoni Service parameter - #ENAEVMONICFG ............................................................. 286
Event Monitoring - #EVMONI ........................................................................................... 287
Send Message - #CMGS .................................................................................................. 290
Write Message To Memory - #CMGW ............................................................................. 291
AT Command Delay - #ATDELAY .................................................................................... 292
Multisocket AT Commands ............................................................................................... 293
Socket Status - #SS.......................................................................................................... 293
Socket Info - #SI ............................................................................................................... 294
Socket Type - #ST ............................................................................................................ 295
Context Activation - #SGACT ........................................................................................... 296
Socket Shutdown - #SH.................................................................................................... 297
Socket Configuration - #SCFG ......................................................................................... 297
Socket Configuration Extended - #SCFGEXT .................................................................. 299
Socket configuration Extended 2 - #SCFGEXT2 ............................................................. 300
Socket configuration Extended 3 - #SCFGEXT3 ............................................................. 303
Socket Dial - #SD ............................................................................................................. 303
Socket Restore - #SO ....................................................................................................... 305
Socket Listen - #SL........................................................................................................... 305
Socket Listen UDP - #SLUDP .......................................................................................... 306
Socket Accept - #SA ......................................................................................................... 307
Socket Info Extended - #SIEXT ....................................................................................... 307
Detect the cause of a Socket disconnection - #SLASTCLOSURE .................................. 308
Receive Data In Command Mode - #SRECV ................................................................... 309
Send Data In Command Mode - #SSEND ....................................................................... 311
Send UDP data to a specific remote host - #SSENDUDP ............................................... 311
Send UDP data to a specific remote host extended #SSENDUDPEXT .......................... 313
Send data in Command Mode extended - #SSENDEXT ................................................. 314
IP Easy Authentication Type - #SGACTAUTH ................................................................. 314
Context activation and configuration - #SGACTCFG ....................................................... 315
Context activation and configuration extended - #SGACTCFGEXT ................................ 316
PAD command features - #PADCMD ............................................................................... 317
PAD forward character - #PADFWD ................................................................................ 317
Base64 encoding/decoding of socket sent/received data - #BASE64 ............................. 317
SSL Commands ................................................................................................................ 320
Open a socket SSL to a remote server - #SSLD .............................................................. 320
Enable a SSL socket - #SSLEN ....................................................................................... 321
Close a SSL socket - #SSLH ............................................................................................ 322
Restore a SSL socket after a +++ - #SSLO ..................................................................... 322
Read Data from a SSL socket - #SSLRECV .................................................................... 323
Report the status of a SSL socket - #SSLS...................................................................... 324
Manage the security data - #SSLSECDATA .................................................................... 325
Send data through a SSL socket - #SSLSEND ................................................................ 326
Send data through a secure sockect in Command Mode - #SSLSENDEXT ................... 327
Configure security parameters of a SSL socket - #SSLSECCFG .................................... 328
Configure additional parameters of a SSL socket - #SSLSECCFG2 ............................... 329
Configure general parameters of a SSL socket - #SSLCFG ............................................ 329
Configure application SSL parameters - #APPSSLCFG .................................................. 331
Secure Socket Info - #SSLI .............................................................................................. 333
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 12 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.
5.1.6.8.1.
5.1.6.8.2.
5.1.6.8.3.
5.1.6.8.4.
5.1.6.8.5.
5.1.6.8.6.
5.1.6.8.7.
5.1.6.8.8.
5.1.6.8.9.
5.1.6.8.10.
5.1.6.8.11.
5.1.6.8.12.
5.1.6.8.13.
5.1.6.8.14.
5.1.6.8.15.
5.1.6.8.16.
5.1.6.8.17.
5.1.6.8.18.
5.1.6.9.
5.1.6.9.1.
5.1.6.9.2.
5.1.6.9.3.
5.1.6.9.4.
5.1.6.9.5.
5.1.6.9.6.
5.1.6.9.7.
5.1.6.9.8.
5.1.6.9.9.
5.1.6.9.10.
5.1.6.9.11.
5.1.6.9.12.
5.1.6.10.
5.1.6.10.1.
5.1.6.10.2.
5.1.6.11.
5.1.6.11.1.
5.1.6.11.2.
5.1.6.11.3.
5.1.6.11.4.
5.1.6.11.5.
5.1.6.11.6.
5.1.6.11.7.
5.1.6.11.8.
5.1.6.11.9.
5.1.6.11.10.
5.1.6.11.11.
5.1.6.12.
5.1.6.12.1.
5.1.6.12.2.
5.1.6.12.3.
5.1.6.12.4.
5.1.6.13.
FTP AT Commands .......................................................................................................... 334
FTP Time-Out - #FTPTO .................................................................................................. 334
FTP Open - #FTPOPEN ................................................................................................... 334
FTP Close - #FTPCLOSE................................................................................................. 334
FTP Config - #FTPCFG .................................................................................................... 335
FTP Put - #FTPPUT ......................................................................................................... 336
FTP Get - #FTPGET ......................................................................................................... 336
FTP GET in command mode - #FTPGETPKT ................................................................ 337
FTP Type - #FTPTYPE..................................................................................................... 337
FTP Read Message - #FTPMSG ..................................................................................... 338
FTP Delete - #FTPDELE .................................................................................................. 338
FTP Print Working Directory - #FTPPWD ........................................................................ 338
FTP Change Working Directory - #FTPCWD ................................................................... 338
FTP List - #FTPLIST ......................................................................................................... 339
Get file size - #FTPFSIZE ................................................................................................. 339
FTP Append - #FTPAPP .................................................................................................. 339
Set restart position - # FTPREST ..................................................................................... 340
Receive Data In Command Mode - #FTPRECV .............................................................. 341
FTPAPPEXT - #FTPAPPEXT........................................................................................... 343
Enhanced IP Easy Extension AT Commands .................................................................. 345
Query DNS - #QDNS ........................................................................................................ 345
DNS Response Caching - #CACHEDNS ......................................................................... 345
Manual DNS Selection - #DNS ......................................................................................... 346
Socket Listen Ring Indicator - #E2SLRI ........................................................................... 347
Firewall Setup - #FRWL.................................................................................................... 347
Firewall Setup for IPV6 addresses - #FRWLIPV6 ............................................................ 348
Configure cid and IID parameters - #IIDIPV6 ................................................................... 349
GPRS Data Volume - #GDATAVOL ................................................................................. 350
ICMP Ping Support - #ICMP ............................................................................................. 351
PING request - #PING ...................................................................................................... 351
DNS from Network - #NWDNS ......................................................................................... 352
Configure protocol parameters - #PROTOCOLCFG ........................................................ 353
SMS AT Commands ......................................................................................................... 354
Move Short Message to other memory - #SMSMOVE ..................................................... 354
SMS Commands Operation Mode - #SMSMODE ............................................................ 355
E-mail Management AT Commands ................................................................................ 356
E-mail SMTP Server - #ESMTP ....................................................................................... 356
E-mail Sender Address - #EADDR ................................................................................... 356
E-mail Authentication User Name - #EUSER ................................................................... 357
E-mail Authentication Password - #EPASSW .................................................................. 357
E-mail Sending - #EMAILD ............................................................................................... 358
E-mail Parameters Save - #ESAV .................................................................................... 359
E-mail Parameters Reset - #ERST ................................................................................... 359
SMTP Read Message - #EMAILMSG .............................................................................. 359
Send mail with attachment - #SMTPCL............................................................................ 359
E-mail SMTP Port - #ESMTPPORT .............................................................................. 361
Configure SMTP parameters - #SMTPCFG.................................................................. 361
HTTP Client AT Commands ............................................................................................. 362
Configure HTTP Parameters - #HTTPCFG ..................................................................... 362
Send HTTP GET, HEAD or DELETE request - #HTTPQRY............................................ 363
Send HTTP POST or PUT request - #HTTPSND ............................................................ 365
Receive HTTP server data - #HTTPRCV ......................................................................... 367
Script Management Commands ....................................................................................... 368
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 13 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.13.1.
5.1.6.13.2.
5.1.6.13.3.
5.1.6.13.4.
5.1.6.13.5.
5.1.6.13.6.
5.1.6.14.
5.1.6.14.1.
5.1.6.14.2.
5.1.6.14.3.
5.1.6.14.4.
5.1.6.14.5.
5.1.6.15.
5.1.6.15.1.
5.1.6.15.2.
5.1.6.16.
5.1.6.16.1.
5.1.6.16.2.
5.1.6.16.3.
5.1.6.16.4.
5.1.6.16.5.
5.1.6.16.6.
5.1.6.16.7.
5.1.6.16.8.
5.1.6.17.
5.1.6.17.1.
5.1.6.17.2.
5.1.6.17.3.
5.1.6.17.4.
5.1.6.17.5.
5.1.6.17.6.
5.1.6.17.7.
5.1.6.17.8.
5.1.6.18.
5.1.6.18.1.
5.1.6.18.2.
5.1.6.19.
5.1.6.19.1.
5.1.6.19.2.
5.1.6.19.3.
5.1.6.19.4.
5.1.6.19.5.
5.1.6.19.6.
5.1.6.19.7.
5.1.6.19.8.
5.1.6.19.9.
5.1.6.20.
5.1.6.20.1.
5.1.6.20.2.
5.1.6.20.3.
5.1.6.20.4.
5.1.6.20.5.
5.1.6.20.6.
Write Script - #WSCRIPT ................................................................................................. 368
Read Script - #RSCRIPT .................................................................................................. 368
List Script Names - #LCSCRIPT ...................................................................................... 369
Delete Script - #DSCRIPT ................................................................................................ 370
Delete All Scripts - #DASCRIPTS .................................................................................... 371
File System Change Current Drive - #CHDRIVE ............................................................. 371
SIM Toolkit Commands .................................................................................................... 372
SIM Tookit Interface Activation - #STIA............................................................................ 372
SIM Tookit Get Information - #STGI ................................................................................. 377
SIM Tookit Send Response - #STSR ............................................................................... 382
SIM Tookit terminal Attach - #STTA ................................................................................. 383
Configure SIM Toolkit Application parameters - #STACFG ............................................. 384
Phonebook AT Commands .............................................................................................. 385
Read Group Entries - #CPBGR ........................................................................................ 385
Write Group Entries - #CPBGW ....................................................................................... 385
GNSS AT Commands....................................................................................................... 386
GNSS Receiver Configuration .......................................................................................... 386
GNSS Power Saving Modes Management ...................................................................... 393
GNSS General Management ............................................................................................ 397
GNSS Positioning Information .......................................................................................... 399
GNSS SiRFInstantFix™ ................................................................................................... 403
GNSS Patch Management ............................................................................................... 407
GNSS ST-AGPSTM ........................................................................................................... 409
GNSS MTK EPO .............................................................................................................. 411
Audio Commands ............................................................................................................. 414
Audio Basic Configuration ................................................................................................ 414
Tones Configuration ......................................................................................................... 419
Audio Profiles .................................................................................................................... 422
Audio Filters ...................................................................................................................... 423
Echo Canceller Configuration ........................................................................................... 426
Embedded DTMF Decoder ............................................................................................... 430
Digital Voice Interface ....................................................................................................... 432
Audio file and stream management .................................................................................. 434
Jammed Detection & Report AT Commands ................................................................... 436
Enhanced Jammed Detect & Report 2 - #JDRENH2 ....................................................... 436
LTE Jammed Detect & Report - #JDR4GCFG ................................................................. 437
m2mAIR Cloud Commands .............................................................................................. 439
Configure deviceWISE parameters - #DWCFG ............................................................... 439
Connect to M2M Service - #DWCONN ............................................................................ 441
Query connection status - #DWSTATUS ......................................................................... 442
Send data to M2M Service - #DWSEND .......................................................................... 442
Send raw data to M2M Service - #DWSENDR................................................................. 443
Receive data from M2M Service - #DWRCV.................................................................... 444
Receive raw data from M2M Service - #DWRCVR .......................................................... 445
List information on messages pending from M2M Service - #DWLRCV.......................... 446
Enable Agent Features - #DWEN..................................................................................... 446
Software Management Service (SWM) AT Commands ................................................... 448
SWM Client Enable / Disable - #SWMENA ...................................................................... 448
Configure SWM Client Parameters - #SWMCFG ............................................................. 449
Configure Bootstrap - # SWMBOOTSTRAP .................................................................... 450
Enable/Disable Self Registration - #SWMREG ................................................................ 452
Check updates - #SWMCHKUPD .................................................................................... 453
Download update package from OMA-DM software mngmt server - #SWMGETDP ...... 453
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 14 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.20.7.
5.1.6.21.
5.1.6.21.1.
5.1.6.21.2.
5.1.6.21.3.
5.1.6.21.4.
5.1.6.21.5.
Install software update package - #SWMDEPLOYDP ..................................................... 454
Device Management (OMA-DM) Commands ................................................................... 456
OMADM Configuration management - #OMACFG .......................................................... 456
Enable OMA DM - #ENAOMADM .................................................................................... 456
Host ODIS parameters management - #HOSTODIS ....................................................... 460
OMA DM Send PIN or NSS - #OMASENDPIN ................................................................ 462
Device ID write - #UNIQUEDEVID ................................................................................... 462
6.
DOCUMENT HISTORY .................................................................................................... 463
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 15 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
1. INTRODUCTION
Scope
Purpose of this document is providing a detailed specification and a comprehensive listing as a reference for
the whole set of AT command for the LE910 V2 series (LTE/3G/2Gmodules)
Audience
Readers of this document should be familiar with Telit modules and their ease of controlling by means of AT
Commands.
Contact Information, Support
For general contact, technical support services, technical questions and report documentation errors
contact Telit Technical Support at:
•
TS-EMEA@telit.com
•
TS-AMERICAS@telit.com
•
TS-APAC@telit.com
•
TS-SRD@telit.com
Alternatively, use:
http://www.telit.com/support
For detailed information about where you can buy the Telit modules or for recommendations on accessories
and components visit:
http://www.telit.com
Our aim is to make this guide as helpful as possible. Keep us informed of your comments and suggestions
for improvements.
Telit appreciates feedback from the users of our information.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 16 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
List of acronyms
Acronym
Description
ARFCN
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number
AT
Attention command
BA
BCCH Allocation
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
CA
Cell Allocation
CBM
Cell Broadcast Message
CBS
Cell Broadcast Service
CCM
Current Call Meter
CLIR
Calling Line Identification Restriction
CTS
Clear To Send
CUG
Closed User Group
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
DCS
Digital Cellular System
DGPS
Differential GPS, the use of GPS measurements, which are differentially corrected
DNS
Domain Name System
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
GGA
GPS Fix data
GLL
Geographic Position – Latitude/Longitude
GLONASS
Global positioning system maintained by the Russian Space Forces
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GNSS
Any single or combined satellite navigation system (GPS, GLONASS and combined
GPS/GLONASS)
GPRS
Global Packet Radio Service
GPS
Global Positioning System
GSA
GPS DOP and Active satellites
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 17 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
GSM
Global System Mobile
GSV
GPS satellites in view
HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
HDOP
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
IMEI
International Mobile Equipment Identity
IMSI
International Mobile Subscriber Identity
IP
Internet Protocol
IRA
International Reference Alphabet
IWF
Interworking Function
ME
Mobile Equipment
MO
Mobile Originated
MT
either Mobile Terminated or Mobile Terminal
NMEA
National Marine Electronics Association
NVM
Non Volatile Memory
PCS
Personal Communication Service
PDP
Packet Data Protocol
PDU
Packet Data Unit
PIN
Personal Identification Number
PPP
Point to Point Protocol
PUK
Pin Unblocking Code
RLP
Radio Link Protocol
RMC
Recommended minimum Specific data
RTS
Request To Send
SAP
SIM Access Profile
SCA
Service Center Address
SMS
Short Message Service
SMSC
Short Message Service Centre
SMTP
Simple Mail Transport Protocol
TA
Terminal Adapter
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 18 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
TE
Terminal Equipment
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
USSD
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
VDOP
Vertical dilution of precision
VTG
Course over ground and ground speed
WAAS
Wide Area Augmentation System
LTE
Long Term Evolution
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 19 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Text Conventions
Danger – This information MUST be followed or catastrophic equipment failure or
bodily injury may occur.
Caution or Warning – Alerts the user to important points about integrating the
module, if these points are not followed, the module and end user equipment may
fail or malfunction.
Tip or Information – Provides advice and suggestions that may be useful when
integrating the module.
All dates are in ISO 8601 format, i.e. YYYY-MM-DD.
Related Documents
•
3GPP TS 27.007 specification and rules
http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/27_series/27.007/
•
3GPP TS 27.005 specification and rules
http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/27_series/27.005/
•
Hayes standard AT command set
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 20 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
2. OVERVIEW
This document is to describe all AT commands implemented on the Telit wireless modules listed on the
Applicability Table.
NOTE:
(EN) The integration of the LTE LE910 V2 cellular module within user
application shall be done according to the design rules described in
this manual.
(IT) L’integrazione del modulo cellulare LTE LE910 V2 all’interno
dell’applicazione dell’utente dovrà rispettare le indicazioni progettuali
descritte in questo manuale.
(DE) Die Integration des LE910 V2 LTE Mobilfunk-Moduls in ein Gerät muß
gemäß der in diesem Dokument beschriebenen Kunstruktionsregeln
erfolgen.
(SL) Integracija LTE LE910 V2 modula v uporabniški aplikaciji bo morala
upoštevati projektna navodila, opisana v tem priročniku.
(SP) La utilización del modulo LTE LE910 V2 debe ser conforme a los usos
para los cuales ha sido deseñado descritos en este manual del usuario.
(FR) L’intégration du module cellulaire LTE LE910 V2 dans l’application de
l’utilisateur sera faite selon les règles de conception décrites dans ce
manuel.
(HE)
LE910 V2
The information presented in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility
is assumed by Telit Communications S.p.A. for its use, nor any infringement of patents or other rights of third
parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent
rights of Telit Communications S.p.A. other than for circuitry embodied in Telit products. This document is
subject to change without notice.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 21 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
3.
AT COMMANDS
The Telit wireless module family can be controlled via the serial interface using the standard AT commands
The Telit wireless module family is compliant with:
•
Hayes standard AT command set, in order to maintain the compatibility with existing SW programs.
•
3GPP TS 27.007 specific AT command and LTE specific commands.
•
3GPP TS 27.005 specific AT commands for SMS (Short Message Service) and CBS (Cell Broadcast
Service)
Moreover Telit wireless module family supports also Telit proprietary AT commands for special purposes.
The following is a description of how to use the AT commands with the Telit wireless module family.
The AT is an ATTENTION command and is used as a prefix to other parameters in
a string. The AT command combined with other parameters can be set up in the
communications package or typed in manually as a command line instruction.
Combined with other parameters can be set up in the communications package or
typed in manually as a command line instruction.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 22 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Definitions
The following syntactical definitions apply:
<CR> Carriage return character, is the command line and result code terminator character, which value,
in decimal ASCII between 0 and 255,is specified within parameter S3. The default value is 13.
<LF>
Linefeed character, is the character recognised as line feed character. Its value, in decimal ASCII
between 0 and 255, is specified within parameter S4. The default value is 10.
The line feed character is output after carriage return character if verbose result codes are used (V1 option
used ) otherwise, if numeric format result codes are used (V0 option used) it will not appear in the result
codes.
<...>
Name enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical element. They do not appear in the
command line.
[...]
Optional sub parameter of a command or an optional part of TA information response is
enclosed in square brackets. Brackets themselves do not appear in the command line. When
sub parameter is not given in AT commands which have a Read command, new value equals to its
previous value. In AT commands which do not store the values of any of their sub parameters, and so have
not a Read command, which are called action type commands, action should be done on the basis of the
recommended default setting of the sub parameter.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 23 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
AT Command Syntax
The syntax rules followed by Telit implementation of either Hayes AT commands, Modem commands are
very similar to those of standard basic and extended AT commands
There are two types of extended command:
Parameter type commands. This type of commands may be “set” (to store a value or values for later use),
“read” (to determine the current value or values stored), or “tested” (to determine ranges of values
supported). Each of them has a test command (trailing =?) to give information about the type of its sub
parameters; they also have a Read command (trailing ?) to check the current values of sub parameters.
Action type commands. This type of command may be “executed” or “tested”.
“executed“ to invoke a particular function of the equipment, which generally involves more than the simple
storage of a value for later use “tested” to determine:
if sub parameters are associated with the action, the ranges of sub parameters values that are supported; if
the command has no sub parameters, issuing the correspondent Test command (trailing =?) raises the
result code “ERROR”.
Note: issuing the Read command (trailing ?) causes the command to be executed.
whether or not the equipment implements the Action Command (in this case issuing the correspondent
Test command - trailing =? - returns the OK result code), and, if sub parameters are associated with the
action, the ranges of sub parameters values that are supported.
Action commands don’t store the values of any of their possible sub parameters.
Moreover:
The response to the Test Command (trailing =?) may be changed in the future by Telit to allow the
description of new values/functionalities.
If all the sub parameters of a parameter type command +CMD are optional, issuing AT+CMD=<CR>
causes the OK result code to be returned and the previous values of the omitted sub parameters to be
retained.
3.2.1.
String Type Parameters
A string, either enclosed between quotes or not, is considered to be a valid string type parameter input.
According to V25.ter space characters are ignored on the command line and may be used freely for
formatting purposes, unless they are embedded in numeric or quoted string constants; therefore a string
containing a space character has to be enclosed between quotes to be considered a valid string type
parameter (e.g. typing AT+COPS=1,0,”A1” is the same as typing AT+COPS=1,0,A1; typing
AT+COPS=1,0,”A BB” is different from typing AT+COPS=1,0,A BB).
A string is always case sensitive.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 24 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
A small set of commands requires always to write the input string parameters within quotes: this is explicitly
reported in the specific descriptions.
3.2.2.
Command Lines
A command line is made up of three elements: the prefix, the body and the termination character.
The command line prefix consists of the characters “AT” or “at”, or, to repeat the execution of the
previous command line, the characters “A/” or “a/” or AT#/ or at#/.
The termination character may be selected by a user option (parameter S3), the default being <CR>.
The basic structures of the command line are:
•
ATCMD1<CR> where AT is the command line prefix, CMD1 is the body of a basic command (nb:
the name of the command never begins with the character “+”) and <CR> is the command line
terminator character ATCMD2=10<CR> where 10 is a sub parameter
•
ATCMD2=10<CR> where 10 is a subparameter
•
AT+CMD1;+CMD2=, ,10<CR> These are two examples of extended commands (nb: the name of
the command always begins with the character “+” ). They are delimited with semicolon. In the
second command the subparameter is omitted.
•
+CMD1?<CR> This is a Read command for checking current sub parameter values
•
+CMD1=?<CR> This is a test command for checking possible sub parameter values
These commands might be performed in a single command line as shown below:
ATCMD1 CMD2=10+CMD1;+CMD2=, ,10;+CMD1?;+CMD1=?<CR>
anyway it is always preferable to separate into different command lines the basic commands and the
extended commands; furthermore it is suggested to avoid placing several action commands in the same
command line, because if one of them fails, then an error message is received but it is not possible to
argue which one of them has failed the execution.
If command V1 is enabled (verbose responses codes) and all commands in a command line has been
performed successfully, result code <CR><LF>OK<CR><LF> is sent from the TA to the TE, if
subparameter values of a command are not accepted by the TA or command itself is invalid, or command
cannot be performed for some reason, result code <CR><LF>ERROR<CR><LF> is sent and no
subsequent commands in the command line are processed.
If command V0 is enabled (numeric responses codes), and all commands in a command line has been
performed successfully, result code 0<CR> is sent from the TA to the TE, if sub-parameter values of a
command are not accepted by the TA or command itself is invalid, or command cannot be performed for
some reason, result code 4<CR> and no subsequent commands in the command line are processed.
In case of errors depending on ME operation, ERROR (or 4) response may be replaced by +CME ERROR:
<err> or +CMS ERROR: <err>.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 25 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
The set of proprietary AT commands differentiates from the standard one
because the name of each of them begins with either “@”, “#”, “$” or “*”.
Proprietary AT commands follow the same syntax rules as extended commands.
The command line buffer accepts a maximum of 400 characters. If this number
is exceeded none of the commands will be executed and TA returns ERROR.
3.2.2.1.
ME Error Result Code - +CME ERROR: <err>
This is NOT a command, it is the error response to +Cxxx 3GPP TS 27.007 commands.
Syntax: +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter: <err> - error code can be either numeric or verbose (see +CMEE).The possible values of <err>
are reported in the table:
General Errors
Numeric Format
Verbose Format
0
phone failure
1
No connection to phone
2
phone-adaptor link reserved
3
operation not allowed
4
operation not supported
5
PH-SIM PIN required
10
SIM not inserted
11
SIM PIN required
12
SIM PUK required
13
SIM failure
14
SIM busy
15
SIM wrong
16
incorrect password
17
SIM PIN2 required
18
SIM PUK2 required
20
memory full
21
invalid index
22
not found
23
memory failure
24
text string too long
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 26 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
General Errors
Numeric Format
Verbose Format
25
invalid characters in text string
26
dial string too long
27
invalid characters in dial string
30
no network service
31
network time-out
32
network not allowed - emergency calls only
40
network personalization PIN required
41
network personalization PUK required
42
nephonebooktwork subset personalization PIN required
43
network subset personalization PUK required
44
service provider personalization PIN required
45
service provider personalization PUK required
46
corporate personalization PIN required
47
corporate personalization PUK required
48
hidden key required
49
EAP method not supported
50
Incorrect parameters
100
Unknown
GPRS related errors to a failure to perform an Attach
Numeric Format
Verbose Format
103
Illegal MS (#3)*
106
Illegal ME (#6)*
107
GPRS service not allowed (#7)*
111
PLMN not allowed (#11)*
112
Location area not allowed (#12)*
113
Roaming not allowed in this location area (#13)*
GPRS related errors to a failure to Activate a Context and others
Numeric Format
Verbose Format
132
service option not supported (#32)*
133
requested service option not subscribed (#33)*
134
service option temporarily out of order (#34)*
148
unspecified GPRS error
149
PDP authentication failure
150
invalid mobile class
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 27 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
NOTE:
*(values in parentheses are GSM 04.08 cause codes).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 28 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
IP Easy related Errors
Numeric Format
Verbose Format
550
generic undocumented error
551
wrong state
552
wrong mode
553
context already activated
554
stack already active
555
activation failed
556
context not opened
557
cannot setup socket
558
cannot resolve DN
559
timeout in opening socket
560
cannot open socket
561
remote disconnected or time-out
562
connection failed
563
TX error
564
already listening
566
can not resume socket
567
wrong APN
568
wrong PDP
569
service not supported
570
QOS not accepted
571
NSAPI already used
572
LLC or SNDCP failure
573
network reject
Custom SIM Lock related errors
Numeric
Format
586
Verbose Format
MCL personalization PIN required
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 29 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
FTP related Errors
Numeric
Format
Verbose Format
600
generic undocumented error
601
wrong state
602
Can not activate
603
Can not resolve name
604
Can not allocate control socket
605
Can not connect control socket
606
Bad or no response from server
607
Not connected
608
Already connected
609
Context down
610
No photo available
611
Can not send photo
612
Resource used by other instance
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 30 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Phonebook related errors
Numeric
Format
Verbose Format
700
ADN memory exceeded
701
ANR memory exceeded
702
SNE memory exceeded
703
EMAIL memory exceeded
704
Extension memory exceeded
3.2.2.2.
Message Service Failure Result Code - +CMS ERROR: <err>
This is NOT a command, it is the error response to +Cxxx 3GPP TS 27.005 commands.
Syntax: +CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter: <err> - numeric error code.
The <err> values are reported in the table:
Numeric
Format
0...127
128...255
Meaning
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values
3GPP TS 23.040 sub clause 9.2.3.22 values
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 31 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Numeric Format
Meaning
300
ME failure
301
SMS service of ME reserved
302
operation not allowed
303
operation not supported
304
invalid PDU mode parameter
305
invalid text mode parameter
310
SIM not inserted
311
SIM PIN required
312
PH-SIM PIN required
313
SIM failure
314
SIM busy
315
SIM wrong
316
SIM PUK required
317
SIM PIN2 required
318
SIM PUK2 required
320
memory failure
321
invalid memory index
322
memory full
330
SMSC address unknown
331
no network service
332
network time-out
340
no +CNMA acknowledgement expected
500
unknown error
512
FDN not allowed number
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 32 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
3.2.3.
Information Responses And Result Codes
The TA response, in case of verbose response format enabled, for the previous examples command line
could be as shown below:
information response to +CMD1?
•
<CR><LF>+CMD1:2,1,10<CR><LF>
information response to +CMD1=?
•
<CR><LF>+CMD1(0-2),(0,1),(0-15)<CR><LF>
final result code
•
<CR><LF>OK<CR><LF>
Moreover there are other two types of result codes:
• result codes that inform about progress of TA operation (e.g. connection establishment
CONNECT)
• result codes that indicate occurrence of an event not directly associated with issuance of a command
from TE (e.g. ring indication RING).
Here the basic result codes according to ITU-T V25Ter recommendation:
Numeric Format
Verbose Form
0
OK
1
CONNECT or CONNECT <text>
2
RING
3
NO CARRIER
4
ERROR
6
NO DIALTONE
7
BUSY
8
NO ANSWER
10
CONNECT 2400
11
CONNECT 4800
12
CONNECT 9600
15
CONNECT 14400
23
CONNECT 1200/75
NOTE:
<text> can be”300”, “1200”, “2400”, “4800”, “9600”, “14400” or “1200/75”
3.2.4.
Command Response Time-Out
Every command issued to the Telit modules returns a result response, if response codes are enabled
(default). The time needed to process the given command and return the response varies, depending on
the command type. Commands that do not interact with the SIM or the network, and only involve internal
setups or readings, have an immediate response.Commands that interact with the SIM or the network
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 33 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
could take many seconds to send a response, depending on SIM configuration (e.g., number of contacts
stored in the phonebook, number of stored SMS), or on the network the command may interact with.
3.2.5.
Command Issuing Timing
The chain Command -> Response shall always be respected and a new command must not be issued
before the module has terminated all the sending of its response result code (whatever it may be).
This applies especially to applications that “sense” the OK text and therefore may send the next command
before the complete code <CR><LF>OK<CR><LF> is sent by the module.
It is advisable anyway to wait for at least 20ms between the end of the reception of the response and the
issue of the next AT command.
If the response codes are disabled and therefore the module does not report any response to the
command, then at least the 20ms pause time shall be respected.
Storage
3.3.1.
Factory Profile And User Profiles
The Telit wireless modules stores the values set by several commands in the internal non volatile memory
(NVM), allowing to remember this setting even after power off. In the NVM these values are set either as
factory profile or as user profiles: there are two customizable user profiles and one factory profile in the
NVM of the device: by default the device will start with user profile 0 equal to factory profile.
For backward compatibility, each profile is divided into two sections, one base section which was
historically the one that was saved and restored in early releases of code, and the extended section which
includes all the remaining values.
The &W command is used to save the actual values of both sections of profiles into the NVM user profile.
Commands &Y and &P are both used to set the profile to be loaded at startup. &Y instructs the device to
load at startup only the base section. &P instructs the device to load at startup the full profile: base +
extended sections.
The &F command resets to factory profile values only the command of the base section of profile, while the
&F1 resets to factory profile values the full set of base + extended section commands.
The values set by other commands are stored in NVM outside the profile: some of them are stored always,
without issuing any &W, some other are stored issuing specific commands (+CSAS, #SLEDSAV, #ESAV);
all of these values are read at power-up.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 34 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
The values set by following commands are stored in the profile base section; they depend on the specific
AT instance:
Item
Command
DTE SPEED
+IPR
COMMAND ECHO
E
RESULT MESSAGES
Q
VERBOSE MESSAGES
V
EXTENDED MESSAGES
X
POWER SAVING
+CFUN (it does not depend on the specific AT instance;
value is always taken from Instance 0)
DEFAULT PROFILE
&Y
S REGISTERS
S0;S2;S3;S4;S5;S7;S10;S12;S25
The values set by following commands are stored in the profile extended section and they depend on the
specific AT instance (see +CMUX):
+CSCS
+CR
+CAPD
+CSDF
+CREG
+CLIP
+CRLP
+CTZR
+CCWE
+CRC
+CLIR
+CSVM
#SIMPR
#NWEN
+CCWA
+CUSD
+CAOC
#NCIH
+COLP
+CSSN
+CIND
+CMER
+CCWE
#CEERNETEXT
+CPBS
+CMEE
+CGREG
#NWEN
+CGEREP
+CMGF
+CSDH
+COLP
+CNMI
#QSS
#ECAM
+CSIL
#SMOV
#MWI
#NITZ
#PSNT
#SKIPESC
#CFF
#STIA
#CESTHLCK
+CSTF
+CSDF
+CTZU
+CSTA
+FCLASS
The values set by following commands are stored in the profile extended section and they do not depend
on the specific AT instance (see +CMUX):
+CALM
+CRSL
+CMUT
#HFMICG
#HSMICG
+CLVL
+VTD
+CSCB
#SPKMUT
#NITZ
#CAP
#SRS
#SRP
#HFRECG
#HSRECG
#STM
#E2SLRI
#E2SMSRI
#SHSAGC
#SHFAGC
#DVI
#CODEC
#SHFEC
#SHFNR
#SHSSD
#SIMDET
#DVIEXT
#SHFSD
#SHSSD
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 35 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
The values set by following commands are automatically stored in NVM, without issuing any storing
command and independently from the profile (unique values), and are automatically restored at startup:
#SELINT
+COPS
+CGCLASS
#DNS
#ICMP
+CGDCONT
+CGQMIN
+CGQREQ
+CGSMS
+CGEQMIN
#ENS
#SCFG
#AUTOATT
#SMSMODE
+CGEQREQ
+CGEQOS
The values set by following commands are stored in NVM on demand, issuing specific commands and
independently from the profile:
+CSCA
+CSMP
+CSCB
stored by +CSAS command and restored by +CRES command:
#SLED
stored by #SLEDSAV command
#ESMTP
#EADDR
#EUSER
#BIQUADINEX
#BIQUADOUT
#EPASSW
#BIQUADIN
#BIQUADOUTEX
stored by #PSAV command and automatically restored at startup;
#ESMTP
#EADDR
#EUSER
#EPASSW
stored by #ESAV command and automatically restored at startup;
NOTE:
+COPS is partially stored in NVM; see command description
Both commands +CSAS and +CRES deal with non-volatile memory, intending
for it either the NVM and the SIM storage.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 36 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
4.
AT COMMANDS AVAILABITY TABLE
The following table highlights the availability of commands which are not shared between all the versions of
the product (• = Supported):
LE910-NA V2
Command
LE910-SV V2
LE910-NA1
LE910-SV1
LE910B4-NA
LE910-SVL
LE910B1-NA
LE910-B1-SA
LE910-EU
V2
LE910-EU1
LE910-JN1
LE910B1-EU
#CIPHIND
•
•
#CODEC
•
•
#CODECINFO
•
•
#CQI
•
•
#ENCALG
•
•
#FDOR
•
•
+CRLP
•
•
#DTMF
•
•
#PRST
•
•
#PSAV
•
•
#PSEL
•
•
#SHFEC
•
•
#SHFNR
•
•
#SHFSD
•
•
#SHSAGC
•
•
#SHSEC
•
•
#SHSNR
•
•
#SHSSD
•
•
#SPKMUT
•
•
#SRP
•
•
+CALM
•
•
+CLVL
•
•
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
LE910-AU
V2
Page 37 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMUT
•
•
+CRSL
•
•
+CSIL
•
•
+VTD
•
•
+VTS
•
•
#TONEEXT
•
•
#TTY
•
•
#UDTRST
•
•
#UDTSAV
•
•
#UDTSET
•
•
#CSFB
•
•
#ENAOMADM
•
•
#OMACFG
•
#OMASENDPIN
•
#PDPAUTH
•
•
+CEVDP
•
+CGCLASS*
•
#UNIQUEDEVID
•
#OSTODIS
•
#MSCLASS
•
•
•
•
•
•
#TXCALEDGE
AT+CEVDP
•
•
#RXTOGGLE
#CEERNETEXT
•
•
•
*Note: +CGCLASS Not supported by LTE only modules
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 38 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.
AT COMMANDS REFERENCES
Command Line General Format
5.1.1.
Command Line Prefixes
5.1.1.1.
Starting A Command Line - AT
AT - Starting A Command Line
SELINT 2
AT
The prefix AT, or at, is a two-character abbreviation (ATtention), always used
to start a command line to be sent from TE to TA, with the only exception of
AT#/ prefix
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.1.2.
Last Command Automatic Repetition - A/
A/ - Last Command Automatic Repetition
A/
SELINT 2
If the prefix A/ or a/ is issued, the MODULE immediately execute once again the
body of the preceding command line. No editing is possible and no termination
character is necessary. A command line may be repeated multiple times through
this mechanism, if desired.
If A/ is issued before any command line has been executed, the preceding
command line is assumed to have been empty (that results in an OK result
code).
Note: this command works only at fixed IPR.
Note: the custom prefix AT#/ has been defined: it causes the last command to
be executed again too; but it doesn’t need a fixed IPR.
Reference
5.1.1.3.
V25ter
Repeat Last Command - AT#/
AT#/ - Repeat Last Command
AT#/
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
The prefix is used to execute again the last received command.
Page 39 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.2.
General Configuration Commands
5.1.2.1.
Select Interface Style - #SELINT
#SELINT - Select Interface Style
AT#SELINT=[<v>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the AT command interface style depending on parameter
<v>.
Parameter:
<v> - AT command interface style
2 - switches the AT command interface style of the product, to the new product
AT#SELINT?
Read command reports the current interface style.
AT#SELINT=?
Test command reports the available range of values for parameter <v>.
Note
Issuing AT#SELINT=<v> when the 3GPP TS 27.010 multiplexing protocol
control channel has been enabled (see +CMUX) causes an ERROR result code
to be returned.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 40 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.
Hayes Compliant AT Commands
5.1.3.1.
Generic Modem Control
5.1.3.1.1.
Set To Factory-Defined Configuration - &F
&F - Set To Factory-Defined Configuration
SELINT 2
AT&F[<value>]
Execution command sets the configuration parameters to default values
specified by manufacturer; it takes in consideration hardware configuration
switches and other manufacturer-defined criteria.
Parameter:
<value>:
0 - just the factory profile base section parameters are considered.
1 - either the factory profile base section and the extended section are
considered (full factory profile).
Note: if parameter <value> is omitted, the command has the same behavior as
AT&F0
Reference
V25ter.
5.1.3.1.2.
Soft Reset – Z
Z - Soft Reset
SELINT 2
ATZ[<n>]
Execution command loads the base section of the specified user profile and the
extended section of the default factory profile.
Parameter:
<n>
0..1 - user profile number
Note: any call in progress will be terminated.
Note: if parameter <n> is omitted, the command has the same behaviour as
ATZ0.
Reference
V25ter.
5.1.3.1.3.
Select Active Service Class - +FCLASS
+FCLASS - Select Active Service Class
SELINT 2
AT+FCLASS=<n>
Set command sets the wireless module in specified connection mode (data,
voice), hence all the calls done afterwards will be data or voice.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - data
8 - voice
AT+FCLASS?
Read command returns the current configuration value of the parameter <n>.
AT+FCLASS=?
Test command returns all supported values of the parameters <n>.
Reference
V25ter.
5.1.3.1.4.
Default Reset Basic Profile Designation - &Y
&Y - Default Reset Basic Profile Designation
AT&Y[<n>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command defines the basic profiles which will be loaded on start-up.
Parameter:
<n>
0..1 - profile (default is 0): the wireless module is able to store 2 complete
configurations (see &W).
Note: differently from command Z<n>, which loads just once the desired profile,
the one chosen through command &Y will be loaded on every startup.
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behavior as AT&Y0
Page 41 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.1.5.
Default Reset Full Profile Designation - &P
&P - Default Reset Full Profile Designation
SELINT 2
AT&P[<n>]
Execution command defines which full profile will be loaded on start-up.
Parameter:
<n>
0..1 – profile number: the wireless module is able to store 2 full configurations
(see command &W).
Note: differently from command Z<n>, which loads just once the desired profile,
the one chosen through command &P will be loaded on every start-up.
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour as AT&P0
Reference
Telit Specifications
5.1.3.1.6.
Store Current Configuration - &W
&W - Store Current Configuration
SELINT 2
Execution command stores on profile <n> the complete configuration of the
device.
AT&W[<n>]
Parameter:
<n>
0..1 - profile
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of AT&W0.
5.1.3.1.7.
Store Telephone Number - &Z
&Z - Store Telephone Number In The Wireless Module Internal
AT&Z<n>=<nr>
SELINT 2
Execution command stores in the record <n> the telephone number <nr>. The
records cannot be overwritten, they must be cleared before rewriting.
Parameters:
<n> - phonebook record
<nr> - telephone number (string type)
Note: the wireless module has a built in non volatile memory in which 10
telephone numbers of a maximum 24 digits can be stored
Note: to delete the record <n> the command AT&Z<n>=<CR> must be issued.
Note: the records in the module memory can be viewed with the command &N,
while the telephone number stored in the record n can be dialled by giving the
command ATDS=<n>.
5.1.3.1.8.
Display Stored Numbers - &N
&N - Display Internal Phonebook Stored Numbers
AT&N[<n>]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the telephone number stored at the <n> position in
the internal memory.
Parameter:
<n> - phonebook record number
Note: if parameter <n> is omitted then all the internal records are shown.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 42 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.1.9.
Manufacturer Identification - +GMI
+GMI - Manufacturer Identification
SELINT 2
AT+GMI
Execution command returns the manufacturer identification.
Reference
V.25ter
5.1.3.1.10. Model Identification - +GMM
+GMM - Model Identification
SELINT 2
AT+GMM
Execution command returns the model identification.
Reference
V.25ter
5.1.3.1.11. Revision Identification - +GMR
+GMR - Revision Identification
SELINT 2
AT+GMR
Execution command returns the software revision identification.
Reference
V.25ter
5.1.3.1.12. Capabilities List - +GCAP
+GCAP - Capabilities List
SELINT 2
AT+GCAP
Execution command returns the equipment supported command set list.
Where:
+CGSM: GSM ETSI command set
+FCLASS: Fax command set
+MS: Mobile Specific command set
+ES: WCDMA data Service common modem command set
Reference
V.25ter
5.1.3.1.13. Serial Number - +GSN
+GSN - Serial Number
AT+GSN
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the device board serial number.
Note: The number returned is not the IMSI, it is only the board number
Reference
V.25ter
5.1.3.1.14. Display Configuration And Profile - &V
&V - Display Current Base Configuration And Profile
AT&V
SELINT 2
Execution command returns some of the base configuration parameters
settings.
Note: the row of information about CTS (C106) OPTIONS is in the output of &V
only for compatibility reasons and represents only a dummy value.
5.1.3.1.15. Display Configuration And Profile - &V0
&V0 - Display Current Configuration And Profile
AT&V0
SELINT 2
Execution command returns all the configuration parameters settings.
Note: this command is the same as &V, it is included only for backwards
compatibility.
Note: the row of information about CTS (C106) OPTIONS is in the output of &V0
only for compatibility reasons and represents only a dummy value.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 43 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.1.16. S Registers Display - &V1
&V1 - S Registers Display
AT&V1
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the value of the S registers in decimal and
hexadecimal value in the format:
REG DEC
HEX
<reg0>
<dec>
<hex>
<reg1>
<dec>
<hex>
...
where
<regn> - S register number
000..005
007
012
025
038
<dec> - current value in decimal notation
<hex> - current value in hexadecimal notation
5.1.3.1.17. Extended S Registers Display - &V3
&V3 - Extended S Registers Display
AT&V3
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the value of the S registers in decimal and
hexadecimal value in the format:
REG DEC
HEX
<reg0>
<dec>
<hex>
<reg1>
<dec>
<hex>
...
where
<regn> - S register number
000..005
007
012
025
030
038
<dec> - current value in decimal notation
<hex> - current value in hexadecimal notation
5.1.3.1.18. Display Last Connection Statistics - &V2
&V2 - Display Last Connection Statistics
AT&V2
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the last connection statistics & connection failure
reason.
5.1.3.1.19. Single Line Connect Message - \V
\V - Single Line Connect Message
AT\V<n>
SELINT 2
Execution command set single line connect message.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - off
1 - on
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 44 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.1.20. Country Of Installation - +GCI
+GCI - Country Of Installation
AT+GCI=<code>
SELINT 2
Set command selects the installation country code according to
ITU-T.35 Annex A.
Parameter:
<code>
59 - it currently supports only the Italy country code
AT+GCI?
Read command reports the currently selected country code.
AT+GCI=?
Test command reports the supported country codes.
Reference
V25ter.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 45 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.2.
5.1.3.2.1.
DTE - Modem Interface Control
Command Echo - E
E - Command Echo
ATE[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the command echo.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - disables command echo
1 - enables command echo (factory default) , hence command sent to the
device are echoed back to the DTE before the response is given.
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of ATE0
Reference
5.1.3.2.2.
V25ter
Quiet Result Codes - Q
Q - Quiet Result Codes
ATQ[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables or disables the result codes.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - enables result codes (factory default)
1 - disables result codes
2 - disables result codes (only for backward compatibility)
Note: After issuing either ATQ1 or ATQ2 every information text transmitted in
response to commands is not affected
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of ATQ0
Reference
5.1.3.2.3.
V25ter
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Control - &C
&C - Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Control
AT&C[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the RS232 DCD output behaviour.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - DCD remains high always.
1 - DCD follows the Carrier detect status: if carrier is detected DCD is high,
otherwise DCD is low. (factory default)
2 - DCD off while disconnecting
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of AT&C0
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of AT&D0
Note: if AT&D2 has been issued the call is drop on falling DTR edge and NO
CARRIER exits on rising DTR edge.
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
V25ter
Page 46 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.2.4.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Control - &D
&D - Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Control
AT&D[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the Module behaviour to the RS232 DTR transitions.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - device ignores DTR transitions (factory default); if +CVHU current setting is
different from 2 then every setting AT&D0 is equivalent to AT&D5
1 - when the MODULE is connected, the High to Low transition of DTR pin
sets the device in command mode, the current connection is NOT closed; if
+CVHU current setting is different from 2 then issuing AT&D1 is equivalent
to AT&D5
2 - when the MODULE is connected , the High to Low transition of DTR pin
sets the device in command mode and the current connection is closed; if
+CVHU current setting is different from 2 then issuing AT&D2 is equivalent
to AT&D5
3 - device ignores DTR transitions; if +CVHU current setting is different from 2
then issuing AT&D3 is equivalent to AT&D5
4 - C108/1 operation is disabled; if +CVHU current setting is different from 2
then issuing AT&D4 is equivalent to AT&D5
5 - C108/1 operation is enabled; same behaviour as for <n>=2
Note: If a connection has been set up issuing AT#SD then AT&D1 and AT&D2
have different effect, as described above.
Note: if AT&D2 has been issued and the DTR has been tied Low,
autoanswering is inhibited and it is possible to answer only issuing command
ATA.
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of AT&D0
Note: if AT&D2 has been issued the call is drop on falling DTR edge and NO
CARRIER exits on rising DTR edge.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.2.5.
Flow Control - &K
&K - Flow Control
AT&K[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the RS232 flow control behaviour.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - no flow control
3 - hardware bi-directional flow control (both RTS/CTS active) (factory default)
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour as AT&K0
Note: &K has no Read Command. To verify the current setting of &K, simply
check the settings of the active profile issuing AT&V.
Note: Hardware flow control (AT&K3) is not active in command mode.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 47 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.2.6.
Data Set Ready (DSR) Control - &S
&S - Data Set Ready (DSR) Control
AT&S[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the RS232 DSR pin behaviour.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - always High
1 - follows the GSM traffic channel indication.
2 - High when connected
3 - High when device is ready to receive commands (factory default).
Note: if option 1 is selected then DSR is tied High when the device receives
from the network the GSM traffic channel indication.
Note: in power saving mode the DSR pin is always tied Low.
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of AT&S0
5.1.3.2.7.
Response Format - V
V - Response Format
ATV[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command determines the contents of the header and trailer transmitted with
result codes and information responses. It also determines if result codes are
transmitted in a numeric form or an alphanumeric form (see [§3.2.3 Information
Responses And Result Codes] for the table of result codes).
Parameter:
<n>
0 - limited headers and trailers and numeric format of result codes
information responses
result codes
<text><CR><LF>
<numeric code><CR>
1 - full headers and trailers and verbose format of result codes (factory default)
information responses
result codes
<CR><LF>
<text><CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
<verbose code><CR><LF>
Note: the <text> portion of information responses is not affected by this setting.
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of ATV0
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
V25ter
Page 48 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.2.8.
Extended Result Codes - X
X - Extended Result Codes
ATX[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the result code messages subset used by the modem to
inform the DTE of the result of the commands.
Parameter:
<n> - (factory default is 1)
0 - on entering dial-mode CONNECT result code is given; OK, CONNECT,
RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NO ANSWER result codes are enabled .
Dial tone and busy detection (NO DIALTONE and BUSY result codes) are
disabled.
1..4 - on entering dial-mode CONNECT <text> result code is given; all the
other result codes are enabled.
Note: If parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of ATX0
Reference
5.1.3.2.9.
V25ter
Identification Information - I
I - Identification Information
ATI[<n>]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns one or more lines of information text followed by a
result code.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - numerical identifier
1 - module checksum
2 - checksum check result
3 - manufacturer
4 - product name
5 - DOB version
Note: if parameter is omitted, the command has the same behaviour of ATI0
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
V25ter
Page 49 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.2.10. Fixed DTE Interface Rate - +IPR
+IPR - Fixed DTE Interface Rate
AT+IPR=<rate>
SELINT 2
Set command specifies the DTE speed at which the device accepts commands
during command mode operations; it may be used to fix the DTE-DCE interface
speed.
Parameter:
<rate>
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200 (default value)
230400
460800
921600
3000000
AT+IPR?
Read command returns the current value of +IPR parameter.
AT+IPR=?
Test command returns the list of fixed-only <rate> values in the format:
+IPR: (list of fixed-only <rate> values)
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.2.11. DTE-Modem Local Flow Control - +IFC
+IFC - DTE-Modem Local Flow Control
AT+IFC=<by_te>,
<by_ta>
SELINT 2
Set command selects the flow control behaviour of the serial port in both
directions: from DTE to modem (<by_ta> option) and from modem to DTE
(<by_te>)
Parameters:
<by_te> - flow control option for the data received by DTE
0 - flow control None
2 - C105 (RTS) (factory default)
<by_ta> - flow control option for the data sent by modem
0 - flow control None
2 - C106 (CTS) (factory default)
Note: only possible commands are AT+IFC=0,0 and AT+IFC=2,2.
AT+IFC?
Read command returns active flow control settings.
AT+IFC=?
Test command returns all supported values of the parameters <by_te> and
<by_ta>.
Reference
V25ter
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 50 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.2.12. DTE-Modem Character Framing - +ICF
+ICF - DTE-Modem Character Framing
AT+ICF=<format>
[,<parity>]
SELINT 2
Set command defines the asynchronous character framing to be used when
autobauding is disabled.
Parameters:
<format> - determines the number of bits in the data bits, the presence of a
parity bit, and the number of stop bits in the start-stop frame.
1 - 8 Data, 2 Stop
2 - 8 Data, 1 Parity, 1 Stop
3 - 8 Data, 1 Stop
5 - 7 Data, 1 Parity, 1 Stop
<parity> - determines how the parity bit is generated and checked, if present;
setting this subparameter is mandatory and has a meaning only if <format>
subparameter is either 2 or 5 otherwise is not allowed.
0 - Odd
1 - Even
AT+ICF?
Read command returns current settings for subparameters <format> and
<parity>. If current setting of subparameter <format> is neither 2 nor 5, the
current setting of subparameter <parity> will always be represented as 0.
AT+ICF=?
Test command returns the ranges of values for the parameters <format> and
<parity>
Reference
V25ter
Example
8N2
AT+ICF = 1
OK
8O1
AT+ICF = 2,0
OK
8E1
AT+ICF = 2,1
OK
8N1
AT+ICF = 3
OK
7O1
AT+ICF = 5,0
OK
7E1
AT+ICF = 5,1
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 51 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.3.
Call Control
5.1.3.3.1.
Dial D
D – Dial
ATD<number>[;]
SELINT 2
Execution command starts a call to the phone number given as parameter.
If “;” is present, a voice call to the given number is performed, regardless of the
current value of the connection mode set by +FCLASS command.
Parameter:
<number> - phone number to be dialed
Note: type of call (data or voice) depends on last +FCLASS setting.
Note: the numbers accepted are 0-9 and *,#,”A”, ”B”, ”C”, ”D”,”+”.
Note: for backwards compatibility with landline modems modifiers
“T”, ”P”, ”R”, ”,”, ”W”, “!”, “@” are accepted but have no effect.
ATD><str>[;]
Issues a call to phone number which corresponding alphanumeric field is <str>;
all available memories will be searched for the correct entry.
If “;” is present a voice call is performed.
Parameter:
<str> - alphanumeric field corresponding to phone number; it must be enclosed
in quotation marks.
Note: parameter <str> is case sensitive.
Note: used character set should be the one selected with +CSCS.
ATD><mem><n>[;]
Issues a call to phone number in phonebook memory storage <mem>, entry
location <n> (available memories may be queried with AT+CPBS=?).
If “;” is present a voice call is performed.
Parameters:
<mem> - phonebook memory storage; it must not be enclosed in quotation
marks.
SM - SIM phonebook
FD - SIM fixed dialing-phonebook
LD - SIM last-dialing-phonebook
MC - device missed (unanswered received) calls list
RC - ME received calls list
MB - mailbox numbers stored on SIM, if this service is provided by the SIM
(see #MBN).
<n> - entry location; it should be in the range of locations available in the
memory used.
ATD><n>[;]
Issues a call to phone number in entry location <n> of the active phonebook
memory storage (see +CPBS).
If “;” is present a voice call is performed.
Parameter:
<n> - active phonebook memory storage entry location; it should be in the range
of locations available in the active phonebook memory storage.
ATDL
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Issues a call to the last number dialed.
Page 52 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
D – Dial
SELINT 2
ATDS=<nr>[;]
Issues a call to the number stored in the MODULE internal phonebook position
number <nr>.
If “;” is present, a voice call is performed.
Parameter:
<nr> - internal phonebook position to be called (See commands &N and &Z)
ATD<number>I[;]
ATD<number>i[;]
Issues a call overwriting the CLIR supplementary service subscription default
value for this call
If “;” is present a voice call is performed.
I - invocation, restrict CLI presentation
i - suppression, allow CLI presentation
ATD<number>G[;]
ATD<number>g[;]
Issues a call checking the CUG supplementary service information for the
current call. Refer to +CCUG command.
If “;” is present a voice call is performed.
ATD*<gprs_sc>
[*<addr>][*[<L2P>]
[*[<cid>]]]]#
This command is specific of GPRS functionality and causes the MT to perform
whatever actions are necessary to establish communication between the TE
and the external PDN.
Parameters:
<gprs_sc> - GPRS Service Code, a digit string (value 99) which identifies a
request to use the GPRS
<addr> - string that identifies the called party in the address space applicable to
the PDP.
<L2P> - a string which indicates the layer 2 protocol to be used. For
communications software that does not support arbitrary characters in the dial
string, the following numeric equivalents shall be used:
1 - PPP
<cid> - a digit which specifies a particular PDP context definition (see
+CGDCONT command).
Note
Data only products do not start the call and command answer is ERROR if a
voice call is requested.
Note
The escape sequence causes a closure of the link.
Example
To dial a number in SIM phonebook entry 6:
ATD>SM6
OK
To have a voice call to the 6-th entry of active phonebook:
ATD>6;
OK
To call the entry with alphanumeric field “Name”:
ATD>”Name”;
OK
Reference
5.1.3.3.2.
V25ter.
Tone Dial - T
T - Tone Dial
SELINT 2
ATT
Set command has no effect is included only for backward compatibility with
landline modems.
Reference
V25ter
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 53 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.3.3.
Pulse Dial - P
P - Pulse Dial
SELINT 2
ATP
Set command has no effect is included only for backward compatibility with
landline modems.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.3.4.
Answer - A
A - Answer
SELINT 2
ATA
Execution command is used to answer to an incoming call if automatic answer
is disabled.
Note: This command MUST be the last in the command line and must be
followed immediately by a <CR> character.
Note
Data only products do not start the call and command answer is ERROR if a
voice call is requested.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.3.5.
Disconnect - H
H - Disconnect
ATH
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to close the current conversation (voice or data).
Note: this command can be issued only in command mode; when a data
conversation is active the device is in on-line mode (commands are not sensed
and characters are sent to the other party), hence escape sequence is required
before issuing this command, otherwise if &D1 option is active, DTR pin has to
be tied Low to return in command mode.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.3.6.
Return To On Line Mode - O
O - Return To On Line Mode
ATO
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to return to on-line mode from command mode. If
there's no active connection it returns NO CARRIER.
Note: After issuing this command, if the device is in conversation, to send other
commands to the device you must return to command mode by issuing the
escape sequence (see register S2).
Note
The escape sequence causes a closure of the link.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.4.
5.1.3.4.1.
Modulation Control
Line Quality And Auto Retrain - %E
%E - Line Quality Monitor And Auto Retrain Or Fallback/Fallforward
AT%E<n>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command has no effect and is included only for backward
compatibility with landline modems.
Page 54 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.5.
S Parameters
Basic commands that begin with the letter “S” are known as “S-Parameters”. The number following the “S”
indicates the “parameter number” being referenced. If the number is not recognized as a valid parameter
number, an ERROR result code is issued.
If no value is given for the sub parameter of an S-Parameter, an ERROR result code will be issued and the
stored value left unchanged.
Reference: V25ter
NOTE:
What follows is a special way to set and read an S-parameter:
AT=<value><CR> sets the contents of the last S-parameter accessed with
ATSn=<value> command (default: S0)
Example:
AT=40<CR>
sets the content of S0 to 40
AT? returns the current value of the last S-parameter accessed with ATSn=<value>
command (default: S0)
5.1.3.5.1.
Number Of Rings To Auto Answer - S0
S0 - Number Of Rings To Auto Answer
ATS0=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the number of rings required before device automatically
answers an incoming call.
Parameter:
<n> - number of rings
0 - auto answer disabled (factory default)
1..255 - number of rings required before automatic answer.
ATS0?
Read command returns the current value of S0 parameter.
Note
Data only products ignore command setting and have auto answer disabled if
incoming call is a voice call.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.5.2.
Ring Counter - S1
S1 - Ring Counter
ATS1
SELINT 2
S1 is incremented each time the device detects the ring signal of an incoming
call. S1 is cleared as soon as no ring occur.
Note: the form ATS1 has no effect.
ATS1?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command returns the value of this parameter.
Page 55 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.5.3.
Escape Character - S2
S2 - Escape Character
ATS2=[<char>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the ASCII character to be used as escape character.
Parameter:
<char> - escape character decimal ASCII
0..255 - factory default value is 43 (+).
Note: the escape sequence consists of three escape characters preceded and
followed by n ms of idle (see S12 to set n).
ATS2?
Read command returns the current value of S2 parameter.
Note: the format of the numbers in output is always 3 digits, left-filled with 0s
5.1.3.5.4.
Command Line Termination Character - S3
S3 - Command Line Termination Character
ATS3=[<char>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the value of the character either recognized by the device as
command line terminator and generated by the device as part of the header,
trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with S4
parameter.
Parameter:
<char> - command line termination character (decimal ASCII)
0..127 - factory default value is 13 (ASCII <CR>)
Note: the “previous” value of S3 is used to determine the command line
termination character for entering the command line containing the S3 setting
command. However the result code issued shall use the “new” value of S3 (as
set during the processing of the command line)
ATS3?
Read command returns the current value of S3 parameter.
Note: the format of the numbers in output is always 3 digits, left-filled with 0s
Reference
5.1.3.5.5.
V25ter
Response Formatting Character - S4
S4 - Response Formatting Character
ATS4=[<char>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the value of the character generated by the device as part of
the header, trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along
with the S3 parameter.
Parameter:
<char> - response formatting character (decimal ASCII)
0..127 - factory default value is 10 (ASCII LF)
Note: if the value of S4 is changed in a command line the result code issued in
response of that command line will use the new value of S4.
ATS4?
Read command returns the current value of S4 parameter.
Note: the format of the numbers in output is always 3 digits, left-filled with 0s
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
V25ter
Page 56 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.5.6.
Command Line Editing Character - S5
S5 - Command Line Editing Character
ATS5=[<char>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the value of the character recognized by the device as a
request to delete from the command line the immediately preceding character.
Parameter:
<char> - command line editing character (decimal ASCII)
0..127 - factory default value is 8 (ASCII BS)
ATS5?
Read command returns the current value of S5 parameter.
Note: the format of the numbers in output is always 3 digits, left-filled with 0s
Reference
5.1.3.5.7.
V25ter
Connection Completion Time-Out - S7
S7 - Connection Completion Time-Out
ATS4=[<tout>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the device shall allow
between either answering a call (automatically or by A command) or completion
of signalling of call addressing information to network (dialing), and
establishment of a connection with the remote device.
Parameter:
<tout> - number of seconds
1..255 - factory default value is 60
ATS7?
Read command returns the current value of S7 parameter.
Reference
V25ter
5.1.3.5.8.
– Carrier Off With Firm Time - S10
S10 –Carrier Off With Firm Time
ATS10
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command has no effect and is included only for backward
compatibility with landline modems
Page 57 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.3.5.9.
– Escaper Prompt Delay - S12
S12 - Escape Prompt Delay
ATS12=[<time>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets:
1) the minimum period, before receipt of the first character of the three
escape character sequence, during which no other character has to be
detected in order to accept it as valid first character;
2) the maximum period allowed between receipt of first or second
character of the three escape character sequence and receipt of the
next;
3) the minimum period, after receipt of the last character of the three
escape character sequence, during which no other character has to be
detected in order to accept the escape sequence as a valid one.
Parameter:
<time> - expressed in fiftieth of a second
2..255 - factory default value is 50.
Note: the minimum period S12 has to pass after CONNECT result
code too, before a received character is accepted as valid first
character of the three escape character sequence.
ATS12?
Read command returns the current value of S12 parameter.
Note: the format of the numbers in output is always 3 digits, left-filled with 0s
5.1.3.5.10. Delay To DTR Off - S25
S25 -Delay To DTR Off
ATS25=[<time>]
SELINT 2
Set command defines the amount of time, in hundredths of second, that the
device will ignore the DTR for taking the action specified by command &D.
Parameter:
<time> - expressed in hundredths of a second
0..255 - factory default value is 5.
Note: the delay is effective only if its value is greater than 5. To be recognized
as valid the DTR transition must be greater than S25, the lower values could
require a transition increased of a factor 1.5 to be handled correctly. (e.g. to be
sure that S25=5 works, use a DTR toggle of 75ms to be detected).
Note: in power saving (e.g. CFUN 5 with DTR low) DTR has to be off
at least 3 seconds for taking the action specified by command &D,
independently of S25 parameter.
ATS25?
Read command returns the current value of S25 parameter.
Note: the format of the numbers in output is always 3 digits, left-filled with 0s
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 58 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.
3GPP TS 27.007 AT Commands
5.1.4.1.
General
5.1.4.1.1.
Request Manufacturer Identification - +CGMI
+CGMI - Request Manufacturer Identification
SELINT 2
AT+CGMI
Execution command returns the device manufacturer identification code without
command echo.
AT+CGMI=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.1.2.
Request Model Identification - +CGMM
+CGMM - Request Model Identification
SELINT 2
AT+CGMM
Execution command returns the device model identification code without
command echo.
AT+CGMM=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.1.3.
Request Revision Identification - +CGMR
+CGMR - Request Revision Identification
SELINT 2
AT+CGMR
Execution command returns device software revision number without
command echo.
AT+CGMR=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.1.4.
Request Product Serial Number Identification - +CGSN
+CGSN - Request Product Serial Number Identification
SELINT 2
AT+CGSN
Execution command returns the product serial number, identified as the IMEI
of the mobile, without command echo.
AT+CGSN=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.1.5.
Select TE Character Set - +CSCS
+CSCS - Select TE Character Set
SELINT 2
AT+CSCS=
[<chset>]
Set command sets the current character set used by the device.
Parameter:
<chset> - character set
“GSM” - GSM default alphabet (3GPP TS 23.038)
“IRA” - international reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50)
”8859-1” - ISO 8859 Latin 1 character set
”PCCP437” - PC character set Code Page 437
”UCS2” - 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character set (ISO/IEC10646)
”HEX” - Character strings consist only of hexadecimal numbers from 00 to FF;
e.g. "032FE6" equals three 8-bit characters with decimal values 3, 47 and 230;
no conversions to the original MT character set shall be done. If MT is using
GSM 7 bit default alphabet, its characters shall be padded with 8th bit (zero)
before converting them to hexadecimal numbers (i.e. no SMS-style packing of
7-bit alphabet).
AT+CSCS?
Read command returns the current value of the active character set.
AT+CSCS=?
Test command returns the supported values for parameter <chset>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 59 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.1.6.
International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) - +CIMI
+CIMI - Request International Mobile Subscriber Identify (IMSI)
AT+CIMI
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the value of the Internal Mobile Subscriber Identity
stored in the SIM without command echo.
Note: a SIM card must be present in the SIM card housing, otherwise the
command returns ERROR.
AT+CIMI=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.1.7.
Multiplexing Mode - +CMUX
+CMUX - Multiplexing Mode
SELINT 2
AT+CMUX=<mode>[, Set command is used to enable/disable the 3GPP TS 27.010 multiplexing
<subset>[,<port_spe protocol control channel.
ed>[,<N1>[,<T1>[,<N2
>[,<T2>[,<T3>[,<k>]]]] Parameters:
]]]]
<mode> multiplexer transparency mechanism
0 - basic option; it is currently the only supported value.
<subset>
0 - UIH frames used only; it is currently the only supported value.
<port_speed> transmission rate
5 - 115 200 bit/s (default)
<N1> maximum frame size
1-1509, the default is 121
<T1> acknowledgement timer in units of ten milliseconds
1-255: where 10 is default (100 ms)
<N2> maximum number of re-transmissions
0-100: currently only the range 0-5 is supported, the default is 3
<T2> response timer for the multiplexer control channel in units of ten
milliseconds
2-255: where 30 is default (300 ms). Note: T2 must be longer than T1.
<T3> wake up response timer in seconds
1-255: currently not supported, in case of read command 0 is returned
<k> window size, for Advanced operation with Error Recovery options
1-7: currently not supported, in case of read command 0 is returned
Note: all the CMUX protocol parameters are fixed as defined in GSM07.10 and
cannot be changed.
Read command returns the current value of <mode>, <subset>, <port_speed>,
<N1>, <T1>, <N2>, <T2>, <T3> and <k> parameters, in the format:
AT+CMUX?
+CMUX: <mode>,<subset>, <port_speed>, <N1>, <T1>, <N2>, <T2>,
<T3>,<k>
AT+CMUX=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameters <mode>,
<subset>, <port_speed>, <N1>, <T1>, <N2>, <T2>, <T3> and <k>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007, 3GPP TS 27.010
5.1.4.1.8.
Read ICCID - +CCID
+CCID - Read ICCID
SELINT 2
AT+CCID
Execution command reads on SIM the ICCID (card identification number that
provides a unique identification number for the SIM)
AT+CCID=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 60 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.2.
Call Control
5.1.4.2.1.
Select type of address - +CSTA
+CSTA – Select Type of Address
AT+CSTA=
[<type>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the type of number for further dialing commands (D)
according to 3GPP specifications.
Parameter:
<type>: type of address octet in integer format (refer TS 24.008,
subclause 10.5.4.7); default 145 when dialing string includes international
access code character "+", otherwise 129
AT+CSTA?
Read command returns the current value of <type> in the format:
+CSTA: <type>
AT+CSTA=?
5.1.4.2.2.
Test command reports the range for the parameter <type>
Hang Up Call - +CHUP
+CHUP - Hang Up Call
SELINT 2
AT+CHUP
Execution command cancels all active and held calls, also if a multiparty session is running.
AT+CHUP=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.2.3.
Cellular Result Codes - +CRC
+CRC - Cellular Result Codes
AT+CRC=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls whether or not the extended format of incoming call
indication is used.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables extended format reporting (factory default)
1 - enables extended format reporting:
When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited result
code
+CRING: <type>
instead of the normal RING.
where
<type> - call type:
ASYNC - asynchronous transparent data
SYNC - synchronous transparent data
REL ASYNC - asynchronous non-transparent data
REL SYNC - synchronous non-transparent data
VOICE - normal voice (TS 11)
AT+CRC?
Read command returns current value of the parameter <mode>.
AT+CRC=?
Test command returns supported values of the parameter <mode>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 61 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.2.4.
Radio Link Protocol - +CRLP
+CRLP - Radio Link Protocol
AT+CRLP=[<iws>
[,<mws>[,<T1>
[,<N2>[,<ver>]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command sets Radio Link Protocol (RLP) parameters used when nontransparent data calls are originated
Parameters:
<iws> - IWF window Dimension
1..61 - factory default value is 61
<mws> - MS window Dimension
1..61 - default value is 61
<T1> - acknowledge timer (10 ms units).
39..255 - default value is 48
<N2> - retransmission attempts
1..255 - default value is 6
<ver> - protocol version
0
AT+CRLP?
Read command returns the current value of the RLP protocol parameters.
AT+CRLP=?
Test command returns supported range of values of the RLP protocol
parameters.
5.1.4.2.5.
Service Reporting Control - +CR
+CR - Service Reporting Control
AT+CR=[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls whether or not intermediate result code +CR is returned
from TA to TE.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables +CR reporting (factory default)
1 - enables +CR reporting: the intermediate result code is transmitted at the
point during connect negotiation at which the TA has determined which speed
and quality of service will be used, before any error control or data compression
reports are transmitted, and before the intermediate result code CONNECT is
transmitted. Its format is:
+CR: <serv>
where:
<serv>
ASYNC - asynchronous transparent
SYNC - synchronous transparent
REL ASYNC - asynchronous non-transparent
REL SYNC - synchronous non-transparent.
Note: this command replaces V.25ter [14] command Modulation Reporting
Control (+MR), which is not appropriate for use with a GSM terminal.
AT+CR?
Read command returns whether or not intermediate result code +CR is
enabled, in the format:
+CR: <mode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 62 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CR - Service Reporting Control
AT+CR=?
5.1.4.2.6.
SELINT 2
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter <mode>
Extended Error Report - +CEER
+CEER - Extended Error Report
SELINT 2
Execution command returns one or more lines of information text <report>
offering the TA user an extended error report, in the format:
AT+CEER
+CEER: <report>
This report regards some error condition that may occur:
• the failure in the last unsuccessful call setup (originating or answering)
• the last call release
Note: if none of the previous conditions has occurred since power up then
“Normal, unspecified” condition is reported
AT+CEER=?
5.1.4.2.7.
Test command returns OK result code.
Voice Hung Up Control - +CVHU
+CVHU - Voice Hang Up Control
AT+CVHU=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects whether ATH or "drop DTR" shall cause a voice
connection to be disconnected or not.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - "Drop DTR" ignored but OK result code given. ATH disconnects.
1 - "Drop DTR" and ATH ignored but OK result code given.
2 - "Drop DTR" behavior according to &D setting. ATH disconnects
(factory default).
AT+CVHU?
Read command reports the current value of the <mode> parameter, in the
format:
+CVHU: <mode>
AT+CVHU=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter <mode>
Page 63 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.3.
Network Service Handling
5.1.4.3.1.
Subscriber Number - +CNUM
+CNUM - Subscriber Number
AT+CNUM
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the MSISDN (if the phone number of the device
has been stored in the SIM card) in the format:
+CNUM: <alpha>,<number>,<type>[<CR><LF>
+CNUM: <alpha>,<number>,<type>[…]]
where:
<alpha> - alphanumeric string associated to <number>; used character set
should be the one selected with +CSCS.
<number> - string containing the phone number in the format <type>
<type> - type of number:
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+").
AT+CNUM=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.2.
Read Operator Names - +COPN
+COPN - Read Operator Names
AT+COPN
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the list of operator names from the ME in the
format:
+COPN: <numeric1>,<alpha1>[<CR><LF>
+COPN: <numeric2>,<alpha2>[…]]
where:
<numericn> - string type, operator in numeric format (see +COPS)
<alphan> - string type, operator in long alphanumeric format (see +COPS)
Note: each operator code <numericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent
<alphan> in the ME memory is returned
AT+COPN=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 64 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.3.3.
Network Registration Report - +CREG
+CREG - Network Registration Report
AT+CREG=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables network registration reports depending on the
parameter <mode>.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disable network registration unsolicited result code (factory default)
1 - enable network registration unsolicited result code
2 - enable network registration unsolicited result code with network Cell
identification data
If <mode>=1, network registration result code reports:
+CREG: <stat>
where
<stat>
0 - not registered, ME is not currently searching a new operator to register
to
1 - registered, home network
2 - not registered, but ME is currently searching a new operator to register
to
3 - registration denied
4 -unknown
5 - registered, roaming
If <mode>=2, network registration result code reports:
+CREG: <stat>[,<Lac>,<Ci>[,<AcT>]]
where:
<Lac> - Local Area Code (when <AcT> indicates value 0
to 6) or tracking area code (when <AcT> indicates value 7)
<Ci> - Cell Id for the currently registered on cell
<AcT>: access technology of the registered network:
0
GSM
2
UTRAN
3
GSM w/EGPRS
4
UTRAN w/HSDPA
5
UTRAN w/HSUPA
6
UTRAN w/HSDPA and HSUPA
7
E-UTRAN
Note: <Lac>, <Ci> and <AcT> are reported only if <mode>=2 and the mobile
is registered on some network cell.
AT+CREG?
Read command reports the <mode> and <stat> parameter values in the format:
+CREG: <mode>,<stat>[,<Lac>,<Ci>[,<AcT>]]
Note: <Lac>, <Ci> and <AcT> are reported only if <mode>=2 and the mobile
is registered on some network cell.
AT+CREG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the range of supported <mode>
Page 65 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CREG - Network Registration Report
Example
SELINT 2
AT
OK
at+creg?
+CREG: 0,2
OK
(the MODULE is in network searching state)
at+creg?
+CREG: 0,2
OK
at+creg?
+CREG: 0,2
OK
at+creg?
+CREG: 0,2
OK
at+creg?
+CREG: 0,1
OK
(the MODULE is registered)
at+creg?
+CREG: 0,1
OK
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.4.
Operator Selection - +COPS
+COPS - Operator Selection
AT+COPS=
[<mode>
[,<format>
[,<oper>[,< AcT>]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command forces an attempt to select and register the network operator.
<mode> parameter defines whether the operator selection is done automatically
or it is forced by this command to operator <oper>.
The operator <oper> shall be given in format <format>.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 - automatic choice (the parameter <oper> will be ignored) (factory default)
1 - manual choice (<oper> field shall be present)
2 - deregister from network; the MODULE is kept unregistered until a +COPS
with <mode>=0, 1 or 4 is issued
3 - set only <format> parameter (the parameter <oper> will be ignored)
4 - manual/automatic (<oper> field shall be present); if manual selection fails,
automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered
<format>
0 - alphanumeric long form (max length 16 digits)
2 - Numeric 5 or 6 digits [country code (3) + network code (2 or 3)]
<oper>: network operator in format defined by <format> parameter.
<AcT> access technology selected:
0 GSM
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 66 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+COPS - Operator Selection
2 UTRAN
7 E-UTRAN
SELINT 2
Note: <mode> parameter setting is stored in NVM and available at next reboot,
if it is not 3 (i.e.: set only <format> parameter).
Note: if <mode>=1 or 4, the selected network is stored in NVM too and is
available at next reboot (this will happen even with a new SIM inserted)
Note: <format> parameter setting is never stored in NVM
Note: 3G only products support <AcT> parameter value 2 only.
Note: 4G only products support <AcT> parameter value 7 only.
AT+COPS?
Read command returns current value of <mode>,<format>,<oper> and <AcT>
in format <format>; if no operator is selected, <format>, <oper> and <AcT>
are omitted
+COPS: <mode>[, <format>, <oper>,< AcT>]
Where
<AcT> access technology selected:
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
3 GSM w/EGPRS
4 UTRAN w/HSDPA
5 UTRAN w/HSUPA
6 UTRAN w/HSDPA and HSUPA
7 E-UTRAN
AT+COPS=?
Test command returns a list of quadruplets, each representing an operator
present in the network.
The quadruplets in the list are separated by commas:
+COPS: [list of supported (<stat> ,<oper (in <format>=0)>,,
<oper (in <format>=2)>,< AcT>)s][,,(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported<format>s)]
where
<stat> - operator availability
0 - unknown
1 - available
2 - current
3 - forbidden
<AcT> access technology selected:
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
7 E-UTRAN
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 67 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+COPS - Operator Selection
SELINT 2
Note: since with this command a network scan is done, this command may
require some seconds before the output is given.
Reference
5.1.4.3.5.
3GPP TS 27.007
Select Wireless Network - +WS46
+WS46 - PCCA STD-101 Select Wireless Network
AT+WS46=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the cellular network (Wireless Data Service, WDS) to
operate with the TA (WDS-Side Stack Selection).
Parameter:
<n> - integer type, it is the WDS-Side Stack to be used by the TA.
12 - GSM Digital Cellular Systems (GERAN only)
22 UTRAN only
25 3GPP Systems (GERAN and UTRAN and E-UTRAN) (factory default)
28 E-UTRAN only
29 GERAN and UTRAN
30 GERAN and E-UTRAN
31 UTRAN and E-UTRAN
NOTE: <n> parameter setting is stored in NVM and available at next reboot.
NOTE: 4G only products support <n> parameter value 28 only.
NOTE: 4G/3G only products support <n> parameter values 22, 28 and 31 only.
31 is factory default
NOTE: 4G/2G only products support <n> parameter values 12, 28 and 30 only.
30 is factory default
NOTE: for NA (North America) products supporting at&t requirement 13340
about RAT Balancing and EF-RAT Mode, the value <n> stored with AT+WS46
command can be changed and overwritten in case of full SIM read (e.g.: power
on, AT+CFUN=4/AT+CFUN=1 sequence, SIM ejection/SIM insertion
sequence).
AT+WS46?
Read command reports the currently selected cellular network, in the format:
+ WS46: <n>
AT+WS46=?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <n>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.6.
Facility Lock/Unlock - +CLCK
+CLCK - Facility Lock/Unlock
AT+CLCK=
<fac>,<mode>
[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to lock or unlock a ME on a network facility.
Parameters:
<fac> - facility
"PS" - PH-SIM (lock Phone to SIM card) MT asks password when other than
current SIM card inserted; MT may remember certain amount of previously used
cards thus not requiring password when they are inserted
"PF" - lock Phone to the very First inserted SIM card (MT asks password when
other than the first SIM card is inserted)
"SC" - SIM (PIN request) (device asks SIM password at power-up and when
this lock command issued)
"AO"- BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)
"OI" - BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)
Page 68 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CLCK - Facility Lock/Unlock
SELINT 2
"OX" - BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to Home Country)
"AI" - BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)
"IR" - BIC-Roam (Barr Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
"AB" - All Barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
"AG" - All outGoing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0) (not yet
supported)
"AC" - All inComing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
"FD" - SIM fixed dialing memory feature (if PIN2 authentication has not been
done during the current session, PIN2 is required as <passwd>)
"PN" - network Personalisation
"PU" - network subset Personalisation
"PP" - service Provider Personalization
"PC" - Corporate Personalization
<mode> - defines the operation to be done on the facility
0 - unlock facility
1 - lock facility
2 - query status
<passwd> - shall be the same as password specified for the facility from the
DTE user interface or with command Change Password +CPWD
<class> - sum of integers each representing a class of information (default is 7)
1 - voice (telephony)
2 - data (refers to all bearer services)
4 - fax (facsimile services)
8 - short message service
16 - data circuit sync
32 - data circuit async
64 - dedicated packet access
128 - dedicated PAD access
Note: when <mode>=2 and command successful, it returns:
+CLCK: <status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>,<class2>
[…]]
where
<status> - the current status of the facility
0 - not active
1 - active
<classn> - class of information of the facility
AT+CLCK=?
Test command reports all the facilities supported by the device.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
Example
Querying such a facility returns an output on three rows, the first for voice, the
second for data, the third for fax:
AT+CLCK =”AO”,2
+CLCK: <status>,1
+CLCK: <status>,2
+CLCK: <status>,4
Note
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
It will return ERROR if executed using SMSATRUN digest mode or TCPATRUN
server mode
Page 69 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.3.7.
Change Facility Password - +CPWD
+CPWD - Change Facility Password
SELINT 2
AT+CPWD=<fac>,
Execution command changes the password for the facility lock function defined
<oldpwd>, <newpwd> by command Facility Lock +CLCK.
Parameters:
<fac> - facility
“SC” - SIM (PIN request)
“AB” - All barring services
“P2” - SIM PIN2
“PS”- SIM VO
<oldpwd> - string type, it shall be the same as password specified for the
facility from the ME user interface or with command +CPWD.
<newpwd> - string type, it is the new password
Note: parameter <oldpwd> is the old password while <newpwd> is the new one.
AT+CPWD=?
Test command returns a list of pairs (<fac>,<pwdlength>) which presents the
available facilities and the maximum length of their password (<pwdlength>)
Example
at+cpwd=?
+CPWD: ("SC",8), ("AB",4), ("P2",8),("PS",8)
OK
Reference
5.1.4.3.8.
3GPP TS 27.007
Calling Line Identification Presentation - +CLIP
+CLIP - Calling Line Identification Presentation
AT+CLIP=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the presentation of the CLI (Calling Line
Identity) at the TE. This command refers to the GSM supplementary service
CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber
to get the CLI of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call.
Parameters:
<n>
0 - disables CLI indication (factory default)
1 - enables CLI indication
If enabled the device reports after each RING the response:
+CLIP: <number>,<type>,””,128,<alpha>,<CLI_validity>
where:
<number> - string type phone number of format specified by <type>
<type> - type of address octet in integer format
128 - both the type of number and the numbering plan are unknown
129 - unknown type of number and ISDN/Telephony numbering plan
145 - international type of number and ISDN/Telephony numbering plan
(contains the character "+")
<alpha> - string type; alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding
to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be the one selected
with command Select TE character set +CSCS.
<CLI_validity>
0 - CLI valid
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 70 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CLIP - Calling Line Identification Presentation
SELINT 2
1 - CLI has been withheld by the originator.
2 - CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitation or originating
network.
Note: in the +CLIP: response they are currently not reported either the
subaddress information (it’s always “” after the 2nd comma) and the
subaddress type information (it’s always 128 after the 3rd comma)
AT+CLIP?
Read command returns the presentation status of the CLI in the format:
+CLIP: <n>,<m>
where:
<n>
0 - CLI presentation disabled
1 - CLI presentation enabled
<m> - status of the CLIP service on the GSM network
0 - CLIP not provisioned
1 - CLIP provisioned
2 - unknown (e.g. no network is present )
Note: This command issues a status request to the network, hence it may take a
few seconds to give the answer due to the time needed to exchange data with it.
AT+CLIP=?
Test command reports the supported values of parameter <n>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
Note
The command changes only the report behaviour of the device, it does not
change CLI supplementary service setting on the network.
5.1.4.3.9.
Calling Line Identification Restriction - +CLIR
+CLIR - Calling Line Identification Restriction
AT+CLIR=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command overrides the CLIR subscription when temporary mode is
provisioned as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls. This
adjustment can be revoked by using the opposite command. This command
refers to CLIR-service (GSM 02.81) that allows a calling subscriber to enable or
disable the presentation of the CLI to the called party when originating a call.
Parameter:
<n> - facility status on the Mobile
0 - CLIR facility according to CLIR service network status
1 - CLIR facility active (CLI not sent)
2 - CLIR facility not active (CLI sent)
AT+CLIR?
Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls (<n>) and
also triggers an interrogation of the provision status of the CLIR service (<m>),
where
<n> - facility status on the Mobile
0 - CLIR facility according to CLIR service network status
1 - CLIR facility active (CLI not sent)
2 - CLIR facility not active (CLI sent)
<m> - facility status on the Network
0 - CLIR service not provisioned
1 - CLIR service provisioned permanently
2 - unknown (e.g. no network present, etc.)
3 - CLI temporary mode presentation restricted
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 71 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CLIR - Calling Line Identification Restriction
4 - CLI temporary mode presentation allowed
SELINT 2
AT+CLIR=?
Test command reports the supported values of parameter <n>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
Note
This command sets the default behaviour of the device in outgoing calls.
5.1.4.3.10. Connected line identification presentation - +COLP
+COLP - Connected Line Identification Presentation
AT+COLP=[<n>]
SELINT 2
This command refers to the supplementary service COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation) that enables a calling subscriber to get the
connected line identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile
originated call. The command enables or disables the presentation of the COL
at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service COLR
in the network.
Parameters:
<n>
0 - disables COL indication (factory default)
1 - enables COL indication
When enabled (and called subscriber allows),
+COLP: <number>,<type>
intermediate result code is returned from TA to TE before any +CR or
ITU-T Recommendation V.250 responses, where
<number> - string type phone number of format specified by <type>
<type> - type of address octet in integer format
129 - unknown type of number and ISDN/Telephony numbering plan
145 - international type of number and ISDN/Telephony numbering plan
(contains the character "+")
Note: if COL information is needed, it is recommended to set DIALMODE to 1
(see AT#DIALMODE command), in order to have network information available
for display before returning to command mode.
AT+COLP?
Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an interrogation of the
provision status of the COLP service according 3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>)
in the format:
+COLP: <n>,<m>
where:
<n>
0 - COL presentation disabled
1 - COL presentation enabled
<m> - status of the COLP service on the network
0 - COLP not provisioned
1 - COLP provisioned
2 - unknown (e.g. no network is present )
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 72 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+COLP - Connected Line Identification Presentation
SELINT 2
Note: This command issues a status request to the network, hence it may take a
few seconds to give the answer due to the time needed to exchange data with it.
AT+COLP=?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <n>
5.1.4.3.11. Connected line identification restriction status - +COLR
+COLR - Connected Line Identification Restriction status
AT+COLR
SELINT 2
This command refers to the supplementary service COLR (Connected Line
Identification Restriction) that enables a called subscriber to restrict the
possibility of presentation of connected line identity (COL) to the calling party
after receiving a mobile terminated call. The command displays the status of the
COL presentation in the network. It has no effect on the execution of the
supplementary service COLR in the network.
Execution command triggers an interrogation of the activation status of the
COLR service according 3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>):
+COLR: <m>
where:
<m>: integer type (parameter shows the subscriber COLR service status in
the network)
0 COLR not provisioned
1 COLR provisioned
2 unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
Activation, deactivation, registration and erasure of the supplementary service
COLR are not applicable.
AT+COLR=?
Test command tests for command existence
5.1.4.3.12. Call Forwarding Number And Conditions - +CCFC
+CCFC - Call Forwarding Number And Condition
AT+CCFC=
<reason>,
<cmd>[,<number>[,<t
ype>[,<class>
[,,,<time>]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command controls the call forwarding supplementary service.
Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported.
Parameters:
<reason>
0 - unconditional
1 - mobile busy
2 - no reply
3 - not reachable
4 - all calls (not with query command)
5 - all conditional calls (not with query command)
<cmd>
0 - disable
1 - enable
2 - query status
3 - registration
4 - erasure
<number> - string type phone number of forwarding address in format
specified by <type> parameter
<type> - type of address octet in integer format :
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 73 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CCFC - Call Forwarding Number And Condition
SELINT 2
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
<class> - sum of integers each representing a class of information which the
command refers to; default 7 (voice + data + fax)
1 - voice (telephony)
2 - data
4 - fax (facsimile services)
8 - short message service
16 - data circuit sync
32 - data circuit async
64 - dedicated packet access
128 - dedicated PAD access
<time> - time in seconds to wait before call is forwarded; it is valid only when
<reason> "no reply" is enabled (<cmd>=1) or queried (<cmd>=2)
1..30 - automatically rounded to a multiple of 5 seconds (default is 20)
Note: when <cmd>=2 and command successful, it returns:
+CCFC: <status>,<class1>[,<number>,<type>[,,,<time>]][<CR><LF>
+CCFC: <status>,<class2>[,<number>,<type>[,,,<time>]][ … ]]
where:
<status> - current status of the network service
0 - not active
1 - active
<classn> - same as <class>
<time> - it is returned only when <reason>=2 (“no reply”) and <cmd>=2.
The other parameters are as seen before.
AT+CCFC=?
Test command reports supported values for the parameter <reason>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
Note
When querying the status of a network service (<cmd>=2) the response line for
'not active' case (<status>=0) should be returned only if service is not active for
any <class>.
5.1.4.3.13. Call Waiting - +CCWA
SELINT 2
+CCWA - Call Waiting
AT+CCWA=
[<n>[,<cmd>
[,<class>]]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Set command allows the control of the call waiting supplementary service.
Activation, deactivation, and status query are supported.
Parameters:
<n> - enables/disables the presentation of an unsolicited result code:
0 - disable
1 - enable
<cmd> - enables/disables or queries the service at network level:
0 - disable
1 - enable
2 - query status
Page 74 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CCWA - Call Waiting
SELINT 2
<class> - is a sum of integers each representing a class of information which
the command refers to; default is 7 (voice + data + fax)
1 - voice (telephony)
2 - data
4 - fax (facsimile services)
8 - short message service
16 - data circuit sync
32 - data circuit async
64 - dedicated packet access
128 - dedicated PAD access
Note: the response to the query command is in the format:
+CCWA: <status>,<class1>[<CR><LF>
+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[ … ]]
where
<status> represents the status of the service:
0 - inactive
1 - active
<classn> - same as <class>
Note: the unsolicited result code enabled by parameter <n> is in the format::
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<cli_validity>]
where:
<number> - string type phone number of calling address in format specified by
<type>
<type> - type of address in integer format
<class> - see before
<alpha> - string type; alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding
to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be the one selected
with +CSCS.
<cli_validity>
0 - CLI valid
1 - CLI has been withheld by the originator
2 - CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitations of
originating network
Note: if parameter <cmd> is omitted then network is not interrogated.
Note: in the query command the class parameter must not be issued.
Note: the difference between call waiting report disabling (AT+CCWA = 0,1,7)
and call waiting service disabling (AT+CCWA = 0,0,7) is that in the first case
the call waiting indication is sent to the device by network but this last one does
not report it to the DTE; instead in the second case the call waiting indication is
not generated by the network. Hence the device results busy to the third party in
the 2nd case while in the 1st case a ringing indication is sent to the third party.
Note: The command AT+CCWA=1,0 has no effect a non sense and must not
be issued.
AT+CCWA?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command reports the current value of the parameter <n>.
Page 75 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CCWA - Call Waiting
SELINT 2
AT+CCWA=?
Test command reports the supported values for the parameter <n>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.14. Call Holding Services - +CHLD
+CHLD - Call Holding Services
AT+CHLD=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Execution command controls the network call hold service. With this service it is
possible to disconnect temporarily a call and keep it suspended while it is
retained by the network, contemporary it is possible to connect another party or
make a multiparty connection.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - releases all held calls, or sets the UDUB (User Determined User Busy)
indication for a waiting call. (only from version D)
1 - releases all active calls (if any exist), and accepts the other (held or
waiting) call
1X - releases a specific active call X
2 - places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or
waiting) call.
2X - places all active calls on hold except call X with which communication
shall be supported (only from version D).
3 - adds an held call to the conversation
4 - connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls
(Explicit Call Transfer (ECT))
Note: "X" is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence of
setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by the served
subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released. New calls take the
lowest available number.
Note: where both a held and a waiting call exist, the above procedures apply to
the waiting call (i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation.
AT+CHLD=?
Test command returns the list of supported <n>s.
+CHLD: (0,1,1X,2,2X,3,4)
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
Note
ONLY for VOICE calls
5.1.4.3.15. Call deflection - +CTFR
+CTFR – Call deflection
SELINT 2
AT+CTFR=<number>[, Set command is used to request a service that causes an incoming alerting call
<type>]
to be forwarded to a specified number. This is based on the supplementary
service CD (Call Deflection; refer 3GPP TS 22.072).
Parameters:
<number>: string type phone number of format specified by <type>
<type>: type of address octet in integer format; default 145 when dialing string
includes international access code character "+", otherwise 129
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 76 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CTFR – Call deflection
AT+CTFR=?
Note: Call Deflection is only applicable to an incoming voice call
SELINT 2
Test command tests for command existence
5.1.4.3.16. Unstructured Supplementary Service Data - +CUSD
+CUSD - Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
AT+CUSD=
[<n>[,<str>
[,<dcs>]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
(USSD 3GPP TS 22.090 ).
Parameters:
<n> - is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code.
0 - disable the result code presentation in the DTA
1 - enable the result code presentation in the DTA
2 - cancel an ongoing USSD session (not applicable to read command
response)
<str> - USSD-string (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not
interrogated)
- If <dcs> indicates that GSM338 default alphabet is used ME/TA converts
GSM alphabet into current TE character set (see +CSCS).
- If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit data coding scheme is used: ME/TA converts
each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number; e.g. octet
with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and
65).
<dcs> - 3GPP TS 23.038 Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format
(default is 0).
Note: the unsolicited result code enabled by parameter <n> is in the format:
+CUSD: <m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE
where:
<m>:
0 - no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further
information needed after mobile initiated operation).
1 - further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further
information needed after mobile initiated operation)
2 - USSD terminated by the network
3 - other local client has responded
4 - operation not supported
5 - network time out
AT+CUSD?
Read command reports the current value of the parameter <n>
AT+CUSD=?
Test command reports the supported values for the parameter <n>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.17. Advice Of Charge - +CAOC
+CAOC - Advice Of Charge
AT+CAOC=
<mode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command refers to the Advice of Charge supplementary services that
enable subscriber to get information about the cost of calls; the command also
includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited event reporting of the Current
Call Meter (CCM) information.
Page 77 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CAOC - Advice Of Charge
SELINT 2
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - query CCM value
1 - disables unsolicited CCM reporting
2 - enables unsolicited CCM reporting
Note: the unsolicited result code enabled by parameter <mode> is in the
format:
+CCCM: <ccm>
where:
<ccm> - current call meter in home units, string type: three bytes of the CCM
value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value
30)
Note: the unsolicited result code +CCCM is sent when the CCM value changes,
but not more than every 10 seconds.
AT+CAOC?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode> in the format:
+CAOC: <mode>
AT+CAOC=?
Test command reports the supported values for <mode> parameter.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
Note
+CAOC command returns an estimate of the cost of the current call only,
produced by the MS and based on the information provided by either AoCI or
AOCC supplementary services; it is not stored in the SIM.
5.1.4.3.18. List Current Calls - +CLCC
+CLCC - List Current Calls
AT+CLCC
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the list of current calls and their characteristics in
the format:
[+CLCC:<id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>,<number>,<type>
,<alpha>[<CR><LF>+CLCC:<id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,
<mpty>,<number>,<type>,<alpha>[…]]]
where:
<idn> - call identification number
<dir> - call direction
0 - mobile originated call
1 - mobile terminated call
<stat> - state of the call
0 - active
1 - held
2 - dialing (MO call)
3 - alerting (MO call)
4 - incoming (MT call)
5 - waiting (MT call)
<mode> - call type
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 78 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CLCC - List Current Calls
0 - voice
1 - data
9 - unknown
<mpty> - multiparty call flag
0 - call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1 - call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
SELINT 2
<number> - string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type> - type of phone number octet in integer format
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
<alpha> - string type; alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding
to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be the one selected
with +CSCS.
Note: If no call is active then only OK message is sent. This command is useful
in conjunction with command +CHLD to know the various call status for call
holding
AT+CLCC=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.19. SS Notification - +CSSN
+CSSN - SS Notification
AT+CSSN=[<n>
[,<m>]]
SELINT 2
It refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications.
Set command enables/disables the presentation of notification result codes from
TA to TE.
Parameters:
<n> - sets the +CSSI result code presentation status
0 - disable
1 - enable
<m> - sets the +CSSU result code presentation status
0 - disable
1 - enable
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile
originated call setup, an unsolicited code:
+CSSI: <code1>
is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result codes, where:
<code1>:
0 - unconditional call forwarding is active
1 - some of the conditional call forwardings are active
2 - call has been forwarded
3 - call is waiting
5 - outgoing calls are barred
6 - incoming calls are barred
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a
mobile terminated call setup or during a call, an unsolicited result code:
+CSSU: <code2>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 79 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSSN - SS Notification
is sent to TE, where:
<code2>:
0 - this is a forwarded call (MT call setup)
2 - call has been put on hold (during a voice call)
3 - call has been retrieved (during a voice call).
SELINT 2
AT+CSSN?
Read command reports the current value of the parameters.
AT+CSSN=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters <n>, <m>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.20. Closed User Group - +CCUG
+CCUG - Closed User Group Supplementary Service Control
AT+CCUG=
[<n>[,<index>
[,<info>]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows control of the Closed User Group supplementary service
[GSM 02.85].
Parameters:
<n>
0 - disable CUG temporary mode (factory default).
1 - enable CUG temporary mode: it enables to control the CUG information on
the air interface as a default adjustment for all following outgoing calls.
<index>
0..9 - CUG index
10 - no index (preferential CUG taken from subscriber data) (default)
<info>
0 - no information (default)
1 - suppress Outgoing Access (OA)
2 - suppress preferential CUG
3 - suppress OA and preferential CUG
AT+CCUG?
Read command reports the current value of the parameters
AT+CCUG=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.21. Preferred Operator List - +CPOL
+CPOL - Preferred Operator List
AT+CPOL=
[<index>][,<format>
[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,
<GSM_Compact_AcT>,
<UTRAN_AcT,<EUTRAN_Ac
T>]]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command writes an entry in the SIM list of preferred
operators.
Parameters:
<index> - integer type; the order number of operator in the SIM
preferred operator list
1..n
<format>
2 - numeric <oper>
<oper> - string type
<GSM_AcT> - GSM access technology
0 – access technology not selected
1 – access technology selected
<GSM_Compact_AcT> - GSM compact access technology
0 – access technology not selected
1 – access technology selected
<UTRAN_AcT> - UTRAN acess technology
Page 80 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CPOL - Preferred Operator List
0 – access technology not selected
1 – access technology selected
SELINT 2
<E-UTRAN_AcTn> - E-UTRAN access technology:
0 access technology not selected
1 access technology selected
Note: if <index> is given but <oper> is left out, entry is deleted. If
<oper> is given but <index> is left out, <oper> is put in the next free
location. If only <format> is given, the format of the <oper> in the read
command is changed.
AT+CPOL?
Read command returns all used entries from the SIM list of preferred
operators.
AT+CPOL=?
Test command returns the whole <index> range supported by the SIM
and the range for the parameter <format>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.3.22. Selection of preferred PLMN list - +CPLS
+CPLS – Selection of preferred PLMN list
AT+CPLS=<list>
SELINT 2
The execution command is used to select a list of preferred PLMNs in the
SIM/USIM.
Parameters:
<list>:
0 - User controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology
EFPLMNwAcT, if not found in the SIM/UICC then PLMN preferred
list EFPLMNsel (this file is only available in SIM card or GSM
application selected in UICC)
1 - Operator controlled PLMN selector with Access Technology
EFOPLMNwAcT
2 - HPLMN selector with Access Technology EFHPLMNwAcT
Note: the value set by command is directly stored in NVM and doesn’t
depend on the specific CMUX instance.
AT+CPLS?
Read command returns the selected PLMN selector <list> from the
SIM/USIM.
AT+CPLS=?
Test command returns the whole index range supported <list>s by the
SIM/USIM.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 81 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.
Mobile Equipment Control
5.1.4.4.1.
Phone Activity Status - +CPAS
+CPAS - Phone Activity Status
AT+CPAS
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the device status in the form:
+CPAS: <pas>
Where:
<pas> - phone activity status
0 - ready (device allows commands from TA/TE)
1 - unavailable (device does not allow commands from TA/TE)
2 - unknown (device is not guaranteed to respond to instructions)
3 - ringing (device is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the ringer is active)
4 - call in progress (device is ready for commands from TA/TE, but a call is in
progress)
AT+CPAS=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for <pas>.
Note: although +CPAS is an execution command, ETSI 07.07 requires the Test
command to be defined.
Example
ATD03282131321;
OK
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: 4
the called phone has answered to your call
OK
ATH
OK
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
3GPP TS 27.007
Page 82 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.2.
Set Phone functionality - +CFUN
+CFUN - Set Phone Functionality
AT+CFUN=
[<fun>[,<rst>]]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the level of functionality in the ME.
Parameters:
<fun> - is the power saving function mode
0 - minimum functionality, NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode: in this mode, the AT
interface is not accessible. Consequently, once you have set <fun> level 0,
do not send further characters. Otherwise these characters remain in the
input buffer and may delay the output of an unsolicited result code. The
first wake-up event, or rising RTS line, stops power saving and takes the
ME back to full functionality level <fun>=1.
1 - mobile full functionality with power saving disabled (factory default)
2 - disable TX and the ME stays attached to the network (it is not available on
LE910-NA products). <fun> level 2 cannot be set (an ERROR is returned)
if:
a) Access technology of the registered network is E-UTRAN (see
+COPS,+WS46).
b) The current <fun> level is set to 4.
c) The SIM is not READY (see +CPIN).
d) The protocol stack is transmitting.
<fun> level 2 is not stored into profile (see &P, &W).
4 - disable both TX and RX
5 - mobile full functionality with power saving enabled
7 - CYCLIC SLEEP mode: in this mode, the serial interface is periodically
enabled while CTS is active. If characters are recognized on the serial
interface, the ME stays active for 2 seconds after the last character was
sent or received. ME exits SLEEP mode only, if AT+CFUN=1 is entered
9 - just as 0 but with different wake-up events (see SW User Guide)
12 – Fast detach
<rst> - reset flag
0 - do not reset the ME before setting it to <fun> functionality level
1 - reset the device. The device is fully functional after the reset. This value is
available only for <fun> = 1
Note: issuing AT+CFUN=4[,0] causes the module to perform a network
deregistration but the SIM is still available.
Note: if power saving enabled, it reduces the power consumption during the
idle time, thus allowing a longer standby time with a given battery capacity.
Note: to place the module in power saving mode, set the <fun> parameter at
value = 5 and the line DTR (RS232) must be set to OFF. Once in power
saving, the CTS line switch to the OFF status to signal that the module is
really in power saving condition.
During the power saving condition, before sending any AT command on the
serial line, the DTR must be set to ON (0V) to exit from power saving and it
must be waited for the CTS (RS232) line to go in ON status.
Until the DTR line is ON, the module will not return back in the power saving
condition
Note: the power saving function does not affect the network behaviour of the
module, even during the power save condition the module remains
registered on the network and reachable for incoming calls or SMS. If a call
incomes during the power save, then the module will wake up and proceed
normally with the unsolicited incoming call code
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 83 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CFUN - Set Phone Functionality
SELINT 2
Note: when the module detects USB port is connected, then the power saving
mode is not allowed
Note: in CYCLIC SLEEP mode (AT+CFUN=7) CTS line toggles slowly, the
toggle delay is about 2 seconds
Note: in CYCLIC SLEEP mode (AT+CFUN=7) during incoming voice call the
CTS line continues to toggle
Note: If the current <fun> level is 2 the next accepted <fun> shall be equal to
the <fun> level set before 2, e.g.:
AT+CFUN=1->AT+CFUN=2->AT+CFUN=1 OK
AT+CFUN=1->AT+CFUN=2->AT+CFUN=5 ERROR
Note: if AT#ENS=1 then AT+CFUN=0 has the same functionality of
AT+CFUN=4
AT+CFUN?
Read command reports the current setting of <fun>.
AT+CFUN=?
Test command returns the list of supported values for <fun> and <rst>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.3.
Enter PIN - +CPIN
+CPIN - Enter PIN
AT+CPIN=<pin>
[,<newpin>]
SELINT 2
Set command sends to the device a password which is necessary before it can
be operated (SIM PIN, SIM PUK, PH-SIM PIN, etc.).
If the PIN required is SIM PUK or SIM PUK2, the <newpin> is required. This
second pin, <newpin> will replace the old pin in the SIM.
The command may be used to change the SIM PIN by sending it with both
parameters <pin> and <newpin>
Parameters:
<pin> - string type value
<newpin> - string type value.
To check the status of the PIN request use the command AT+CPIN?
Note: if MBIM is enabled and SIM PIN is required, the SIM must be unlocked
from the MBIM interface.
AT+CPIN?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command reports the PIN/PUK/PUK2 request status of the device in the
form:
+CPIN: <code>
where:
<code> - PIN/PUK/PUK2 request status code
READY - ME is not pending for any password
SIM PIN - ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given
SIM PUK - ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given
PH-SIM PIN - ME is waiting phone-to-SIM card password to be given
PH-FSIM PIN - ME is waiting phone-to-very first SIM card password to be
given
PH-FSIM PUK - ME is waiting phone-to-very first SIM card unblocking
password to be given
SIM PIN2 - ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given; this <code> is returned only
when the last executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17)
SIM PUK2 - ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given; this <code> is returned
only when the last executed command resulted in PUK2
authentication failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 18)
PH-NET PIN - ME is waiting network personalization password to be given
Page 84 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CPIN - Enter PIN
SELINT 2
PH-NET PUK - ME is waiting network personalization unblocking password to
be given
PH-NETSUB PIN - ME is waiting network subset personalization password to
be given
PH-NETSUB PUK - ME is waiting network subset personalization unblocking
password to be given
PH-SP PIN - ME is waiting service provider personalization password to be
given
PH-SP PUK - ME is waiting service provider personalization unblocking
password to be given
PH-CORP PIN - ME is waiting corporate personalization password to be given
PH-CORP PUK - ME is waiting corporate personalization unblocking password
to be given
Note: Pin pending status at startup depends on PIN facility setting, to change or
query the default power up setting use the command
AT+CLCK=SC,<mode>,<pin>
AT+CPIN=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT+CMEE=1
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CME ERROR: 10
error: you have to insert the SIM
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: READY you inserted the SIM and device is not waiting for PIN to be given
OK
Reference
5.1.4.4.4.
3GPP TS 27.007
Signal Quality - +CSQ
+CSQ - Signal Quality
AT+CSQ
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command reports received signal quality indicators in the form:
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
where
<rssi> - received signal strength indication
0 - (-113) dBm or less
1 - (-111) dBm
2..30 - (-109)dBm..(-53)dBm / 2 dBm per step
31 - (-51)dBm or greater
99 - not known or not detectable
<ber> - bit error rate (in percent)
0 - less than 0.2%
1 - 0.2% to 0.4%
2 - 0.4% to 0.8%
3 - 0.8% to 1.6%
4 - 1.6% to 3.2%
5 - 3.2% to 6.4%
6 - 6.4% to 12.8%
7 - more than 12.8%
99 - not known or not detectable
Page 85 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSQ - Signal Quality
SELINT 2
Note: in GSM, the received signal strength indication is the average of the
received signal level measurement samples in dBm, taken on a channel within
the reporting period of length one SACCH multi frame, and is mapped as above.
For UMTS, the current radio signal strength indicates CPICH RSCP in levels.
According to the specification 3GPP TS25.133, the level range is from 0 to 91,
with
0 less than (-115) dBm
1 (-115) dBm...(-114) dBm
.
.
.
91 (-25) dBm or greater
99 - not known or not detectable
Values between -115dbm and -120dbm will all be represented by level 0
To be compliant with 3GPP TS27.007 specification, the above 0...91 levels are
mapped to range 0...31:
3GPP TS25.133 Level
3 or less
4...65
66...91
99
Scaled (displayed) RSSI
0
Level /2 - 1
31
99
If module is registered in 4G the execution command reports received signal
quality indicators in the form:
+CSQ: <RSSI>,<RSRQ>
Where:
<RSSI> - Received Signal Strength Indication
<RSRQ> - Reference Signal Received Quality
For <RSSI> To be compliant with 3GPP TS27.007 specification, levels are
mapped to range 0...31:
:
0
-113 dBm or less
1
-111 dBm
2...30 -109... -53 dBm
31
-51 dBm or greater
99
not known or not detectable
For <RSRQ> levels are mapped to range 0..7:
4G (LTE)-RSRQ[in dBm]
0:(-4) to (-3)
1:(-6) to (-5)
2:(-8) to (-7)
3:(-10) to (-9)
4:(-13) to (-11)
5:(-15) to (-14)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 86 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSQ - Signal Quality
SELINT 2
6:(-17) to (-16)
7:(-19) to (-18)
99 - not known or not detectable
AT+CSQ=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of the parameters <rssi>
and <ber>.
Note: although +CSQ is an execution command without parameters, ETSI 07.07
requires the Test command to be defined.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.5.
Extended Signal Quality - +CESQ
+CESQ – Extended Signal Quality
AT+CESQ
SELINT 2
Execution command reports received signal quality parameters in the form:
+CESQ: <rxlev>,<ber>,<rscp>,<ecno>,<rsrq>,<rsrp>
Where
< rxlev > - received received signal strength level (see 3GPP TS 45.008
subclause 8.1.4).
0 - rssi < -110 dBm
1 - -110 dBm ≤ rssi < -109 dBm
2 - -109 dBm ≤ rssi < -108 dBm
...
61 - -50 dBm ≤ rssi < -49 dBm
62 - -49 dBm ≤ rssi < -48 dBm
63 - -48 dBm ≤ rssi
99 - not known or not detectable or if the current serving cell is not a GERAN
cell
<ber> - bit error rate (in percent)
0...7 - as RXQUAL values in the table in 3GPP TS 45.008 subclause 8.2.4
99 - not known or not detectable or if the current serving cell is not a GERAN
cell.
<rscp> - received signal code power (see 3GPP TS 25.133 subclause 9.1.1.3
and 3GPP TS 25.123 subclause 9.1.1.1.3).
0 - rscp < -120 dBm
1 - -120 dBm ≤ rscp < -119 dBm
2 - -119 dBm ≤ rscp < -118 dBm
...
94 - -27 dBm ≤ rscp < -26 dBm
95 - -26 dBm ≤ rscp < -25 dBm
96 - 25 dBm ≤ rscp
255 - not known or not detectable or if the current serving cell is not a UTRA
cell
<ecno> - ratio of the received energy per PN chip to the total received power
spectral density (see 3GPP TS 25.133 subclause).
0 - Ec/Io < -24 dB
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 87 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CESQ – Extended Signal Quality
SELINT 2
1 - -24 dB ≤ Ec/Io < -23.5 dB
2 - -23.5 dB ≤ Ec/Io < -23 dB
...
47 - -1 dB ≤ Ec/Io < -0.5 dB
48 - -0.5 dB ≤ Ec/Io < 0 dB
49 – 0 dB ≤ Ec/Io
255 - not known or not detectable detectable or if the current serving cell is not
a UTRA cell
<rsrq> - reference signal received quality (see 3GPP TS 36.133 subclause
9.1.7).
0 - rsrq < -19.5 dB
1 - -19.5 dB ≤ rsrq < -19 dB
2-19 dB ≤ rsrq < -18.5 dB
...
32 - -4 dB ≤ rsrq < -3.5 dB
33 - -3.5 dB ≤ rsrq < -3 dB
34 - -3 dB ≤ rsrq
255 - not known or not detectable detectable or if the current serving cell is not
a EUTRA cell
<rsrp> - reference signal received power (see 3GPP TS 36.133 subclause
9.1.4).
0 - rsrp < -140 dBm
1 - -140 dBm ≤ rsrp < -139 dBm
2 - -139 dBm ≤ rsrp < -138 dBm
...
95 - -46 dBm ≤ rsrp < -45 dBm
96 - -45 dBm ≤ rsrp < -44 dBm
97 - -44 dBm ≤ rsrp
255 not known or not detectable detectable or if the current serving
cell is not a EUTRA cell
AT+CESQ=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of the parameters <rxlev>,
<ber>, <rscp>, <ecno>, <rsrq>, <rsrp>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.6.
Indicator Control - +CIND
+CIND - Indicator Control
AT+CIND=
[<state>
[,<state>[,…]]]
SELINT 2
Set command is used to control the registration state of ME indicators, in order
to automatically send the +CIEV URC, whenever the value of the associated
indicator changes. The supported indicators (<descr>) and their order appear
from test command AT+CIND=?
Parameter:
<state> - registration state
0 - the indicator is deregistered; there’s no unsolicited result code (+CIEV
URC) automatically sent by the ME to the application, whenever the value
of the associated indicator changes; the value can be directly queried with
+CIND?
1 - the indicator is registered: an unsolicited result code (+CIEV URC) is
automatically sent by the ME to the application, whenever the value of the
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 88 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CIND - Indicator Control
SELINT 2
associated indicator changes; it is still possible to query the value through
+CIND? (default)
Note: When the ME is switched on all of the indicators are in registered mode.
AT+CIND?
Read command returns the current value of ME indicators, in the format:
+CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,…]]
Note: the order of the values <ind>s is the same as that in which the associated
indicators appear from test command AT+CIND=?
AT+CIND=?
Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a description (max.
16 chars) of the indicator and compound value is the supported values for the
indicator, in the format:
+CIND: ((<descr>, (list of supported <ind>s))[,(<descr>, (list of supported
<ind>s))[,…]])
where:
<descr> - indicator names as follows (along with their <ind> ranges)
“battchg” - battery charge level
<ind> - battery charge level indicator range
0..5
99 - not measurable
“signal” - signal quality
<ind> - signal quality indicator range
0..7
99 - not measurable
“service” - service availability
<ind> - service availability indicator range
0 - not registered to any network
1 - registered
“sounder” - sounder activity
<ind> - sounder activity indicator range
0 - there’s no any sound activity
1 - there’s some sound activity
“message” - message received
<ind> - message received indicator range
0 - there is no unread short message at memory location “SM”
1 - unread short message at memory location “SM”
“call” - call in progress
<ind> - call in progress indicator range
0 - there’s no calls in progress
1 - at least a call has been established
“roam” - roaming
<ind> - roaming indicator range
0 - registered to home network or not registered
1 - registered to other network
“smsfull” - a short message memory storage in the MT has become full (1), or
memory locations are available (0)
<ind> - short message memory storage indicator range
0 - memory locations are available
1 - a short message memory storage in the MT has become full.
“rssi” - received signal (field) strength
<ind> - received signal strength level indicator range
0 - signal strength ≤ (-112) dBm
1..4 - signal strength in (-97) dBm..(-66) dBm (15 dBm steps)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 89 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CIND - Indicator Control
Example
5 - signal strength ≥ (-51) dBm
99 - not measurable
SELINT 2
Next command causes all the indicators to be registered
AT+CIND=1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1
Next command causes all the indicators to be de-registered
AT+CIND=0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
Next command to query the current value of all indicators
AT+CIND?
CIND: 4,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,2
OK
Note
See command +CMER
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.7.
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting - +CMER
+CMER - Mobile Equipment Event Reporting
AT+CMER=
[<mode>
[,<keyp>
[,<disp>
[,<ind>
[,<bfr>]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables sending of unsolicited result codes from TA to
TE in the case of indicator state changes (n.b.: sending of URCs in the case of
key pressings or display changes are currently not implemented).
Parameters:
<mode> - controls the processing of unsolicited result codes
0 - buffer +CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes.
1 - discard +CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g.
on-line data mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
2 - buffer +CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes in the TA when TA-TE link is
reserved (e.g. on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE after
reservation; otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
3 - forward +CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes directly to the TE; when TA is in
on-line data mode each +CIEV URC is stored in a buffer; once the ME
goes into command mode (after +++ was entered), all URCs stored in the
buffer will be output.
<keyp> - keypad event reporting
0 - no keypad event reporting
<disp> - display event reporting
0 - no display event reporting
<ind> - indicator event reporting
0 - no indicator event reporting
2 - indicator event reporting
<bfr> - TA buffer clearing
0 - TA buffer of unsolicited result codes is cleared when <mode> 1..3 is
entered
1 - TA buffer of unsolicited result codes is flushed to the TE when <mode>
1...3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes)
Note: After AT+CMER has been switched on with e.g. AT+CMER=2,0,0,2
command (i.e. <bfr> is 0), URCs for all registered indicators will be issued
only first time, if previous <mode> was 0, for backward compatibility.
Values shown by the indicators will be current indicators values, not
buffered ones. Subsequent AT+CMER commands with <mode> different
from 0 and <bfr> equal to 0 will not flush the codes, even if <mode> was
set again to 0 before. To flush the codes, <bfr> must be set to 1.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 90 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMER - Mobile Equipment Event Reporting
SELINT 2
Although it is possible to issue the command when SIM PIN is pending, it will
answer ERROR if “message” or “smsfull” indicators are enabled in AT+CIND,
because with pending PIN it is not possible to give a correct indication about
SMS status. To issue the command when SIM PIN is pending you have to
disable “message” and “smsfull” indicators in AT+CIND first.
AT+CMER?
Read command returns the current setting of parameters, in the format:
+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
AT+CMER=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameters <mode>,
<keyp>, <disp>, <ind>, <bfr>, in the format:
+CMER: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <keyp>s),
(list of supported <disp>s),(list of supported <ind>s),(list of supported
<bfr>s)
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.8.
Select Phonebook Memory Storage - +CPBS
+CPBS - Select Phonebook Memory Storage
AT+CPBS=
<storage>[,<password>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects phonebook memory storage <storage>, which
will be used by other phonebook commands.
Parameter:
<storage>
"SM" - SIM phonebook
"FD" - SIM fixed dialing-phonebook (FDN)(only phase 2/2+ SIM)
"LD" - SIM last-dialing-phonebook (+CPBF is not applicable for this
storage)
"MC" - device missed (unanswered received) calls list (+CPBF is not
applicable for this storage)
"RC" - ME received calls list (+CPBF is not applicable for this
storage).
“MB” - mailbox numbers stored on SIM; it is possible to select this
storage only if the mailbox service is provided by the SIM (see #MBN).
"DC" - ME last-dialing-phonebook (+CPBF is not applicable for this
storage).
"ME" - ME phonebook
"EN" – SIM emergency numbers phonebook (+CPBW and +CPBF
not applicable for this storage).
"ON" - SIM own numbers (MSISDNs) phonebook (+CPBF is not
applicable for this storage).
"SD" - SIM Service Dialling Numbers (SDN) phonebook (+CPBW is
not applicable for this storage).
<password>: string type value representing the PIN2-code required
when selecting PIN2-code locked <storage> above "FD
Note: If “SM” is the currently selected phonebook, selecting”FD”
phonebook with “AT+CPBS=”FD”” command simply selects the FDN
as the phonebook upon which all subsequent +CPBW, +CPBF and
+CPBR commands act; the command does not deactivate “SM”
phonebook, and does not activate FDN
Note: if <password> parameter is given, PIN2 will be verified, even if it
is not required, i.e. it has already been inserted and verified during
current session
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 91 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Read command returns the actual values of the parameter <storage>,
the number of occupied records <used> and the maximum index
number <total>, in the format:
AT+CPBS?
+CPBS: <storage>,<used>,<total>
Note: For <storage>=”MC”: if there are more than one missed calls
from the same number the read command will return only the last call
AT+CPBS=?
5.1.4.4.9.
Test command returns the supported range of values for the
parameters <storage>.
Read Phonebook Entries - +CPBR
+CPBR - Read Phonebook Entries
AT+CPBR=
<index1>
[,<index2>]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns phonebook entries in location number range
<index1>..<index2> from the current phonebook memory storage selected with
+CPBS. If <index2> is omitted, only location <index1> is returned.
Parameters:
<index1> - integer type, value in the range of location numbers of the currently
selected phonebook memory storage (see +CPBS).
<index2> - integer type, value in the range of location numbers of the currently
selected phonebook memory storage (see +CPBS).
The response format is:
[+CPBR:
<index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<hidden>][,<group>][,<adnumber>][,<adty
pe>][,<secondtext>][,<email>]] [<CR><LF>
+CPBR:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<hidden>][,<group>][,<adnumber>][,<adty
pe>][,<secondtext>][,<email>]] […]]]
where:
<indexn> - the location number of the phonebook entry
<number> - string type phone number of format <type>
<type> - type of phone number octet in integer format
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
<text> - the alphanumeric text associated to the number; used character set
should be the one selected with command +CSCS.
<group>: string type field of maximum length <glength> indicating a group the
entry may belong to; character set as specified by command Select TE
Character Set +CSCS
<adnumber>: additional number ; string type phone number of format <adtype>
<adtype>: type of address octet in integer format
<secondtext>: string type field of maximum length <slength> indicating a second
text field associated with the number; character set as specified by command
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<email>: string type field of maximum length <elength> indicating an email
address; character set as specified by command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS
<hidden>: indicates if the entry is hidden or not
0:
phonebook entry not hidden
1:
phonebook entry hidden
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 92 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CPBR - Read Phonebook Entries
SELINT 2
Note: if “MC” is the currently selected phonebook memory storage, a sequence
of missed calls coming from the same number will be saved as one missed call
and +CPBR will show just one line of information.
Note: If all queried locations are empty (but available), no information text lines
will be returned, while if listing fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is
returned.
AT+CPBR=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters <indexn>
and the maximum lengths of <number> , <text>, <group>, <secondtext> and
<email> fields fields, in the format:
+CPBR: (<minIndex> <maxIndex>),<nlength>,<tlength>,<glength>,<slength>,<elength>
where:
<minIndex> - the minimum <index> number, integer type
<maxIndex>- the maximum <index> number, integer type
<nlength> - maximum <number> field length, integer type
<tlength> - maximum <name> field length, integer type
<glength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <group>
<slength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field
<secondtext>
<elength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <email>
Note: the value of <nlength> could vary, depending on the availability of
Extension service, in the following situations:
1. if “SM” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM
supports the Extension1 service
2. if “FD” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM
supports the Extension2 service
if “MB” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM supports
the Extension6 service
Note
Remember to select the PB storage with +CPBS command before issuing PB
commands.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.10. Find Phonebook Entries - +CPBF
+CPBF - Find Phonebook Entries
AT+CPBF=
<findtext>
SELINT 2
Execution command returns phonebook entries (from the current phonebook
memory storage selected with +CPBS) which alphanumeric field start with string
<findtext>.
Parameter:
<findtext> - string type; used character set should be the one selected with
command +CSCS.
The command returns a report in the form:
[+CPBF:
<index1>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<hidden>][,<group>][,<adnumber>][,<adty
pe>][,<secondtext>][,<email>]<CR><LF>
+CPBF:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,<text>[,<hidden>][,<group>][,<adnumber>][,<adty
pe>][,<secondtext>][,<email>][…]]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 93 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CPBF - Find Phonebook Entries
SELINT 2
where:
<indexn> - the location number of the phonebook entry
<number> - string type phone number of format <type>
<type> - type of phone number octet in integer format
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
<text> - the alphanumeric text associated to the number; used character set
should be the one selected with command +CSCS.
<group>: string type field of maximum length <glength> indicating a group the
entry may belong to; character set as specified by command Select TE
Character Set +CSCS
<adnumber>: additional number ; string type phone number of format <adtype>
<adtype>: type of address octet in integer format
<secondtext>: string type field of maximum length <slength> indicating a second
text field associated with the number; character set as specified by command
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<email>: string type field of maximum length <elength> indicating an email
address; character set as specified by command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS
<hidden>: indicates if the entry is hidden or not
0:
phonebook entry not hidden
1:
phonebook entry hidden
Note: +CPBF is not applicable if the current selected storage (see +CPBS) is
either “MC”, either “RC” or “LD”.
Note: if <findtext>=”” the command returns all the phonebook records.
Note: if no PB records satisfy the search criteria then an ERROR message is
reported..
AT+CPBF=?
Test command reports the maximum lengths of <number> and <text> fields, in
the format:
+CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>,<glength>,<slength>,<elength>
where:
<nlength> - maximum length of field <number>, integer type
<tlength> - maximum length of field <text>, integer type
<glength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <group>
<slength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field
<secondtext>
<elength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <email>
Note: the value of <nlength> could vary, depending on the availability of
Extension service, in the following situations:
1. if “SM” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM
supports the Extension1 service
2. if “FD” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM
supports the Extension2 service
if “MB” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM supports
the Extension6 service
Note
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Remember to select the PB storage with +CPBF command before issuing PB
commands.
Page 94 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CPBF - Find Phonebook Entries
Reference
SELINT 2
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.11. Write Phonebook Entry - +CPBW
+CPBW - Write Phonebook Entry
AT+CPBW=
[<index>]
[,<number> [,<type>
[,<text>[,<group>[,<a
dnumber>[,<adtype>[
,<secondtext>[,<emai
l>[,<hidden>]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command writes phonebook entry in location number <index> in the
current phonebook memory storage selected with +CPBS.
Parameters:
<index> - integer type, value in the range of location numbers of the currently
selected phonebook memory storage (see +CPBS).
<number> - string type, phone number in the format <type>
<type> - the type of number
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
<text> - the text associated to the number, string type; used character set
should be the one selected with command +CSCS.
<group>: string type field of maximum length <glength> indicating a group the
entry may belong to; character set as specified by command Select TE
Character Set +CSCS
<adnumber>: additional number ; string type phone number of format <adtype>
<adtype>: type of address octet in integer format
<secondtext>: string type field of maximum length <slength> indicating a second
text field associated with the number; character set as specified by command
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<email>: string type field of maximum length <elength> indicating an email
address; character set as specified by command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS
<hidden>: indicates if the entry is hidden or not
0:
phonebook entry not hidden
1:
phonebook entry hidden
Note: If record number <index> already exists, it will be overwritten.
Note: if either <number>, <type> and <text> are omitted, the phonebook entry
in location <index> is deleted.
Note: if <index> is omitted or <index>=0, the number <number> is stored in
the first free phonebook location.
(example at+cpbw=0,"+390404192701",129,"Text" and
at+cpbw=,"+390404192701",129,"Text")
Note: if either “LD”, “MC” or “RC” memory storage has been selected (see
+CPBS) it is possible just to delete the phonebook entry in location <index>,
therefore parameters <number>, <type> and <text> must be omitted.
Note: before defining <group> string, it is recommended to check, with #CPBGR
command, the predefined group names, that could be already stored in USIM in
Grouping information Alpha String (GAS) file. If all records in such file are
already occupied, +CPBW command will return ERROR when trying to use a
new group name that is not in the predefined GAS names. To define a new
custom group string, it is necessary to overwrite with it one of the old predefined
strings, using #CPBGW command.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 95 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CPBW - Write Phonebook Entry
AT+CPBW=?
SELINT 2
Test command returns location range supported by the current storage as a
compound value, the maximum length of <number> field, supported number
format of the storage and maximum length of <text> field. The format is:
+CPBW: (list of supported <index>s),<nlength>,
(list of supported <type>s),<tlength>>,<glength>,<slength>,<elength>
where:
<nlength> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of field
<number>.
<tlength> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
<glength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <group>
<slength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field
<secondtext>
<elength>: integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <email>
Note: the value of <nlength> could vary, depending on the availability of
Extension service, in the following situations:
1. if “SM” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM
supports the Extension1 service
2. if “FD” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM
supports the Extension2 service
if “MB” memory storage has been selected (see +CPBS) and the SIM supports
the Extension6 service
Note
Remember to select the PB storage with +CPBW command before issuing PB
commands.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.12. Clock Management - +CCLK
+CCLK - Clock Management
AT+CCLK=<time>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the real-time clock of the ME.
Parameter:
<time> - current time as quoted string in the format: "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz"
yy - year (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..99
MM - month (two last digits are mandatory), range is 01..12
dd - day (two last digits are mandatory);
The range for dd(day) depends either on the month and on the year it
refers to. Available ranges are:
(01..28)
(01..29)
(01..30)
(01..31)
Trying to enter an out of range value will raise an error
hh - hour (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..23
mm - minute (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..59
ss - seconds (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..59
±zz - time zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarter of an hour,
between the local time and GMT; two last digits are mandatory), range is 96..+96.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 96 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CCLK - Clock Management
AT+CCLK?
SELINT 2
Read command returns the current setting of the real-time clock, in the format
<time>.
Note: the three last characters of <time>, i.e. the time zone information, are
returned by +CCLK? only if the #NITZ URC ‘extended’ format has been enabled
(see #NITZ).
AT+CCLK=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT+CCLK="02/09/07,22:30:00+00"
OK
AT+CCLK?
+CCLK: “02/09/07,22:30:25”
OK
5.1.4.4.13. Alarm Management - +CALA
+CALA - Alarm Management
AT+CALA=
<time>[,<n>[,<type>
[,<text>[,<recurr>
[,<silent>]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command stores in the internal Real Time Clock an alarm time with
respective settings. It is possible to set up a recurrent alarm for one or more
days in the week.
Currently just one alarm can be set.
When the RTC time reaches the alarm time then the alarm starts, the
behaviour of the MODULE depends upon the setting <type> and if the device
was already ON at the moment when the alarm time had come.
Parameters:
<time> - current alarm time as quoted string
“” - (empty string) deletes the current alarm and resets all the +CALA
parameters to the “factory default” configuration
"hh:mm:ss±zz" - format to be used only when issuing +CALA with parameter
<recurr> too.
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz" - generic format: it’s the same as defined for
+CCLK (see)
<n> - index of the alarm
0 - The only value supported is 0.
<type> - alarm behaviour type
0 - reserved for other equipment use.
1 - the MODULE simply wakes up fully operative as if the ON/OFF button
had been pressed. If the device is already ON at the alarm time, then it does
nothing (default).
2 - the MODULE wakes up in "alarm mode" if at the alarm time it was off,
otherwise it remains fully operative. In both cases the MODULE issues an
unsolicited code every 3s:
+CALA: <text>
where <text> is the +CALA optional parameter previously set.
The device keeps on sending the unsolicited code every 3s until a #WAKE or
#SHDN command is received or a 90 seconds timer expires. If the device is in
"alarm mode" and it does not receive the #WAKE command within 90s then it
shuts down.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 97 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CALA - Alarm Management
SELINT 2
3 - the MODULE wakes up in "alarm mode" if at the alarm time it was off,
otherwise it remains fully operative. In both cases the MODULE starts playing
the alarm tone on the selected path for the ringer (see command #SRP)
The device keeps on playing the alarm tone until a #WAKE or #SHDN
command is received or a 90 s time-out occurs. If the device is in "alarm
mode" and it does not receive the #WAKE command within 90s then it shuts
down.
4 - the MODULE wakes up in "alarm mode" if at the alarm time it was off,
otherwise it remains fully operative. In both cases the MODULE brings the pin
GPIO6 high, provided its <direction> has been set to alarm output, and keeps
it in this state until a #WAKE or #SHDN command is received or a 90 seconds
timer expires. If the device is in "alarm mode" and it does not receive the
#WAKE command within 90s then it shuts down.
5 - the MODULE will make both the actions as for type=2 and <type>=3.
6 - the MODULE will make both the actions as for type=2 and <type>=4.
7 - the MODULE will make both the actions as for type=3 and <type>=4.
8 - the MODULE wakes up in "alarm mode" if at the alarm time it was off,
otherwise it remains fully operative. In both cases the MODULE sets High the
RI output pin. The RI output pin remains High until next #WAKE issue or until
a 90s timer expires. If the device is in "alarm mode" and it does not receive the
#WAKE command within 90s. After that it shuts down.
<text> - unsolicited alarm code text string. It has meaning only if <type> is
equal to 2 or 5 or 6.
<recurr> - string type value indicating day of week for the alarm in one of the
following formats:
“<1..7>[,<1..7>[, … ]]” - it sets a recurrent alarm for one or more days in the
week; the digits 1 to 7 corresponds to the days in the week (Monday is 1).
“0” - it sets a recurrent alarm for all days in the week.
<silent> - integer type indicating if the alarm is silent or not.
0 - the alarm will not be silent;
1 - the alarm will be silent.
During the "alarm mode" the device will not make any network scan and will
not register to any network and therefore is not able to dial or receive any call
or SMS, the only commands that can be issued to the MODULE in this state
are the #WAKE and #SHDN, every other command must not be issued during
this state.
AT+CALA?
Read command returns the list of current active alarm settings in the ME, in
the format:
[+CALA: <time>,<n>,<type>,[<text>],<recurr>,<silent>]
AT+CALA=?
Test command returns the list of supported index values (currently just 0),
alarm types, maximum length of the text to be displayed, maximum length of
<recurr> and supported <silent>s, in the format:
+CALA: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <type>s),<tlength>,
<rlength>,(list of supported <silent>s)
Example
AT+CALA="02/09/07,23:30:00+00"
OK
5.1.4.4.14. Delete Alarm - +CALD
+CALD - Delete Alarm
AT+CALD=<n>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command deletes an alarm in the ME
Page 98 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CALD - Delete Alarm
AT+CALD=?
Parameter:
<n> - alarm index
0
SELINT 2
Test command returns the OK result code. Test command reports the
range of supported values for <n> parameter.
5.1.4.4.15. Postpone alarm - +CAPD
+CAPD – postpone or dismiss an alarm
AT+CAPD=[<sec>]
SELINT 2
Set command postpones or dismisses a currently active alarm.
Parameters:
<sec>: integer type value indicating the number of seconds to postpone
the alarm (maximum 60 seconds). If <sec> is set to 0 (default), the alarm is
dismissed.
AT+CAPD=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <sec>
5.1.4.4.16. Setting date format - +CSDF
+CSDF – setting date format
AT+CSDF=[<mode>
[,<auxmode>]]
SELINT 2
This command sets the date format of the date information presented to
the user, which is specified by use of the <mode> parameter. The
<mode> affects the date format on the phone display and doesn't affect
the date format of
the AT command serial interface, so it not used.
The command also sets the date format of the TE-TA interface, which is
specified by use of the <auxmode> parameter (i.e., the <auxmode>
affects the <time> of AT+CCLK and AT+CALA). If the parameters are
omitted then this sets the default value of <mode>.
Parameters:
<mode>:
1 DD-MMM-YYYY (default)
2 DD-MM-YY
3 MM/DD/YY
4 DD/MM/YY
5 DD.MM.YY
6 YYMMDD
7 YY-MM-DD
<auxmode>:
1 yy/MM/dd (default)
2 yyyy/MM/dd
Note: The <time> format of +CCLK and +CALA is
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss+zz" when <auxmode>=1 and it is
"yyyy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss+zz" when <auxmode>=2.
AT+CSDF?
Read command reports the currently selected <mode> and <auxmode> in
the format:
+CSDF: <mode>,<auxmode>
AT+CSDF=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<mode> and <auxmode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 99 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.17. Setting time format - +CSTF
+CSTF – setting time format
AT+CSTF=[<mode>]
SELINT 2
This command sets the time format of the time information presented to the
user, which is specified by use of the <mode> parameter. The <mode>
affects the time format on the phone display and doesn't affect the time
format of
the AT command serial interface, so it not actually not used.
Parameters:
<mode>:
1 HH:MM (24 hour clock; default)
2 HH:MM a.m./p.m.
AT+CSTF?
Read command reports the currently selected <mode> in the format:
+CSTF: <mode>
AT+CSTF=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <mode>
5.1.4.4.18. Time Zone reporting - +CTZR
+CTZR – Time Zone reporting
AT+CTZR=<onoff>
SELINT 2
This command enables and disables the time zone change event reporting.
If the reporting is enabled the MT returns
the unsolicited result code +CTZV: <tz> whenever the time zone is changed.
Parameters:
<onoff>:
0 Disable time zone change event reporting (default)
1 Enable time zone change event reporting
AT+CTZR?
Read command reports the currently selected <onoff> in the format:
+CTZR: <onoff>
AT+CTZR=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <onoff>
5.1.4.4.19. Automatic Time Zone update - +CTZU
+CTZU – automatic Time Zone update
AT+CTZU=<onoff>
SELINT 2
This command enables and disables automatic time zone update via NITZ.
Parameters:
<onoff>:
0 Disable automatic time zone update via NITZ (default)
1 Enable automatic time zone update via NITZ
Note: despite of the name, the command AT+CTZU=1 enables automatic
update of the date and time set by AT+CCLK command (not only time
zone). This happens when a Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ)
message is sent by the network. This command is the ETSI standard
equivalent of Telit custom command AT#NITZ=1. If command AT+CTZU=1,
or AT#NITZ=1 (or both) has been issued, NITZ message will cause a date
and time update.
AT+CTZU?
Read command reports the currently selected <onoff> in the format:
+CTZU: <onoff>
AT+CTZU=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <onoff>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 100 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.20. Restricted SIM Access - +CRSM
+CRSM - Restricted SIM Access
AT+CRSM=
<command>
[,<fileid>
[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>
[,<data>]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command transmits to the ME the SIM <command> and its required
parameters. ME handles internally all SIM-ME interface locking and file selection
routines. As response to the command, ME sends the actual SIM information
parameters and response data.
Parameters:
<command> - command passed on by the ME to the SIM
176 - READ BINARY
178 - READ RECORD
192 - GET RESPONSE
214 - UPDATE BINARY
220 - UPDATE RECORD
242 - STATUS
<fileid> - identifier of an elementary data file on SIM. Mandatory for every
command except STATUS.
<P1>,<P2>,<P3> - parameter passed on by the ME to the SIM; they are
mandatory for every command except GET RESPONSE
and STATUS
0..255
<data> - information to be read/written to the SIM (hexadecimal character
format).
The response of the command is in the format:
+CRSM: <sw1>,<sw2>[,<response>]
where:
<sw1>,<sw2> - information from the SIM about the execution of the actual
command either on successful or on failed execution.
<response> - on a successful completion of the command previously issued it
gives the requested data (hexadecimal character format). It’s
not returned after a successful UPDATE BINARY or UPDATE
RECORD command.
Note: use only decimal numbers for parameters <command>, <fileid>, <P1>,
<P2> and <P3>.
AT+CRSM=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007, GSM 11.11
5.1.4.4.21. Generic SIM access - +CSIM
+CSIM – Generic SIM access
AT+CSIM=<lock>
SELINT 2
Between two successive +CSIM command the SIM-ME interface must be locked
to avoid commands can modify wrong SIM file. The locking and unlocking of the
SIM-ME interface must be done explicitly respectively at the beginning and at the
end of the +CSIM commands sequence.
Parameters:
<lock>=1 locking of the interface
<lock>=0 unlocking of the interface
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 101 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSIM – Generic SIM access
SELINT 2
In case that TE application does not use the unlock command in a certain
timeout value, ME releases the locking.
AT+CSIM=<length>,<
command>
The ME shall send the <command> as it is to the SIM/UICC. As response to the
command, ME sends back the actual SIM/UICC <response> to the TA as it is.
Parameters:
<lenght>: number of the characters that are sent to TE in <command> or
<response> (two times the actual length of the command or response)
<command>: command passed on by the ME to the SIM/UICC in the format as
described in GSM TS 11.11 or 3G TS 31.101 (hexadecimal character format)
The response of the command is in the format:
+CSIM: <length>,<response>
where:
<response> : response to the command passed on by the SIM to the ME in the
format as described in GSM TS 11.11 or 3G TS 31.101 (hexadecimal character
format).
Error case:
+CME ERROR: <err>
possible <err> values (numeric format followed by verbose format):
3
operation not allowed (operation mode is not allowed by the ME, wrong
interface lock/unlock status )
4
operation not supported (wrong format or parameters of the command)
13
SIM failure (SIM no response)
AT+CSIM=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
Lock SIM interface
AT+CSIM=1
OK
2G SIM (TS 11.11):
AT#ENAUSIM?
+ENAUSIM: 0
OK
STATUS
AT+CSIM=10,A0F2000016
+CSIM:48,”000002A87F20020000000000099300220800838A838A9000”
OK
SELECT EF 6F07
AT+CSIM=14,A0A40000026F07
+CSIM: 4,”9F0F”
OK
GET RESPONSE
AT+CSIM=10,A0C000000F
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 102 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSIM – Generic SIM access
+CSIM: 34,”000000096F0704001A001A010200009000”
SELINT 2
OK
SELECT EF 6F30
AT+CSIM=14,A0A40000026F30
+CSIM: 4,”9F0F”
OK
READ BINARY
AT+CSIM=10,A0B00000FC
+CSIM:508,”FFFFFF13008313009013005413003013006513003813008013018
0130001131109130130130098130077130059130043130081130095130140130
023130016330420130041FFFFFFFFFFFF21436542F41922F28822F201FFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF9000”
OK
3G UICC (3G TS 31.101):
AT#ENAUSIM?
+ENAUSIM: 1
OK
STATUS
AT+CSIM=10,A0F2000016
+CME ERROR: operation not supported
STATUS
AT+CSIM=10,80F2000016
+CSIM:48,"623F8202782183027FF08410A0000000871002FFFFFF9000"
OK
SELECT EF 6F07 No Data Returned
AT+CSIM=18,00A4080C047F206F07
+CSIM: 4,"9000"
OK
SELECT EF 6F30 Return FCP Template
AT+CSIM=18,00A40804047F206F30
+CSIM: 4,"6120"
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 103 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSIM – Generic SIM access
SELINT 2
GET RESPONSE
AT+CSIM=10,00C0000020
+CSIM:68,"621E8202412183026F30A506C00140DE01008A01058B036F06048
002006988009000"
OK
READ BINARY
AT+CSIM=10,00B0000069
+CSIM:214,"02F81012F47022F83082F63082F64022F60192F31412F60313006
132F40102F20162
F21032F23002F60182F41012F91042F41902F46102F40242F22092F52072F2
2062F03062F86032F0
1032F11042F01032F80217F60127F42027F43027F44027F24337F62037F0209
000"
OK
Unlock SIM interface
AT+CSIM=0
OK
Note
After the locking of the SIM-ME interface (AT+CSIM=1) the SIM will be accessible
only by AT+CSIM commands (#QSS: 0). The GSM and GPRS services will be
automatically deregistered to avoid the TE commands alter the GSM application.
They will be automatically reconditioned after the unlocking of the SIM-ME
interface. After the unlocking of the SIM-ME interface if PIN is required it will be
necessary to enter it another time.
5.1.4.4.22. Alert Sound Mode - +CALM
+CALM - Alert Sound Mode
AT+CALM=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command is used to select the general alert sound mode of the device.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - normal mode
1 - silent mode; no sound will be generated by the device, except for alarm sound
2 - stealth mode; no sound will be generated by the device
Note: if silent mode is selected then incoming calls will not produce alerting
sounds but only the unsolicited messages RING or +CRING.
AT+CALM?
Read command returns the current value of parameter <mode>.
AT+CALM=?
Test command returns the supported values for the parameter <mode> as
compound value.
+CALM: (0-2)
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
3GPP TS 27.007
Page 104 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.23. Ringer Sound Level - +CRSL
+CRSL - Ringer Sound Level
AT+CRSL=<level>
SELINT 2
Set command is used to select the incoming call ringer sound level of the device.
Parameter:
<level> - ringer sound level
0 - Off
1 - low
2 - middle
3 - high
4 - progressive
AT+CRSL?
Read command reports the current <level> setting of the call ringer in the format:
+CRSL: <level>
AT+ CRSL=?
Test command reports <level> supported values as compound value.
+CRSL: (0-4)
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.24. Loudspeaker Volume Level - +CLVL
+CLVL - Loudspeaker Volume Level
AT+CLVL=<level>
SELINT 2
Set command is used to select the volume of the internal loudspeaker audio
output of the device.
Parameter:
<level> - loudspeaker volume
0..max - the value of max can be read by issuing the Test command
AT+CLVL=?
AT+CLVL?
Read command reports the current <level> setting of the loudspeaker volume in
the format:
+CLVL: <level>
AT+ CLVL=?
Test command reports <level> supported values range in the format:
+CLVL: (0-max)
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.25. Microphone Mute Control - +CMUT
+CMUT - Microphone Mute Control
AT+CMUT=<n>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the muting of the microphone audio line during a
voice call.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - mute off, microphone active (factory default)
1 - mute on, microphone muted.
Note: this command mutes/activates both microphone audio paths, internal mic
and external mic.
AT+CMUT?
Read command reports whether the muting of the microphone audio line during
a voice call is enabled or not, in the format:
+CMUT: <n>
AT+ CMUT=?
Test command reports the supported values for <n> parameter.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 105 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.4.26. Silence command - +CSIL
+CSIL – silence command
AT+CSIL=[<mode>]
SELINT 2
This command enables/disables the silent mode. When the phone is in silent
mode, all signalling tones from MT are suppressed.
Parameters:
<mode>:
0 Silent mode off (default)
1 Silent mode on
AT+CSIL?
Read command reports the currently selected <mode> in the format:
+CSIL: <mode>
AT+ CSIL=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <mode>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.27.
Accumulated Call Meter - +CACM
+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter
AT+CACM=
[<pwd>]
SELINT 2
Set command resets the Advice of Charge related Accumulated Call Meter
stored in SIM (ACM): it contains the total number of home units for both the
current and preceding calls.
Parameter:
<pwd> - to access this command PIN2; if PIN2 has been already input once
after startup, it is required no more
AT+CACM?
Read command reports the current value of the SIM ACM in the format:
+CACM: <acm>
where:
<acm> - accumulated call meter in home units, string type: three bytes of the
ACM value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal
value 30)
Note: the value <acm> is in home units; price per unit and currency are defined
with command +CPUC
AT+CACM=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.28. Accumulated Call Meter Maximum - +CAMM
+CAMM - Accumulated Call Meter Maximum
AT+CAMM=
[<acmmax>
[,<pwd>]]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the Advice of Charge related Accumulated Call Meter
Maximum Value stored in SIM (ACMmax). This value represents the maximum
number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM
reaches <acmmax> value further calls are prohibited.
Parameter:
<acmmax> - ACMmax value, integer type: it is the maximum number of home
units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber.
<pwd> - PIN2; if PIN2 has been already input once after startup, it is
required no more
Note: <acmmax> = 0 value disables the feature.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 106 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CAMM - Accumulated Call Meter Maximum
AT+CAMM?
SELINT 2
Read command reports the ACMmax value stored in SIM in the format:
+CAMM : <acmm>
where:
<acmm> - ACMmax value in home units, string type: three bytes of the
ACMmax value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates
decimal value 30)
AT+CAMM=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.29. Price per Unit and Currency Table - +CPUC
+CPUC - Price Per Unit And Currency Table
AT+CPUC=
<currency>,
<ppu>[,<pwd>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the values of Advice of Charge related Price per Unit and
Currency Table stored in SIM (PUCT). The PUCT information can be used to
convert the home units (as used in commands +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)
into currency units.
Parameters:
<currency> - string type; three-character currency code (e.g. “LIT”, “L. “,
“USD”, “DEM” etc..); used character set should be the one selected
with command +CSCS.
<ppu> - price per unit, string type (dot is used as decimal separator) e.g.
“1989.27”
<pwd> - SIM PIN2; if PIN2 has been already input once after startup, it is
required no more
AT+CPUC?
Read command reports the current values of <currency> and <ppu>
parameters in the format:
+CPUC : <currency>,<ppu>
AT+CPUC=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.30. Call meter maximum event - +CCWE
+CCWE – Call Meter maximum event
AT+CCWE=<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command is used to enable/disable sending of an unsolicited result code
+CCWV shortly before the ACM (Accumulated Call Meter) maximum value is
reached. The warning is issued approximately when 30 seconds call time
remains. It is also issued when starting a call if less than 30 seconds call time
remains.
Parameters:
<mode>:
0 Disable the call meter warning event (default)
1 Enable the call meter warning event
Note: the set command will respond with an error if the Accumulated Call Meter
service is not active in SIM
AT+CCWE?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command reports the currently selected <mode> in the format:
Page 107 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CCWE – Call Meter maximum event
+CCWE: <mode>
SELINT 2
AT+CCWE=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <mode>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.31. Set voice mail number - +CSVM
+CSVM – Set Voice Mail Number
SELINT 2
AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number> The number to the voice mail server is set with this command. The
[,<type>]]
parameters <number> and <type> can be left out if the parameter
<mode> is set to 0.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 – disable the voice mail number
1 – enable the voice mail number (factory default)
<number> - string type phone number of format specified by <type>
<type> - type of address octet in integer format
129 - unknown type of number and ISDN/Telephony numbering plan
145 - international type of number and ISDN/Telephony numbering
plan (contains the character "+")
Note: Set command is dummy. It only checks for
parameters values validity; it does not send any actual write
request to SIM to update voice mail number, nor sends any
request to network to enable/disable voice mail..
AT+CSVM?
Read command returns the currently selected voice mail number and
the status (i.e. enabled/disabled) in the format
+CSVM:<mode>,<number>,<type>
AT+CSVM=?
Test command reports the range for the parameters <mode> and
<type>.
5.1.4.4.32. Available AT Commands - +CLAC
+CLAC - Available AT Commands
AT+CLAC
SELINT 2
Execution command causes the ME to return the AT commands that are
available for the user, in the following format:
<AT cmd1>[<CR><LF><AT cmd2>[…]]
where:
<AT cmdn> - defines the AT command including the prefix AT
AT+CLAC=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.4.33. Master reset - +CMAR
+CMAR – Master Reset
SELINT 2
AT+CMAR=< phone lock This command requests the MT to reset user data. The user data in the
code>
phone will be reset to default values.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 108 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMAR – Master Reset
SELINT 2
Parameters:
<phone lock code> - string type representing an 8 digits security code. It
must be verified before performing the master reset.
Note: issuing the command will cause an NVM and filesystem formatting.
After the formatting is completed the module will automatically reboot. To not
interfere with the formatting process, it is strongly recommended to issue an
AT+CFUN=4 command before starting to format.
AT+CMAR=?
Test command tests for command existence.
5.1.4.4.34. Open Logical Channel - +CCHO
SELINT 2
+CCHO – Open Logical Channel
AT+CCHO=<dfname>
Execution of the command causes the MT to return <sessionid> to allow the
TE to identify a channel that is being allocated by the currently selected UICC,
which is attached to ME. The currently selected UICC will open a new logical
channel; select the application identified by the <dfname> received with this
command and return a session Id as the response. The ME shall restrict the
communication between the TE and the UICC to this logical channel.
This <sessionid> is to be used when sending commands with Restricted UICC
Logical Channel access +CRLA or Generic UICC Logical Channel access
+CGLA commands.
Parameter:
<dfname> : all selectable applications in the UICC are referenced by a DF
name coded on 1 to 16 bytes
The response of the command is in the format:
+CCHO: < sessionid >
where:
<sessionid> integer type; a session Id to be used in order to target a specific
application on the smart card (e.g. (U)SIM, WIM, ISIM) using logical channels
mechanism
See 3GPP TS 31.101 for more information about defined values.
Note: The logical channel number is contained in the CLASS byte of an APDU
command, thus implicitly contained in all APDU commands sent to a UICC. In
this case it will be up to the MT to manage the logical channel part of the APDU
CLASS byte and to ensure that the chosen logical channel is relevant to the
<sessionid> indicated in the AT command. See 3GPP TS 31.101 for further
information on logical channels in APDU commands protocol.
AT+CCHO=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.4.4.35. Close Logical Channel - +CCHC
+CCHC – Close Logical Channel
AT+CCHC=<sessionid>
SELINT 2
This command asks the ME to close a communication session with the
active UICC. The ME shall close the previously opened logical channel. The
TE will no longer be able to send commands on this logical channel. The
UICC will close the logical channel when receiving this command.
Parameter:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 109 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
<sessionid> : integer type; a session Id to be used in order to target a
specific application on the smart card (e.g. (U)SIM, WIM, ISIM) using logical
channels mechanism.
AT+CCHC=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.4.4.36. Generic UICC Logical Channel Access - +CGLA
+CGLA – Generic UICC Logical Channel Access
SELINT 2
AT+CGLA=<sessionid>,< Set command transmits to the MT the <command> it then shall send as it is
length>,<command>
to the selected UICC. In the same manner the UICC <response> shall be
sent back by the MT to the TA as it is.
This command allows a direct control of the currently selected UICC by a
distant application on the TE. The TE shall then take care of processing
UICC information within the frame specified by GSM/UMTS.
Parameter:
<sessionid> : integer type; this is the identifier of the session to be used in
order to send the APDU commands to the UICC. It is mandatory in order to
send commands to the UICC when targeting applications on the smart card
using a logical channel other than the default channel (channel "0")
<length> : integer type; length of the characters that are sent to TE in
<command> or <response> (two times the actual length of the command or
response)
<command> : command passed on by the MT to the UICC in the format as
described in 3GPP TS 31.101 (hexadecimal character format; refer +CSCS)
The response of the command is in the format:
+CGLA: <length>,<response>
where:
<response> : response to the command passed on by the SIM to the ME in
the format as described in GSM TS 11.11 or 3G TS 31.101 (hexadecimal
character format).
See 3GPP TS 31.101 for more information about defined values.
AT+CGLA=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the OK result code.
Page 110 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.5.
Mobile Equipment Errors
5.1.4.5.1.
Report Mobile Equipment Error - +CMEE
+CMEE - Report Mobile Equipment Error
AT+CMEE=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the report of result code:
+CME ERROR: <err>
as an indication of an error relating to the +Cxxx commands issued.
When enabled, device related errors cause the +CME ERROR: <err> final
result code instead of the default ERROR final result code. ERROR is anyway
returned normally when the error message is related to syntax, invalid
parameters, or DTE functionality.
Parameter:
<n> - enable flag
0 - disable +CME ERROR:<err> reports, use only ERROR report.
1 - enable +CME ERROR:<err> reports, with <err> in numeric format
2 - enable +CME ERROR: <err> reports, with <err> in verbose format
AT+CMEE?
Read command returns the current value of subparameter <n>:
+CMEE: <n>
AT+CMEE=?
Test command returns the range of values for subparameter <n>
Note
+CMEE has no effect on the final result code +CMS
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 111 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.6.
5.1.4.6.1.
Voice Control
DTMF Tones Transmission - +VTS
+VTS - DTMF Tones Transmission
AT+VTS=
<dtmfstring>
[,duration]
SELINT 2
Execution command allows the transmission of DTMF tones.
Parameters:
<dtmfstring> - string of <dtmf>s, i.e. ASCII characters in the set (0 9), #,*,(A
D),P; it allows the user to send a sequence of DTMF tones, each of them with a
duration that was defined through +VTD command.
<duration> - duration of a tone in 1/100 sec.; this parameter can be specified
only if the length of first parameter is just one ASCII character
0 - a single DTMF tone will be transmitted for a duration depending on the
network, no matter what the current +VTD setting is.
1..255 - a single DTMF tone will be transmitted for a time <duration> (in 10 ms
multiples), no matter what the current +VTD setting is.
Note: this commands operates in voice mode only (see +FCLASS).
Note: the character P does not correspond to any DTMF tone, but it is
interpreted as a pause of 3 seconds between the preceding and succeeding
DTMF string elements
Test command provides the list of supported <dtmf>s and the list of supported
<duration>s in the format:
AT+VTS=?
(list of supported <dtmf>s)[,(list of supported <duration>s)]
Reference
5.1.4.6.2.
3GPP TS 27.007 and TIA IS-101
Tone Duration - +VTD
+VTD - Tone Duration
AT+VTD=
<duration>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the length of tones transmitted with +VTS command.
Parameter:
<duration> - duration of a tone
0 - the duration of every single tone is dependent on the network (factory
default)
1..255 - duration of every single tone in 1/10 sec.
NOTE: the default value for NA products is 2.
AT+VTD?
Read command reports the current Tone Duration, in the format:
<duration>
AT+VTD=?
Test command provides the list of supported <duration>s in the format:
(list of supported <duration>s)
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
3GPP TS 27.007 and TIA IS-101
Page 112 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.7.
Commands for Packet Domain
5.1.4.7.1.
GPRS Mobile Station Class - +CGCLASS
+CGCLASS - GPRS mobile station class
AT+CGCLASS=
[<class>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the GPRS class according to <class> parameter.
Parameter:
<class> - GPRS class
“A” - UMTS
“B” - GSM/GPRS (factory default)
“CG” - class C in GPRS only mode (GPRS only)
“CC” - class C in circuit switched only mode (GSM only)
Note: the setting is saved in NVM (and available on following reboot).
AT+CGCLASS?
Read command returns the current value of the GPRS class in the format:
+CGLASS: <class>
AT+CGCLASS=?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <class>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.2.
GPRS Attach Or Detach - +CGATT
+CGATT -PS Attach Or Detach
AT+CGATT=[
<state>]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to attach the terminal to, or detach the terminal
from, the Packet Domain service depending on the parameter <state>.
Parameter:
<state> - state of Packet Domain attachment
0 - detached
1 - attached
AT+CGATT?
Read command returns the current Packet Domain service state.
AT+CGATT=?
Test command requests information on the supported Packet Domain service
states.
Example
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK
AT+CGATT=?
+CGATT: (0,1)
OK
AT+CGATT=1
OK
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
3GPP TS 27.007
Page 113 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.7.3.
Packet Domain Event Reporting - +CGEREP
+CGEREP - Packet Domain Event Reporting
AT+CGEREP=
[<mode>[,<bfr>]]
SELINT 2
Set command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes +CGEV:
XXX (see below) from TA to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the TA
or the network.
Parameters:
<mode> - controls the processing of URCs specified with this command
0 - Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full, the
oldest one can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the TE.
1 - Discard unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line
data mode); otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
2 - Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g.
in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE when TA-TE link becomes
available; otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
<bfr> - controls the effect on buffered codes when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered:
0 - TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared
when <mode>=1 or 2 is entered.
1 - TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed
to the TE when <mode>=1 or 2 is entered (OK response shall be given
before flushing the codes)
Unsolicited Result Codes
The following unsolicited result codes and the corresponding events are defined:
+CGEV: REJECT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>
A network request for PDN connection activation occurred when the TA
was unable to report it to the TE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and
was automatically rejected
+CGEV: NW REACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was
used to reactivate the context is provided if known to TA
+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to
activate the context is provided if known to TA
+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that
was used to activate the context is provided if known to TA
+CGEV: NW DETACH
The network has forced a PS detach. This implies that all active contexts
have been deactivated. These are not reported separately
+CGEV: ME DETACH
The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all
active contexts have been deactivated. These are not reported separately
+CGEV: ME CLASS <class>
The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest
available class is reported (see +CGCLASS)
AT+CGEREP?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command returns the current <mode> and <bfr> settings, in the format:
Page 114 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEREP - Packet Domain Event Reporting
SELINT 2
+CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>
AT+CGEREP=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the +CGEREP
command parameters.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.4.
Network Registration Status - +CGREG
+CGREG - GPRS Network Registration Status
AT+CGREG=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code
+CGREG: (see format below).
Parameter:
<n> - result code presentation mode
0 - disable network registration unsolicited result code
1 - enable network registration unsolicited result code; if there is a change in
the terminal GPRS network registration status, it is issued the unsolicited result
code:
+CGREG: <stat>
where:
<stat> - registration status
0 - not registered, terminal is not currently searching a new operator to register
to
1 - registered, home network
2 - not registered, but terminal is currently searching a new operator to register
to
3 - registration denied
4 - unknown
5 - registered, roaming
2 - enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code;
if there is a change of the network cell, it is issued the unsolicited result code:
+CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>,<rac>]]
where:
<stat> - registration status (see above for values)
<lac> - Local Area Code (when <AcT> indicates value 0
to 6) or tracking area code (when <AcT> indicates value 7)
<ci> - cell ID in hexadecimal format.
<AcT>: access technology of the registered network:
0
GSM
2
UTRAN
3
GSM w/EGPRS
4
UTRAN w/HSDPA
5
UTRAN w/HSUPA
6
UTRAN w/HSDPA and HSUPA
<rac>: string type; one byte routing area code in hexadecimal format
Note: <lac>, <Ci>, <AcT> and <rac> are reported only if <mode>=2 and the
mobile is registered on some network cell.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 115 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGREG - GPRS Network Registration Status
SELINT 2
Read command returns the status of result code presentation mode <n> and the
integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the
registration of the terminal in the format:
AT+CGREG?
+CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>[,<AcT>,<rac>]]
Note: <lac>, <Ci>, <AcT> and <rac> are reported only if <mode>=2 and the
mobile is registered on some network cell.
AT+CGREG=?
Test command returns supported values for parameter <n>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.5.
EPS network registration status - +CEREG
+CEREG – EPS network registration status
+CEREG=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code
+CEREG: (see format below).
Parameter:
<n> - result code presentation mode
0 - disable network registration unsolicited result code
1 - enable network registration unsolicited result code; if there is a change in the
terminal EPS network registration status, it is issued the unsolicited result code:
+CEREG: <stat>
<stat> - registration status
0 - not registered, terminal is not currently searching a new operator to register to
1 - registered, home network
2 - not registered, but terminal is currently searching a new operator to register to
3 - registration denied
4 - unknown
5 - registered, roaming
2 - enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code; if
there is a change of the network cell in E-UTRAN, it is issued the unsolicited result
code:
+CEREG: <stat>[,[<tac>],[<ci>],[<AcT>]]
where:
<stat> - registration status (see above for values)
<tac>: string type; two byte tracking area code in hexadecimal format (e.g. "00C3"
equals 195 in decimal).
<ci>: string type; four byte E-UTRAN cell ID in hexadecimal format.
<AcT>: integer type; indicates the access technology of the serving cell.
7 - E-UTRAN
Note:
If the EPS MT in GERAN/UTRAN/E-UTRAN also supports circuit mode services
and/or GPRS services, the +CREG command and +CREG: result codes and/or the
+CGREG command and +CGREG: result codes apply to the registration status and
location information for those services.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 116 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CEREG – EPS network registration status
+CEREG?
SELINT 2
Read command returns the status of result code presentation mode <n> and the
integer <stat> which shows whether the network has currently indicated the
registration of the terminal in the format:
+CEREG: <stat>[,[<tac>],[<ci>],[<AcT>]]
Note: <tac>, <ci>, and <AcT> are reported only if <n>=2 and the mobile is registered
on some network cell.
+CEREG=?
Test command returns supported values for parameter <n>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.6.
Define PDP context- +CGDCONT
+CGDCONT - Define PDP context
AT+CGDCONT=
[<cid>
[,<PDP_type>
[,<APN>
[,<PDP_addr>
[,<d_comp>
[,<h_comp>
[,<IPv4AddrAlloc>[,<e
mergency_indication
>[,<PCSCF_discovery>[,<I
M_CN_Signalling_Fla
g_Ind>]]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context
identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>
Parameters:
<cid> - (PDP Context Identifier) numeric parameter which specifies a particular
PDP context definition.
1..max - where the value of max is returned by the Test command
<PDP_type> - (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies
the type of packet data protocol
"IP" - Internet Protocol
"IPV6" - Internet Protocol version 6
"IPV4V6" - Virtual <PDP_type> introduced to handle dual IP stack UE capability
<APN> - (Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical name that is
used to select the GGSN or the external packet data network. If the value is
empty (“”) or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested.
<PDP_addr> - a string parameter that identifies the terminal in the address
space applicable to the PDP. The allocated address may be read using the
+CGPADDR command.
<d_comp> - numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression
0 - off
<h_comp> - numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression
0 - off (default if value is omitted)
1 – on
2 - RFC1144 (applicable for SNDCP only)
3- RFC2507
4- RFC3095 (applicable for PDCP only)
<IPv4AddrAlloc> - a numeric parameter that controls how
requests to get the IPv4 address information
0 - IPv4 Address Allocation through NAS Signalling (default)
1 - IPv4 Address Allocated through DHCP
the MT/TA
<emergency_indication> - a numeric parameter used to indicate whether the
PDP context is for emergency bearer services or not.
0 - PDP context is not for emergency bearer services (default)
1 - PDP context is for emergency bearer services
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 117 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGDCONT - Define PDP context
SELINT 2
<P-CSCF_discovery> - a numeric parameter that influences how the MT/TA
requests to get the P-CSCF address, see
3GPP TS 24.229 [89]
annex B and annex L.
0 - Preference of P-CSCF address discovery not influenced by +CGDCONT
(default)
1 - Preference of P-CSCF address discovery through NAS Signalling
<IM_CN_Signalling_Flag_Ind> - a numeric parameter used to indicate to the
network whether the PDPcontext is for IM CN subsystem-related signalling only
or not.
0 - UE indicates that the PDP context is not for IM CN subsystem-related
signaling only (default)
1 - UE indicates that the PDP context is for IM CN subsystem-related signaling
only
Note: a special form of the Set command, +CGDCONT=<cid>, causes the
values for context number <cid> to become undefined.
Note: parameters from <IPv4AddrAlloc> to <IM_CN_Signalling_Flag_Ind> are
shown in the Read command only if different from default.
Note: it is not possible to set more than 11 contexts
AT+CGDCONT?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined context in the
format:
+CGDCONT: <cid>,<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>,
<PDP_type>,<APN>,<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,<h_comp>
[…]
AT+CGDCONT=?
Test command returns values supported as a compound value
Example
AT+CGDCONT=1,”IP”,”APN”,”10.10.10.10”,0,0
OK
AT+CGDCONT?
+CGDCONT: 1,”IP”,“APN”,”10.10.10.10”,0,0
OK
at+cgdcont=?
+CGDCONT: (1-15),"IP",,,0,(0-4),(0,1),(0,1),(0,1),(0,1)
+CGDCONT: (1-15),"IPV6",,,0,(0-4),(0,1),(0,1),(0,1),(0,1)
+CGDCONT: (1-15),"IPV4V6",,,0,(0-4),(0,1),(0,1),(0,1),(0,1)
OK
Reference
5.1.4.7.7.
3GPP TS 27.007
PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters - +CGCONTRDP
+CGCONTRDP - PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters
AT+CGCONTRDP=
[<p_cid>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
The execution command returns the relevant information <bearer_id>, <apn>,
<ip_addr>, <subnet_mask>,
<gw_addr>, <DNS_prim_addr>, <DNS_sec_addr>, <P-CSCF_prim_addr> and
<P-CSCF_sec_addr> for a PDP Context established by the network with the
context identifier <p_cid>. If the context cannot be found an ERROR response is
returned.
If the parameter <p_cid> is omitted, the relevant information for all established
PDP contexts are returned.
Page 118 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGCONTRDP - PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters
SELINT 2
Possible response(s):
+CGCONTRDP: <p_cid>, <bearer_id>,
<apn>[, <ip_addr and subnet_mask>[,
<gw_addr>[, <DNS_prim_addr>[,
<DNS_sec_addr>[, <P-CSCF_prim_addr>[,
<P-CSCF_sec_addr>]]]]]]
[<CR><LF>
+CGCONTRDP: <p_cid>,<bearer_id>,
<apn>[, <ip_addr and subnet_mask>[,
<gw_addr>[,<DNS_prim_addr>[,
<DNS_sec_addr>[, <PCSCF_prim_addr>[,
<PCSCF_sec_addr>]]]]]]
[…]]
Parameters:
<p_cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular non secondary PDP
context definition. The parameter
is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in other PDP context-related
commands.
<bearer_id>: a numeric parameter which identifies the bearer, EPS Bearer in
EPS and NSAPI in UMTS/GPRS.
<APN>: a string parameter which is a logical name that was used to select the
GGSN or the external packet data
network.
<ip_addr and subnet_mask >: a string parameter which shows the IP Address
and subnet mask of the MT. The string is given as dot-separated numeric (0255) parameters on the form:
"a1.a2.a3.a4.m1.m2.m3.m4" for IPv4 or
"a1.a2.a3.a4.a5.a6.a7.a8.a9.a10.a11.a12.a13.a14.a15.a16.m1.m2.m3.m4.m5.
m6.m7.m8.m9.m10.m11.m12.m13.m14.m15.m16" for IPv6.
When +CGPIAF is supported, its settings can influence the format of this
parameter returned with the execute form of +CGCONTRDP.
<gw_addr>: a string parameter which shows the Gateway Address of the MT.
The string is given as dot-separated
numeric (0-255) parameters.
<DNS_prim_addr>: a string parameter which shows the IP Address of the
primary DNS Server.
<DNS_sec_addr>: a string parameter which shows the IP address of the
secondary DNS Server.
<P_CSCF_prim_addr>: a string parameter which shows the IP Address of the
primary P-CSCF Server. If the
<P_CSCF_sec_addr>: a string parameter which shows the IP Address of the
secondary P-CSCF Server.
Note: The dynamic part of the PDP context will only exist if established by the
network.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 119 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGCONTRDP - PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters
SELINT 2
The test command returns a list of <p_cid>s associated with active contexts.
Note: If the MT has dual stack capabilities, two lines of information are returned
per <cid>. First one
line with the IPv4 parameters followed by one line with the IPv6 parameters
AT+CGCONTRDP=?
+CGCONTRDP: (list of <p_cid>s associated with active contexts)
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.8.
Quality Of Service Profile - +CGQMIN
+CGCONTRDP - PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters
AT+CGQMIN=
[<cid>
[,<precedence>
[,<delay>
[,<reliability>
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked
by the terminal against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP
Context Accept message.
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identification (see +CGDCONT command).
<precedence> - precedence class
<delay> - delay class
<reliability> - reliability class
<peak> - peak throughput class
<mean> - mean throughput class
If a value is omitted for a particular class then this class is not checked.
Note: a special form of the Set command, +CGQMIN=<cid> causes the
requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
Note: set command can modify the 3G QoS according to 3GPP 23.107 (see
+CGEQMIN).
AT+CGQMIN?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined context in the
format:
+CGQMIN: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>,<precedence>,
<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>[…]]
If no PDP context has been defined, it has no effect and OK result code is
returned
AT+CGQMIN=?
+CGCONTRDP: (list of <p_cid>s associated with active
contexts) Test command returns as a compound value the type of the current
PDP context and the supported values for the subparameters in the format:
+CGQMIN: <PDP_Type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s)
Note: only the “IP” <PDP_Type> is currently supported.
Example
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
AT+CGQMIN=1,0,0,3,0,0
OK
AT+CGQMIN?
+CGQMIN: 1,0,0,5,0,0
Page 120 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGCONTRDP - PDP Context Read Dynamic Parameters
OK
AT+CGQMIN=?
+CGQMIN: “IP”,(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-18,31)
SELINT 2
OK
Reference
5.1.4.7.9.
3GPP TS 27.007
Quality Of Service Profile (Requested) - +CGQREQ
+CGQREQ - Quality Of Service Profile (Requested)
AT+CGQREQ=
[<cid>
[,<precedence>
[,<delay>
[,<reliability>
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the
terminal sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network. It
specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local) context identification
parameter, <cid>.
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identification (see +CGDCONT command).
<precedence> - precedence class
<delay> - delay class
<reliability> - reliability class
<peak> - peak throughput class
<mean> - mean throughput class
If a value is omitted for a particular class then this class is not checked.
Note: a special form of the Set command, +CGQREQ=<cid> causes the
requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
Note: set command can modify the 3G QoS according to 3GPP 23.107 (see
+CGEQREQ).
AT+CGQREQ?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined context in the
format:
+CGQREQ: <cid>,<precedence>,<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>,<precedence>,
<delay>,<reliability>,<peak>,<mean>[…]]
If no PDP context has been defined, it has no effect and OK result code is
returned.
AT+CGQREQ=?
Test command returns as a compound value the type of the current PDP
context and the supported values for the subparameters in the format:
+CGQREQ: <PDP_Type>,(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),(list of supported <mean>s)
Note: only the “IP” <PDP_Type> is currently supported.
Example
AT+CGQREQ?
+CGQREQ: 1,0,0,3,0,0
OK
AT+CGQREQ=1,0,0,3,0,0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 121 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGQREQ - Quality Of Service Profile (Requested)
AT+CGQREQ=?
+CGQREQ: ”IP”,(0-3),(0-4),(0-5),(0-9),(0-18,31)
SELINT 2
OK
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.10. 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Requested) - +CGEQREQ
+CGEQREQ – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Requested)
SELINT 2
- AT+CGEQREQ=
Set command allows to specify a 3G quality of service profile for the
- [<cid>
context identified by the(local) context identification parameter <cid>
- [,<Traffic class>
which is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request
- [,<Maximum bitrate UL>
message to the network.
- [,<Maximum bitrate DL>
- [,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
Parameters:
- [,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>
- [,<Delivery order>
<cid> - PDP context identification (see +CGDCONT command).
- [,<Maximum SDU size>
- [,<SDU error ratio>
- [,<Residual bit error ratio> <Traffic class> - Traffic class
[,<Delivery of erroneous
0 - conversational
SDUs>
1 - streaming
- [,<Transfer delay>
2 - interactive
[,<Traffic handling priority>
3
- background
[,<Source statistics
4 - subscribed value (default value)
descriptor> [,<Signalling
indication>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]
<Maximum bitrate UL> - Maximum bitrate Up Link (kbits/s). This
parameter should be provided if the <Traffic class> is specified as
conversational or streaming.
0 - subscribed value (default value)
1…568
576…8640
<Maximum bitrate DL> - Maximum bitrate down link (kbits/s). This
parameter should be provided if the <Traffic class> is specified as
conversational or streaming.
0 - subscribed value (default value)
1…568
576…8640
8700…16000
<Guaranteed bitrate UL> - the guaranteed bitrate up link(kbits/s).
This parameter should be provided if the <Traffic class> is specified
as conversational or streaming.
0 - subscribed value (default value)
1…568
576…8640
<Guaranteed bitrate DL> - the guaranteed bitrate down link(kbits/s).
This parameter should be provided if the <Traffic class> is specified
as conversational or streaming.
0 - subscribed value (default value)
1…568
576…8640
8700…16000
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 122 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEQREQ – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Requested)
SELINT 2
<Delivery order> - SDU Delivery order
0 - no
1 – yes
2 – subscribed value (default value)
<Maximum SDU size> - Maximum SDU size in octets
0 - subscribed value (default value)
10…1500
1502
1510
1520
<SDU error ratio> - SDU error ratio
- mEe mean m*10-e , for example 1E2 mean 1*10-2
“0E0” (default value)
“1E1”
“1E2”
“7E3”
“1E3”
“1E4”
“1E5”
“1E6”
<Residual bit error ratio> - Residual bitt error ratio
- mEe mean m*10-e , for example 1E2 mean 1*10-2
“0E0” (default value)
“5E2”
“1E2”
“5E3”
“4E3”
“1E3”
“1E4”
“1E5”
“1E6”
“6E8”
<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> - Delivery of erroneous SDUs
0 - no
1 – yes
2 – no detect
3 – subscribed value (default value)
<Transfer delay > - Transfer delay (milliseconds)
0 – subscribed value (default value)
10…150
200…950
1000…4000
<Traffic handling priority > - Traffic handling priority
0 - subscribed value (default value)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 123 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEQREQ – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Requested)
1…3
SELINT 2
<Source Statistics Descriptor> - Characteristics of the source of the
submitted SDUs for a PDP context. This parameter should be
provided if the <Traffic class> is specified as conversational or
streaming.
0 - Characteristics of SDUs is unknown (default value)
1 - Characteristics of SDUs corresponds to a speech source
<Signalling Indication> - Signalling content of submitted SDUs for a
PDP context. This parameter should be provided if the <Traffic
class> is specified as interactive.
0 - PDP context is not optimized for signalling (default value)
1 - PDP context is optimized for signalling <PDP_type> (see
+CGDCONT command).
Note: a special form of the Set command, +CGEQREQ=<cid> causes
the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
Note: the current settings are stored in NVM.
Note: set command can modify the 2G QoS according to 3GPP
23.107 (see +CGQREQ).
AT+CGEQREQ?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined context
in the format:
[+CGEQREQ: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate
UL>,<Maximum bitrate DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of
erroneous SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling>,<Source
statistics descriptor>,<Signalling indication><CR><LF>]
[+CGEQREQ:…]
If no PDP context has been defined, it has no effect and OK result
code is returned.
AT+CGEQREQ=?
Test command returns as a compound value the type of the current
PDP context and the supported values for the subparameters in the
format:
+CGQEQREQ: <PDP_Type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s),
(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s),(list of supported
<Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of
supported <Delivery order>s),(list of supported<Maximum SDU
size>s),(list of supported<SDU error ratio>s),(list of
supported<Residual bit error ratio>s),(list of supported <Delivery
of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported <Transfer delay>s),(list
of supported <Traffic handling priority>s), (list of supported
<Source statistics descriptor>s), (list of supported <Signalling
indication>s)
Note: only the “IP” PDP_Type is currently supported.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 124 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.7.11. Define EPS quality of service - +CGEQOS
+CGEQOS - Define EPS quality of service
AT+CGEQOS=
[<cid>[,<QCI>
[,<DL_GBR>,
<UL_GBR>
[,<DL_MBR>,<UL_M
BR]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows the TE to specify the EPS Quality of Service parameters for
a PDP context.
Possible Response(s):
+CME ERROR: <err>
The set command allows the TE to specify the EPS Quality of Service parameters
<cid>, <QCI>, [<DL_GBR> and
<UL_GBR>] and [<DL_MBR> and <UL_MBR>] for a PDP context or Traffic Flows.
When in UMTS/GPRS the MT
applies a mapping function to UTMS/GPRS Quality of Service. Refer subclause
9.2 for <err> values.
A special form of the set command, +CGEQOS= <cid> causes the values for
context number <cid> to become
undefined.
Parameters:
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular EPS Traffic Flows
definition in EPS and a PDP Context
definition in UMTS/GPRS.
<QCI>: a numeric parameter that specifies a class of EPS QoS. (see 3GPP TS
23.203)
0 QCI is selected by network
[1 – 4] value range for guranteed bit rate Traffic Flows
[5 – 9] value range for non-guarenteed bit rate Traffic Flows
<DL_GBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates DL GBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is omitted for a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301)
<UL_GBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates UL GBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is omitted for a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301)
<DL_MBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates DL MBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is omitted for a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301)
<UL_MBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates UL MBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is omitted for a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301)
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT+CGEQOS?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
The read command returns the current settings for each defined QoS.
+CGEQOS: <cid>, <QCI>,
[<DL_GBR>,<UL_GBR>],
[<DL_MBR>,<UL_MBR>]
[<CR>>LF>+CGEQOS: <cid>, <QCI>,
[<DL_GBR>,<UL_GBR>],
[<DL_MBR>,<UL_MBR>]
[…]]
Page 125 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEQOS - Define EPS quality of service
AT+CGEQOS=?
SELINT 2
The test command returns the ranges of the supported parameters.
+CGEQOS: (range of supported <cid>s) ,(list of
supported <QCI>s) ,(list of supported <DL_GBR>s),
(list of supported <UL_GBR>s), (list of supported <DL_MBR>s) ,(list of
supported <UL_MBR>s)
5.1.4.7.12. EPS quality of service read dynamic parameters - +CGEQOSRDP
+CGEQOSRDP - EPS quality of service read dynamic parameters
AT+CGEQOSRDP=[
<cid>]
SELINT 2
The execution command returns the Quality of Service parameters of the
established PDP Context associated to the provided context identifier <cid>. If the
context cannot be found an ERROR response is returned.
If the parameter <cid> is omitted, the Quality of Service parameters for all
established PDP contexts are returned.
Possible Response(s):
+CGEQOSRDP: <cid>, <QCI>,
[<DL_GBR>,<UL_GBR>],
[<DL_MBR>,<UL_MBR>]
[<CR>>LF>+CGEQOSRDP: <cid>, <QCI>,
[<DL_GBR>,<UL_GBR>],
[<DL_MBR>,<UL_MBR>]
[…]]
DParameters:
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular Traffic Flows definition in
EPS and a PDP Context definition in UMTS/GPRS.
<QCI>: a numeric parameter that specifies a class of EPS QoS. (see 3GPP TS
23.203 [85])0 QCI is selected by network [1 – 4] value range for guranteed bit
rate Traffic Flows [5 – 9] value range for non-guarenteed bit rate Traffic Flows.
<DL_GBR>: a numeric parameter, which indicates DL GBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is dummyfor a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301 [83])
<UL_GBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates UL GBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is dummyfor a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301 [83])
<DL_MBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates DL MBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is dummy for a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301 [83])
<UL_MBR>: a numeric parameter which indicates UL MBR in case of GBR QCI.
The value is in kbit/s. This
parameter is dummy for a non-GBR QCI. (see 3GPP TS 24.301)
AT+CGEQOSRDP=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
+CGEQOSRDP: (list of <cid>s associated with active
contexts)
The test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.
Parameters of both network and MT/TA initiated PDN connections will be
returned.
Page 126 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.7.13. 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) - +CGEQMIN
+CGEQMIN – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
AT+CGEQMIN=
[<cid>
[,<Traffic class>
[,<Maximum bitrate UL>
[,<Maximum bitrate DL>
[,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>
[,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>
[,<Delivery order>
[,<Maximum SDU size>
[,<SDU error ratio>
[,<Residual bit error ratio>
[,<Delivery of erroneous
SDUs>
[,<Transfer delay>
[,<Traffic handling priority>
[,<Source statistics
descriptor> [,<Signalling
indication>]]]]]]]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows specifying a 3G quality of service profile for the
context identified by the (local) context identification parameter <cid>
which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in
the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept Message.
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identification (see +CGDCONT command).
<Traffic class> - Traffic class
0 – conversational (default value)
1 - streaming
2 - interactive
3 - background
<Maximum bitrate UL> - Maximum bitrate Up Link (kbits/s)
0 (default value)
1…568
576…8640
<Maximum bitrate DL> - Maximum bitrate down link (kbits/s)
0 (default value)
1…568
576…8640
8700…16000
<Guaranteed bitrate UL> - the guaranteed bitrate up link(kbits/s)
0 (default value)
1…568
576…8640
<Guaranteed bitrate DL> - the guaranteed bitrate down link(kbits/s)
0 (default value)
1…568
576…8640
8700…16000
<Delivery order> - SDU Delivery order
0 - no (for default value)
1 – yes
<Maximum SDU size> - Maximum SDU size in octets
0 (default value)
10…1520
1502
1510
1520
<SDU error ratio> - SDU error ratio
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 127 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEQMIN – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
- mEe mean m*10-e , for example 1E2 mean 1*10-2
“0E0” (default value)
“1E1”
“1E2”
“7E3”
“1E3”
“1E4”
“1E5”
“1E6”
SELINT 2
<Residual bit error ratio> - Residual bit error ratio
- mEe mean m*10-e , for example 1E2 mean 1*10-2
“0E0” (default value)
“5E2”
“1E2”
“5E3”
“4E3”
“1E3”
“1E4”
“1E5”
“1E6”
“6E8”
<Delivery of erroneous SDUs> - Delivery of erroneous SDUs
0 - no (default value)
1 – yes
2 – no detect
<Transfer delay > - Transfer delay (milliseconds)
0 (default value)
10…150
200…950
1000…4000
<Traffic handling priority > - Traffic handling priority
1…3
<Source Statistics Descriptor> - Characteristics of the source of the
submitted SDUs for a PDP context. This parameter should be
provided if the <Traffic class> is specified as conversational or
streaming.
0 - Characteristics of SDUs is unknown (default value)
1 - Characteristics of SDUs corresponds to a speech source
<Signalling Indication> - Signalling content of submitted SDUs for a
PDP context. This parameter should be provided if the <Traffic
class> is specified as interactive.
0 - PDP context is not optimized for signalling (default value)
1 - PDP context is optimized for signalling.
Note: a special form of the Set command, +CGEQMIN=<cid> causes
the requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 128 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEQMIN – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
Note: the current settings are stored in NVM.
SELINT 2
Note: set command can modify the 2G QoS according to 3GPP
23.107
(see +CGQMIN).
AT+CGEQMIN?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined context
in the format:
[+CGEQMIN: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate
UL>,<Maximum bitrate DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate
UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery order>,<Maximum SDU
size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error ratio>,<Delivery of
erroneous SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic handling>,<Source
statistics descriptor>,<Signalling indication><CR><LF>]
[+CGEQMIN:…]
Parameters are described as for the set command except:
<Traffic class> - Traffic class
0 – conversational (if the value is explicitly defined, otherwise, if the
context or the QoS is undefined it is the default value as undefined)
1 - streaming
2 - interactive
3 – background
<Traffic handling priority > - Traffic handling priority
0 (default value as undefined)
1…3
If no PDP context has been defined, it has no effect and OK result
code is returned.
AT+CGEQMIN=?
Test command returns as a compound value the type of the current
PDP context and the supported values for the subparameters in the
format:
+CGQMIN: <PDP_Type>,(list of supported <Traffic class>s),
(list of supported <Maximum bitrate UL>s),(list of supported
<Maximum bitrate DL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate
UL>s),(list of supported <Guaranteed bitrate DL>s),(list of
supported <Delivery order>s),(list of supported<Maximum SDU
size>s),(list of supported<SDU error ratio>s),(list of
supported<Residual bit error ratio>s),(list of supported <Delivery
of erroneous SDUs>s),(list of supported <Transfer delay>s),(list
of supported <Traffic handling priority>s), (list of supported
<Source statistics descriptor>s), (list of supported <Signalling
indication>s)
Note: only the “IP” PDP_Type is currently supported.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 129 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.7.14. PDP Context activate or deactivate - +CGACT
+CGACT - PDP Context Activate Or Deactivate
AT+CGACT=
[<state>[,<cid>
[,<cid>[,…]]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s)
Parameters:
<state> - indicates the state of PDP context activation
0 - deactivated
1 - activated
<cid> - a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
(see +CGDCONT command)
Note: only three <cid>s can be activated at the same time.
Note: if no <cid>s are specified, the activation form of the command activates the
first three defined contexts. The deactivation form deactivates all the active
contexts.
AT+CGACT?
Read command returns the current activation state for all the defined PDP
contexts in the format:
+CGACT: <cid>,<state>[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>,<state>[…]]
AT+CGACT =?
Test command reports information on the supported PDP context activation states
parameters in the format:
+CGACT: (0,1)
Example
AT+CGACT=1,1
OK
AT+CGACT?
+CGACT: 1,1
OK
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.15. 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Negotiated) - +CGEQNEG
+CGEQNEG – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Negotiated)
AT+CGEQNEG=
[<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]
SELINT 2
This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated 3G quality of service
returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept/Modify message.
Set command returns the negotiated 3G QoS profile for the specified context
identifiers, <cid>s. The Qos profile consists of a number of parameters, each of
which may have a separate value.
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identification (see +CGDCONT command).
It returns the current settings for each specified context in the format (see
+CGEQREQ):
[+CGEQNEQ: <cid>,<Traffic class>,<Maximum bitrate UL>,<Maximum bitrate
DL>,<Guaranteed bitrate UL>,<Guaranteed bitrate DL>,<Delivery
order>,<Maximum SDU size>,<SDU error ratio>,<Residual bit error
ratio>,<Delivery of erroneous SDUs>,<Transfer delay>,<Traffic
handling><CR><LF>]
[+CGEQNEQ:…]
AT+CGEQNEG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.
Page 130 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CGEQNEG – 3G Quality Of Service Profile (Negotiated)
Reference
SELINT 2
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.16. Show PDP Address - +CGPADDR
+CGPADDR - Show PDP Address
AT+CGPADDR=
[<cid>[,<cid>
[,…]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns a list of PDN addresses for the specified context
identifiers in the format:
+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>[<CR><LF>+CGPADDR: <cid>,
<PDP_addr>[…]]
Parameters:
<cid> - a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDN connection
definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is specified, the
addresses for all defined contexts are returned.
<PDP_addr> - a string that identifies the terminal in the address space
applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or dynamic.
For a static address, it will be the one set by the +CGDCONT
command when the context was defined. For a dynamic
address it will be the one assigned during the last PDN
connection activation that used the context definition referred to
by <cid>; if no address is available the empty string (“”) is
represented as <PDP_addr>
AT+CGPADDR=?
Test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
Example
AT#SGACT=3,1
#SGACT: xxx.yyy.zzz.www
OK
AT+CGPADDR=3
+CGPADDR: 3,”xxx.yyy.zzz.www”
OK
AT+CGPADDR=?
+CGPADDR: (3)
OK
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
5.1.4.7.17. Modify PDP context - +CGCMOD
+CGCMOD – Modify PDP context
SELINT 2
AT+CGCMOD=[<cid1 The execution command is used to modify the specified PDP context(s) with
>[,<cid2>[,…,<cidN>]] respect to QoS profiles.
]
If no <cidi> is specified the command modifies all active contexts.
Parameters:
<cidi>:
a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
AT+CGCMOD=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns a list of <cid>s associated with active contexts.
Page 131 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.7.18. S Printing IP Address Format - +CGPIAF
+CGPIAF - Printing IP Address Format
AT+CGPIAF=
[<IPv6_AddressForm
at>[,<IPv6_SubnetNot
ation>[,<IPv6_leading
Zeros>[,<IPv6_compr
essZeros>]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command decides what the format to print IPv6 address parameter.
Parameters:
<IPv6_AddressFormat> - decides the IPv6 address format. Relevant for all AT
command parameters that can hold an IPv6 address.
0 – Use IPv4-like dot-notation. IP addresses, and subnetwork mask if
applicable, are dot-separated.
1 – Use IPv6-like colon-notation. IP address, and subnetwork mask if
applicable and when given explicitly, are separated by a space.
<IPv6_SubnetNotation> - decides the subnet-notation for <remote address and
subnet mask>
Setting does not apply if IPv6 address format <IPv6_AddressFormat> = 0.
0 – Both IP address, and subnet mask are started explicitly, separated by a
space.
1 – The printout format is applying /(forward slash) subnet-prefix Classless
Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation.
<IPv6_LeadingZeros> - decides whether leading zeros are omitted or not.
Setting does not apply if IPv6 address format <IPv6_AddressFormat> = 0.
0 – Leading zeros are omitted.
1 – Leading zeros are included.
<IPv6_CompressZeros> - decides whether 1-n instances of 16-bit- zero-values
are replaced by only “::”. This applies only once. Setting does not apply if IPv6
address format <IPv6_AddressFormat> = 0.
0 – No zero compression.
1 – Use zero compression.
AT+CGPIAF?
Read command returns the current parameter setting.
AT+CGPIAF=?
Test command returns values supported as compound parameter setting.
Example
AT+CGPIAF=0,0,0,0
OK
AT#SGACT=1,1
#SGACT: 252.1.171.171.205.205.239.224.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.1
OK
at+CGPIAF=1,0,0,0
OK
AT#SGACT=1,1
#SGACT: FC01:ABAB:CDCD:EFE0:0:0:0:1
OK
5.1.4.7.19. Set Mode of operation for EPS - +CEMODE
+CEMODE – Set mode of operation for EPS
AT+CEMODE=[<mod
e>]
SELINT 2
Set command configures the mode of operation for EPS.
Parameter:
<mode>: a numeric parameter which indicates the mode of operation
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 132 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CEMODE – Set mode of operation for EPS
0 : PS mode 2 of operation
1 : CS/PS mode 1 of operation
2 : CS/PS mode 2 of operation
3 : PS mode 1 of operation
SELINT 2
NOTE1: the default value depends on product and the support of VoLTE.
NOTE2: the definition for UE modes of operation can be found in
3GPP TS 24.301 [83]
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to
the set command.
AT+CEMODE?
Read command returns the currently configured values, in the format:
+CEMODE: < mode >
NOTE: The read command will return right values after set command, but
effectively the mode of operation changes after power cycle.
AT+CEMODE=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameters < mode>.
Example
AT+CEMODE=1
OK
AT+CEMODE?
+CEMODE: 1
OK
5.1.4.7.20. Voice domain preference - +CEVDP
+CEVDP – Voice domain preference
AT+CEVDP=<domain>
SELINT 2
Set command selects the voice domain preference.
<domain> - voice domain preference
1 – CS voice only
2 – CS voice preferred, IMS PS voice as secondary
3 – IMS PS voice preferred, CS as secondary
4 – IMS PS voice only
Note: parameter <domain> is saved in NVM.
Note: the default value depends on product and the support of
VoLTE.
AT+CEVDP?
Read command returns the selected domain in the format
+CEVDP: <domain>
AT+CEVDP=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of the parameter
<domain>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.007
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 133 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.4.8.
5.1.4.8.1.
Commands for Battery Charger
Battery Charge - +CBC
+ CBC - Battery Charge
AT+CBC
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the current Battery Charge status in the format:
+CBC: <bcs>,<bcl>
where:
<bcs> - battery status
0 - ME is powered by the battery
1 - ME has a battery connected, and charger pin is being powered
2 - ME does not have a battery connected
3 - Recognized power fault, calls inhibited
<bcl> - battery charge level, only if <bcs>=0
0 - battery is exhausted, or ME does not have a battery connected
25 - battery charge remained is estimated to be 25%
50 - battery charge remained is estimated to be 50%
75 - battery charge remained is estimated to be 75%
100 - battery is fully charged.
Note: <bcs>=1 indicates that the battery charger supply is inserted and the
battery is being recharged if necessary with it. Supply for ME operations is
taken anyway from VBATT pins.
Note: without battery/power connected on VBATT pins or during a power fault
the unit is not working, therefore values <bcs>=2 and <bcs>=3 will never
appear.
Note: <bcl> indicates battery charge level only if battery is connected
and charger is not connected
Note: The ME does not make differences between being powered by a
battery or by a power supply on the VBATT pins, so it is not possible to
distinguish between these two cases.
AT+CBC=?
Test command returns parameter values supported as a compound value.
+CBC: (0-3),(0-100)
Example
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
AT+CBC
+CBC: 0,75
OK
Page 134 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.
3GPP TS 27.005 AT Commands for SMS and CBS
5.1.5.1.
General Configuration
5.1.5.1.1.
Select Message Service - +CSMS
+CSMS - Select Message Service
AT+CSMS=
<service>
SELINT 2
Set command selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of
messages supported by the ME:
Parameter:
<service>
0 – 3GPP TS 23.040 and 3GPP TS 23.041. The syntax of SMS AT commands
is compatible with 3GPP TS 27.005 (factory default)
1 – 3GPP TS 23.040 and 3GPP TS 23.041. The syntax of SMS AT commands
is compatible with 3GPP TS 27.005. The requirement of <service> setting 1
is mentioned under corresponding command descriptions
Set command returns the types of messages supported by the ME:
+CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm>
where:
<mt> - mobile terminated messages support
0 - type not supported
1 - type supported
<mo> - mobile originated messages support
0 - type not supported
1 - type supported
<bm> - broadcast type messages support
0 - type not supported
1 - type supported
AT+CSMS?
Read command reports current service setting along with supported message
types in the format:
+CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
where:
<service> - messaging service (see above)
<mt> - mobile terminated messages support (see above)
<mo> - mobile originated messages support (see above)
<bm> - broadcast type messages support (see above)
AT+CSMS=?
Test command reports the supported value of the parameter <service>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005; 3GPP TS 23.040; 3GPP TS 23.041
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 135 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.1.2.
Preferred Message Storage - +CPMS
+CPMS - Preferred Message Storage
AT+CPMS=
<memr>
[,<memw>
[,<mems>]]
SELINT 2
Set command selects memory storages <memr>, <memw> and <mems> to be
used for reading, writing, sending and storing SMS.
Parameters:
<memr> - memory from which messages are read and deleted
"SM" - SIM SMS memory storage (default)
“ME” – NVM SMS storage
<memw> - memory to which writing and sending operations are made
"SM" - SIM SMS memory storage (default)
“ME” – NVM SMS storage
<mems> - memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored
"SM" - SIM SMS memory storage (default)
“ME” – NVM SMS storage
The command returns the memory storage status in the format:
+CPMS: <usedr>,<totalr>,<usedw>,<totalw>,<useds>,<totals>
where:
<usedr> - number of SMs stored into <memr>
<totalr> - max number of SMs that <memr> can contain
<usedw> - number of SMs stored into <memw>
<totalw> max number of SMs that <memw> can contain
<useds> - number of SMs stored into <mems>
<totals> - max number of SMs that <mems> can contain
Note: when <memr> is set to a memory, also <memw> and <mems> are set to
the same memory.
Note: the set memory is automatically saved in NVM.
AT+CPMS?
Read command reports the message storage status in the format:
+CPMS: <memr>,<usedr>,<totalr>,<memw>,<usedw>,<totalw>,
<mems>,<useds>,<totals>
where <memr>, <memw> and <mems> are the selected storage memories for
reading, writing and storing respectively.
AT+CPMS=?
Test command reports the supported values for parameters <memr>, <memw>
and <mems>
Example
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS: "SM",5,10,"SM",5,10,"SM",5,10
OK
(you have 5 out of 10 SMS SIM positions occupied)
AT+CPMS="ME"
+CPMS: "ME",15,100,"ME",15,100,"ME",15,100
OK
(change memory to ME where there are 15 SMS positions occupied)
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
3GPP TS 27.005
Page 136 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.1.3.
Message Format - +CMGF
+CMGF - Message Format
AT+CMGF=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the format of messages used with send, list, read and
write commands.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - PDU mode, as defined in 3GPP TS 23.040 and 3GPP TS 23.041 (factory
default)
1 - text mode
AT+CMGF?
Read command reports the current value of the parameter <mode>.
AT+CMGF=?
Test command reports the supported value of <mode> parameter.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 137 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.2.
Message Configuration
5.1.5.2.1.
Service Center Address - +CSCA
+CSCA -Service Center Address
AT+CSCA=
<number>
[,<type>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the Service Center Address to be used for mobile originated
SMS transmissions.
Parameter:
<number> - SC phone number in the format defined by <type>
<type> - the type of number
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
Note: to use the SM service, is mandatory to set a Service Center Address at
which service requests will be directed.
Note: in Text mode, this setting is used by send and write commands; in PDU
mode, setting is used by the same commands, but only when the length of the
SMSC address coded into the <pdu> parameter equals zero.
Note: the current settings are stored through +CSAS
AT+CSCA?
Read command reports the current value of the SCA in the format:
+CSCA: <number>,<type>
Note: if SCA is not present the device reports an error message.
AT+CSCA=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
5.1.5.2.2.
Set Text Mode Parameters - +CSMP
+CSMP - Set Text Mode Parameters
AT+CSMP=
[<fo>
[,<vp>
[,<pid>
[,<dcs>]]]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command is used to select values for additional parameters for storing and
sending SMs when the text mode is used (AT+CMGF=1)
Parameters:
<fo> - first octet of 3GPP TS 23.040 SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-DELIVER, in integer
format (default 17, i.e. SMS-SUBMIT with validity period in relative format).
As first octet of a PDU has the following bit field description
(bit[7]bit[6]bit[5]bit[4]bit[3]bit[2]bit[1]bit[0]):
bit[1]bit[0]: Message Type Indicator, 2-bit field describing the message
type;
[00] - SMS-DELIVER;
[01] - SMS-SUBMIT (default) ;
bit[2]: Reject Duplicates, 1-bit field: user is not responsible for setting this
bit and, if any set, it will have no meaning (default is [0]);
bit[4]bit[3]: Validity Period Format, 2-bit field indicating whether or not the
Validity Period field is present (default is [10]):
[00] - Validity Period field not present
[01] - Validity Period field present in enhanced format(i.e. quoted timestring type, see below)
[10] - Validity Period field present in relative format, (i.e. integer type, see
below)
[11] - Validity Period field present in absolute format (i.e. quoted timestring type, see below)
Page 138 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSMP - Set Text Mode Parameters
SELINT 2
bit[5]: Status Report Request, 1-bit field indicating the MS is requesting a
status report (default is [0]);
[0] - MS is not requesting a status report
[1] - MS is requesting a status report
bit[6]: User Data Header Indicator, 1-bit field: user is not responsible for
setting this bit and, if any set, it will have no meaning (default is [0]);
bit[7]: Reply Path, 1-bit field indicating the request for Reply Path (default
is [0]);
[0] - Reply Path not requested
[1] - Reply Path requested
<vp> - depending on <fo> setting:
a) if <fo> asks for a Not Present Validity Period, <vp> can be any type
and it will be not considered;
b) if <fo> asks for a Validity Period in relative format, <vp> shall be
integer type (default 167, i.e. 24 hours);
0..143 - (<vp> + 1) x 5 minutes
144..167 - 12 hours + ((<vp> - 143) x 30 minutes)
168..196 - (<vp> - 166) x 1 day
197..255 - (<vp> - 192) x 1 week
c) if <fo> asks for a Validity Period in absolute format, <vp> shall be
quoted time-string type (see +CCLK)
d) if <fo> asks for a Validity Period in enhanced format, <vp> shall be
the quoted hexadecimal representation (string type) of 7 octets, as
follows:
• the first octet is the Validity Period Functionality Indicator,
indicating the way in which the other 6 octets are used; let’s
consider its bit field description:
bit[7]: extension bit
[0] - there are no more VP Fuctionality Indicator extension
octets to follow
bit[6]: Single Shot SM;
[0] - the SC is not required to make up to one delivery attempt
[1] - the SC is required to make up to one delivery attempt
bit[5]bit[4]bit[3]: reserved
[000]
bit[2]bit[1]bit[0]: Validity Period Format
[000] - No Validity Period specified
[001] - Validity Period specified as for the relative format. The
following octet contains the VP value as described before; all
the other octets are 0’s.
[010] - Validity Period is relative in integer representation. The
following octet contains the VP value in the range 0 to 255,
representing 0 to 255 seconds; all the other octets are 0’s.
[011] - Validity Period is relative in semi-octet representation.
The following 3 octets contain the relative time in Hours,
Minutes and Seconds, giving the length of the validity period
counted from when the SMS-SUBMIT is received by the SC;
all the other octets are 0’s.
<pid> - 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default 0).
<dcs> - depending on the command or result code: 3GPP TS 23.038
SMS Data Coding Scheme (default 0), or Cell Broadcast Data
Coding Scheme
Note: the current settings are stored through +CSAS
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 139 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSMP - Set Text Mode Parameters
SELINT 2
Note: we’re storing through +CSAS the <vp> value too, but only as integer type,
i.e. only in its relative format
Note: <vp>, <pid> and <dcs> default values are loaded from first SIM SMS
Parameters profile, if present. If it is not present, then the default values are
those above indicated.
AT+CSMP?
Read command reports the current setting in the format:
+CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
Note: if the Validity Period Format (<fo>’s bit[4]bit[3]) is [00] (i.e. Not Present),
<vp> is represented just as a quoted empty string (“”).
AT+CSMP=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
Set the parameters for an outgoing message with 24 hours of validity period and
default properties:
AT+CSMP=17,167,0,0
OK
Set the parameters for an outgoing message with validity period in enhanced
format: the <vp> string actually codes 24 hours of validity period.
AT+CSMP=9,“01A80000000000“
OK
Set the parameters for an outgoing message with validity period in enhanced
format: the <vp> string actually codes 60 seconds of validity period.
AT+CSMP=9,“023C0000000000“
OK
Set the parameters for an outgoing message with validity period in enhanced
format: the <vp> string actually codes 29 hours 85 minutes 30 seconds of
validity period.
AT+CSMP=9,“03925803000000“
OK
Reference
5.1.5.2.3.
3GPP TS 27.005; 3GPP TS 23.040; 3GPP TS 23.038
Show Text Mode Parameters - +CSDH
+CSDH - Show Text Mode Parameters
AT+CSDH=
[<show>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls whether detailed header information is shown in text
mode (AT+CMGF=1) result codes.
Parameter:
<show>
0 - do not show header values defined in commands +CSCA and +CSMP
(<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>, <pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or
<tooa> in +CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and
SMS-SUBMITs in text mode. For SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR result code
do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>, <length> or <cdata>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 140 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSDH - Show Text Mode Parameters
1 - show the values in result codes
AT+CSDH?
SELINT 2
Read command reports the current setting in the format:
+CSDH: <show>
AT+CSDH=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <show>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
5.1.5.2.4.
Select Cell Broadcast - +CSCB
+CSCB -Select Cell Broadcast Message Types
AT+CSCB=
[<mode>[,<mids>
[,<dcss>]]]
SELINT 2
Set command selects which types of Cell Broadcast Messages are to be
received by the device.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 - the message types defined by <mids> and <dcss> are accepted (factory
default)
1 - the message types defined by <mids> and <dcss> are rejected
<mids> - Message Identifiers, string type: all different possible combinations of
the CBM message identifiers; default is empty string (“”).
<dcss> - Data Coding Schemes, string type: all different possible combinations
of CBM data coding schemes; default is empty string (“”).
Note: the current settings are stored through +CSAS
AT+CSCB?
Read command reports the current value of parameters <mode>, <mids> and
<dcss>.
AT+CSCB=?
Test command returns the range of values for parameter <mode>.
Example
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: 1,"",""
OK
(all CBMs are accepted, none is rejected)
AT+CSCB=0,"0,1,300-315,450","0-3"
OK
Reference
5.1.5.2.5.
3GPP TS 27.005, 3GPP TS 23.041, 3GPP TS 23.038.
Save Settings - +CSAS
+CSAS - Save Settings
AT+CSAS
[=<profile>]
SELINT 2
Execution command saves settings which have been made by the +CSCA,
+CSMP and +CSCB commands in local non volatile memory.
Parameter:
<profile>
0 - it saves the settings to NVM (factory default).
1..n - SIM profile number; the value of n depends on the SIM and its max is 3.
Note: certain settings may not be supported by the SIM and therefore they are
always saved to NVM, regardless the value of <profile>.
Note: If parameter is omitted the settings are saved in the non volatile memory.
Note: +CSCB <mids> ( Message Identifiers ) parameter can be saved to SIM
only if the “Cell broadcast message identifier selection” file is present on the SIM
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 141 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSAS - Save Settings
SELINT 2
itself. This file, if present, has storage for only a single set of data. Therefore, it
is not possible to save different <mids> in different SIM profiles; <mids> value,
once changed and saved, will be the same for all SIM profiles.
AT+CSAS=?
Test command returns the possible range of values for the parameter <profile>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
5.1.5.2.6.
Restore Settings - +CRES
+CRES - Restore Settings
SELINT 2
Execution command restores message service settings saved by +CSAS
command from either NVM or SIM.
AT+CRES
[=<profile>]
Parameter:
<profile>
0 - it restores message service settings
from NVM.
1..n - it restores message service settings from SIM. The value of n depends
on the SIM and its max is 3.
Note: certain settings may not be supported by the SIM and therefore they are
always restored from NVM, regardless the value of <profile>.
Note: If parameter is omitted the command restores message service settings
from NVM.
AT+CRES=?
Test command returns the possible range of values for the parameter <profile>.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
5.1.5.2.7.
More message to send - +CMMS
+CMMS – More Message to Send
AT+CMMS=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command controls the continuity of SMS relay protocol link. When feature is
enabled (and supported by network) multiple messages can be sent much faster
as link is kept open.
Parameter:
<n>
0 - disable (factory default)
1 - keep enabled until the time between the response of the latest message
send command (+CMGS, +CMSS, etc.) and the next send command exceeds 5
seconds, then the link is closed and the parameter <n> is automatically reset to
0
2 - enable (if the time between the response of the latest message send
command and the next send command exceeds 5 seconds, the link is closed
but the parameter <n> remains set to 2)
AT+CMMS?
Read command reports the current value of the parameter <n> in the format:
+CMMS: <n>
AT+CMMS=?
Test command returns the range of supported <n>
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 142 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.3.
5.1.5.3.1.
Message Receiving and Reading
New Message Indications - +CNMI
+CNMI - New Message Indications To Terminal Equipment
AT+CNMI=[
<mode>[,<mt>
[,<bm>[,<ds>
[,<bfr>]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the behaviour of the device on how the receiving of new
messages from the network is indicated to the DTE.
Parameter:
<mode> - unsolicited result codes buffering option
0 - Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full,
indications can be buffered in some other place or the oldest indications may be
discarded and replaced with the new received indications.
1 - Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result codes
when TA-TE link is reserved, otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
2 - Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA in case the DTE is busy and flush them
to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
3 - if <mt> is set to 1 the hardware ring line is enabled for 1 s. when a SMS is
received while the module is in GPRS online mode.
<mt> - result code indication reporting for SMS-DELIVER
0 - No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE and messages are stored in
SIM.
1 - If SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA, indication of the memory location is
routed to the TE using the following unsolicited result code:
+CMTI: <mems>,<index>
where:
<mems> - memory storage where the new message is stored (see +CPMS)
<index> - location on the memory where SMS is stored.
2 - SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages and messages in the “store”
message waiting indication group) are routed directly to the TE using the
following unsolicited result code:
(PDU Mode)
+CMT: <alpha>,<length><CR><LF><pdu>
where:
<alpha> - alphanumeric representation of originator/destination number
corresponding to the entry found in MT phonebook; used character
set should be the one selected with command +CSCS.
<length> - PDU length
<pdu> - PDU message
(TEXT Mode)
+CMT:<oa>,<alpha>,<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (the information written in italics
will be present depending on +CSDH last setting)
where:
<oa> - originating address, string type converted in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS)
<alpha> - alphanumeric representation of <oa>; used character set should be
the one selected with command +CSCS.
<scts> - arrival time of the message to the SC
<tooa>, <tosca> - type of number <oa> or <sca>:
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
<fo> - first octet of 3GPP TS 23.040
<pid> - Protocol Identifier
<dcs> - Data Coding Scheme
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 143 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CNMI - New Message Indications To Terminal Equipment
SELINT 2
<sca> - Service Centre address, string type, converted in the currently
selected character set (see +CSCS)
<length> - text length
<data> - TP-User-Data
• If <dcs> indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo>
indicates that GSM03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set (bit 6
of <fo> is 0), each character of GSM alphabet will be converted into
current TE character set (see +CSCS)
• If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or
<fo> indicates that GSM03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set (bit
6 of <fo> is 1), each 8-bit octet will be converted into two IRA character
long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet 0x2A will be converted as two
characters 0x32 0x41)
Class 2 messages and messages in the “store” message waiting indication
group result in indication as defined in <mt>=1.
3 - Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result codes
defined in <mt>=2. Messages of other data coding schemes result in indication
as defined in <mt>=1.
<bm> - broadcast reporting option
0 - Cell Broadcast Messages are not sent to the DTE
2 - New Cell Broadcast Messages are sent to the DTE with the unsolicited result
code:
(PDU Mode)
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><PDU>
where:
<length> - PDU length
<PDU> - message PDU
(TEXT Mode)
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<pag>,<pags><CR><LF><data>
where:
<sn> - message serial number
<mid> - message ID
<dcs> - Data Coding Scheme
<pag> - page number
<pags> - total number of pages of the message
<data> - CBM Content of Message
• If <dcs> indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used , each
character of GSM alphabet will be converted into current TE character
set (see +CSCS)
• If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, each
8-bit octet will be converted into two IRA character long hexadecimal
number (e.g. octet 0x2A will be converted as two characters 0x32 0x41)
<ds> - SMS-STATUS-REPORTs reporting option
0 - status report receiving is not reported to the DTE and is not stored
1 - the status report is sent to the DTE with the following unsolicited result code:
(PDU Mode)
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><PDU>
where:
<length> - PDU length
<PDU> - message PDU
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 144 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CNMI - New Message Indications To Terminal Equipment
SELINT 2
(TEXT Mode)
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,<ra>,<tora>,<scts>,<dt>,<st>
where:
<fo> - first octet of the message PDU
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-MessageReference in integer format
<ra> - recipient address, string type, represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS)
<tora> - type of number <ra>
<scts> - arrival time of the message to the SC
<dt> - sending time of the message
<st> - message status as coded in the PDU
2 - if a status report is stored, then the following unsolicited result code is sent:
+CDSI: <memr>,<index>
where:
<memr> - memory storage where the new message is stored
"SM"
<index> - location on the memory where SMS is stored
<bfr> - buffered result codes handling method:
0 - TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to
the TE when <mode>=1..3 is entered (OK response shall be given before
flushing the codes)
1 - TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared
when <mode>=1..3 is entered.
AT+CNMI?
Read command returns the current parameter settings for +CNMI command in the
form:
+CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
AT+CNMI=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the +CNMI command
parameters.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
Note
DTR signal is ignored, hence the indication is sent even if the DTE is inactive ( DTR
signal is Low). In this case the unsolicited result code may be lost so if MODULE
remains active while DTE is not, at DTE startup is suggested to check whether new
messages have reached the device meanwhile with command AT+CMGL=0 that
lists the new messages received.
Note
It has been necessary to take the following decisions to get over any incoherence
problem, due to the possibility to have contemporaneous different settings of
parameter <mt> in different sessions (see #PORTCFG and +CMUX):
Message Class or
Indication group,
as in the DCS
<mt> settings in
different sessions
<mt>=2 for session “0”
AND
<mt>=anyvalue for other
session(s)
SM Class is No Class
OR
SM Class is 0 or 1 or 3
OR
SM is an Indication with
group “Discard”
URC is shown only
on session “0”
<mt>=3 for session “0”
AND
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SM Class is 3
Page 145 of 464
URC is shown only
on session “0”
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CNMI - New Message Indications To Terminal Equipment
SELINT 2
<mt>=0 or 1 for other
session(s)
Note
The following table clarifies which URC is shown and if the DELIVER SM is stored,
depending on the <mt> parameter value and the SM class.
SM CLASS
0 / msg
waiting
discard
1 / no
class
2
3
msg
waiting
store
0
Store in
<mems>
Store in
<mems>
Store in
SIM
Store in
<mems>
Store in
<mems>
1
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
Store in
SIM - Send
ind +CMTI
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
2
Route msg
to TE:
+CMT 1
Route msg
to TE:
+CMT1
Store in
SIM - Send
ind +CMTI
Route msg
to TE:
+CMT1
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
Store in
<mems>Send ind
+CMTI
Store in
SIM - Send
ind +CMTI
Route msg
to TE:
+CMT1
Store in
<mems> Send ind
+CMTI
<mt>
7F 7F
3
where <mems> is the memory where the received messages are stored (see
+CPMS)
Note
It has been necessary to take the following decision to get over an incoherence
problem, due to the possibility to have contemporaneous different settings of
parameter <ds> in different sessions (see #PORTCFG and +CMUX):
<ds> settings in different
sessions
1
<ds>=1 for session “0”
AND
<ds>=2 for at least one of the other
sessions
URC +CDS is shown only on session “0”
and no status report is stored on SIM
<ds>=0 for session “0”
AND
<ds>=2 for at least one of the other
sessions
no URC is shown on any session and no
status report is stored on SIM
The SM is not stored!
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 146 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.3.2.
New message acknowledgement - +CNMA
+CNMA – New Message Acknowledgement
AT+CNMA
SELINT 2
Execution command confirms correct reception of a new message (SMSDELIVER or SMS-STATUS-REPORT) which is routed directly to the TE.
Acknowledge with +CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1
(+CSMS=1) when a +CMT or +CDS indication is shown.
If no acknowledgement is given within the network timeout (17 seconds), an RPERROR is sent to the network, the <mt> and <ds> parameters of the +CNMI
command are then reset to zero (do not show new message indication).
If command is executed, but no acknowledgement is expected, or some other
ME related error occurs, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
The AT command syntax and functionalities are different between SMS PDU
Mode and SMS Text Mode, as explained below.
(PDU Mode)
AT+CNMA[=<n>[,<len
gth>[<CR>PDU is
given<ctrl-Z/ESC]]]
Either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERROR) acknowledgement to the
network is possible. Parameter <n> defines which one will be sent. Optionally
(when <length> is greater than zero) an acknowledgement TPDU (SMSDELIVER-REPORT for RP-ACK or RP-ERROR) may be sent to the network.
The entering of PDU is done similarly as specified in command Send Message
+CMGS, except that the SMSC address field is not present.
Parameter:
<n> - Type of acknowledgement in PDU mode
0 : send RP-ACK without PDU (same as TEXT mode)
1 : send RP-ACK with optional PDU message.
2 : send RP-ERROR with optional PDU message.
<length> : Length of the PDU message.
(Text Mode)
AT+CNMA
Only positive acknowledgement to network (RP-ACK) is possible.
(PDU Mode)
AT+CNMA=?
Test command returns the possible range of values for the parameter <n>
(Text Mode)
AT+CNMA=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Notes
1 - In case that a directly routed message must be buffered in ME/TA (possible
when +CNMI parameter <mode> equals 0 or 2) or AT interpreter remains too
long in a state where result codes cannot be sent to TE (e.g. user is entering a
message using +CMGS), acknowledgement (RP-ACK) is sent to the network
without waiting +CNMA command from TE.
2 - It has been necessary to take the following decision to get over any
incoherence problem, due to the possibility to have contemporaneous different
settings of parameter <mt> and <ds> of the +CNMI command in different
sessions (see #PORTCFG and +CMUX): only the <mt> and <ds> setting for
session “0” are considered as valid to decide if +CNMA acknowledgment is
expected or not.
(PDU Mode)
Example
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 147 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CNMA – New Message Acknowledgement
AT+CSMS=1
+CSMS: 1,1,1
OK
SELINT 2
Set PDU mode.
AT+CMGF=0
OK
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
OK
Message is received from network.
+CMT: "",70
06816000585426000480980600F170110370537284…
Send positive acknowledgement to the network.
AT+CNMA=0
OK
Message is received from network.
+CMT: "",70
06816000585426000480980600F170110370537284…
Send negative acknowledgment (Unspecified error) to the network.
AT+CNMA=2,3<CR>
> 00FF00 <Ctrl-Z>
OK
(Text Mode)
AT+CSMS=1
+CSMS: 1,1,1
OK
Set Text mode.
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
OK
Message is received from network.
+CMT: "+821020955219",,"07/07/26,20:09:07+36"
TEST MESSAGE
Send positive acknowledgement to the network.
AT+CNMA
OK
Reference
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
3GPP TS 27.005
Page 148 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.3.3.
List Messages - +CMGL
+CMGL - List Messages
AT+CMGL
[=<stat>]
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the list of all the messages with status value <stat>
stored into <memr> message storage (<memr> is the message storage for
read and delete SMs as last settings of command +CPMS).
The parameter type and the command output depend on the last settings of
command +CMGF (message format to be used)
Parameter:
<stat>
0 - new message
1 - read message
2 - stored message not yet sent
3 - stored message already sent
4 - all messages.
(PDU Mode)
If there is at least one message to be listed the representation format is:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<alpha>,<length><CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<alpha>,<length><CR><LF><pdu>[...]]
where:
<index> - message position in the memory storage list.
<stat> - status of the message
<alpha> - string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa>,
corresponding to an entry found in the phonebook; used character
set is the one selected with command +CSCS.
<length> - length of the PDU in bytes
<pdu> - message in PDU format according to 3GPP TS 23.040
(Text Mode)
Parameter:
<stat>
"REC UNREAD" - new message
"REC READ" - read message
"STO UNSENT" - stored message not yet sent
"STO SENT" - stored message already sent
"ALL" - all messages.
The representation format for stored messages (either sent or unsent) or
received messages (either read or unread, not message delivery confirm) is (the
information written in italics will be present depending on +CSDH last setting):
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,<alpha>,<scts>[,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,<alpha>,<scts>[,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[...]]
where:
<index> - message position in the storage
<stat> - message status
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 149 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGL - List Messages
SELINT 2
<oa/da> - originator/destination address, string type , represented in the
currently selected character set (see +CSCS)
<alpha> - string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa>,
corresponding to an entry found in the phonebook; used character
set is the one selected with command +CSCS.
<scts> - TP-Service Centre Time Stamp in Time String Format
<tooa/toda> - type of number <oa/da>
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
<length> - text length
<data> - TP-User-Data
• If <dcs> indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used , each character
of GSM alphabet will be converted into current TE character set (see
+CSCS)
• If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, each 8bit octet will be converted into two IRA character long hexadecimal number
(e.g. octet 0x2A will be converted as two characters 0x32 0x41)
• If <fo> indicates that a UDH is present each 8-bit octet will be converted
into two IRA character long hexadecimal number. The <length> indicates
text length in characters without UDH length.
If there is at least one message delivery confirm to be listed the representation
format is:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,<ra>,<tora>,<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,<ra>,<tora>,<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[...]]
where
<index> - message position in the storage
<stat> - message status
<fo> - first octet of the message PDU
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Message-Reference
in integer format
<ra> - recipient address, string type , represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS)
<tora> - type of number <ra>
<scts> - arrival time of the message to the SC
<dt> - sending time of the message
<st> - message status as coded in the PDU
Note: If parameter is omitted the command returns the list of sms with
“REC UNREAD” status.
Note: the order in which the messages are reported by +CMGL
corresponds to their position in the memory storage
AT+CMGL=?
Test command returns a list of supported <stat>s
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005, 3GPP TS 23.040
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 150 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.3.4.
Read Message - +CMGR
+CMGR - Read Message
AT+CMGR=
<index>
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the message with location value <index> from <memr>
message storage (<memr> is the message storage for read and delete SMs as last
settings of command +CPMS).
Parameter:
<index> - message index.
The output depends on the last settings of command +CMGF (message format to be
used)
(PDU Mode)
If there is a message in location <index>, the output has the following format:
+CMGR: <stat>,<alpha>,<length><CR><LF><pdu>
where
<stat> - status of the message
0 - new message
1 - read message
2 - stored message not yet sent
3 - stored message already sent
<alpha> - string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa>, corresponding
to an entry found in the phonebook; used character set is the one selected
with command +CSCS.
<length> - length of the PDU in bytes.
<pdu> - message in PDU format according to 3GPP TS 23.040.
The status of the message and entire message data unit <pdu> is returned.
(Text Mode)
If there is a Received message in location <index> the output format is (the
information written in italics will be present depending on +CSDH last setting):
+CMGR: <stat>,<oa>,<alpha>,<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,
<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
If there is either a Sent or an Unsent message in location <index> the output format
is:
+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,<alpha>[,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
If there is a Message Delivery Confirm in location <index> the output format is:
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,<ra>,<tora>,<scts>,<dt>,<st>
where:
<stat> - status of the message
"REC UNREAD" - new received message unread
"REC READ" - received message read
"STO UNSENT" - message stored not yet sent
"STO SENT" - message stored already sent
<fo> - first octet of the message PDU
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 151 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGR - Read Message
SELINT 2
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in
integer format
<ra> - recipient address, string type, represented in the currently selected character
set (see +CSCS)
<tora> - type of number <ra>
<scts> - arrival time of the message to the SC
<dt> - sending time of the message
<st> - message status as coded in the PDU
<pid> - Protocol Identifier
<dcs> - Data Coding Scheme
<vp> - Validity Period; its format depends on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting (see
+CSMP):
a) Not Present if <fo> tells that the Validity Period Format is Not Present
b) Integer type if <fo> tells that the Validity Period Format is Relative
c) Quoted time-string type if <fo> tells that the Validity Period Format is
Absolute
d) Quoted hexadecimal representation of 7 octets if <fo> tells that the Validity
Period Format is Enhanced.
<oa> - Originator address, string type represented in the currently selected character
set (see +CSCS)
<da> - Destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS)
<alpha> - string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa>, corresponding to
an entry found in the phonebook; used character set is the one selected
with command +CSCS.
<sca> - Service Centre number
<tooa>,<toda >,<tosca> - type of number <oa>,<da>,<sca>
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
<length> - text length
<data> - TP-User_data
• If <dcs> indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used , each character of
GSM alphabet will be converted into current TE character set (see +CSCS)
• If <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, each 8-bit
octet will be converted into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g.
octet 0x2A will be converted as two characters 0x32 0x41)
Note: in both cases if status of the message is 'received unread', status in the
storage changes to 'received read'.
AT+CMGR=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 152 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.4.
Message Sending And Writing
5.1.5.4.1.
Send Message - +CMGS
+CMGS - Send Message
(PDU Mode)
AT+CMGS=
<length>
SELINT 2
(PDU Mode)
Execution command sends to the network a message.
Parameter:
<length> - length of the PDU to be sent in bytes (excluding the SMSC address
octets).
7..164
After command line is terminated with <CR>, the device responds sending a four
character sequence prompt:
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32)
and waits for the specified number of bytes.
Note: the DCD signal shall be in ON state while PDU is given.
Note: the echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by echo
command E
Note: the PDU shall be hexadecimal format (each octet of the PDU is given as two
IRA character long hexadecimal number) and given in one line.
Note: when the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the PDU) equals zero,
the SMSC address set with command +CSCA is used; in this case the SMSC
Type-of-Address octet shall not be present in the PDU.
To send the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without sending the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully sent to the network, then the result is sent in the format:
+CMGS: <mr>
where
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in
integer format.
Note: if message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, which may
take several seconds, no other SIM interacting commands are issued.
(Text Mode)
AT+CMGS=<da>
[,<toda>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
(Text Mode)
Execution command sends to the network a message.
Parameters:
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS).
<toda> - type of destination address
129 - number in national format
Page 153 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGS - Send Message
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
SELINT 2
After command line is terminated with <CR>, the device responds sending a four
character sequence prompt:
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32)
After this prompt text can be entered; the entered text should be formatted as
follows:
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used
and current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-User-DataHeader-Indication is not set, then ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM
alphabet, according to 3GPP TS 27.005, Annex A; backspace can be used to
delete last character and carriage returns can be used; after every <CR>
entered by the user the sequence <CR><LF><greather_than><space> is sent
to the TE.
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is
used or current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-UserData-Header-Indication is set, the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g.
the ‘asterisk’ will be entered as 2A (IRA50 and IRA65) and this will be converted
to an octet with integer value 0x2A)
Note: the DCD signal shall be in ON state while text is entered.
Note: the echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by echo
command E
To send the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without sending the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully sent to the network, then the result is sent in the format:
+CMGS: <mr>
where
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in
integer format.
Note: if message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, which may
take several seconds, no other SIM interacting commands are issued.
Note: it is possible to send a concatenation of at most 10 SMs; the maximum
number of chars depends on the <dcs>: 1520 chars if 3GPP TS 23.038 default
alphabet is used, 1330 chars if 8-bit is used, 660 chars if UCS2 is used. If entered
text is longer than this maximum value an error is raised
AT+CMGS=?
Test command resturns the OK result code.
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the +CMGS: <mr> or +CMS
ERROR: <err> response before issuing further commands.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 154 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.4.2.
Send Message From Storage - +CMSS
+CMSS - Send Message From Storage
AT+CMSS=
<index>[,<da>
[,<toda>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command sends to the network a message which is already stored in the
<memw> storage (see +CPMS) at the location <index>.
Parameters:
<index> - location value in the message storage <memw> of the message to send
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS); if it is given it shall be used instead of the one
stored with the message.
<toda> - type of destination address
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
If message is successfully sent to the network then the result is sent in the format:
+CMSS: <mr>
where:
<mr> - message reference number.
If message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported:
+CMS ERROR:<err>
Note: to store a message in the <memw> storage see command +CMGW.
Note: care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, which may
take several seconds, no other SIM interacting commands are issued.
AT+CMSS=?
Test command resturns the OK result code.
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the +CMSS: <mr> or +CMS ERROR:
<err> response before issuing further commands.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
5.1.5.4.3.
Write Message To Memory - +CMGW
+CMGW - Write Message To Memory
(PDU Mode)
AT+CMGW=
<length>
[,<stat>]
SELINT 2
(PDU Mode)
Execution command writes in the <memw> memory storage a new message.
Parameter:
<length> - length in bytes of the PDU to be written.
7..164
<stat> - message status.
0 - new message (received unread message; default for DELIVER messages
(3GPP TS 23.040 SMS-DELIVER messages))
1 - read message
2 - stored message not yet sent (default for SUBMIT messages(3GPP TS 23.040
SMS-SUBMIT messages))
3 - stored message already sent
The device responds to the command with the prompt '>' and waits for the specified
number of bytes.
To write the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 155 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGW - Write Message To Memory
To exit without writing the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
SELINT 2
If message is successfully written in the memory, then the result is sent in the
format:
+CMGW: <index>
where:
<index> - message location index in the memory <memw>.
If message storing fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, no other
SIM interacting commands are issued.
Note: in PDU mode, not only SUBMIT messages can be stored in SIM, but also
DELIVER and STATUS REPORT messages (3GPP TS 23.040 SMS-STATUSREPORT messages). SUBMIT messages can only be stored with status 2 or 3;
DELIVER and STATUS REPORT messages can only be stored with status 0 or 1.
(Text Mode)
(Text Mode)
AT+CMGW[=<da> Execution command writes in the <memw> memory storage a new message.
[,<toda>
Parameters:
[,<stat>]]]
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS).
<toda> - type of destination address.
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
<stat> - message status.
"REC UNREAD" - new received message unread (default for DELIVER messages)
"REC READ" - received message read
"STO UNSENT" - message stored not yet sent (default for SUBMIT messages)
"STO SENT" - message stored already sent
After command line is terminated with <CR>, the device responds sending a four
character sequence prompt:
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32)
After this prompt text can be entered; the entered text should be formatted as
follows:
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used
and current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-User-DataHeader-Indication is not set, then ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM
alphabet, according to 3GPP TS 27.005, Annex A; backspace can be used to
delete last character and carriage returns can be used; after every <CR> entered
by the user the sequence <CR><LF><greather_than><space> is sent to the TE.
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is
used or current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-User-DataHeader-Indication is set, the entered text should consist of two IRA character long
hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g. the ‘asterisk’
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 156 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGW - Write Message To Memory
SELINT 2
will be entered as 2A (IRA50 and IRA65) and this will be converted to an octet
with integer value 0x2A)
Note: the DCD signal shall be in ON state while text is entered.
Note: the echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by echo
command E
To write the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without writing the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully written in the memory, then the result is sent in the
format:
+CMGW: <index>
where:
<index> - message location index in the memory <memw>.
If message storing fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, no other
SIM interacting commands are issued.
Note: it is possible to save a concatenation of at most 10 SMs; the maximum number
of chars depends on the <dcs>: 1530 chars if 3GPP TS 23.038 default alphabet is
used, 1340 chars if 8-bit is used, 670 chars if UCS2 is used. If entered text is longer
than this maximum value an error is raised.
Note: in text mode, not only SUBMIT messages can be stored in SIM, but also
DELIVER messages.
The type of saved message depends upon the current <fo> parameter (see
+CSMP). For a DELIVER message, current <vp> parameter (see +CSMP) is used to
set the message Service Centre Time Stamp <scts>, so it has to be an absolute time
string, e.g. "09/01/12,11:15:00+04".
SUBMIT messages can only be stored with status "STO UNSENT" or "STO SENT";
DELIVER messages can only be stored with status "REC UNREAD" or "REC
READ".
AT+CMGW=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the +CMGW: <index> or +CMS
ERROR: <err> response before issuing further commands.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 157 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.4.4.
Delete Message - +CMGD
+CMGD - Delete Message
SELINT 2
Execution command deletes from memory <memr> the message(s).
AT+CMGD=
<index>
[,<delflag>]
Parameter:
<index> - message index in the selected storage <memr> that can have values
form 1 to N, where N depends on the available space (see +CPMS)
<delflag> - an integer indicating multiple message deletion request.
0 (or omitted) - delete message specified in <index>
1 - delete all read messages from <memr> storage, leaving unread messages
and stored mobile originated messages (whether sent or not) untouched
2 - delete all read messages from <memr> storage and sent mobile originated
messages, leaving unread messages and unsent mobile originated
messages untouched
3 - delete all read messages from <memr> storage, sent and unsent mobile
originated messages, leaving unread messages untouched
4 - delete all messages from <memr> storage.
Note: if <delflag> is present and not set to 0 then, if <index> is greater than 0,
<index> is ignored and ME shall follow the rules for <delflag> shown above.
AT+CMGD=?
Test command shows the valid memory locations and optionally the supported
values of <delflag>.
+CMGD: (supported <index>s list)[,(supported <delflag>s list)]
Example
AT+CMGD=?
+CMGD: (1,2,3,6,7,17,18,19,20,37,38,39,47),(0-4)
OK
Reference
5.1.5.4.5.
3GPP TS 27.005
Select service for MO SMS messages - +CGSMS
+CGSMS – Select service for MO SMS messages
AT+CGSMS=
[<service>]
SELINT 2
The set command is used to specify the service or service preference that the
MT will use to send MO SMS messages.
<service>: a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service
preference to be used
0 - GPRS
1 - circuit switched (default)
2 - GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if SMS via GPRS service not
available or GPRS not registered)
3 - circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if SMS via GSM service not available
or GSM not registered)
Note: the <service> value is saved on NVM as global parameter
AT+CGSMS?
The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference
in the form:
+CGSMS: <service>
AT+ CGSMS=?
Test command reports the supported list of currently available <service>s.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 158 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.5.
Message Sending And Writing (3GPP2 mode)
5.1.5.5.1.
Send Message From storage - +CMSS
+CMSS - Send Message From Storage
SELINT 2
AT+CMSS=<index>[,< Execution command sends to the network a message which is already stored in
da>[,<toda>]]
the
<memw> storage (see +CPMS) at the location <index>.
Parameters:
<index> - location value in the message storage <memw> of the message to
send
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS); if it is given it shall be used instead of the one
stored with the message.
<toda> - type of destination address
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
If message is successfully sent to the network then the OK result is shown.
If message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported:
+CMS ERROR:<err>
Note: to store a message in the <memw>storage see command +CMGW.
Note: care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, which
may take several seconds, no other SIM interacting commands are issued.
AT+CMSS=?
5.1.5.5.2.
Test command returns the OK result code.
Set Text Mode Parameters - +CSMP
+CSMP - Set Text Mode Parameters
AT+CSMP=[<callbac
k_addr>[,<tele_id>[,<
priority>[,<enc_type
>]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command is used to select values for additional parameters for storing and
sending SMs when the text mode is used (AT+CMGF=1)
Parameters:
<callback_addr>- Callback address.
Note: The maximum length is different with every carrier.
In case of Sprint and Aeris.Net: Maximum length is 32 characters
In case of Verizon: Maximum length is 20 characters
Note: Initially, this parameter is null. Some carrier networks discard SMS's
without
a callback number. Therefore, we recommend that customer setup callback
number using AT+CSMP command.
Note: The <callback_addr> isn’t used and saved for only Aeris.Net
<tele_id>- Teleservice ID
4097 - page
4098 - SMS message (factory default)
<priority> - Priority
Note: The priority is different with every carrier.
In case of Sprint and Aeris.Net:
0 - Normal (factory default)
1 - Interactive
2 - Urgent
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 159 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CSMP - Set Text Mode Parameters
3 - Emergency
In case of Verizon:
0 - Normal (factory default)
1 – High
SELINT 2
<enc_type>- data coding scheme:
0 - 8-bit Octet (factory default for only Aeris.Net)
2 - 7-bit ASCII (factory default)
4 - 16-bit Unicode (Sprint does not support)
Note: the current settings are stored through +CSAS
AT+CSMP?
Read command reports the current setting in the format:
+CSMP: <callback_addr>,<tele_id>,<priority>,<enc_type>
AT+CSMP=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT+CSMP=?
OK
AT+CSMP?
+CSMP: ,4098,0,0
OK
AT+CSMP="1234567890",4097,1,2
OK
AT+CSMP?
+CSMP: "1234567890",4097,1,2
OK
5.1.5.5.3.
Save Settings - +CSAS
+CSAS - Save Settings
AT+CSAS[=
<profile>]
SELINT 2
Execution command saves settings made by + CSMP command in local nonvolatile memory
Parameter:
<profile>
0 - it saves the settings to NVM.
Note: If parameter is omitted the settings are saved to profile 0 in the nonvolatile memory.
AT+CSAS=?
Test command returns the possible range of values for the parameter <profile>.
Example
AT+CSAS=?
+CSAS: (0)
OK
AT+CSAS
OK
AT+CSAS=0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 160 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.5.5.4.
Restore Settings - +CRES
+CRES - Restore Settings
AT+CRES[=
[<profile>]
SELINT 2
Execution command restores message service settings saved by +CSAS
command from NVM.
Parameter:
<profile>
0 - it restores message service settings from NVM.
Note: If parameter is omitted the command restores message service settings
from
NVM.
AT+CRES=?
Test command returns the possible range of values for the parameter <profile>.
Example
AT+CRES=?
+CRES: (0)
OK
AT+CRES
OK
AT+CRES=0
OK
5.1.5.5.5.
Send Message (3GPP2) - +CMGS
+CMGS - Send Message (3GPP2)
(PDU Mode)
AT+CMGS=
<length>
SELINT 2
(PDU Mode)
Execution command sends to the network a message. After command line is
terminated with <CR>, the device responds sending a four character sequence
prompt:
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) and waits for the
specified number of bytes.
Parameter:
<length>- length of the PDU to be sent in bytes (excluding the Destination
address octets).
5..183
Note: the echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by echo
command E
Note: the PDU shall be hexadecimal format (each octet of the PDU is given as
two IRA character long hexadecimal number) and given in one line.
To send the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without sending the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully sent to the network then the OK result is shown.
Note: if message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: The limit of user data is 160 characters.
Example – PDU mode AT+CMGF=0
OK
AT+CMGS=35
>
07801091346554F307801096224658F11002000016626262626262626262626
2626
2626262626262626262
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 161 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGS - Send Message (3GPP2)
SELINT 2
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
1091346554F3 <Destination_address:01194356453>
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
1096224658F1 <callback_address:01692264851>
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
00 <priority: normal>
00 <encoding_type: octet>
16 <data_len: 22>
62626262626262626262626262626262626262626262
<user_data: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb>
AT+CMGS=31
>
07801091346554F307801091346554F31002020212C3870E1C3870E1C38716
2C5
8B162C58B1620
OK
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
1091346554F3 <destination_address:01194356453>
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
1091346554F3 <callback_address: 01194356453>
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
02 <priority: ungent >
02 <encoding_type: 7-bit ASCII >
12 <data_len: 18>
C3870E1C3870E1C387162C58B162C58B1620
<user_data: aaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbb>
(Text Mode)
AT+CMGS=
<da>
[,<toda>]
(Text Mode)
Execution command sends to the network a message.
Parameters:
<da>- destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS);
ASCII characters in the set (0 9), #,*,(A D);
Note: The maximum length is different with every carrier.
In case of Sprint and Aeris.Net:
Maximum length is 32 characters
In case of Verizon:
Maximum length is 20 characters.
<toda>- type of destination address
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
To send the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without sending the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully sent to the network then the OK result is shown.
Note: if message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 162 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGS - Send Message (3GPP2)
SELINT 2
Note: To discard SMS, press the “ESC” key, an “OK” response will be
returned.
Example – Text mode AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGS="9194547830"
> Test SMS
OK
AT+CMGS=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the OK or +CMS
ERROR: <err> response before issuing further commands.
5.1.5.5.6.
List Messages (3GPP2) - +CMGL
+CMGL – List Messages
AT+CMGL=
[=<stat>]
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the list of all the messages with status value
<stat> stored into <memr> message storage (<memr> is the message storage
for read and delete SMs as last settings of command +CPMS).
The parameter type and the command output depend on the last settings of
command +CMGF (message format to be used)
Parameter:
<stat>
0 - new message
1 - read message
2 - stored message not yet sent
3 - stored message already sent
4 - all messages.
(PDU Mode)
Each message to be listed is represented in the format:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,””,<length><CR><LF><pdu>
Case of received message from base station:
<PDU>: <orig_num><date><tele_id><priority><enc_type><length><data>
Case of sending message to base station:
<PDU>: <da><callback><tele_id><priority><enc_type><length><data>
where:
<index> - message position in the memory storage list.
<stat> - status of the message
<length> - length of the PDU in bytes
<pdu> - message in PDU format
(Text Mode)
Parameter:
<stat>
"REC UNREAD" - new message
"REC READ" - read message
"STO UNSENT" - stored message not yet sent
"STO SENT" - stored message already sent
"ALL" - all messages.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 163 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGL – List Messages
SELINT 2
Each message to be listed is represented in the format (the information written
in italics will be present depending on +CSDH last setting):
If there is at least a Received message to be listed the representation format is:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<orig_num>,<callback>,<date>[,<tooa>,<tele_id>,<priority
>,<enc_type>,<length>]<CR><LF> <data>
If there is at least a Sent or an Unsent message to be listed the representation
format is:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<da>,<callback>[,,<toda>,<tele_id>,<priority>,<enc_type>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
Where
<orig_num> - Origination number.
<da> - Destination number.
<callback> - Callback number.
<date> - Received date in form as "YYYYMMDDHHMMSS".
<tooa> - Type of <orig_num>.
<toda> - Type of <da>.
<tele_id> - Teleservice ID.
4097 - page
4098 - SMS message
4099 - voice mail notification
262144 - voice mail notification
<priority> - Priority.
Note: The priority is different with every carrier.
0 - Normal (factory default)
1 - High
<enc_type>- Encoding type of message.
0 - Octet, unspecified (8-bit)
2 - ASCII (7-bit)
3 - IA5 (7-bit)
4 - Unicode (16-bit)
8 - ISO 8859 Latin 1 (8-bit)
9 - GSM (7-bit)
<length> - Length of message.
<data> - Message data. (Indicates the new voice mail count, if <tele_id> is
voice mail notification)
Note: If parameter is omitted the command returns the list of sms with “REC
UNREAD” status.
AT+CMGL=?
Test command returns a list of supported <stat>s
Example
<PDU Mode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 164 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGL – List Messages
Case of received message from base station:
SELINT 2
AT+CMGL=1
+CMGL: 29,1,"",52
07802811495346350808040947271002020221C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3
870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C20
OK
Where:
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
281149534635 <Origination number: 821194356453>
080804094727 <Date: 08/08/04,09:47:27>
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
02 <priority: urgent >
02 <encoding_type: 7-bit ASCII >
21 <data_len: 33>
C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C38
70E1C20
<user_data: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa>
Else:
AT+CMGL=2
+CMGL: 31,2,"",23
07801091346554F307801091346554F3100200000A61616161616161616161
OK
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr:128>
1091346554F3 <Destination_addr: 01194356453>
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr:128>
1096224658F1 <Callback_Number: 01692264851>
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
00 <priority: normal >
00 <encoding_type: 8-bit Octet >
0A <data_len: 10>
61616161616161616161 <data: aaaaaaaaaa>
<PDU Mode>
AT+CMGF=0
OK
AT+CMGF?
+CMGF: 0
OK
AT+CMGL=?
(0-4)
OK
AT+CMGL=4
+CMGL: 0,2,"",12
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 165 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGL – List Messages
SELINT 2
06801041394306001002000006313233343536
+CMGL: 1,2,"",15
06801041394306001002000009313233343536363737
+CMGL: 2,2,"",18
0680104139430600100200000C313132323334343434343434
+CMGL: 3,2,"",21
0680104139430600100200000F616666617364656565656565656565
OK
<Text Mode>
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGF?
+CMGF: 1
OK
AT+CMGL=?
("REC UNREAD","REC READ","STO UNSENT","STO SENT","ALL")
OK
at+cmgl="ALL"
+CMGL: 0,"STO UNSENT","My Number","",
123456
+CMGL: 1,"STO UNSENT","My Number","",
123456677
+CMGL: 2,"STO UNSENT","My Number","",
112234444444
+CMGL: 3,"STO UNSENT","My Number","",
affasdeeeeeeeee
OK
5.1.5.5.7.
Read Message (3GPP2) - +CMGR
+CMGR - Read Message
AT+CMGR=
<index>
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the message with location value <index> from
<memr> message storage (<memr> is the message storage for read and
delete SMs as last settings of command +CPMS).
Parameter:
<index> - message index.
The output depends on the last settings of command +CMGF (message format
to be used)
(PDU Mode)
If there is at least one message to be listed the representation format is:
+CMGR:<stat>,"",<length><CR><LF><PDU>
Case of received message from base station :
<PDU>:
<orig_num>,<date><tele_id><priority><enc_type><length><data>
Case of sending message to base station:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 166 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGR - Read Message
SELINT 2
<PDU>:
<da><callback><tele_id><priority><enc_type><length><data>
where
<stat> - status of the message
0 - new message
1 - read message
2 - stored message not yet sent
3 - stored message already sent
<length> - length of the PDU in bytes.
<pdu> - message in PDU format
(Text Mode)
Output format for received messages (the information written in italics will be
present depending on +CSDH last setting):
Output format for message delivery confirm:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<orig_num>,<callback>,<date>[,<tooa>,<tele_id>,<priority>,<enc_ty
pe>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
If there is either a Sent or an Unsent message in location <index> the output
format is:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,<callback>,[,<toda>,<tele_id>,<priority>,<enc_type>,<length>]
<CR><LF><data>
where:
<stat> - status of the message
"REC UNREAD" - new received message unread
"REC READ" - received message read
"STO UNSENT" - message stored not yet sent
"STO SENT" - message stored already sent
<orig_num> - Origination number.
<callback> - Callback number.
<date> - Received date in form as "YYYYMMDDHHMMSS".
<tooa> - Type of <orig_num>.
<toda> - Type of <da>.
<tele_id> - Teleservice ID.
4097 - page
4098 - SMS message
4099 - voice mail notification
262144 - voice mail notification
<priority> - Priority.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 167 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGR - Read Message
Note: The priority is different with every carrier.
0 - Normal (factory default)
1 - High
SELINT 2
<enc_type>- Encoding type of message.
0 - Octet, unspecified (8-bit)
2 - ASCII (7-bit)
3 - IA5 (7-bit)
4 - Unicode (16-bit)
8 - ISO 8859 Latin 1 (8-bit)
9 - GSM (7-bit)
<length> - Length of message.
<data> - Message data. (Indicates the new voice mail count, if <tele_id> is voice
mail notification)
AT+CMGR=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
<PDU Mode>
Case of received message from base station:
AT+CMGR=29
+CMGR: 1,"",52
07802811495346350808040947271002020221C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C38
70E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C20
OK
Where:
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
281149534635 <Origination number: 821194356453>
080804094727 <Date: 08/08/04,09:47:27>
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
02 <priority: urgent >
02 <encoding_type: ascii >
21 <data_len: 33>
C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C3870E1C38
70E1C20
<user_data: aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa>
Else:
at+cmgr=31
+CMGR: 2,"",23
07801091346554F307801091346554F3100200000A61616161616161616161
OK
Where:
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr:128>
1091346554F3 <Origination number: 01193645534 >
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr:128>
1091346554F3 < Callback number: 01193645534 >
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 168 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGR - Read Message
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
00 <priority: Normal >
00 <encoding_type: 8-bit Octet >
0A <data_len: 10>
61616161616161616161 <usr data: aaaaaaaaaa>
SELINT 2
<Text Mode>
AT+CSDH=1
OK
AT+CMGR=1
+CMGR: "REC READ","","01191775982",20071217190804,,4098,,16,12
TEST MESSAGE
OK
AT+CMGR=2
+CMGR: "REC READ","",01191775982",20071221160610,,4098,,16,9
TEST MESSAGE2
OK
AT+CMGR=3
+CMGR: "STO SENT","01191775982","01096529157",,4098,,16,9
TEST MESSAGE2
OK
5.1.5.5.8.
Write Message to Memory (3GPP2) - +CMGW
+CMGW - Write Message To Memory
(PDU Mode)
AT+CMGW=
<length>
[,<stat>]
SELINT 2
Execution command writes in the <memw> memory storage a new message.
Parameter:
<length> - length in bytes of the PDU to be written.
5..183
<stat> - message status.
0 - new message
1 - read message
2 - stored message not yet sent (default)
3 - stored message already sent
The device responds to the command with the prompt '>' and waits for the
specified number of bytes.
To write the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without writing the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully written in the memory, then the result is sent in
theformat:
+CMGW: <index>
where:
<index> - message location index in the memory <memw>.
If message storing fails for some reason an “error” code reported.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 169 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGW - Write Message To Memory
SELINT 2
Note: to ensure that during the command execution, no other SIM interacting
commands issued care must be taken of.
Example – PDU mode AT+CMGF=0
OK
AT+CMGW=35
>07801091346554F307801096224658F1100200001662626262626262626262
626262626262626262626262
+CMGW: 4
OK
Where:
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
1091346554F3 <Destination_address:01194356453>
07 <addr_len: 7byte>
80 <type_addr: 128>
1096224658F1 <callback_address:01692264851>
1002 <Teleservice_id: 4098(decimal)>
00 <priority: normal>
00 <encoding_type: octet>
16 <data_len: 22>
62626262626262626262626262626262626262626262
<user_data: bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb>
(Text Mode)
AT+CMGW[=<da>
[,<toda>
[,<stat>]]]
Execution command writes in the <memw> memory storage a new message.
Parameters:
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS);
ASCII characters in the set (0 9), #,*,(A D);
<toda> - type of destination address
129 - number in national format
145 - number in international format (contains the "+")
<stat> - message status.
"REC UNREAD" - new received message unread
"REC READ" - received message read
"STO UNSENT" - message stored not yet sent (default)
"STO SENT" - message stored already sent
After command line is terminated with <CR>, the device responds sending a
four character sequence prompt:
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32)
Note: the echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by echo
command E.
To write the message issue Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex).
To exit without writing the message issue ESC char (0x1B hex).
If message is successfully written in the memory, then the result is sent in
theformat:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 170 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
+CMGW - Write Message To Memory
SELINT 2
+CMGW: <index>
where:
<index> - message location index in the memory <memw>.
AT+CMGW=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example – TEXT
mode
AT+CMGW=?
OK
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGW
> Test message
> Ctrl+Z must be used to write message
+CMGW: 1
OK
AT+CMGW="9194397977"
> Test SMS
+CMGW: 2
OK
AT+CMGW="9194397977",129
> Test SMS
+CMGW: 3
OK
Note
It is not possible to write a SMS in 7 bit ASCII character set (see <enc_type>
parameter of +CSMP (3GPP2)) when current memory storage is SM (see
+CPMS command). Therefore, in that case the SMS will be automatically
converted and stored in GSM 7bit character set.
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the +CMGW: <index> or +CMS
ERROR: <err> response before issuing further commands.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 171 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.
Custom AT Commands
5.1.6.1.
General Configuration AT Commands
5.1.6.1.1.
Hang Up Call - #CHUP
#CHUP - Hang Up Call
SELINT 2
AT#CHUP
Execution command ends all active and held calls, also if a multi-party
session is running. It also allows disconnecting of a data call from a CMUX
instance different from the one that was used to start the data call.
AT#CHUP=?
Test command returns the OK result code
5.1.6.1.2.
USB Configuration - #USBCFG
#USBCFG – USB Configuration
AT#USBCFG=<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command specify USB configuration on the modem device.
New configuration mode applied at the next boot up time.
Parameter:
<mode> - USB configuration mode
0 – All the USB ports (Telit Mobile (USBx) are in ACM mode; Selective
Suspend is disabled; NCM is enabled; VID 0x1BC7 PID 0x0036 (default
value)
1 – All the USB ports (Telit Mobile (USBx) are in ACM Data Only mode;
Selective Suspend is disabled; NCM and MBIM are disabled; VID 0x1BC7
PID 0x0034
2 – All the USB ports (Telit Mobile (USBx) are in ACM mode; Selective
Suspend is disabled; NCM and MBIM are disabled; VID 0x1BC7 PID 0x0035
3 – All the USB ports (Telit Mobile (USBx) are in ACM mode; Selective
Suspend is disabled; NCM and MBIM are enabled; VID 0x1BC7 PID 0x0032
4 – All the USB ports (Telit Mobile (USBx) are in ACM mode; Selective
Suspend is enabled; NCM is enabled; VID 0x1BC7 PID 0x0037
5 – All the USB ports (Telit Mobile (USBx) are in ACM mode; Selective
Suspend is enabled; NCM and MBIM are enabled; VID 0x1BC7 PID 0x0033
Note: the modem device doesn’t reset automatically; use AT#REBOOT or a
complete power cycle.
Note: the default value depends on the software version
Mode
AT#USBCFG?
Ports
SS
MBIM
NCM
DLINK
VID
PID
0
ACM
NO
NO
YES
TBD
0x1BC7
0x0036
1
ACM
Data
Only
NO
NO
NO
TBD
0x1BC7
0x0034
2
ACM
NO
NO
NO
TBD
0x1BC7
0x0035
3
ACM
NO
YES
YES
TBD
0x1BC7
0x0032
4
ACM
YES
NO
YES
TBD
0x1BC7
0x0037
5
ACM
YES
YES
YES
TBD
0x1BC7
0x0033
Read command shows the current <mode> in the following format
#USBCFG: <mode>
AT#USBCFG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the list of supported values.
Page 172 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.3.
Connect physical ports to Service Access Points - #PORTCFG
#PORTCFG – Connect physical ports to Service Access Points
AT#PORTCFG=<Variant>
SELINT 2
AT#PORTCFG command allows to connect Service Access Points (sof
tware anchorage points) to the external physical ports giving a great fle
xibility. Examples of Service Access Points: AT Parser Instance #1,#2,
#3, TT(Telit Trace).
<Variant> parameter range: depends on the product, use the test com
mand to get the supported values; factory setting: 0.
Please, refer to “LE910 V2 Series Ports Arrangements” document for a
detailed explanation of all port configurations
Note: in order to enable the set port configuration, the module has to b
e rebooted.
AT#PORTCFG?
Read command reports: <requested> value shows the requested
configuration that will be activated on the next power off /on of the
module; <active> value shows the actual configuration.
#PORTCFG: <requested>,<active>
AT#PORTCFG=?
5.1.6.1.4.
Test command reports a brief description of the supported ports
arrangement solutions. For each <Variant> parameter value are
displayed, on one row, the allowed couples formed by: a physical port
and the logically connected internal software Access Point (AT, TT).
On each row are reported the couples concerning both configurations:
USB cable plugged into USB port or not plugged in.
AT, indicated on each command row result, can be AT0, AT1, or AT2.
MBIM Configuration - #MBIMCFG
#MBIMCFG – MBIM Configuration
AT#MBIMCFG=<cid>[,<cid2>[
… ,<cidN>]]
SELINT 2
The command allows the user to set a list of CIDs which will be used b
y MBIM when one or more connection(s) will be established.
<cid> - (PDP Context Identifier) numeric parameter which specifies a p
articular PDP context definition.
The allowed range depends on the product, then use the test comman
d to get it.
<cid2> - <cidN> (PDP Context Identifier) numeric parameter which sp
ecifies a particular PDP context definition. The allowed range depends
on the product, then use the test command to get it.
These CIDs are optional and useful only when the user want to establis
h more MBIM connections (using different APNs) simultaneously.
Note: the value is set immediately so that the next MBIM connect will u
se the new value; it is also saved in NVM.
Note: MBIM and internal stack (AT+CGACT, AT#SGACT …) are mutu
ally exclusive: they can share the same APN on different or the same c
id, but they can’t be both active at the same time.
Note: the list of CIDs cannot contain duplicates
AT#MBIMCFG?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command returns the current value of the MBIM <cid> list in the
format:
#MBIMCFG: <cid>[,cid2[... ,cidN]]
Page 173 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MBIMCFG – MBIM Configuration
SELINT 2
Note: only the CIDs in the list are displayed by the read command.
AT#MBIMCFG=?
Test command returns the supported values for <cid>.
Example
AT# MBIMCFG=14
OK
AT#MBIMCFG?
#MBIMCFG: 14
OK
AT# MBIMCFG=?
#MBIMCFG: (1-15),(1-15),(1-15),(1-15),(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15)
,(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15) ,(1-15)
OK
5.1.6.1.5.
NCM Configuration - #NCM
#NCM - NCM Configuration
SELINT 2
AT#NCM=<Mode>,<Cid>[,<Did This command sets up a Network Control Model (NCM) session.
>[,<UserId>,<Pwd>[,<DhcpSer
verEnable>]]]
Parameters:
<Mode> - NCM mode
1 – manual PDP context activation using AT+CGACT (default)
2 – automatic PDP context and NCM activation (AT+CGACT and
AT+CGDATA are managed internally)
<Cid> - Context id
- For all product except LE910-SV_V2 and LE910-SV1:
the default is 15
- For LE910-SV_V2 and LE910-SV1:
the default is 3
<Did> - Device id, currently limited to 0 (only one device)
<UserId> - string type, used only if context requires it
<Pwd> - string type, used only if context requires it
<DhcpServerEnable> - dhcp server abilitation
Note: the optional parameter <DhcpServerEnable> is not yet
supported.
Note: mode 2 activates a context, so all necessary setup has to be
done before (registration, APN).
AT#NCM?
Read command reports the session state in the following format:
#NCM: <Mode>,<Cid>,<Did>,<State>
…
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 174 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#NCM - NCM Configuration
SELINT 2
OK
Where <Mode> is the selected NCM mode, <Did> is currently 0,
<Cid> is the Context id associated to NCM, and <State> can be:
0 – disabled
1 – enabled
AT#NCM=?
5.1.6.1.6.
Test command reports the supported range of values for all the
parameters.
NCM Disable - #NCMD
#NCMD - NCM Disable
AT#NCMD=<Did>
SELINT 2
This command ends the Network Control Model session (NCM).
Parameters:
<Did> - Device id, currently limited to 0 (only one device)
Note: this command also deactivates the context.
AT#NCMD?
Read command reports the session state in the following format:
#NCMD: <Did>,<State>
…
OK
where <Did> is currently 0 and <State> can be:
0 – disabled
1 – enabled
AT#NCMD=?
5.1.6.1.7.
Test command reports the supported range of values for all the
parameters.
Initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol - #SPIOPEN
#SPIOPEN – Initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol
SELINT 2
AT#SPIOPEN=<ID>,<speed>,< This command initializes the provided modem serial port for SPI protoc
mode>
ol.
Parameters:
<ID> - supported value is 3
<speed> - supported speed value:
1 for 1 Mhz
2 for 3 Mhz
3 for 6 Mhz
4 for 12 Mhz
<mode> - CPOL CPH setting:
0 Clock signal is active high and data is sampled in rising edge.
1 Clock signal is active high and data is sampled in falling edge.
2 Clock signal is active low and data is sampled in rising edge.
3 Clock signal is active low and data is sampled in falling edge
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 175 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SPIOPEN – Initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol
SELINT 2
AT#SPIOPEN?
Read command returns (0,0,0) if SPI is not opened, otherwise it
returns the last provided Parameters value.
AT#SPIOPEN=?
Test command reports available values for parameters <ID>, <speed>
and <mode>.
5.1.6.1.8.
De-initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol - #SPICLOSE
#SPICLOSE – De - Initializes modem serial port with SPI protocol
AT#SPICLOSE=<ID>
SELINT 2
This command de-initializes the provided modem serial port for the SPI
protocol .
Parameters:
<ID> - supported value is 3
Note: returns OK if de-initialization complete, ERROR otherwise
AT#SPICLOSE?
Read command returns current initialized <ID> (0 as default).
AT#SPICLOSE=?
Test command reports available values for parameter <ID>.
5.1.6.1.9.
Writes a buffer to the SPI and prints the read data - #SPIRW
#SPIRW – Writes a buffer to the SPI and prints the read data
AT#SPIRW=[<length>]
SELINT 2
This command writes a buffer to the SPI and prints the read data.
Parameters:
<length> - buffer length : MIN 1 byte
MAX 128 bytes
The module responds to the command with the prompt
<greater_than><space> and waits for the data to send.
When <length> bytes have been sent, operation is automatically comp
leted.
If data are successfully sent, the module answer with the bytes read on
the SPI RX channel.
The received data can be read on the AT console, the amount of printe
d data is the same received that is the length of the sent data.
Note: the modem serial port on which the SPI data must be sent has to
be initialized previously with an AT#SPIOPEN command, otherwise it
will return ERROR.
AT#SPIRW=?
Test command reports available value for parameter <length>.
5.1.6.1.10. Network Selection Menu Availability - +PACSP
+PACSP - Network Selection Menu Availability
AT+PACSP?
SELINT 2
Read command returns the current value of the <mode> parameter in the
format:
+PACSP<mode>
where:
<mode> - PLMN mode bit (in CSP file on the SIM)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 176 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
0 - restriction of menu option for manual PLMN selection.
1 - no restriction of menu option for Manual PLMN selection.
AT+PACSP=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.11. Manufacturer Identification - #CGMI
#CGMI - Manufacturer Identification
SELINT 2
AT#CGMI
Execution command returns the device manufacturer identification code with
command echo.
AT#CGMI=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.12. Model Identification - #CGMM
#CGMM - Model Identification
SELINT 2
AT#CGMM
Execution command returns the device model identification code with command
echo.
AT#CGMM=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.13. Revision Identification - #CGMR
#CGMR - Revision Identification
SELINT 2
AT#CGMR
Execution command returns device software revision number with command
echo.
AT#CGMR=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.14. Product Serial Number Identification - #CGSN
#CGSN - Product Serial Number Identification
SELINT 2
AT#CGSN
Execution command returns the product serial number, identified as the IMEI of
the mobile, with command echo.
AT#CGSN=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.15. Request International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Sw Version - +IMEISV
+IMEISV – Request International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Software
Version
SELINT 2
AT+IMEISV
Execution command returns the International Mobile station Equipment Identity
and Software Version Number, identified as the IMEISV of the mobile, without
command echo.
The IMEISV is composed of the following elements (each element shall consist
of decimal digits only):
• Type Allocation Code (TAC). Its length is 8 digits;
• Serial Number (SNR) is an individual serial number uniquely identifying
each equipment within each TAC. Its length is 6 digits;
• Software Version Number (SVN) identifies the software version number
of the mobile equipment. Its length is 2 digits.
AT+IMEISV=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 23.003
5.1.6.1.16. International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) - #CIMI
#CIMI - International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI)
SELINT 2
AT#CIMI
Execution command returns the international mobile subscriber identity,
identified as the IMSI number, with command echo.
AT#CIMI=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 177 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.17. Read ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identification) - #CCID
#CCID - Read ICCID
SELINT 2
AT#CCID
Execution command reads on SIM the ICCID (card identification number that
provides a unique identification number for the SIM)
AT#CCID=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.18. Service Provider Name - #SPN
#SPN - Service Provider Name
AT#SPN
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the service provider string contained in the SIM
field SPN, in the format:
#SPN: <spn>
where:
<spn> - service provider string contained in the SIM field SPN, represented in
the currently selected character set (see +CSCS).
Note: if the SIM field SPN is empty, the command returns just the OK result
code.
AT#SPN=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.19. Extended Numeric Error report - #CEER
#CEER – Extended numeric error report
AT#CEER
SELINT 2
Execution command causes the TA to return a numeric code in the format
#CEER: <code>
which should offer the user of the TA a report of the reason for
• the failure in the last unsuccessful call setup (originating or answering);
• the last call release;
• the last unsuccessful GPRS attach or unsuccessful PDN connection activation;
• the last GPRS detach or PDN connection deactivation.
Note: if none of the previous conditions has occurred since power up then 0 is
reported (i.e. No error, see below)
<code> values as follows
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Value
Diagnostic
0
No error
1
Unassigned (unallocated) number
3
No route to destination
6
Channel unacceptable
8
Operator determined barring
16
Normal call clearing
17
User busy
18
No user responding
19
User alerting, no answer
21
Call rejected
22
Number changed
Page 178 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CEER – Extended numeric error report
SELINT 2
26
Non selected user clearing
27
Destination out of order
28
Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29
Facility rejected
30
Response to STATUS ENQUIRY
31
Normal, unspecified
34
No circuit/channel available
38
Network out of order
41
Temporary failure
42
Switching equipment congestion
43
Access information discarded
44
Requested circuit/channel not available
47
Resources unavailable, unspecified
49
Quality of service unavailable
50
Requested facility not subscribed
55
Incoming calls barred with in the CUG
57
Bearer capability not authorized
58
Bearer capability not presently available
63
Service or option not available, unspecified
65
Bearer service not implemented
68
ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax
69
Requested facility not implemented
70
Only restricted digital information bearer capability is
available
79
Service or option not implemented, unspecified
81
Invalid transaction identifier value
87
User not member of CUG
88
Incompatible destination
91
Invalid transit network selection
95
Semantically incorrect message
96
Invalid mandatory information
97
Message type non-existent or not implemented
98
Message type not compatible with protocol state
99
Information element non-existent or not implemented
100
Conditional IE error
101
Message not compatible with protocol state
102
Recovery on timer expiry
111
Protocol error, unspecified
127
Interworking, unspecified
GPRS related errors
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
224
MS requested detach
225
NWK requested detach
226
Unsuccessful attach cause NO SERVICE
Page 179 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CEER – Extended numeric error report
SELINT 2
227
Unsuccessful attach cause NO ACCESS
228
Unsuccessful attach cause GPRS SERVICE REFUSED
229
PDP deactivation requested by NWK
230
PDP deactivation cause LLC link activation Failed
231
PDP deactivation cause NWK reactivation with same TI
232
PDP deactivation cause GMM abort
233
PDP deactivation cause LLC or SNDCP failure
234
PDP unsuccessful activation cause GMM error
235
PDP unsuccessful activation cause NWK reject
236
PDP unsuccessful activation cause NO NSAPI available
237
PDP unsuccessful activation cause SM refuse
238
PDP unsuccessful activation cause MMI ignore
239
PDP unsuccessful activation cause Nb Max Session
Reach
256
PDP unsuccessful activation cause wrong APN
257
PDP unsuccessful activation cause unknown PDP
address or type
258
PDP unsuccessful activation cause service not supported
259
PDP unsuccessful activation cause QOS not accepted
260
PDP unsuccessful activation cause socket error
Other custom values
240
FDN is active and number is not in FDN
241
Call operation not allowed
252
Call barring on outgoing calls
253
Call barring on incoming calls
254
Call impossible
255
Lower layer failure
AT#CEER=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
GSM 04.08
5.1.6.1.20. Extended Numeric Error report - #CEERNET
#CEERNET – Ext error report for Network reject cause
AT#CEERNET
SELINT 2
Execution command causes the TA to return a numeric code in the format
#CEERNET: <code>
which should offer the user of the TA a report for the last mobility management
(MM/GMM/EMM) or session management (SM/ESM) procedure not accepted by the
network.
<code> values as follows valid for (MM/GMM) or session management (SM) i.e. for 2G
and 3G networks
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Value
Diagnostic
2
IMSI UNKNOWN IN HLR
3
ILLEGAL MS
Page 180 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CEERNET – Ext error report for Network reject cause
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
4
IMSI UNKNOWN IN VISITOR LR
5
IMEI NOT ACCEPTED
6
ILLEGAL ME
7
GPRS NOT ALLOWED
8
OPERATOR DETERMINED BARRING(SM cause failure)/
GPRS AND NON GPRS NOT ALLOWED(GMM cause failure)
9
MS IDENTITY CANNOT BE DERIVED BY NETWORK
10
IMPLICITLY DETACHED
11
PLMN NOT ALLOWED
12
LA NOT ALLOWED
13
ROAMING NOT ALLOWED
14
GPRS NOT ALLOWED IN THIS PLMN
15
NO SUITABLE CELLS IN LA
16
MSC TEMP NOT REACHABLE
17
NETWORK FAILURE
20
MAC FAILURE
21
SYNCH FAILURE
22
CONGESTION
23
GSM AUTHENTICATION UNACCEPTABLE
24
MBMS BEARER CAPABILITIES INSUFFICIENT FOR THE
SERVICE
25
LLC OR SNDCP FAILURE
26
INSUFFICIENT RESOURCES
27
MISSING OR UNKNOWN APN
28
UNKNOWN PDP ADDRESS OR PDP TYPE
29
USER AUTHENTICATION FAILED
30
ACTIVATION REJECTED BY GGSN
31
ACTIVATION REJECTED UNSPECIFIED
32
SERVICE OPTION NOT SUPPORTED
33
REQ. SERVICE OPTION NOT SUBSCRIBED
34
SERV.OPTION TEMPORARILY OUT OF ORDER
35
NSAPI ALREADY USED
36
REGULAR DEACTIVATION
37
QOS NOT ACCEPTED
38
CALL CANNOT BE IDENTIFIED(MM cause failure) /
SMN NETWORK FAILURE(SM cause failure)
39
REACTIVATION REQUIRED
40
NO PDP CTXT ACTIVATED(GMM cause failure)/
FEATURE NOT SUPPORTED(SM cause failure)
41
SEMANTIC ERROR IN TFT OPERATION
42
SYNTACTICAL ERROR IN TFT OPERATION
43
UNKNOWN PDP CNTXT
44
SEM ERR IN PKT FILTER
45
SYNT ERR IN PKT FILTER
Page 181 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CEERNET – Ext error report for Network reject cause
SELINT 2
46
PDP CNTXT WITHOUT TFT ACTIVATED
47
MULTICAST GROUP MEMBERSHIP TIMEOUT
48
RETRY ON NEW CELL BEGIN(if MM cause failure) /
ACTIVATION REJECTED BCM VIOLATION(if SM cause
failure)
50
PDP TYPE IPV4 ONLY ALLOWED
51
PDP TYPE IPV6 ONLY ALLOWED
52
SINGLE ADDRESS BEARERS ONLY ALLOWED
63
RETRY ON NEW CELL END
81
INVALID TRANSACTION IDENTIFIER
95
SEMANTICALLY INCORRECT MESSAGE
96
INVALID MANDATORY INFORMATION
97
MSG TYPE NON EXISTENT OR NOT IMPLEMENTED
98
MSG TYPE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PROTOCOL STATE
99
IE NON_EXISTENT OR NOT IMPLEMENTED
100
CONDITIONAL IE ERROR
101
MSG NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PROTOCOL STATE
111
PROTOCOL ERROR UNSPECIFIED
112
APN RESTRICTION VALUE INCOMPATIBLE WITH ACTIVE
PDP CONTEXT
In 4G network the <code>s meaning are included in tables 9.9.4.4.1 (for ESM causes)
and 9.9.3.9.1 (for EMM cause) of 3GPP TS 24.301 Release 9.
AT#CEERNET
=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Reference
3GPP 24.008 24.301
5.1.6.1.21. Extended error report for Network reject cause - #CEERNETEXT
#CEERNETEXT – Extended error report for Network reject cause
AT#CEERNETEXT=<f
unc>
SELINT 2
Set command allows to configure the functions of #CEERNETEXT.
Parameters:
<func> - function
0 – Disable the #CEERNETEXT URC (factory default)
1 – Enable the #CEERNETEXT URC
2 – Delete last info of Network Code, AcT, MCC and MNC
The URC will occur every time a mobility management (MM/GMM/EMM) or
session management (SM/ESM) procedure is not accepted by the network.
The URC format is:
#CEERNETEXT: <code>,<AcT>,<MCC>,<MNC>
where:
<code> is last numeric Network Reject Cause from network, see <code> in
AT#CEERNET
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 182 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CEERNETEXT – Extended error report for Network reject cause
<AcT> is the access technology:
0 GSM
2 UTRAN
7 E-UTRAN
SELINT 2
<MCC> is the Mobile Country Code of the used network when last numeric
code has received
<MNC> is the Mobile Network Code of the used network when last numeric
code has received
Note. The values 0 and 1 of <func> parameter are saved in the NVM issuing
AT&W command. The value 2 is not stored and does not change the current
<func> value.
1..10 - if the device is waiting either SIM PUK or SIM PUK2 to be given.
AT#CEERNETEXT
Execution command causes the TA to return the last numeric Network Reject
Cause code, AcT, MCC and MNC received by the network
#CEERNETEXT: <code>,<AcT>,<MCC>,<MNC>
AT#CEERNETEXT?
Read command returns the current value of parameter <func> in the format:
AT#CEERNETEXT: <func>
Where <func> can assume the following values:
0 – if CEERNETEXT URC is disabled
1 – if CEERNETEXT URC is enabled
AT#CEERNETEXT=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the <func> parameter
only, in the format:
#CEERNETEXT: (0-2)
5.1.6.1.22.
Display PIN Counter - #PCT
#PCT - Display PIN Counter
AT#PCT
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the PIN/PUK or PIN2/PUK2 input remaining
attempts, depending on +CPIN requested password in the format:
#PCT: <n>
where:
<n> - remaining attempts
0 - the SIM is blocked.
1..3 - if the device is waiting either SIM PIN or SIM PIN2 to be given.
1..10 - if the device is waiting either SIM PUK or SIM PUK2 to be given.
AT#PCT=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the OK result code.
Page 183 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.23. Software Shut Down - #SHDN
#SHDN - Software Shutdown
AT#SHDN
SELINT 2
Execution command causes device detach from the network and shut down.
Before definitive shut down an OK response is returned.
Note: after the issuing of this command any previous activity is terminated and
the device will not respond to any further command.
Note: to turn it on again Hardware pin ON/OFF must be tied low.
AT#SHDN=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.24. Fast shutdown configuration - #FASTSHDN
#FASTSHDN - Fast shutdown configuration
AT#FASTSHDN[=
<Enable>,<Gpio>[,
<spare>[,<spare>[,<s
pare>[,<spare>]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set the GPIO fast shutdown configuration.
Parameters:
<Enable>
It is used to enable or disable the fast shutdown execution via GPIO:
0 - The fast shutdown execution via GPIO is disabled
1 - The fast shutdown execution via GPIO is enabled
This parameter is stored in NVM.
<Gpio>
It sets which Gpio execute the fast shdn. When the GPIO number configured
with <Gpio> goes from the High level to the low level and the <Enable> is
set to 1, the module execute immediately the fast shutdown.
This parameter is stored in NVM.
The format AT#FASTSHDN forces the module to execute immediately the fast
shutdown
Note: it is necessary that the Gpio set whit <Gpio> is used for the fast
shutdown purpose only. If you want to use the Gpio set via AT#FASTSHDN
you have to disable the fastshutdown purpose for that pin:
AT#FASTSHDN=0,<Gpio>
AT#FASTSHDN?
Read command reports the currently selected configuration in the format:
AT#FASTSHDN: <Enable>,<Gpio>,0,0,0,0
AT#FASTSHDN=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for all the parameters.
Example
//enable fast shutdown on GPIO 5
AT#FASTSHDN=1,5
OK
AT#FASTSHDN?
$GPSGPIO: 1,5,0,0,0,0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 184 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FASTSHDN - Fast shutdown configuration
//force immediate fast shutdown
AT#FASTSHDN
OK
SELINT 2
5.1.6.1.25. Extended Reset - #Z
#Z – Extended reset
AT#Z=<profile>
SELINT 2
Set command loads both base section and extended section of the specified
user profile stored with AT&W and selected with AT&P.
Parameter
<profile>
0 – user profile 0
1 – user profile 1
AT#Z=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command tests for command existence.
Page 185 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.26. Periodic Reset - #ENHRST
#ENHRST – Periodic ReseT
AT#ENHRST=<mod>,<delay>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the unit reset after <delay> minutes.
Parameters:
<mod>
0 – disables the unit reset (factory default)
1 – enables the unit reset only for one time
2 – enables the periodic unit reset
<delay> - time interval after that the unit reboots; numeric value in
minutes
Note: the settings are saved automatically in NVM only if old or new
mod is 2. Any change from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 is not stored in NVM
Note: the particular case AT#ENHRST=1,0 causes the immediate
module reboot. In this case if AT#ENHRST=1,0 follows an AT
command that stores some parameters in NVM, it is recommended to
insert a delay of at least 5 seconds before to issue AT#ENHRST=1,0,
to permit the complete NVM storing.
AT#ENHRST?
Read command reports the current parameter settings for # EHNRST
command in the format:
# EHNRST: < mod >[,<delay>,<remainTime>]
<remainTime> - time remaining before next reset
AT#ENHRST=?
Test command reports supported range of values for parameters
<mod> and <delay>.
Examples
AT#ENHRST=1,60
…. Module reboots after 60 minutes …
AT#ENHRST=1,0
…. Module reboots now …
AT#ENHRST=2,60
…. Module reboots after 60 minutes and indefinitely after every
following power on …
5.1.6.1.27. Wake From Alarm Mode - #WAKE
#WAKE - Wake From Alarm Mode
AT#WAKE=
[<opmode>]
SELINT 2
Execution command stops any eventually present alarm activity and, if the
module is in alarm mode, it exits the alarm mode and enters the normal
operating mode.
Parameter:
<opmode> - operating mode
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 186 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#WAKE - Wake From Alarm Mode
SELINT 2
0 - normal operating mode; the module exits the alarm mode, enters the
normal operating mode, any alarm activity is stopped (e.g. alarm tone
playing) and an OK result code is returned.
Note: the alarm mode is indicated by status ON of hardware pin CTS and by
status ON of pin DSR; the power saving status is indicated by a CTS - OFF
and DSR - OFF status; the normal operating status is indicated by DSR ON.
Note: during the alarm mode the device will not make any network scan and
will not register to any network and therefore is not able to dial or receive any
call or SM, the only commands that can be issued to the MODULE in this
state are the #WAKE and #SHDN, every other command must not be issued
during this state.
Note: if #WAKE=0 command is issued after an alarm has been set with
+CALA command, but before the alarm has expired, it will answer OK but
have no effect.
AT#WAKE?
Read command returns the operating status of the device in the format:
#WAKE: <status>
where:
<status>
0 - normal operating mode
1 - alarm mode or normal operating mode with some alarm activity.
AT#WAKE=?
Test command returns OK result code.
5.1.6.1.28. Temperature Monitor - #TEMPMON
#TEMPMON - Temperature Monitor
AT#TEMPMON=
<mod>
[,<urcmode>
[,<action>
[,<hyst_time>
[,<GPIO>]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the behaviour of the module internal temperature monitor.
Parameters:
<mod>
0 - sets the command parameters.
1 - triggers the measurement of the module internal temperature, reporting the
result in the format:
#TEMPMEAS: <level>,<value>
where:
<level> - threshold level
-2 - extreme temperature lower bound (see Note)
-1 - operating temperature lower bound (see Note)
0 - normal temperature
1 - operating temperature upper bound (see Note)
2 - extreme temperature upper bound (see Note)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 187 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
<value> - actual temperature expressed in Celsius degrees.
Setting of the following optional parameters has meaning only if <mod>=0
<urcmode> - URC presentation mode.
0 - it disables the presentation of the temperature monitor URC
1 - it enables the presentation of the temperature monitor URC, whenever the
module internal temperature reaches either operating or extreme levels; the
unsolicited message is in the format:
#TEMPMEAS: <level>,<value>
where:
<level> and <value> are as before
<action> - sum of integers, each representing an action to be done whenever
the module internal temperature reaches either operating or extreme
levels (default is 0). If <action> is not zero, it is mandatory to set the
<hyst_time> parameter too.
0..7 - as a sum of:
0 - no action
1 - automatic shut-down when the temperature is beyond the extreme
bounds
2 - RF RX and TX circuits automatically disabled (using +CFUN=4) when
operating temperature bounds are reached. When the temperature is
back to normal the module is brought back to the previous state,
before RF RX and TX disabled.
4 - the output pin <GPIO> is tied HIGH when operating temperature
bounds are reached; when the temperature is back to normal the
output pin <GPIO> is tied LOW. If this <action> is required, it is
mandatory to set the <GPIO> parameter too.
<hyst_time> - hysteresis time: all the actions happen only if the extreme or
operating bounds are maintained at least for this period. This
parameter is needed and required if <action> is not zero.
0..255 - time in seconds
<GPIO> - GPIO number. valid range is “any output pin” (see “Hardware User’s
Guide”). This parameter is needed and required only if <action>=4 is
required.
Note: the URC presentation mode <urcmode> is related to the current AT
instance only (see +cmux); last <urcmode> settings are saved for every
instance as extended profile parameters, thus it is possible to restore them
either if the multiplexer control channel is released and set up, back and forth.
Note: in case that action 4 is set, the chosen GPIO has to be configured in
alternate function ALT3 through AT#GPIO command
Note: last <action>, <hyst_time> and <GPIO> settings are saved in NVM too,
but they are not related to the current CMUX instance only (see +cmux).
AT#TEMPMON?
Read command reports the current parameter settings for #TEMPMON
command in the format:
#TEMPMON: <urcmode>,<action>[,<hyst_time>[,<GPIO>]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 188 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
AT#TEMPMON=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters <mod>,
<urcmode>, <action>, <hyst_time> and <GPIO>
Note
The following table is describing the temperature levels.
Extreme Temperature Lower Bound
-30°C
Operating Temperature Lower Bound
-10°C
Operating Temperature
Operating Temperature Upper Bound
55°C
Extreme Temperature Upper Bound
80°C
5.1.6.1.29. Temperature monitor configuration - #TEMPCFG
#TEMPCFG – Temperature monitor configuration
AT#TEMPCFG=
<TempExLowBound>
[,<TempOpLowBound>
[,<TempOpUpBound>
[,<TempExUpBound>]]]
SELINT 2
This parameter command manages the temperature range used by the
TEMPMON command
Parameters:
<TempExLowBound> - the extreme temperature lower limit
<TempOpLowBound> - the operating temperature lower limit
<TempOpUpBound> - the operating temperature upper limit
<TempExUpBound> - the extreme temperature upper limit
Note 1: The extreme temperature lower limit must not be lower than lower
limit (see TEMPMON for temperature limits);
Note 2: the operating temperature lower limit must be bigger than the
extreme temperature lower limit, and not lower than its minimum admitted
value (see TEMPMON for temperature limits);
Note 3: the operating temperature upper limit must be bigger than the
operating temperature lower limit, and not lower than its minimum admitted
value (see TEMPMON for temperature limits);
Note 4: the extreme temperature upper limit must be bigger than the
operating temperature upper limit
Note 5: The extreme temperature upper limit must be lower than its upper
limit (see TEMPMON for temperature limits).
Note 5: the temperature correctly set are saved in NvM, so at the next
reboot the last temperature set is active instead of the factory default
values.
Note 6: a factory reset restores the factory default values.
AT#TEMPCFG?
read the currently active temperature range :
#TEMPCFG: <TempExLowBound>,
<TempOpLowBound>,
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 189 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
<TempOpUpBound>,
<TempExUpBound>
AT#TEMPCFG =?
Test command returns the supported range of <TempExLowBound>,
<TempOpLowBound>,
<TempOpUpBound>,
<TempExUpBound> parameters.
Example
//test the currently set values
AT#TEMPCFG?
#TEMPCFG: -30,-10,55,80
OK
//set a new temperature range
AT#TEMPCFG=-40,-15,55,85
OK
//read the currently set values
AT#TEMPCFG?
#TEMPCFG: -40,-15,55,85
OK
5.1.6.1.30. General Purpose Input/Output Pin Control - #GPIO
#GPIO - General Purpose Input/Output Pin Control
SELINT 2
Execution command sets the value of the general purpose output pin
AT#GPIO=[<pin>,
<mode>[,<dir>[,<save]]] GPIO<pin> according to <dir> and <mode> parameter.
Not all configurations for the three parameters are valid.
Parameters:
<pin> - GPIO pin number; supported range is from 1 to a value that depends
on the hardware.
<mode> - its meaning depends on <dir> setting:
0 - if <dir>=0 – INPUT, remove any Pull-up/Pull-down
- output pin cleared to 0 (Low) if <dir>=1 - OUTPUT
- no meaning if <dir>=2 - ALTERNATE FUNCTION
- no meaning if <dir>=3 – TRISTATE PULL DOWN
1 - if <dir>=0 – INPUT, if <dir>=0 – INPUT, remove any Pull-up/Pull-down
- output pin set to 1 (High) if <dir>=1 - OUTPUT
- no meaning if <dir>=2 - ALTERNATE FUNCTION
- no meaning if <dir>=3 – TRISTATE PULL DOWN
2 - Reports the read value from the input pin if <dir>=0 - INPUT
- Reports the read value from the input pin if <dir>=1 - OUTPUT
- Reports a no meaning value if <dir>=2 - ALTERNATE FUNCTION
3 - if <dir>=0 – INPUT, enable Pull-Up
4 - if <dir>=0 – INPUT, enable Pull-Down
<dir> - GPIO pin direction
0 - pin direction is INPUT
1 - pin direction is OUTPUT
2,3,4,5,6 - pin direction is Alternate Function ALT1, ALT2, ALT3, ALT4, ALT5
respectively (see Note).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 190 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#GPIO - General Purpose Input/Output Pin Control
<save> - GPIO pin save configuration
0 – pin configuration is not saved
1 – pin configuration is saved
SELINT 2
Note: when <save> is omitted the configuration is stored only if user set or
reset ALTx function on <dir> parameter.
Note: if values of <dir> is set in output and save omitted then it is set
automatically in input on next power cycle.
Note: when <mode>=2 (and <dir> is omitted) the command reports the
direction and value of pin GPIO<pin> in the format:
#GPIO: <dir>,<stat>
where:
<dir> - current direction setting for the GPIO<pin>
<stat>
• logic value read from pin GPIO<pin> in the case the pin <dir> is set
to input;
• logic value present in output of the pin GPIO<pin> in the case the pin
<dir> is currently set to output;
• no meaning value for the pin GPIO<pin> in the case the pin <dir> is
set to alternate function or Tristate pull down
AT#GPIO?
Read command reports the read direction and value of all GPIO pins, in the
format:
#GPIO: <dir>,<stat>[<CR><LF>#GPIO: <dir>,<stat>[…]]
where
<dir> - as seen before
<stat> - as seen before
If <mode> = 3,4 the ouput format is
#GPIO:<dir>,<stat>,<mode>[<CR><LF>#GPIO:<dir>,<stat>,<mode>[…]]
AT#GPIO=?
Test command reports the supported range of values of the command
parameters <pin>, <mode> , <dir> and <save>.
Example
AT#GPIO=3,0,1
OK
AT#GPIO=3,2
#GPIO: 1,0
OK
AT#GPIO=4,1,1
OK
AT#GPIO=5,0,0
OK
AT#GPIO=6,2
#GPIO: 0,1
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 191 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.31. STAT_LED GPIO Setting - AT#SLED
#SLED - STAT_LED GPIO Setting
AT#SLED=<mode>
[,<on_duration>
[,<off_duration>]]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the behaviour of the STAT_LED GPIO
Parameters:
<mode> - defines how the STAT_LED GPIO is handled
0 - GPIO tied Low
1 - GPIO tied High
2 - GPIO handled by Module Software (factory default) with the following
timings:
• not registered : always on
• registered in idle: blinking 1s on and 2s off
• registered in idle with powersaving : blinking time depends on network
condition in order to minimize power consumption
3 - GPIO is turned on and off alternatively, with period defined by the sum
<on_duration> + <off_duration>
4 - GPIO handled by Module Software with the following timings:
• not registered : blinking 0,5s on and 0,5s off
• registered in idle: blinking 300ms on and 2,7s off
• registered in idle with powersaving : blinking time depends on network
condition in order to minimize power consumption
<on_duration> - duration of period in which STAT_LED GPIO is tied High
while <mode>=3
1..100 - in tenth of seconds (default is 10)
<off_duration> - duration of period in which STAT_LED GPIO is tied Low
while <mode>=3
1..100 - in tenth of seconds (default is 10)
Note: values are saved in NVM by command #SLEDSAV
Note: at module boot the STAT_LED GPIO is always tied High and holds this
value until the first NVM reading.
Note: to have STAT_LED operative, the first time enter AT#GPIO=1,0,2 setting
the GPIO1 as alternate function.
AT#SLED?
Read command returns the STAT_LED GPIO current setting, in the format:
#SLED: <mode>,<on_duration>,<off_duration>
AT#SLED=?
Test command returns the range of available values for parameters <mode>,
<on_duration> and <off_duration>.
5.1.6.1.32. Save STAT_LED GPIO Setting - #SLEDSAV
#SLEDSAV - Save STAT_LED GPIO Setting
AT#SLEDSAV
Execution command saves STAT_LED setting in NVM.
AT#SLED=?
Test command returns OK result code.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 192 of 464
SELINT 2
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.33. SMS Ring Indicator - #E2SMSRI
#SLED - STAT_LED GPIO Setting
AT#E2SMSRI=
[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the Ring Indicator pin response to an incoming
SMS message. If enabled, a negative going pulse is generated on receipt of an
incoming SMS message. The duration of this pulse is determined by the value
of <n>.
Parameter:
<n> - RI enabling
0 - disables RI pin response for incoming SMS messages (factory default)
50..1150 - enables RI pin response for incoming SMS messages. The value
of <n> is the duration in ms of the pulse generated on receipt of an incoming
SM.
Note: if +CNMI=3,1 command is issued and the module is in a GPRS
connection, a 100 ms break signal is sent and a 1 sec. pulse is generated on
RI pin, no matter if the RI pin response is either enabled or not.
AT#E2SMSRI?
Read command reports the duration in ms of the pulse generated on receipt of
an incoming SM, in the format:
#E2SMSRI: <n>
Note: as seen before, the value <n>=0 means that the RI pin response to an
incoming SM is disabled.
AT#E2SMSRI=?
Reports the range of supported values for parameter <n>
5.1.6.1.34. Event Ring Indicator - #E2RI
#E2RI – Event Ring Indicator
SELINT 2
AT#E2RI=<event_mask>,<duration> Set command enables/disables the Ring Indicator pin response
to one or more events. If an event has been enabled, a negative
going pulse is generated when event happens. The duration of
this pulse is determined by the value of <duration>.
Parameters:
<event_mask> :
0 – disables all events
hexadecimal number representing the list of events: 1 –
Power Saving Mode
2 – Socket Listen (same as AT#E2SLRI=<duration>)
4 – OTA firmware upgrade (same as
AT#OTASETRI=<duration>)
8 – MT SMS has been received (same as
AT#E2SMSRI=<duration>)
10 – +CREG will change status
20 – +CGREG will change status
40 – #QSS become 2 (SIM INSERTED and PIN UNLOCKED)
80 – MO SMS has been delivered
100 – Jamming Detection & Reporting (JDR)
The hexadecimal number is actually a bit mask, where each bit,
when set/not set, indicates that the corresponding event has
been enabled/disabled.
<duration> :
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 193 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#E2RI – Event Ring Indicator
SELINT 2
50..1150 - the duration in ms of the pulse generated
Note: The values set by the command are stored in the profile
extended section and they don’t depend on the specific AT
instance.
Note: Enabling JDR event when the Enhanced Jamming
Detection &
Reporting feature has been previously enabled (see
#JDRENH2)
AT#E2RI?
Read command reports a line for each event and the duration in
ms of the pulse generated, in the format:
#E2RI: <event_mask>,<duration>
AT#E2RI=?
Test command returns supported values of parameters
<event_mask> and <duration>
5.1.6.1.35. Read Analog/Digital Converter input - #ADC
#ADC - Read Analog/Digital Converter input
AT#ADC=
[<adc>,<mode>
[,<dir>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command reads pin<adc> voltage, converted by ADC, and outputs
it in the format:
#ADC: <value>
where:
<value> - pin<adc> voltage, expressed in mV
Parameters:
<adc> - index of pin
For the number of available ADCs see HW User Guide
<mode> - required action
2 - query ADC value
<dir> - direction; its interpretation is currently not implemented
0 - no effect.
Note: The command returns the last valid measure.
AT#ADC?
Read command reports all pins voltage, converted by ADC, in the format:
#ADC: <value>[<CR><LF>#ADC: <value>[…]]
AT#ADC=?
Test command reports the supported range of values of the command
parameters <adc>, <mode> and <dir>.
5.1.6.1.36. V24 Output Pins Configuration - #V24CFG
#V24CFG - V24 Output Pins Configuration
AT#V24CFG=<pin>,
<mode>[,<save>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command sets the AT commands serial port interface output pins mode.
Parameters:
<pin> - AT commands serial port interface hardware pin:
0 – DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
1 – CTS (Clear To Send)
2 – RI (Ring Indicator)
3 – DSR (Data Set Ready)
Page 194 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#V24CFG - V24 Output Pins Configuration
SELINT 2
4 – DTR (Data Terminal Ready). This is not an output pin, so its state cannot
be set through the AT#V24 command.
5 – RTS (Request To Send). This is not an output pin, so its state cannot be
set through the AT#V24 command.
<mode> - AT commands serial port interface hardware pins mode:
0 – AT commands serial port mode: the V24 pins are controlled by the serial
port device driver (default)
1 – GPIO mode: the V24 output pins can be managed through the AT#V24
command
<save> - Save V24 pin configuration:
0 – Pin configuration is not saved
1 – Pin configuration is saved
Note: when <mode>=1, the V24 pins, both output and input, can be set to
control an external GNSS receiver through the AT$GPSGPIO command.
Note: when the <save> parameter is omitted, the pin configuration is NOT
stored.
Note: changing V24 pins configuration may affect the cellular module
functionality set through AT+CFUN.
AT#V24CFG?
Read command returns the current configuration for all the pins (both output
and input) in the format:
#V24CFG: <pin1>,<mode1>[<CR><LF><CR><LF>
#V24CFG: <pin2>,<mode2>[...]]
Where:
<pinn> - AT command serial port interface HW pin
<moden> - AT commands serial port interface hardware pin mode
AT#V24CFG=?
Test command reports supported range of values for parameters <pin>,
<mode> and <save>.
5.1.6.1.37. V24 Output Pins Control - #V24
#V24 - V24 Output Pins Control
AT#V24=<pin>
[,<state>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command sets the AT commands serial port interface output pins state.
Parameters:
<pin> - AT commands serial port interface hardware pin:
0 - DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
1 - CTS (Clear To Send)
2 - RI (Ring Indicator)
3 - DSR (Data Set Ready)
4 - DTR (Data Terminal Ready). This is not an output pin: we maintain this
value only for backward compatibility, but trying to set its state raises the
result code “ERROR” (not yet implemented)
5 - RTS (Request To Send). This is not an output pin: we maintain this value
only for backward compatibility, but trying to set its state raises the result
code “ERROR”
<state> - State of AT commands serial port interface output hardware pins(0, 1,
2, 3) when pin is in GPIO mode (see #V24CFG):
0 - Low
1 - High
Page 195 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#V24 - V24 Output Pins Control
SELINT 2
Note: if <state> is omitted the command returns the actual state of the pin
<pin>.
AT#V24?
Read command returns actual state for all the pins (either output and input) in
the format:
#V24: <pin1>,<state1>[<CR><LF>
#V24: <pin2>,<state2>[...]]
where
<pinn> - AT command serial port interface HW pin
<staten> - AT commands serial port interface hardware pin state
AT#V24=?
Test command reports supported range of values for parameters <pin> and
<state>.
5.1.6.1.38. Battery and charger status - #CBC
#CBC- Battery And Charger Status
AT#CBC
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the current Battery and Charger state in the format:
#CBC: <ChargerState>,<BatteryVoltage>
where:
<ChargerState> - battery charger state
0 - charger not connected
1 - charger connected and charging
2 - charger connected and charge completed
<BatteryVoltage> - battery voltage in units of ten millivolts: it is the real battery
voltage only if charger is not connected; if the charger is connected this value
depends on the charger voltage.
AT#CBC=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.39. GPRS Auto-Attach Property - #AUTOATT
#AUTOATT - Auto-Attach Property
AT#AUTOATT=
[<auto>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the TE GPRS auto-attach property.
Parameter:
<auto>
0 - disables GPRS auto-attach property
1 - enables GPRS auto-attach property (factory default): after the command
#AUTOATT=1 has been issued (and at every following startup) the terminal will
automatically try to attach to the GPRS service.
Note: for Verizon products setting AT#AUTOATT returns OK but has no effect.
AT#AUTOATT?
Read command reports whether the auto-attach property is currently enabled or
not, in the format:
#AUTOATT: <auto>
AT#AUTOATT=?
Test command reports available values for parameter <auto>.
5.1.6.1.40. Multislot Class Control - #MSCLASS
#MSCLASS - Multislot Class Control
AT#MSCLASS=
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command sets the multislot class
Page 196 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MSCLASS - Multislot Class Control
[<class>[,
<autoattach>]]
Parameters:
<class> - multislot class; take care: class 7 is not supported.
(1-12),(30-33),(35-38) - GPRS (EGPRS) class
SELINT 2
<autoattach>
0 - the new multislot class is enabled only at the next detach/attach or after a
reboot.
1 - the new multislot class is enabled immediately, automatically forcing a
detach / attach procedure.
Note: DTM multislot class is automatically chosen with maximum allowed value
for every GPRS (EGPRS) subset
AT#MSCLASS?
Read command reports the current value of the multislot class in the format:
#MSCLASS: <class>
AT#MSCLASS=?
Test command reports the range of available values for both parameters
<class> and <autoattach>.
5.1.6.1.41. Cell Monitor - #MONI
#MONI - Cell Monitor
AT#MONI[=
[<number>]]
SELINT 2
#MONI is both a set and an execution command.
Set command sets one cell out of seven, in the neighbour list of the serving cell
including it, from which extract GSM /UMTS-related information.
Parameter:
<number>
(GSM network)
0..6 - it is the ordinal number of the cell, in the neighbour list of the serving cell
(default 0, serving cell).
7 - it is a special request to obtain GSM-related information from the whole set of
seven cells in the neighbour list of the serving cell.
(UMTS network)
0 – it is the serving cell in idle; Active set cells are also reported in CELL_DCH
state, i.e. during a call (default)
1 – it is the candidate set ( cells that belong to the Active set, only reported in
CELL_DCH state, i.e. during a call)
2 – it is the synchronized neighbour set (cells that belong to the Virtual Active set,
only reported in CELL_DCH state, i.e. during a call)
3 – it is the asynchronized neighbour set (cells which are not suitable cells to
camp on)
4 – it is the ranked neighbour set (cells which are suitable cells to camp on)
7 - it is a special request to obtain information from the whole set of detected cells
in the neighbour list of the serving cell.
5..6 – it is not available
<LTE network>
0 – it is the serving cell
1 – it is the intra-frequency cells
2 – it is the inter-frequency cells
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 197 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONI - Cell Monitor
3 – it is the WCDMA neighbour cells
4 – it is the GSM neighbour cells
5..7 – it is not available
SELINT 2
Execution command (AT#MONI<CR>) reports GSM/UMTS-related information for
selected cell and dedicated channel (if exists).
1. If the last setting done by #MONI is in the range [0..6], the output format is
as follows:
a) When extracting data for the serving cell and the network name is known the
format is:
(GSM network)
#MONI: <netname> BSIC:<bsic> RxQual:<qual> LAC:<lac> Id:<id>
ARFCN:<arfcn> PWR:<dBm> dBm TA: <timadv>
(UMTS network)
#MONI: <netname> PSC:<psc> RSCP:<rscp> LAC:<lac> Id:<id>EcIo:<ecio>
UARFCN:<uarfcn> PWR:<dBm> dBm DRX:<drx> SCR:<scr>
(LTE network)
#MONI: <netmame> RSRP:<rsrp> RSRQ:<rsrq> TAC:<tac> Id:<id>
EARFCN:<earfcn> PWR:<dBm>dbm DRX:<drx> pci:<pci>
QRxLevMin:<QRxLevMin>
b) When the network name is unknown, the format is:
(GSM network)
#MONI: <cc> <nc> BSIC:<bsic> RxQual:<qual> LAC:<lac> Id:<id>
ARFCN:<arfcn> PWR:<dBm> dBm TA: <timadv>
(UMTS network)
#MONI: <cc> <nc> PSC:<psc> RSCP:<rscp> LAC:,<lac> Id:<id>
EcIo:<ecio> UARFCN:<uarfcn> PWR:<dBm> dBm DRX:<drx>SCR:<scr>
(LTE network)
#MONI: Cc:<cc> Nc:<nc> RSRP:<rsrp> RSRQ:<rsrq> TAC:<tac>
Id:<id> EARFCN:<earfcn> PWR:<dBm>dbm DRX:<drx> pci:<pci>
QRxLevMin:<QRxLevMin>
c) When extracting data for an adjacent cell (or active set cell), the format is:
(GSM network)
#MONI: Adj Cell<n> [LAC:<lac> Id:<id>] ARFCN:<arfcn> PWR:<dBm> dBm
(UMTS network)
#MONI: PSC:<psc> RSCP:<rscp> EcIo:<ecio> UARFCN:<uarfcn> SCR:<scr>
(LTE network)
(LTE intra-frequency and inter-frequency cells)
#MONI: RSRP:<rsrp> RSRQ:<rsrq> Id:<id> EARFCN:<earfcn>
PWR:<dBm>dbm pci:<pci> QRxLevMin:<QRxLevMin>
(LTE WCDMA neighbour cells)
#MONI: PSC:<psc> RSCP:<rscp> EcIo:<ecio> UARFCN:<uarfcn> SCR:<scr>
(LTE GSM neighbour cells)
#MONI: Adj Cell<n> BSIC:<bsic> ARFCN:<arfcn> PWR:<dBm>dbm
where:
<netname> - name of network operator
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 198 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONI - Cell Monitor
SELINT 2
<cc> - country code
<nc> - network operator code
<n> - progressive number of adjacent cell
<bsic> - base station identification code
<qual> - quality of reception
0..7
<lac> - localization area code
<id> - cell identifier
<arfcn> - assigned radio channel
<dBm> - received signal strength in dBm; for serving cell in UMTS network this is
not available during a call, and is displayed as 0
<timadv> - timing advance
<psc> - Primary Scrambling Code
<rscp> - Received Signal Code Power in dBm; for serving cell this is not available
during a call, and is displayed as 255
<ecio> - chip energy per total wideband power in dBm; for serving cell this is not
available during a call, and is displayed as 255
<uarfcn> - UMTS assigned radio channel
<drx> - Discontinuous reception cycle length
<scr> - Scrambling code
<rsrp> - Reference Signal Received Power
<rsrq> - Reference Signal Received Quality
<tac> - Tracking Area Code
<earfcn> - E-UTRA Assigned Radio Channel
<ura_id> - UTRAN Registration Area Identity
<pci> - Physical Cell Id
<QRxLevMin> - Minimum required RX level in the cell
Note: TA: <timadv> is reported only for the serving cell.
2. If the last setting done by #MONI is 7, the execution command produces a
table-like formatted output, as follows:
(GSM network)
a. First row reports the identifying name of the ‘columns’
#MONI:
Cell BSIC LAC CellId ARFCN Power C1 C2 TA RxQual PLMN<CR><LF>
b. Second row reports a complete set of GSM-related information for
the serving cell:
#MONI:
S: <bsic> <lac> <id> <arfcn> <dBm> <C1value> <C2value> <timadv> <qu
al> <netname><CR><LF>
c.
3rd to 8th rows report a reduced set of GSM-related information for
the cells in the neighbours:
#MONI:
N<n> <bsic> <lac> <id> <arfcn> <dBm> <C1value> <C2value>[<CR><LF>]
where:
<C1value> - C1 reselection parameter
<C2value> - C2 reselection parameter
other parameters as before
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 199 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONI - Cell Monitor
SELINT 2
(UMTS network)
a. First row reports a set of information for the serving cell:
#MONI: <netname> PSC:<psc> RSCP:<rscp> LAC:<lac> Id:<id>EcIo:<ecio>
UARFCN:<uarfcn> PWR:<dBm> dBm DRX:<drx> SCR:<scr>
b. the other rows report a set of information for all detected neighbour cells:
#MONI: PSC:<psc> RSCP:<rscp> EcIo:<ecio> UARFCN:<uarfcn> SCR:<scr>
See above for parameters description.
AT#MONI=?
Test command reports the maximum number of cells, in the neighbour list of the
serving cell excluding it, from which we can extract GSM/UMTS-related information,
along with the ordinal number of the current selected cell, in the format:
#MONI: (<MaxCellNo>,<CellSet>)
where:
<MaxCellNo> - maximum number of cells, in the neighbour list of the serving cell
and excluding it, from which we can extract GSM-related information. This value is
always 6.
<CellSet> - the last setting done with command #MONI.
Examples
Set command selects the cell 0 in GSM network
at#moni=0
OK
Execution command reports GSM-related information for cell 0
at#moni
#MONI: I WIND BSIC:70 RxQual:0 LAC:55FA Id:1D23 ARFCN:736 PWR:-83dbm
TA:1
Set command selects the cell 0 in UMTS network
at#moni=0
OK
Execution command reports UMTS-related information for serving cell and active cell
at#moni
#MONI: I TIM PSC:65535 RSCP:255 LAC:EF8D Id:52D2388 EcIo:255
UARFCN:65535 PWR:0dbm DRX:128 SCR:0
#MONI: PSC:49 RSCP:-96 EcIo:-2.0 UARFCN:10638 SCR:784
OK
Set command selects the special request to obtain GSM-related information from the
whole set of seven cells in the neighbour list of the serving cell
at#moni=7
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 200 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONI - Cell Monitor
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the requested information in table-like format
at#moni
#MONI: Cell BSIC LAC CellId ARFCN Power C1 C2 TA RxQual PLMN
#MONI: S 70 55FA 1D23 736 -83dbm 19 33 1 0 I WIND
#MONI: N1 75 55FA 1297 983 -78dbm 26 20
#MONI: N2 72 55FA 1289 976 -82dbm 22 16
#MONI: N3 70 55FA 1D15 749 -92dbm 10 18
#MONI: N4 72 55FA 1D0D 751 -92dbm 10 18
#MONI: N5 75 55FA 1296 978 -95dbm 9 3
#MONI: N6 70 55FA 1D77 756 -99dbm 3 11
OK
Note
The timing advance value is meaningful only during calls or GPRS transfers active.
Note
The serving cell is the current serving cell or the last available serving cell, if the
module loses coverage.
5.1.6.1.42. Compressed Cell Monitor - #MONIZIP
#MONIZIP – Compressed Cell Monitor
AT#MONIZIP[=
[<number>]]
SELINT 2
#MONIZIP is both a set and an execution command.
Set command sets one cell out of seven, in a the neighbour list of the serving cell
including it, from which extract GSM/UMTS-related information.
Parameter:
<number>
(GSM network)
0..6 - it is the ordinal number of the cell, in a the neighbour list of the serving cell
(default 0, serving cell).
7 - it is a special request to obtain GSM-related information from the whole set of
seven cells in the neighbour list of the serving cell.
(UMTS network)
0 – it is the serving cell in idle; Active set cells are also reported in CELL_DCH
state, i.e. during a call (default)
1 – it is the candidate set ( cells that belong to the Active set, only reported in
CELL_DCH state, i.e. during a call)
2 – it is the synchronized neighbour set (cells that belong to the Virtual Active
set, only reported in CELL_DCH state, i.e. during a call)
3 – it is the asynchronized neighbour set (cells which are not suitable cells to
camp on)
4 – it is the ranked neighbour set (cells which are suitable cells to camp on)
7 - it is a special request to obtain information from the whole set of detected cells
in the neighbour list of the serving cell.
5..6 – it is not available
<LTE network>
0 – it is the serving cell
1 – it is the intra-frequency cells
2 – it is the inter-frequency cells
3 – it is the WCDMA neighbour cells
4 – it is the GSM neighbour cells
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 201 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONIZIP – Compressed Cell Monitor
5..7 – it is not available
SELINT 2
Execution command (AT#MONIZIP<CR>) reports GSM/UMTS/LTE-related
information for selected cell and dedicated channel (if exists).
1. If the last setting done by #MONIZIP is in the range [0..6], the output
format is as follows:
a) When extracting data for the serving cell the format is:
(GSM network)
#MONIZIP: <cc><nc>,<bsic>,<qual>,<lac>,<id>,<arfcn>,<dBm>,<timadv>
(UMTS network)
#MONIZIP: <cc><nc>,<psc>,<rscp>,<lac>,<id>,<ecio>,
<uarfcn>,<dBm>,<drx>,<scr>
(LTE network)
#MONIZIP:
<netname>,<rsrp>,<rsrq>,<tac>,<id>,<earfcn>,<dBm>,<drx>,<pci>,<QRxLev
Min>
b) When extracting data for an adjacent cell (or active set cell), the format is:
(GSM network)
#MONIZIP: <lac>,<id>,<arfcn>,<dBm>
(UMTS network)
#MONIZIP: <psc>,<rscp>,<ecio>,<uarfcn>,<scr>
(LTE network)
(LTE intra-frequency and inter-frequency cells)
#MONIZIP: <rsrp>,<rsrq>,<id>,<earfcn>,<dBm>,<pci>,<QRxLevMin>
(LTE WCDMA neighbour cells)
#MONIZIP: <psc>,<rscp>,<ecio>,<uarfcn>,<scr>
(LTE GSM neighbour cells)
#MONIZIP: <n>,<bsic>,<arfcn>,<dBm>
where:
<cc> - country code
<nc> - network operator code
<n> - progressive number of adjacent cell
<bsic> - base station identification code
<qual> - quality of reception
0..7
<lac> - localization area code
<id> - cell identifier
<arfcn> - assigned radio channel
<dBm> - received signal strength in dBm
<timadv> - timing advance
<psc> - Primary Scrambling Code
<rscp> - Received Signal Code Power in dBm; for serving cell this is not available
during a call, and is displayed as 255
<ecio> - chip energy per total wideband power in dBm; for serving cell this is not
available during a call, and is displayed as 255
<uarfcn> - UMTS assigned radio channel
<drx> - Discontinuous reception cycle length
<scr> - Scrambling code
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 202 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONIZIP – Compressed Cell Monitor
<rsrp> - Reference Signal Received Power
<rsrq> - Reference Signal Received Quality
<tac> - Tracking Area Code
<earfcn> - E-UTRA Assigned Radio Channel
<ura_id> - UTRAN Registration Area Identity
<pci> - Physical Cell Id
<QRxLevMin> - Minimum required RX level in the cell
SELINT 2
Note: TA: <timadv> is reported only for the serving cell.
2. If the last setting done by #MONIZIP is 7, the execution command
produces a table-like formatted output, as follows:
(GSM network)
a. First row reports a complete set of GSM-related information for
the serving cell:
#MONIZIP: <bsic>,<lac>,<id>,<arfcn>,<dBm>,<C1value>, <C2value>,<timad
v>,<qual>,<cc><nc><CR><LF>
b. 2nd to 7th rows report a reduced set of GSM-related information
for the cells in the neighbours:
#MONIZIP: <bsic>,<lac>,<id>,<arfcn>,<dBm>,<C1value>, <C2value>[<CR><
LF>]
where:
<C1value> - C1 reselection parameter
<C2value> - C2 reselection parameter
other parameters as before
(UMTS network)
a. First row reports a set of information for the serving cell:
#MONIZIP: <netname>,<psc>,<rscp>,<lac>,<id>,<ecio>,<uarfcn>,
<dBm>,<drx>,<scr>
b. the other rows report a set of information for all detected neighbour cells:
#MONIZIP: <psc>,<rscp>,<ecio>,<uarfcn>,<scr>
See above for parameters description
AT#MONIZIP=?
Test command reports the maximum number of cells, in the neighbour list of the
serving cell excluding it, from which we can extract GSM-related information, along
with the ordinal number of the current selected cell, in the format:
#MONIZIP: (<MaxCellNo>,<CellSet>)
where:
<MaxCellNo> - maximum number of cells, in the neighbour list of the serving cell
and excluding it, from which we can extract GSM-related information. This value is
always 6.
<CellSet> - the last setting done with command #MONIZIP.
Note
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
The refresh time of the measures is preset to 3 sec.
The timing advance value is meaningful only during calls or GPRS transfers active.
Page 203 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MONIZIP – Compressed Cell Monitor
Note
SELINT 2
The serving cell is the current serving cell or the last available serving cell, if the
module loses coverage.
5.1.6.1.43. Serving Cell Information - #SERVINFO
#SERVINFO - Serving Cell Information
AT#SERVINFO
SELINT 2
Execution command reports information about serving cell, in the format:
(GSM network)
#SERVINFO: <B-ARFCN>,<dBM>,<NetNameAsc>,<NetCode>,
<BSIC>,<LAC>,<TA>,<GPRS>[,[<PB-ARFCN>],[<NOM>],
<RAC>,[<PAT>]]
(UMTS network)
#SERVINFO: <UARFCN>, <dBM>, <NetNameAsc>,<NetCode>,
<PSC>,<LAC>,<DRX>,<SD>,<RSCP>, <NOM>,<RAC>
(LTE network)
#SERVINFO:
<EARFCN>,<dBM>,[<NetNameAsc>],<NetCode>,<PhysicalCellId>,<TAC>,<D
RX>,<
SD>,<RSRP>
where:
<B-ARFCN> - BCCH ARFCN of the serving cell
<dBM> - received signal strength in dBm
<NetNameAsc> - operator name, quoted string type
<NetCode> - string representing the network operator in numeric format: 5 or 6
digits [country code (3) + network code (2 or 3)]
<BSIC> - Base Station Identification Code
<LAC> - Localization Area Code
<TA> - Time Advance: it’s available only if a GSM or GPRS is running
<GPRS> - GPRS supported in the cell
0 - not supported
1 - supported
The following information will be present only if GPRS is supported in the cell
<PB-ARFCN> • if PBCCH is supported by the cell
o if its content is the PBCCH ARFCN of the serving cell, then
<PB-ARFCN> is available
o else the label “hopping” will be printed
• else <PB-ARFCN> is not available
<NOM> - Network Operation Mode
..”I”
“II”
..”III”
<RAC> - Routing Area Colour Code
<PAT> - Priority Access Threshold
..0
..3..6
<UARFCN> - UMTS ARFCN of the serving cell
<PSC> - Primary Synchronisation Code
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 204 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SERVINFO - Serving Cell Information
<DRX> - Discontinuous reception cycle length
<SD> - Service Domain
0 – No Service
1 – CS Only
2 – PS Only
3 – CS & PS
<RSCP> - Received Signal Code Power in dBm
<EARFCN> - E-UTRA Assigned Radio Channel
<PhysicalCellId> - Physical Cell ID
<TAC> - Tracking Area Code
<RSRP> - Reference Signal Received Power
<URA> - UTRAN Registration Area Identity
SELINT 2
During a call, a SMS sending/receiving or a location update the value of <GPRS>,
<PB-ARFCN>, <NOM>, <RAC> and <PAT> parameters don’t make sense.
AT#SERVINFO=?
Test command tests for command existence.
5.1.6.1.44. Read current network status - #RFSTS
#RFSTS – Read current network status
AT#RFSTS
SELINT 2
Execution command reads current network status, in the format:
(GSM network)
#RFSTS:<PLMN>,<ARFCN>,<RSSI>,<LAC>,<RAC>,<TXPWR>,<MM>,
<RR>,<NOM>,<CID>,<IMSI>,<NetNameAsc>,<SD>,<ABND>
Where:
<PLMN> - Country code and operator code(MCC, MNC)
<ARFCN> - GSM Assigned Radio Channel
<RSSI> - Received Signal Strength Indication
<LAC> - Localization Area Code
<RAC> - Routing Area Code
<TXPWR> - Tx Power
<MM> - Mobility Management state (for debug purpose only)
0 - NULL
3 - LOCATION UPDATING INITIATED
5 - WAIT FOR OUTGOING MM CONNECTION
6 - CONNECTION ACTIVE
7 - IMSI DETACH INITIATED
8 - PROCESS CM SERVICE PROMPT
9 - WAIT FOR NETWORK COMMAND
10 - LOCATION UPDATE REJECTED
13 - WAIT FOR RR CONNECTION LOCATION UPDATE
14 - WAIT FOR RR CONNECTION MM
15 - WAIT FOR RR CONNECTION IMSI DETACH
17 - WAIT FOR REESTABLISHMENT
18 - WAIT FOR RR ACTIVE
19 - IDLE
20 - WAIT FOR ADDITIONAL OUTGOING MM CONNECTION
21 - CONNECTION ACTIVE GROUP TRANSMIT
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 205 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#RFSTS – Read current network status
22 - WAIT RR CONNECTION GROUP TRANSMIT
23 - LOCATION UPDATING PENDING
24 –IMSI DETACH PENDING
25 - RR CONNECTION RELEASE NOT ALLOWED
255 - UNKNOWN
<RR> - Radio Resource state (for debug purpose only)
2 - CELL SELECTION
3 - WAIT CELL SELECTION
4 - DEACTIVATION CELL SELECTION
5 - SELECT ANY CELL
6 - WAIT SELECT ANY CELL
7 - DEACTIVATION SELECT ANY CELL
8 - WAIT INACTIVE
9 - INACTIVE
10 WAIT IDLE
11 - IDLE
12 - PLMN SEARCH
13 - CELL RESELECTION
14 - WAIT CELL RESELECTION
15 - DEACTIVATION PLMN SEARCH
16 - CELL CHANGE
17 - CS CELL CHANGE
18 - WAIT CELL CHANGE
19 - SINGLE BLOCK ASSIGNMENT
20 - DOWNLINK TBF ESTABLISH
21 - UPLINK TBF ESTABLISH
22 - WAIT TBF
23 - TRANSFER
24 - WAIT SYNC
25 - DTM ENHANCED CALL ESTABLISH
26 - DTM
27 - DTM ENHANCED MO CALL ESTABLISH
28 - MO CONNECTION ESTABLISH
29 - MT CONNECTION ESTABLISH
30 - RR CONNECTION
31 - DTM ESTABLISH
32 - DTM RELEASE
33 - CALL REESTABLISH
34 – DEACTIVATION CALL REESTABLISH
35 - NORMAL CHANNEL RELEASE
36 - LOCAL CHANNEL RELEASE
37 - DEACTIVATION
38 - ENHANCED DTM CS CALL ESTABLISH
39 - CELL RESELECTION TO UTRAN
40 - DTM ENHANCED CS CALL ESTABLISH
41 – INTER RAT ACTIVE ON HOLD
SELINT 2
42 – INTER RAT RESEL ABORT
43 – INTER RAT WAIT INTER RAT
44 – INTER RAT WAIT FOR RSRC
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 206 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#RFSTS – Read current network status
45 - DSIM SUSPEND
46 - DSIM WAIT SUSPEND
47 - DSIM WAIT SUSPEND IDLE
<NOM> - Network Operator Mode
<CID> - Cell ID
<IMSI> - International Mobile Subscriber Identity
<NetNameAsc> - Operator name
<SD> - Service Domain
0 - No Service
1 - CS only
2 - PS only
3 - CS+PS
SELINT 2
<ABND> - Active Band
1 - GSM 850
2 - GSM 900
3 - DCS 1800
4 - PCS 1900
(WCDMA network)
#RFSTS:
[<PLMN>],<UARFCN>,<PSC>,<Ec/Io>,<RSCP>, RSSI>,[<LAC>],
[<RAC>],<TXPWR>,<DRX>,<MM>,<RRC>,<NOM>,<BLER>,<CID>,<IMSI>,
<NetNameAsc>,<SD>,<nAST>[,<nUARFCN><nPSC>,<nEc/Io>]
Where:
<PLMN> - Country code and operator code(MCC, MNC)
<UARFCN> - UMTS Assigned Radio Channel
<PSC> - Active PSC(Primary Synchronization Code)
<Ec/Io> - Active Ec/Io(chip energy per total wideband power in dBm)
<RSCP> - Active RSCP (Received Signal Code Power in dBm)
<RSSI> - Received Signal Strength Indication
<LAC> - Localization Area Code
<RAC> - Routing Area Code
<TXPWR> - Tx Power
<DRX> - Discontinuous reception cycle Length (cycle length in ms)
<MM> - Mobility Management state (for debug purpose only)
0 - NULL
3 - LOCATION UPDATING INITIATED
5 - WAIT FOR OUTGOING MM CONNECTION
6 - CONNECTION ACTIVE
7 - IMSI DETACH INITIATED
8 - PROCESS CM SERVICE PROMPT
9 - WAIT FOR NETWORK COMMAND
10 - LOCATION UPDATE REJECTED
13 - WAIT FOR RR CONNECTION LOCATION UPDATE
14 - WAIT FOR RR CONNECTION MM
15 - WAIT FOR RR CONNECTION IMSI DETACH
17 - WAIT FOR REESTABLISHMENT
18 - WAIT FOR RR ACTIVE
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 207 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#RFSTS – Read current network status
19 - IDLE
20 - WAIT FOR ADDITIONAL OUTGOING MM CONNECTION
21 - CONNECTION ACTIVE GROUP TRANSMIT
22 - WAIT RR CONNECTION GROUP TRANSMIT
23 - LOCATION UPDATING PENDING
24 –IMSI DETACH PENDING
25 - RR CONNECTION RELEASE NOT ALLOWED
255 - UNKNOWN
<RRC> - Radio Resource state (for debug purpose only)
0 - CELL DCH
1 - CELL FACH
2 - CELL PCH
3 - URA PCH
4 - IDLE
5 - IDLE CCCH
<NOM> - Network Operator Mode
<BLER> - Block Error Rate (e.g., 005 means 0.5 %)
<CID> - Cell ID
<IMSI> - International Mobile Station ID
<NetNameAsc> - Operator name
<SD> - Service Domain (see above)
<nAST> - Number of Active Set (Maximum 6)
<nUARFCN>
UARFCN of n th active set
<nPSC>
PSC of n th active set
<nEc/Io >
Ec/Io of n th active Set
SELINT 2
(LTE network)
#RFSTS:
<PLMN>,<EARFCN>,<RSRP>,<RSSI>,<RSRQ>,<TAC>,<RAC>,[<TXPWR>],<DRX>
,<MM
>,<RRC>,<CID>,<IMSI>,[<NetNameAsc>],<SD>,<ABND>,<T3402>,<T3412>
Where:
<PLMN> - Country code and operator code(MCC, MNC)
<EARFCN> - E-UTRA Assigned Radio Channel
<RSRP> - Reference Signal Received Power
<RSSI> - Received Signal Strength Indication
<RSRQ - Reference Signal Received Quality
<TAC> - Tracking Area Code
<RAC> - Routing Area Code
<TXPWR> - Tx Power (In traffic only)
<DRX> - Discontinuous reception cycle Length (cycle length in ms)
<MM> - Mobility Management state (for debug purpose only; see above)
<RRC> - Radio Resource state (for debug purpose only; see above)
<CID> - Cell ID
<IMSI> - International Mobile Station ID<SD> - Service Domain
0 - No Service
1 - CS only
2 - PS only
3 - CS+PS
<ABND> - Active Band
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 208 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#RFSTS – Read current network status
SELINT 2
1..63according to 3GPP TS 36.101<T3402> - Timer T3402 in seconds
<T3412> - Timer T3412 in seconds
AT#RFSTS=?
Test command tests for command existence.
5.1.6.1.45. Query SIM Status - #QSS
#QSS - Query SIM Status
AT#QSS=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the Query SIM Status unsolicited indication in the
ME.
Parameter:
<mode> - type of notification
0 - disabled (factory default); it’s possible only to query the current SIM status
through Read command AT#QSS?
1 - enabled; the ME informs at every SIM status change through the following
basic unsolicited indication:
#QSS: <status>
where:
<status> - current SIM status
0 - SIM NOT INSERTED
1 - SIM INSERTED
2 - enabled; the ME informs at every SIM status change through the following
unsolicited indication:
#QSS: <status>
where:
<status> - current SIM status
0 - SIM NOT INSERTED
1 - SIM INSERTED
2 - SIM INSERTED and PIN UNLOCKED
3 - SIM INSERTED and READY (SMS and Phonebook access are
possible).
AT#QSS?
Read command reports whether the unsolicited indication #QSS is currently
enabled or not, along with the SIM status, in the format:
#QSS: <mode>,<status>
(<mode> and <status> are described above).
AT#QSS=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameter <mode>.
Page 209 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.46. Delete all phonebook entries - #CPBD
#CPBD – Delete All Phonebook Entries
SELINT 2
AT#CPBD
Execution command deletes all phonebook entries in the current phonebook
memory storage selected with +CPBS.
AT#CPBD=?
Test command tests for command existence
5.1.6.1.47. ATD Dialing Mode - #DIALMODE
#DIALMODE - Dialing Mode
AT#DIALMODE=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets dialing modality.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - (voice call only) OK result code is received as soon as it starts remotely
ringing (factory default)
1 – (voice call only) OK result code is received only after the called party
answers. Any character typed aborts the call and OK result code is received.
2 - (voice call and data call) the following custom result codes are received,
monitoring step by step the call status:
DIALING (MO in progress)
RINGING (remote ring)
CONNECTED (remote call accepted)
RELEASED (after ATH)
DISCONNECTED (remote hang-up)
Any character typed before the CONNECTED message aborts the call
Note: In case a BUSY tone is received and at the same time ATX0 is enabled
ATD will return NO CARRIER instead of DISCONNECTED.
Note: The setting is saved in NVM and available on following reboot.
AT#DIALMODE?
Read command returns current ATD dialling mode in the format:
#DIALMODE: <mode>
AT#DIALMODE=?
Test command returns the range of values for parameter <mode>
5.1.6.1.48. Automatic call - #ACAL
#ACAL - Automatic Call
AT#ACAL=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the automatic call function.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables the automatic call function (factory default)
1 - enables the automatic call function. If enabled (and &D2 has been issued),
the transition OFF/ON of DTR causes an automatic call to the first number
(position 0) stored in the internal phonebook.
Note: type of call depends on the last issue of command +FCLASS.
AT#ACAL?
Read command reports whether the automatic call function is currently enabled
or not, in the format:
#ACAL: <mode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 210 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ACAL - Automatic Call
SELINT 2
Note: as a consequence of the introduction of the command #ACALEXT
(Extended Automatic Call) it is possible that the Read Command returns
a value supported by #ACALEXT but NOT supported by #ACAL.
AT#ACAL?
#ACAL : 2
OK
Due to this possible situation it is strongly recommended not to use
contemporaneously both commands.
AT#ACAL=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameter <mode>.
Note
See &Z to write and &N to read the number on module internal phonebook.
5.1.6.1.49. Extended automatic call - #ACALEXT
#ACALEXT – Extended Automatic Call
AT#ACALEXT=
<mode>,<index>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the extended automatic call function.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 - disables the automatic call function (factory default)
1 - enables the automatic call function from internal phonebook.
2 - enables the automatic call function from “SM” phonebook.
<index> - it indicates a position in the currently selected phonebook.
If the extended automatic call function is enabled and &D2 has been issued, the
transition OFF/ON of DTR causes an automatic call to the number stored in
position <index> in the selected phonebook.
Note: type of call depends on the last issue of command +FCLASS.
AT#ACALEXT?
Read command reports either whether the automatic call function is currently
enabled or not, and the last <index> setting in the format:
#ACALEXT: <mode>,<index>
AT#ACALEXT=?
The range of available positions in a phonebook depends on the selected
phonebook. This is the reason why the test command returns three ranges of
values: the first for parameter <mode>, the second for parameter <index> when
is chosen the internal phonebook, the third for parameter <index> when “SM” is
the chosen phonebook.
Note
Issuing #ACALEXT causes the #ACAL <mode> to be changed.
Issuing AT#ACAL=1 causes the #ACALEXT <index> to be set to default.
It is recommended to NOT use contemporaneously either #ACALEXT and
#ACAL
Note
See &Z to write and &N to read the number on module internal phonebook.
5.1.6.1.50. Extended Call Monitoring - #ECAM
#ECAM - Extended Call Monitoring
AT#ECAM=
[<onoff>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
This command enables/disables the call monitoring function in the ME.
Page 211 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ECAM - Extended Call Monitoring
SELINT 2
Parameter:
<onoff>
0 - disables call monitoring function (factory default)
1 - enables call monitoring function; the ME informs about call events, such as
incoming call, connected, hang up etc. using the following unsolicited indication:
#ECAM: <ccid>,<ccstatus>,<calltype>,,,[<number>,<type>]
where
<ccid> - call ID
<ccstatus> - call status
0 - idle
1 - calling (MO)
2 - connecting (MO)
3 - active
4 - hold
5 - waiting (MT)
6 - alerting (MT)
7 - busy
<calltype> - call type
1 - voice
2 - data
<number> - called number (valid only for <ccstatus>=1)
<type> - type of <number>
129 - national number
145 - international number
Note: the unsolicited indication is sent along with usual codes (OK, NO
CARRIER, BUSY...).
AT#ECAM?
Read command reports whether the extended call monitoring function is
currently enabled or not, in the format:
#ECAM: <onoff>
AT#ECAM=?
Test command returns the list of supported values for <onoff>.
5.1.6.1.51. Circuit Switched Fallback - #CSFB
#CSFB – Circuit Switched Fallback
AT#CSFB=<mode>
SELINT 2
This command is available for LE910-xx V2 variants supporting with 2G/3G
fallback technologies.
Set command configures the mode of operation for Circuit Switched Fallback.
Parameter:
<n>: unsolicited and mode of operation for Circuit Switched Fallback
0 - disable reporting of CSFB related CS paging requests and disable automatic
acceptance/rejection of CSFB calls.
1 - enable reporting of CSFB related CS paging requests and disable automatic
acceptance/rejection of CSFB calls.
2 - enable reporting of CSFB related CS paging requests and enable automatic
acceptance of CSFB calls. CSFB is always preferred over PS. (default)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 212 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSFB – Circuit Switched Fallback
SELINT 2
3 - enable reporting of CSFB related CS paging requests and enable automatic
rejection of CSFB calls.
4 - accept CSFB call. This value can be used only after having received the
unsolicited result code #CSFBI.
5 - reject CSFB call. This value can be used only after having received the
unsolicited result code #CSFBI.
The format of the enabled unsolicited is:
#CSFBI: <m>,<ph_no>,<ss_code>,<lcs_indicator>,
<lcs_client_identity>
where:
<m>: Notification parameter
0 - No user response required. This could be because of last user settings
AT#CSFB=2 or 3.
1 - User response required. User should respond with AT#CSFB=4 or 5.
2 - CSFB operation failed due to some error.
<ph_no>: string with the identification of the calling line for the mobile
terminating call in the CS domain, which triggered the paging via SGs.
<ss_code>: information on the supplementary service transaction in the CS
domain, which triggered the paging via SGs.
<lcs_indicator>: indicates that the paging was triggered by a terminating LCS
request in the CS domain.
<lcs_client_identity>: string with the information related to the requestor of the
terminating LCS request in the CS domain.
Note 1: options 4 and 5 has to be sent only when the CSFB indication(URC) is
sent with <m> = 1.
Note 2: options 4 and 5 will not be reported in AT#CSFB? command.
Note 3: In case CSFB indication is reported and there is no answer before the
timer expires, a timeout scenario is handled.
Note 4: the setting is saved in NVM.
AT#CSFB?
Read command returns the currently configured values, in the format:
#CSFB: < mode >
AT#CSFB=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameters < mode>
#CSFB: (0-5)
5.1.6.1.52. SMS Overflow - #SMOV
#SMOV - SMS Overflow
AT#SMOV=
[<mode>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the SMS overflow signaling function.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables SMS overflow signaling function (factory default)
Page 213 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SMOV - SMS Overflow
SELINT 2
1 - enables SMS overflow signaling function; when the maximum storage
capacity has been reached, the following network initiated notification is
sent:
#SMOV: <memo>
where <memo> is a string indicating the SMS storage that has reached
maximum capacity:
“SM” – SIM Memory
“ME” – NVM SMS storage
AT#SMOV?
Read command reports whether the SMS overflow signaling function is currently
enabled or not, in the format:
#SMOV: <mode>
AT#SMOV=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter <mode>.
5.1.6.1.53. Mailbox Numbers - #MBN
#MBN - Mailbox Numbers
AT#MBN
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the mailbox numbers stored on SIM, if this service
is provided by the SIM.
The response format is:
[#MBN: <index>,<number>,<type>[,<text>][,mboxtype][<CR><LF>
#MBN: <index>,<number>,<type>[,<text>][,mboxtype][…]]]
where:
<index> - record number
<number> - string type mailbox number in the format <type>
<type> - type of mailbox number octet in integer format
129 - national numbering scheme
145 - international numbering scheme (contains the character "+")
<text> - the alphanumeric text associated to the number; used character set
should be the one selected with command +CSCS
<mboxtype> - the message waiting group type of the mailbox, if available:
"VOICE" - voice
"FAX" - fax
"EMAIL" - electronic mail
"OTHER" - other
Note: if all queried locations are empty (but available), no information text lines
will be returned.
AT#MBN=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.54. Message Waiting Indication - #MWI
#MWI - Message Waiting Indication
AT#MWI=<enable>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the presentation of the message waiting
indicator URC.
Parameter:
<enable>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 214 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#MWI - Message Waiting Indication
SELINT 2
0 - disable the presentation of the #MWI URC
1 - enable the presentation of the #MWI URC each time a new message
waiting indicator is received from the network and, at startup, the
presentation of the status of the message waiting indicators, as they are
currently stored on SIM..
The URC format is:
#MWI: <status>,<indicator>[,<count>]
where:
<status>
0 - clear: it has been deleted one of the messages related to the indicator
<indicator>.
1 - set: there’s a new waiting message related to the indicator <indicator>
<indicator>
1 - either Line 1 (CPHS context) or Voice (3GPP context)
2 - Line 2 (CPHS context only)
3 - Fax
4 - E-mail
5 - Other
<count> - message counter: network information reporting the number of
pending messages related to the message waiting indicator
<indicator>.
The presentation at startup of the message waiting indicators status, as they
are currently stored on SIM, is as follows:
#MWI: <status>[,<indicator>[,<count>][<CR><LF>
#MWI: <status>,<indicator>[,<count>][...]]]
where:
<status>
0 - no waiting message indicator is currently set: if this the case no other
information is reported
1 - there are waiting messages related to the message waiting indicator
<indicator>.
<indicator>
1 - either Line 1 (CPHS context) or Voice (3GPP context)
2 - Line 2 (CPHS context)
3 - Fax
4 - E-mail
5 - Other
<count> - message counter: number of pending messages related to the
message waiting indicator <indicator> as it is stored on SIM.
AT#MWI?
Read command reports wheter the presentation of the message waiting
indicator URC is currently enabled or not, and the current status of the
message waiting indicators as they are currently stored on SIM. The format is:
#MWI: <enable>,<status>[,<indicator>[,<count>][<CR><LF>
#MWI: <enable>,<status>,<indicator>[,<count>][...]]]
AT#MWI=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the range of available values for parameter <enable>.
Page 215 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.55. Network Emergency Number Update - #NWEN
#NWEN – Network Emergency Number Update
AT#NWEN=[<en>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables unsolicited indication of emergency
number update.
Parameters:
<en>
0 - disables unsolicited indication of emergency number update (factory
default)
1 - enables unsolicited indication of emergency number update
#NWEN: <type>
where:
<type>
1 number list update from internal ME
2 number list update from SIM
3 number list update from network
AT#NWEN?
Read command reports whether the unsolicited indication of network
emergency number update is currently enabled or not, in the format:
#NWEN: <en>
AT#NWEN=?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <en>
5.1.6.1.56. Update PLMN List - #PLMNUPDATE
SELINT 2
#PLMNUPDATE – Update PLMN List
AT#PLMNUPDATE=[<action>, Set command adds a new entry or updates an existing entry of the
<MCC>,<MNC>[,<PLMNname> module PLMN list.
]]
Parameter:
<action> - command action
0 - remove the entry with selected <MCC> and <MNC>. Parameter
<PLMNname> will be ignored
1 - update the entry with selected <MCC> and <MNC> if it is already
present, otherwise add it.
2 – remove all entries. Parameters <MCC> and <MNC> are not used
in this case.
<MCC> - Mobile Country Code. String value, length 3 digits.
<MNC> - Mobile Network Code. String value, min length 2 digits, max
length 3 digits.
<PLMNname> - Name of the PLMN; string value, max length 30
characters.
NOTE: the entries will be saved in NVM.
NOTE: this command supports up to 30 entries.
NOTE: entries added or updated with #PLMNUPDATE are effective
only if #PLMNMODE is set to 2.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 216 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
AT#PLMNUPDATE?
Read command returns the list of entries added or updated with set
command, in the format:
#PLMNUPDATE: <MCC>,<MNC>,<PLMNname>
#PLMNUPDATE: <MCC>,<MNC>,<PLMNname>
…
OK
NOTE: the entries are in increasing order by MCC and MNC
AT#PLMNUPDATE=?
Test command returns the range of <action> parameter and the
maximum length of <MCC>, <MNC> and <PLMNname> parameters.
5.1.6.1.57. PLMN List Selection - #PLMNMODE
#PLMNMODE – PLMN List Selection
AT#PLMNMODE=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command selects the list of PLMN names to be used currently
Parameter:
<mode>
1 – disable PLMN list updates set with #PLMNUPDATE command
(factory default)
2 – enable PLMN list updates set with #PLMNUPDATE command.
Note: <mode> parameter is saved in NVM
AT#PLMNMODE?
Read command reports whether the currently used list of PLMN names
is fixed or not, in the format:
#PLMNMODE: <mode>
(<mode> described above)
AT#PLMNMODE=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameter
<mode>.
5.1.6.1.58. Periodical FPLMN cleaning - #FPLMN
#FPLMN – Periodically FPLMN clearing
SELINT 2
AT#FPLMN=<action>[ Periodically delete the Forbidden PLMN list stored inside the SIM card.
,<period>]
Parameters:
<action> :
0 – disable periodic FPLMN clearing (default)
1 – enable periodic FPLMN clearing with period <period>
2 – clear FPLMN file on SIM (one shot)
3 – list contents of forbidden PLMN list file
<period> : interval in minutes from FPLMN clearing, range 1...60, default value
is 60
Note: the disable/enable value set by command is directly stored in NVM.
AT#FPLMN?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command reports whether the periodic deletion is currently enabled or
not,
and the deletion period, in the format:
#FPLMN: <action>,<period>
Page 217 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
AT#FPLMN=?
Test command reports available values for parameters <action> and <period>.
5.1.6.1.59. Show Call Timers - #SCT
#SCT – Show Call Timers
AT#SCT
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the value stored in USIM field Incoming Call Timer,
which contains the accumulated incoming call timer duration value for the current
call and previous calls, and the value stored in the USIM field Outgoing Call Timer,
that contains the accumulated outgoing call timer duration value for the current call
and previous calls, in the format:
#SCT: <ICT>,<OCT>
where:
<ICT> - Incoming Call Timer string, in the format: "hh:mm:ss", where
hh - hour
mm - minute
ss - seconds
<OCT> - Outgoing Call Timer string, in the format: "hh:mm:ss", where
hh - hour
mm - minute
ss - seconds
AT#SCT=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.60. #Show Call Information - #SCI
#SCI – Show Call Information
AT#SCI
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the value stored in USIM field Incoming Call
Information, which contains the time of the call and duration of the last calls, and
the value stored in the USIM field Outgoing Call Information, that contains time of
the call and duration of the last calls, in the format:
#SCI:
<index1>,<number>,<text>,<callTime>,<callDuration>[,<status>]<CR><LF>
#SCI: <index2>,<number>,<text>,<callTime>,<callDuration>[,<status>][…]]]
where:
<indexn> - the type of the entry ( 1: incoming call; 2: outgoing call)
<number> - string type phone number
<text> - the alphanumeric text associated to the number; used character set
should be the one selected with command +CSCS
<callTime> - call time yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz, where
yy - year
MM - month
dd - day
hh - hour
mm - minute
ss - seconds
±zz - time zone
<callDuration> - call duration in the format: "hh:mm:ss", where
hh - hour
mm - minute
ss - seconds
<status> - only for incoming calls, call status (0: answered: 1: not answered)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 218 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SCI – Show Call Information
AT#SCI=?
SELINT 2
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.1.61. Packet Service Network Type - #PSNT
#PSNT – Packet Service Network Type
AT#PSNT=[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables unsolicited result code for packet service
network type (PSNT).
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disable PSNT unsolicited result code (factory default)
1 - enable PSNT unsolicited result code
2 - PSNT unsolicited result code enabled; read command reports HSUPA
and HSDPA related info
AT#PSNT?
Read command reports the <mode>,<nt> and HSUPA and HSDPA related info
in the format:
(<mode> = 2)
#PSNT: <mode>,<nt>,<is_hsupa_available>,<
is_hsupa_used>,<is_hsdpa_available>,<is_hsdpa_used>
(<mode> = 0 or <mode> = 1)
#PSNT: <mode>,<nt>
where
<mode>
0 - PSNT unsolicited result code disabled
1 - PSNT unsolicited result code enabled
2 - PSNT unsolicited result code enabled; read command reports HSUPA and
HSDPA related info
<nt> - network type
0 - GPRS network
1 - EGPRS network
2 - WCDMA network
3 - HSDPA network
4 – LTE network
5 - unknown or not registered.
<is_hsupa_available> - HSUPA available
0 – HSUPA is not supported by network
1 – HSUPA is supported by network
<is_hsupa_used> - HSUPA used
0 – HSUPA is not in use
1 – HSUPA is in use
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 219 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#PSNT – Packet Service Network Type
<is_hsdpa_available> - HSDPA available
SELINT 2
0 – HSDPA is not supported by network
1 – HSDPA is supported by network
<is_hsdpa_used> - HSPA used
0 – HSDPA is not in use
1 – HSDPA is in use
Note: when the reported type of network <nt> is 2, the <nt> indication could be
not complete in idle, because it depends on some not always broadcasted
network parameters (HSDPA could be supported anyway); it is valid during
traffic.
AT#PSNT=?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <mode>
5.1.6.1.62. SIM Presence status - #SIMPR
#SIMPR – SIM Presence status
AT#SIMPR=[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the SIM Presence Status unsolicited
indication in the ME. This command reports also the status of the remote SIM,
if the SAP functionality is supported and has been enabled.
Parameter:
<mode> - type of notification
0 - disabled (factory default)
1 - enabled; the ME informs at every (local and remote) SIM status change
through the following unsolicited indication:
#SIMPR: <SIM>,<status>
where:
<SIM> - local or remote SIM
0 local SIM
1 remote SIM
<status> - current SIM status
0 - SIM NOT INSERTED
1 - SIM INSERTED
AT#SIMPR?
Read command reports whether the unsolicited indication #SIMPR is currently
enabled or not, along with the local and remote SIM status, in the format:
#SIMPR: <mode>,0,<status><CR><LF>
#SIMPR: <mode>,1,<status>
If SAP functionality is not supported or enabled the remote SIM status will
always be 0.
AT#SIMPR=?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <mode>
5.1.6.1.63. Call Forwarding Flags - #CFF
#CFF – Call Forwarding Flags
AT#CFF=<enable>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the presentation of the call forwarding flags URC.
Page 220 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CFF – Call Forwarding Flags
SELINT 2
Parameter:
<enable>
0 - disable the presentation of the #CFF URC (default value)
1 - enable the presentation of the #CFF URC each time the Call Forwarding
Unconditional (CFU) SS setting is changed or checked and, at startup, the
presentation of the status of the call forwarding flags, as they are currently
stored on SIM.
The URC format is:
#CFF: <status>,<fwdtonum>
where:
<status>
0 – CFU disabled
1 – CFU enabled
< fwdtonum > - number incoming calls are forwarded to
The presentation at start up of the call forwarding flags status, as they are
currently stored on SIM, is as follows:
#CFF: <status>,< fwdtonum >
where:
<status>
0 – CFU disabled
1 – CFU enabled
< fwdtonum > - number incoming calls are forwarded to
AT#CFF?
Read command reports whether the presentation of the call forwarding flags
URC is currently enabled or not, and, if the flags field is present in the SIM, the
current status of the call forwarding flags as they are currently stored on SIM,
and the number incoming calls are forwarded to. The format is:
#CFF: <enable>[,<status>,< fwdtonum >]
AT#CFF=?
Test command returns the range of available values for
parameter <enable>.
5.1.6.1.64. GSM and UMTS Audio Codec - #CODEC
#CODEC – GSM and UMTS Audio Codec
AT#CODEC=
[<codec>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the GSM and UMTS audio codec mode.
Parameter:
<codec>
0 - all the codec modes are enabled
1..255 - sum of integers each representing a specific codec mode:
1 - FR, full rate mode enabled
2 - EFR, enhanced full rate mode enabled
4 - HR, half rate mode enabled
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 221 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CODEC – GSM and UMTS Audio Codec
8 - AMR-FR, AMR full rate mode enabled
16 - AMR-HR, AMR half rate mode enabled
32 – FAWB, full rate AMR wide band
64 – UAMR2, UMTS AMR version 2
128 – UAWB, UMTS AMR wide band
SELINT 2
Note: the default value is 0 for all products except LE910-NA-V2 and LE910NA1.
Note: the full rate mode is added by default to any setting in the SETUP
message (as specified in ETSI 04.08), but the call drops if the network
assigned codec mode has not been selected by the user.
Note: AT#CODEC=4 and AT#CODEC= 16 are not recommended; better using
AT#CODEC=5 and AT#CODEC=24 respectively
Note: the setting 0 is equivalent to the setting 255.
Note: The codec setting is saved in the profile parameters.
Note: 3G only products support <codec> parameter value 0 or sum of integers
64 and 128 only.
AT#CODEC?
Read command returns current audio codec mode in the format:
#CODEC: <codec>
AT#CODEC=?
Test command returns the range of available values for parameter <codec>
Example
AT#CODEC=14
OK
sets the codec modes HR (4), EFR (2) and AMR-FR (8)
5.1.6.1.65. Network Timezone - #NITZ
#NITZ - Network Timezone
AT#NITZ=
[<val>
[,<mode>]]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables (a) automatic date/time updating, (b) Full
Network Name applying and (c) #NITZ URC; moreover it permits to change the
#NITZ URC format.
Date and time information can be sent by the network after GSM registration or
after GPRS attach.
Parameters:
<val>
0 - disables (a) automatic data/time updating, (b) Full Network Name applying
and (c) #NITZ URC; moreover it sets the #NITZ URC ‘basic’ format (see
<datetime> below)
1..15 - as a sum of:
1 - enables automatic date/time updating
2 - enables Full Network Name applying
4 - it sets the #NITZ URC ‘extended’ format (see <datetime> below)
8 - it sets the #NITZ URC ‘extended’ format with Daylight Saving Time (DST)
support (see <datetime> below)
(default: 7)
<mode>
0 - disables #NITZ URC (factory default)
1 - enables #NITZ URC; after date and time updating the following unsolicited
indication is sent:
#NITZ: <datetime>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 222 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#NITZ - Network Timezone
SELINT 2
where:
<datetime> - string whose format depends on subparameter <val>
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss” - ‘basic’ format, if <val> is in (0..3)
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz” - ‘extended’ format, if <val> is in (4..7)
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz,d” - ‘extended’ format with DST support, if <val> is
in (8..15)
where:
yy - year
MM - month (in digits)
dd - day
hh - hour
mm - minute
ss - second
zz - time zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarter of an hour,
between the local time and GMT; two last digits are mandatory, range is 47..+48)
d – number of hours added to the local TZ because of Daylight Saving Time
(summertime) adjustment; range is 0-3.
Note: If the DST information isn’t sent by the network, then the <datetime>
parameter has the format “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”
AT#NITZ?
Read command reports whether (a) automatic date/time updating, (b) Full
Network Name applying, (c) #NITZ URC (as well as its format) are currently
enabled or not, in the format:
#NITZ: <val>,<mode>
AT#NITZ=?
Test command returns supported values of parameters <val> and <mode>.
5.1.6.1.66. Clock management - #CCLK
#CCLK - Clock Management
AT#CCLK=<time>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the real-time clock of the ME.
Parameter:
<time> - current time as quoted string in the format:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz,d"
yy - year (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..99
MM - month (two last digits are mandatory), range is 01..12
dd - day (two last digits are mandatory)
The range for dd(day) depends either on the month and on the year it
refers to. Available ranges are:
(01..28)
(01..29)
(01..30)
(01..31)
Trying to enter an out of range value will raise an error
hh - hour (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..23
mm - minute (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..59
ss - seconds (two last digits are mandatory), range is 00..59
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 223 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CCLK - Clock Management
SELINT 2
±zz - time zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarter of an hour,
between the local time and GMT; two last digits are mandatory), range is
-47..+48
d – number of hours added to the local TZ because of Daylight Saving Time
(summertime) adjustment; range is 0-2.
AT#CCLK?
Read command returns the current setting of the real-time clock, in the format
<time>.
Note: if the time is set by the network but the DST information is missing, or the
time is set by +CCLK command, then the <time> format is:
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz"
AT#CCLK=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT#CCLK="02/09/07,22:30:00+04,1"
OK
AT#CCLK?
#CCLK: “02/09/07,22:30:25+04,1”
OK
5.1.6.1.67. Clock Mode - #CCLKMODE
#CCLKMODE – Clock Mode
AT#CCLKMODE=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command enables the local time or the UTC time in AT+CCLK and
AT#CCLK commands and in #NITZ URC
Parameter:
<mode> - time and date mode
0 - Local time + local time zone offset (default)
1 – UTC time + local time zone offset
Note: the setting is saved automatically in NVM.
AT#CCLKMODE?
Read command reports whether the local time or the UTC time is enabled, in
the format:
#CCLKMODE: <mode>
(<mode> described above)
AT#CCLKMODE=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <mode>
Example
at#cclkmode?
#CCLKMODE: 0
OK
#NITZ: 13/03/05,15:20:33+04,0
at+cclk?
+CCLK: "13/03/05,15:20:37+04"
OK
at#cclkmode=1
OK
at+cclk?
+CCLK: "13/03/05,14:20:45+04"
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 224 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CCLKMODE – Clock Mode
OK
SELINT 2
at#cclkmode?
#CCLKMODE: 1
OK
#NITZ: 13/03/05,14:20:53+04,0
at+cclk?
+CCLK: "13/03/05,14:20:55+04"
OK
at#cclkmode=0
OK
at+cclk?
+CCLK: "13/03/05,15:20:59+04"
OK
5.1.6.1.68. Calculate and update date and time - #NTP
#NTP – Calculate and update date and time
AT#NTP=
<NTPaddr>,
<NTPPort>,
<update_module_cloc
k>,
<timeout>[,<TimeZone
>]
SELINT 2
This command permits to calculate and update date and time through NTP
protocol(RFC2030), sending a request to a NTP
server.
Parameters:
<NTPaddr> - address of the NTP server, string type. This parameter can be
either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
- any host name to be solved with a DNS query
<NTPPort> - NTP server port to contact
1..65535
<update_module_clock>
0 - no update module clock
1 – update module clock
<timeout> - waiting timeout for server response in seconds
1..10
<TimeZone> - Time Zone (indicates the difference, expressed in quarter of an
hour, between the local time and GMT), range is -47..+48; default is 0.
Note: the Time Zone is applied directly in the Date and Time received by the
NTP Server, that is, by definition, GMT+0
AT#NTP=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<NTPaddr>,<NTPPort>,<update_module_clock>,
<timeout> and <TimeZone>
Page 225 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#NTP – Calculate and update date and time
Example
SELINT 2
at#ntp="ntp1.inrim.it",123,1,2,4
#NTP: 12/01/27,14:42:38+04
OK
….
at+cclk?
+CCLK: "12/01/27,14:42:39+04"
OK
5.1.6.1.69. Enhanced Network Selection - #ENS
#ENS - Enhanced Network Selection
SELINT 2
AT#ENS=[<mode>] Set command is used to activate the ENS functionality.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disable ENS functionality (default for all products except LE910-NA V2/NA1)
1 - enable ENS functionality
if AT#ENS=1 has been issued, the following values will be automatically
set:
- at every next power-up
b SIM Application Toolkit enabled on user interface 0 if not previously enabled
on a different user interface (AT#STIA=2).
-
just at first next power-up
a Automatic Band Selection enabled (AT#AUTOBND=2) only if the previous
setting was equal to AT#AUTOBND=0
Note: the new setting will be available just at first next power-up.
AT#ENS?
Read command reports whether the ENS functionality is currently enabled or not,
in the format:
#ENS: <mode>
where:
<mode> as above
AT#ENS=?
Test command reports the available range of values for parameter <mode>.
Reference
Cingular Wireless LLC Requirement
5.1.6.1.70. Band Selection - #BND
#BND - Select Band
SELINT 2
AT#BND=<band>[,<UMTS Set command selects the current GSM,UMTS and LTE bands.
band>[,<LTE band>]]
Parameter
<band>:
0 - GSM 900MHz + DCS 1800MHz (default value)
1 - GSM 900MHz + PCS 1900MHz; this value is not available if the ENS
functionality has been activated (see #ENS)
2 - GSM 850MHz + DCS 1800MHz (available only on quadri-band
modules); this value is not available if the ENS functionality has been
activated (see #ENS)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 226 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#BND - Select Band
SELINT 2
3 - GSM 850MHz + PCS 1900MHz (available only on quadri-band
modules)
<UMTS band>:
0 - 1900 / 2100MHz(FDD I)
1 - 1900MHz(FDD II) (default value depending on product)
2 - 850MHz(FDD V)
3 - 2100MHz(FDD I) + 1900MHz(FDD II) + 850MHz(FDD V)
4 - 1900MHz(FDD II) + 850MHz(FDD V)
5 - 900MHz(FDD VIII) (default value, depending on the product)
6 - 2100MHz(FDD I) + 900MHz(FDD VIII)
7 – 1700/ 2100MHz(FDD IV, AWS)
<LTE band> values in the range 1 – 4294967295 as a sum of:
1 - B1
2 - B2
4 - B3
8 - B4
…
i - B(2exp(i-1))
…
2147483648 - B32
Note: This setting is maintained even after power off.
Note: if the automatic band selection is enabled (AT#AUTOBND=2) then
you can issue AT#BND=<band>,<UMTS band>,<LTE band> but it will
have no functional effect; nevertheless every following read command
AT#BND? will report that setting.
Note: not all products support all the values of parameter <band>: please
refer to test command to find the supported range of values.
Note: not all products support all the values of parameter <UMTS band>:
please refer to test command to find the supported range of values.
Note: not all products support all the values of parameter <LTE band>:
please refer to test command to find the supported range of values
(maximum value is the sum representation of supported bands).
Note: for 4G only product use fixed unused value 0 for <band> and <UMTS
band> parameters.
Note: for 4G/3G only product use fixed unused value 0 for <band>
parameter.
Note: for 4G/2G only product use fixed unused value 0 for <UMTS band>
parameter.
AT#BND?
Read command returns the current selected band in the format:
#BND: <band>,<UMTS band>,<LTE band>
AT#BND=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameters
<band>, <UMTS band> and <LTE band>.
Page 227 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.71. Automatic Band Selection - #AUTOBND
#AUTOBND - Automatic Band Selection
AT#AUTOBND=
[<value>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the automatic band selection at power-on.
Parameter:
<value>:
0 - disables automatic band selection at next power-up
1 – value not supported.
2 – (default) enables automatic band selection in all supported bands at next
power-up
Note: if the current setting is equal to AT#AUTOBND=0 and we’re issuing
AT#ENS=1, at first next power-up after the ENS functionality has been
activated (see #ENS) the automatic band selection (AT#AUTOBND=2) is
enabled.
AT#AUTOBND?
Read command returns whether the automatic band selection is enabled or not
in the form:
#AUTOBND: <value>
AT#AUTOBND=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <value>.
5.1.6.1.72. PPP-GPRS Connection Authentication Type - #GAUTH
#GAUTH – PPP Data Connection Authentication Type
AT#GAUTH=
[<type>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the authentication type used in PDP Context Activation
during PPP-GPRS connections.
Parameter
<type>
0 - no authentication
1 - PAP authentication (factory default)
2 - CHAP authentication
Note: if the settings on the server side (the host application) of the PPP are not
compatible with the AT#GAUTH setting, then the PDP Context Activation will
use no authentication.
AT#GAUTH?
Read command reports the current authentication type, in the format:
#GAUTH: <type>
AT#GAUTH=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <type>.
Page 228 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.73. PPP-GPRS Parameters Configuration - # GPPPCFG
#GPPPCFG - PPP-GPRS Parameters Configuration
AT#GPPPCFG=
<hostIPaddress>
[,<unused_A>]
[,<unused_B>]]
SELINT 2
Set command sets one parameter for a PPP-GPRS connection.
Parameters:
<hostIPaddress> - Host IP Address that is assigned to the PPP server side
(the host application); Sstring type, it can be any valid IP
address in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Note: if <hostIPaddress>=”000.000.000.000” (factory default) host address
is not included in the IPCP Conf Req, host address choice is
left to the peer
AT# GPPPCFG?
Read command reports the current PPP-GPRS connection parameters in the
format:
#GPPPCFG: <hostIPaddress>,,<unused_A>,<unused_B>
AT# GPPPCFG=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameters
#GPPPCFG: (25),(0)
5.1.6.1.74. Skip Escape Sequence - #SKIPESC
#SKIPESC - Skip Escape Sequence
AT#SKIPESC=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables skipping the escape sequence +++ while
transmitting during a data connection.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - doesn’t skip the escape sequence; its transmission is enabled (factory
default).
1 - skips the escape sequence; its transmission is not enabled.
2 - skips the escape sequence; its transmission is not enabled. If there are data
pending in the receiving buffer from the serial port driver, they are deleted.
Note: in case of an FTP connection, the escape sequence is not transmitted,
regardless of the command setting.
AT#SKIPESC?
Read command reports whether escape sequence skipping is currently enabled
or not, in the format:
#SKIPESC: <mode>
AT#SKIPESC=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports supported range of values for parameter <mode>.
Page 229 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.75. Subscriber number - #SNUM
#SNUM – Subscriber Number
SELINT 2
Set command writes the MSISDN information related to the subscriber (own
AT#SNUM=
<index>[,<number>[,< number) in the EFmsisdn SIM file.
alpha>]]
Parameter:
<index> - record number
The number of record in the EFmsisdn depends on the SIM. If only <index>
value is given, then delete the EFmsisdn record in location <index> is deleted.
<number> - string containing the phone number
<alpha> - alphanumeric string associated to <number>. Default value is empty
string (“”), otherwise the used character set should be the one selected with
+CSCS. The string could be written between quotes, the number of characters
depends on the SIM. If empty string is given (""), the corresponding <alpha> will
be an empty string.
Note: the command return ERROR if EFmsisdn file is not present in the SIM or if
MSISDN service is not allocated and activated in the SIM Service Table (see
3GPP TS 11.11).
AT#SNUM=?
Test command returns the OK result code
5.1.6.1.76. SIM detection mode - #SIMDET
#SIMDET - SIM Detection Mode
AT#SIMDET=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command specifies the SIM Detection mode
Parameter:
<mode> - SIM Detection mode
0 - ignore SIMIN pin and simulate the status ‘SIM Not Inserted’
1 - ignore SIMIN pin and simulate the status ‘SIM Inserted’
2 - automatic SIM detection through SIMIN Pin (default)
Note: with Sim-On-Chip products, #SIMDET allows to switch between internal
and external SIM, as described below:
0 – switch to internal SIM
1 – switch to external SIM, ignore SIMIN pin.
2 – automatic external SIM detection through SIMIN Pin (default).
NOTE: with #SIMDET=1, although SIMIN pin is ignored, SIM removal is detected
AT#SIMDET?
Read command returns the currently selected Sim Detection Mode in the format:
#SIMDET: <mode>,<simin>
where:
<mode> - SIM Detection mode, as before
<simin> - SIMIN pin real status
0 - SIM not inserted
1 - SIM inserted
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 230 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SIMDET - SIM Detection Mode
AT#SIMDET=?
SELINT 2
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <mode>
5.1.6.1.77. SIMIN pin configuration - #SIMINCFG
#SIMINCFG – SIMIN pin configuration
SELINT 2
AT#SIMINCFG=
<reserved>,
<Simin_det_mode>
This command allows to set Simin pin status for SIM detection
Parameters:
<reserved>
<Simin_det_mode> - status of Simin pin for sim detection:
0 – Simin pin to ground means SIM inserted, to Vcc means SIM removed, for
normal sim holder
1 – Simin pin to ground means SIM removed, to Vcc means SIM inserted, for
micro sim holder
AT#SIMINCFG?
Read command reports the selected GPIO pin in the format:
#SIMINCFG: <0>, <Simin_det_mode>
AT#SIMINCFG=?
Test command reports <0> and supported range of values for parameter
<Simin_det_mode>
5.1.6.1.78. Alarm Pin - #ALARMPIN
#ALARMPIN – Alarm Pin
AT#ALARMPIN=
<pin>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the GPIO pin for the ALARM pin
Parameters:
<pin>
defines which GPIO shall be used as ALARM pin.
For the < pin > actual range check the “Hardware User Guide”. Default value is 0,
which means no ALARM pin set.
Note: the setting is saved in NVM
Note: ALARM pin function of a GPIO corresponds to ALT2 function of the GPIO.
So it can be also set through AT#GPIO command, ALT2 function.
AT#ALARMPIN?
Read command returns the current parameter settings for #ALARMPIN
command in the format:
#ALARMPIN: <pin>
AT#ALARMPIN=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <pin>.
5.1.6.1.79. Show Address - #CGPADDR
#CGPADDR - Show Address
AT#CGPADDR=
[<cid>[,<cid>
[,…]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns a list of PDN addresses for the specified PDN
connection identifiers
Parameters:
<cid> - context identifier
1..5 - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDN connection
definition (see +CGDCONT command).
Note: if no <cid> is specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are
returned.
Note: issuing the command with more than 6 parameters raises an error.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 231 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Note: the command returns only one row of information for every specified
<cid>, even if the same <cid> is present more than once.
The command returns a row of information for every specified <cid> whose
context has been already defined. No row is returned for a <cid> whose context
has not been defined yet. Response format is:
#CGPADDR: <cid>,<address>[<CR><LF>
#CGPADDR: <cid>,<address>[…]]
where:
<cid> - context identifier, as before
<address> - its meaning depends on the value of <cid>
<cid> in (1..5)) it is a string that identifies the terminal in the address space
applicable to the PDN.
The address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set
by the +CGDCONT command when the context was defined. For a dynamic
address it will be the one assigned during the last PDN connection activation
that used the context definition referred to by <cid>.
Note: if no address is available the empty string (“”) is represented as
<address>.
AT#CGPADDR=?
Test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
Example
AT#SGACT=0,1
#SGACT: xxx.yyy.zzz.www
OK
AT#CGPADDR=0
#CGPADDR: 0,”xxx.yyy.zzz.www”
OK
AT#CGPADDR=?
#CGPADDR: (0)
OK
5.1.6.1.80. Call Establishment Lock - #CESTHLCK
#CESTHLCK – Call establishment lock
AT#CESTHLCK=
[<closure_type >]
SELINT 2
This command can be used to disable call abort before the DCE enters
connected state.
<closure_type >:
0 - Aborting the call setup by reception of a character is generally possible at any
time before the DCE enters connected state (default)
1 - Aborting the call setup is disabled until the DCE enters connected state
AT#CESTHLCK?
Read command returns the current setting of <closure_type> parameter in the
format:
#CESTHLCK: <closure_type>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 232 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CESTHLCK – Call establishment lock
AT#CESTHLCK=?
SELINT 2
Test command returns the supported range of values for the <closure_type>
parameter
5.1.6.1.81. Write to I2C - #I2CWR
#I2CWR – Write to I2C
AT#I2CWR=
<sdaPin>,
<sclPin>,
<deviceId>,
<registerId>,
<len>
SELINT 2
This command is used to Send Data to an I2C peripheral connected to module
GPIOs
<sdaPin >: GPIO number for SDA . Valid range is “any input/output pin” (see
Test Command.)
<sclPin>: GPIO number to be used for SCL. Valid range is “any output pin” (see
Test Command).
<deviceId>: address of the I2C device, with the LSB, used for read\write
command. It doesn’t matter if the LSB is set to 0 or to 1. 10 bit addressing
supported.
Value has to be written in hexadecimal form (without 0x).
<registerId>: Register to write data to , range 0..255.
Value has to be written in hexadecimal form (without 0x).
<len>: number of data to send. Valid range is 1-254.
The module responds to the command with the prompt '>' and awaits for the
data to send.
To complete the operation send Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex); to exit without writing
the message send ESC char (0x1B hex).
Data shall be written in Hexadecimal Form.
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Example if CheckAck is set and no Ack signal was received on the I2C bus
NOTE: At the end of the execution GPIO will be restored to the original setting
( check AT#GPIO Command )
NOTE: device address, register address where to read from\ write to, and date
bytes have to be written in hexadecimal form without 0x.
AT#I2CWR=?
Test command reports the supported list of currently available <service>s.
Example
AT#I2CWR=2,3,20,10,14
> 00112233445566778899AABBCCDD<ctrl-z>
OK
Set GPIO2 as SDA, GPIO3 as SCL;
Device I2C address is 0x20;
0x10 is the address of the first register where to write I2C data;
14 data bytes will be written since register 0x10
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 233 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.82. Read to I2C - #I2CRD
#I2CRD – Read to I2C
AT#I2CRD=
<sdaPin>,
<sclPin>,
<deviceId>,
<registerId>,
<len>
SELINT 2
This command is used to Send Data to an I2C peripheral connected to module
GPIOs
<sdaPin >: GPIO number for SDA . Valid range is “any input/output pin” (see
Test Command.)
<sclPin>: GPIO number to be used for SCL. Valid range is “any output pin” (see
Command Test).
<deviceId>: address of the I2C device, with the LSB, used for read\write
command. It doesn’t matter if the LSB is set to 0 or to 1. 10 bit addressing
supported.
Value has to be written in hexadecimal form (without 0x before).
<registerId>: Register to read data from, range 0..255.
Value has to be written in hexadecimal form (without 0x before).
<len>: number of data to receive. Valid range is 1-254.
Data Read from I2C will be dumped in Hex:
NOTE: If data requested are more than data available in the device, dummy
data ( normally 0x00 or 0xff ) will be dumped.
NOTE: At the end of the execution GPIO will be restored to the original setting
( check AT#GPIO Command )
NOTE: device address, register address where to read from\ write to, and date
bytes have to be written in hexadecimal form without 0x.
AT#I2CRD=?
Test command reports the supported list of currently available <service>s.
Example
AT#I2CRD=2,3,20,10,12
#I2CRD: 00112233445566778899AABBCC
OK
5.1.6.1.83. I2C Combined Format - #I2CCF
#I2CCF – I2C Write and Read Data in Combined Format
AT#I2CCF=
<sdaPin>,
<sclPin>,
<deviceId>,
<lenwr>,
<lenrd>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
The module, as master, transmits data to a slave and then reads data from the
same slave through two GPIOs. Transfer direction is changed after all write
bytes have been sent.
<sdaPin>: GPIO number for SDA . Valid range is “any input/output pin” (see
Command Test)
<sclPin>: GPIO number to be used for SCL. Valid range is “any output pin”
(see Command Test).
<deviceId>: address of the I2C device, with the LSB, used for read\write
command.
It doesn’t matter if the LSB is set to 0 or to 1.
10 bit addressing is supported.
Value has to be written in hexadecimal form (without 0x before).
<lenwr>: number of data to send. Valid range is 1-254.
<lenrd>: number of data to receive. Valid range is 1-254.
Page 234 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#I2CCF – I2C Write and Read Data in Combined Format
SELINT 2
AT#I2CCF=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for all the parameters.
Example
AT#I2CCF=2,3,20,1,4
>0a<ctrl-z>
OK
Set GPIO2 as SDA, GPIO3 as SCL;
Device I2C address is 0x20;
First is send data 0x0a; after a “restart” 4 data bytes are read
The sequence is the following:
START - 0x20- 0x0a -RESTART - 0X21 - data read 1 -...- data read 4 - STOP
5.1.6.1.84. Power Saving Mode Ring - #PSMRI
#PSMRI – Power Saving Mode Ring
AT#PSMRI=
<x>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the Ring Indicator pin response to an
URC message while modem is in power saving mode. If enabled, a
negative going pulse is generated, when URC message for specific event is
invoked.
The duration of this pulse is determined by the value of <x>.
Parameter:
<x> - RI enabling
0 - disables RI pin response for URC message(factory default)
50-1150 - enables RI pin response for URC messages.
Note: when RING signal from incoming call/SMS/socket listen is enabled, the
behaviour for #PSMRI will be ignored.
Note: the behavior for #PSMRI is invoked, only when modem is in sleep mode
(AT+CFUN=5 and AT+CFUN=9)
Note: in case of AT+CFUN=9, the pulse is generated also when a GPRS packet
is received.
Note: the value set by command is stored in the profile extended section and
doesn’t depend on the specific AT instance
AT#PSMRI?
Read command reports the duration in ms of the pulse generated, in the
format:
#PSMRI: <x>
AT#PSMRI=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <x>
5.1.6.1.85. Control Command Flow - #CFLO
#CFLO – Command Flow Control
AT#CFLO=
<enable>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the flow control in command mode. If enabled,
current flow control is applied to both data mode and command mode.
Parameter:
<enable> 0 – disable flow control in command mode <default value>
1 – enable flow control in command mode
Note: setting value is saved in the profile
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 235 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CFLO – Command Flow Control
SELINT 2
AT#CFLO?
Read command returns current setting value in the format
#CFLO: <enable>
AT#CFLO=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <enable>
5.1.6.1.86. Report concatenated SMS indexes - #CMGLCONCINDEX
#CMGLCONCINDEX – Report concatenated SMS indexes
AT#CMGLCONCINDEX
SELINT 2
The command will report a line for each concatenated SMS containing:
#CMGLCONCINDEX: N,i,j,k,...
where
N is the number of segments that form the whole concatenated SMS
i,j,k are the SMS indexes of each SMS segment , 0 if segment has not
been received
If no concatenated SMS is present on the SIM, only OK result code will
be returned.
AT#CMGLCONCINDEX=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
at#cmglconcindex
#CMGLCONCINDEX: 3,0,2,3
#CMGLCONCINDEX: 5,4,5,6,0,8
OK
5.1.6.1.87. Codec Information - #CODECINFO
#CODECINFO – Codec Information
AT#CODECINFO[
=<format>[,
<mode>]]
SELINT 2
This command is both a set and an execution command.
Set command enables/disables codec information reports depending on the
parameter <mode>, in the specified <format>.
Parameters:
<format>
0 – numeric format (default)
1 – textual format
<mode>
0 - disable codec information unsolicited report (default)
1 - enable codec information unsolicited report only if the codec changes
2 - enable short codec information unsolicited report only if the codec changes
If <mode>=1 the unsolicited channel mode information is reported in the
following format:
(if <format>=0)
#CODECINFO: <codec_used>,<codec_set>
(if <format>=1)
#CODECINFO: <codec_used>,<codec_set1>
[,<codec_set2>[..[,codec_setn]]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 236 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CODECINFO – Codec Information
SELINT 2
If <mode>=2 the unsolicited codec information is reported in the following
format:
#CODECINFO: <codec_used>
The reported values are described below.
Execution command reports codec information in the specified <format>.
(if <format>=0)
#CODECINFO: <codec_used>,<codec_set>
(if <format>=1)
#CODECINFO: <codec_used>,<codec_set1>
[,<codec_set2>[..[,codec_setn]]]
The reported values are:
(if <format>=0)
<codec_used> - one of the following channel modes:
0 – no TCH
1 - full rate speech 1 on TCH
2 - full rate speech 2 on TCH
4 - half rate speech 1 on TCH
8 - full rate speech 3 – AMR on TCH
16 - half rate speech 3 – AMR on TCH
128 – full data 9.6
129 – full data 4.8
130 – full data 2.4
131 – half data 4.8
132 – half data 2.4
133 – full data 14.4
134 – full rate AMR wide band
135 – UMTS AMR version 2
136 – UMTS AMR wide band
<codec_set>
1..255 - sum of integers each representing a specific codec mode:
1 - FR, full rate mode enabled
2 - EFR, enhanced full rate mode enabled
4 - HR, half rate mode enabled
8 - FAMR, AMR full rate mode enabled
16 - HAMR, AMR half rate mode enabled
32 – FR-AMR-WB, full rate AMR wide band
64 – UMTS-AMR-V2, UMTS AMR version 2
128 – UMTS-AMR-WB, UMTS AMR wide band
(if <format>=1)
<codec_used> - one of the following channel modes:
None – no TCH
FR - full rate speech 1 on TCH
EFR - full rate speech 2 on TCH
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 237 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CODECINFO – Codec Information
HR - half rate speech 1 on TCH
FAMR - full rate speech 3 – AMR on TCH
HAMR - half rate speech 3 – AMR on TCH
FD96 - full data 9.6
FD48 - full data 4.8
FD24 - full data 2.4
HD48 - half data 4.8
HD24 - half data 2.4
FD144 - full data 14.4
FAWB - full rate AMR wide band
UAMR2 – UMTS AMR version 2
UAWB – UMTS AMR wide band
SELINT 2
<codec_setn>
FR - full rate mode enabled
EFR - enhanced full rate mode enabled
HR - half rate mode enabled
FAMR - AMR full rate mode enabled
HAMR - AMR half rate mode enabled
FAWB - full rate AMR wide band
UAMR2 - UMTS AMR version 2
UAWB - UMTS AMR wide band
Note: The command refers to codec information in speech call and to channel
mode in data call.
Note: if AT#CODEC is 0, the reported codec set for <format>=0 is 255 (all
codec).
Note: This command is not supported in LTE-only variants.
AT#CODECINFO?
Read command reports <format> and <mode> parameter values in the format:
#CODECINFO: <format>,<mode>
AT#CODECINFO=?
Test command returns the range of supported <format> and <mode>.
5.1.6.1.88. Select language - #LANG
SELINT 2
#LANG – select language
AT#LANG=<lan>
Set command selects the currently used language for displaying
different messages
Parameter:
<lan> - selected language
“en” – English (factory default)
“it” – Italian
AT#LANG?
Read command reports the currently selected <lan> in the format:
#LANG: <lan>
AT#LANG=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter
<lan>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 238 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.89. Swap 4G RX from main to diversity - #RXTOGGLE
#RXTOGGLE– Swap 4G RX from main to diversity
AT#RXTOGGLE=<TO
GGLE_enable>
SELINT 2
Set command moves the 4G-RX receiver from the main antenna to the diversity
antenna
Parameters:
<TOGGLE_enable>
0 – set the RX to the main antenna
1 – set the RX to the diversity antenna
2 – set the RX to both main and diversity antenna
Note: the command is available only for HSPA(HE910) and LTE products that
support the diversity
Note: value 2 for TOGGLE_enable parameter is available only for LTE products
Note: this command is only for test purpose, do not use it in Normal Operation
Note: the correct way to use this command is that shown in the example
AT#RXTOGGLE?
Read command reports the currently selected <TOGGLE_enable> in the
format:
#RXTOGGLE: <TOGGLE_enable>
AT#RXTOGGLE=?
Test command reports the supported range of values
Example
AT+COPS=2
module deregistered from GSM network
OK
AT+WS46=28 select 3G cellular network
OK
AT#RXTOGGLE=1 set the RX to the diversity antenna
OK
AT+COPS = 0 register to the GSM network
OK
AT+CREG =1 enable network registration unsolicited result code
OK
AT+CREG? read <mode> and <stat> parameters
+CREG: 1,1
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 239 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.90. Set Encryption algorithm - #ENCALG
#ENCALG – Set Encryption Algorithm
AT#ENCALG=[<encG
SM>][,<encGPRS>]
SELINT 2
This command enables or disables the GSM and/or GPRS encryption
algorithms supported by the module.
Parameters:
<encGSM>:
0 – no GSM encryption algorithm
1..7 - sum of integers each representing a specific GSM encryption algorithm:
1 – A5/1
2 – A5/2
4 – A5/3
255 - reset the default values
<encGPRS>:
0 – no GPRS encryption algorithm
1..7 - sum of integers each representing a specific GPRS encryption algorithm:
1 – GEA1
2 – GEA2
4 – GEA3
255 - reset the default values
Note: the values are stored in NVM and available on following reboot.
Note: For possible <encGSM> and <encGPRS> encryptions see test command
response.
Note: If no parameter is issued, the set command returns ERROR.
Note: This command is not supported in LTE-only variants.
AT#ENCALG?
Read command reports the currently selected <encGSM> and <encGPRS>,
and the last used <useGSM> and <useGPRS> in the format:
#ENCALG: <encGSM>,<encGPRS>,<usedGSM>,<usedGPRS>
Parameters:
<usedGSM>:
0 – no GSM encryption algorithm
1 – A5/1
2 – A5/2
4 – A5/3
255 – not available
<usedGPRS>:
0 – no GPRS encryption algorithm
1 – GEA1
2 – GEA2
4 – GEA3
255 – not available
AT#ENCALG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters in the
format:
Page 240 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENCALG – Set Encryption Algorithm
< encGSM > and <encGPRS>.
Example
SELINT 2
AT#ENCALG?
#ENCALG: 5,2,1,1
OK
AT#ENCALG=5,1
OK
sets the GSM encryption algorithm A5/1 and A5/3, and the GPRS encryption
algorithm GEA1.
It will be available at the next reboot.
AT#ENCALG?
#ENCALG: 5,2,1,1
The last two values indicate that the last used GSM encryption algorithm is A5/1
and the last used GPRS encryption algorithm is GEA1
After reboot
AT#ENCALG?
#ENCALG: 5,1,1,1
5.1.6.1.91. Escape Sequence Guard Time - #E2ESC
#ENCALG – Set Encryption Algorithm
AT#E2ESC=
[<gt>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets a guard time in seconds for the escape sequence in GPRS
to be considered a valid one (and return to on-line command mode).
Parameter:
<gt>
0 - guard time defined by command S12 (factory default)
1..10 - guard time in seconds
Note: if the Escape Sequence Guard Time is set to a value different from zero, it
overrides the one set with S12.
AT#E2ESC?
Read command returns current value of the escape sequence guard time, in the
format:
#E2ESC: <gt>
AT#E2ESC=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <gt>.
5.1.6.1.92. No Carrier Indication Handling - #NCIH
#NCIH – NO CARRIER Indication Handling
AT#NCIH =
<enable>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables sending of a NO CARRIER indication when a
remote call that is ringing is dropped by calling party before it is answered at
called party.
Parameter:
<enable> - NO CARRIER indication sending
0 - disabled (factory default)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 241 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#NCIH – NO CARRIER Indication Handling
1 - enabled
AT#NCIH?
SELINT 2
Read command reports whether the feature is currently enabled or not, in the
format:
#NCIH: <enable>
AT#NCIH=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameter <enable>.
5.1.6.1.93. Digital/Analog Converter Control - #DAC
#DAC - Digital/Analog Converter Control
AT#DAC=
[<enable>
[,<value>]]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the DAC_OUT pin.
Parameters:
<enable> - enables/disables DAC output.
0 - disables pin; it is in high impedance status (factory default)
1 - enables pin; the corresponding output is driven
<value> - scale factor of the integrated output voltage; it must be present if
<enable>=1
0..1023 - 10 bit precision
Note: integrated output voltage = MAX_VOLTAGE * value / 1023
Note: the command automatically sets the GPIO_07 in alternate function ALT1
AT#DAC?
Read command reports whether the DAC_OUT pin is currently enabled or not,
along with the integrated output voltage scale factor, in the format:
#DAC: <enable>,<value>
AT#DAC=?
Test command reports the range for the parameters <enable> and <value>.
Example
Enable the DAC out and set its integrated output to the 50% of the max value:
AT#DAC=1,511
OK
Disable the DAC out:
AT#DAC=0
OK
Note
With this command the DAC frequency is selected internally.
D/A converter must not be used during POWERSAVING.
DAC_OUT line must be integrated (for example with a low band pass filter) in
order to obtain an analog voltage.
For a more in depth description of the integration filter refer to the hardware user
guide.
5.1.6.1.94. Change and insert file system password - #FILEPWD
#FILEPWD – Change and insert file system password
SELINT 2
AT#FILEPWD=<Mode This command changes and inserts file system password.
>,<Pwd>[,<NewPwd>] File system password is always enabled (see notes for factory default empty
string “”).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 242 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FILEPWD – Change and insert file system password
SELINT 2
If current password is different from the empty string “” and password is not
inserted then AT commands that make use of the file system will not work (see
notes for insertion and AT response).
Parameters:
<Mode>:
1 – insert file system password;
2 – change file system password.
<Pwd>:
current password when inserting password, old password when changing
password, string type (factory default is the empty string “”).
<NewPwd>:
new password when changing password, string type (only allowed if <Mode>
parameter is 2).
Note: maximum password length is 12 characters.
Note: password is saved in NVM.
Note: password value doesn’t depend on the specific CMUX instance.
Note: in default configuration current password is equal to the empty string “”
and password will be always considered inserted.
Note: if current password is different from the empty string “”, password will be
always not inserted at power on.
Note: if current password is different from the empty string “”, after successful
password insertion (<Mode> 1) password will remain inserted until power off.
Note: after successful password change (<Mode> 2) password will be not
inserted.
Note: if current password is different from the empty string “” and password is
not inserted then AT commands that make use of the file system (SCRIPT,
M2M, MMS) will have either
ERROR
or
+CME ERROR: 16
or
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
response depending on AT+CMEE setting.
AT#FILEPWD=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters.
Example
First time: change default password
AT#FILEPWD=2,"","mynewpwd"
OK
and insert password
AT#FILEPWD=1,"mynewpwd"
OK
At next power on: insert password
AT#FILEPWD=1,"mynewpwd"
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 243 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.95. User Determined User Busy - #UDUB
#UDUB – User Determined User Busy
SELINT 2
AT#UDUB
Execution command disconnects all active calls (like ATH or AT+CHUP), but
setting the “user busy” cause for disconnection (only if we have an incoming call
that has not been answered yet, and that we want to reject).
AT#UDUB=?
Test command returns the OK result code
5.1.6.1.96. Enable Test Mode command in not signalling mode - #TESTMODE
#TESTMODE – Enable Test Mode command in not signalling mode
AT#TESTMODE=<co
mmand>
SELINT 2
The command allows setting module in not signaling mode. The functionality
has to be first activated by sending AT#TESTMODE=”TM”, which sets the
module in Test Mode. Only after this set, AT#TESTMODE can be used with the
other allowed commands. To exit from Test Mode and go back to Operative
Mode, the command AT#TESTMODE =”OM” has to be sent.
Parameter:
<command>:
•
•
“TM” forces the module in Test Mode;
“OM” forces the module in Operative Mode
2G Commands:
• “TCH”starts the non-stop module transmission. It enables one Tx Slot
(Note, edge not supported)
• “TCH2” starts the non-stop module transmission. It enables two TX
slots (Note, edge not supported)
• “TQ <training_sequence>” sets the training sequence;
<training_sequence> has the range: 0 ÷ 7
• “PL <power_lev>” sets the Power Control Level for lower and upper
bands; power_lev has the range: 0 ÷ 19
• “PL2 <power_lev0> <power_lev1>” sets the Power Control Level for
both TX slots; power_lev0 is related to the first slot and power_lev1 to
the second one; power_lev0 and power_lev1 has the range: 0 ÷ 19
• “RL”  Read Rx power level
• “RXTOGGLE <antenna>” Selects the receiving antenna path
depending on <antenna> value: <antenna> = 0 for the primary antenna,
<antenna> = 1 for the secondary (diversity) antenna.
•
“ESC” exits the current non-stop sequence. It must be used to stop
TCH/TCH2 transmission
• “SetPCSBand <band>” sets the PCS band;
ban
d
Band
0
850/900/180
0
850/900/190
0
“CH <GSM_ETSI_Index>” sets the ARFCH;
1
•
GSM_ETSI_Index
Band
1
GSM (Standard Band)
÷
124
975 ÷ 1023
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
E GSM (Extended Band)
Page 244 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TESTMODE – Enable Test Mode command in not signalling mode
955 ÷
974
R GSM (Railway Band)
512 ÷
885
DCS Band (1800 MHz)
512 ÷
810
PCS Band (1900 MHz)
128 ÷
251
GSM 850 (850 MHz)
SELINT 2
3G Commands:
“INIT3G” initialize Radio for 3G transmission
“TX3G” starts the 3G module transmission if Radio is initialized (
Default UARFCN UL is 9612 and power is -19.5 dBm)
• “PL3G <power>  change the 3G transmission power
Power has the range -736 to 384 in sixteenths of dBm
• “CH3G <uarfcn ul>” change the 3G uarfcn ul on which to transmit or
to receive. If TX3G is called previously CH3G sets a UARFCN for
transmission, otherwise it will accept a channel for reception.
•
•
UMTS_UARFCN UL
Band
9612 ÷ 9888
1
9262 ÷ 9538
2
1312 ÷ 1513
4
4132 ÷ 4233
5
2712 ÷ 2863
8
UMTS_UARFCN DL
Band
10562 ÷ 10838
1
9662 ÷ 9938
2
1537 ÷ 1738
4
4357 ÷ 4458
5
2937 ÷ 3088
8
“RL3G”  provides the Rx power level for the channel set with ““CH3G
<uarfcn dl>” command.
• “RXTOGGLE <antenna>” Selects the receiving antenna path
depending on <antenna> value: <antenna> = 0 for the primary antenna,
<antenna> = 1 for the secondary (diversity) antenna.
4G Commands:
•
• “INIT4G” initialize Radio for 4G transmission
•
“TX4G” starts the 4G module transmission if Radio is initialized
• “PL4G <power>  change the 4G transmission power
Power has the range -736 to 384 in sixteenths of dBm
• “CH4G <earfcn> <bw>” changes the 4G earfcn ul or dl for transmitting
or receiving, and sets the bandwith:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
LTE_EARFCN UL
Band
18000 ÷ 18599
1
18600 ÷ 19199
2
Page 245 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TESTMODE – Enable Test Mode command in not signalling mode
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
19200 ÷ 19949
3
19950 ÷ 20399
4
20400 ÷ 20649
5
20750 ÷ 21449
7
21450 ÷ 21799
8
22150 ÷ 22749
11
23010 ÷ 23179
12
23180 ÷ 23279
13
23730 ÷ 23849
17
24000 ÷ 24149
19
24150 ÷ 24449
20
24450 ÷ 24599
21
26690 ÷ 27039
26
27210 ÷ 27659
28
LTE_EARFCN DL
Band
0 ÷ 599
1
600 ÷ 1199
2
1200 ÷ 1949
3
1950 ÷ 2399
4
2400 ÷ 2649
5
2750 ÷ 3449
7
3450 ÷ 3799
8
4750 ÷ 4949
11
5010 ÷ 5179
12
5180 ÷ 5279
13
5730 ÷ 5849
17
6000 ÷ 6149
19
6150 ÷ 6449
20
6450 ÷ 6599
21
8690 ÷ 9039
26
9210 ÷ 9659
28
<bw>
Band (MHz)
0
1,4
1
3,0
2
5,0
3
10,0
4
15,0
5
20,0
Page 246 of 464
SELINT 2
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TESTMODE – Enable Test Mode command in not signalling mode
SELINT 2
• “RL4G”  provides the Rx power level for the channel set with ““CH4G
<earfcn dl>” command.
• “RXTOGGLE <antenna>” Selects the receiving antenna path
depending on <antenna> value: <antenna> = 0 for the primary antenna,
<antenna> = 1 for the secondary (diversity) antenna, 2 for both
antennas.
• “DEINIT4G” de-initialize Radio for 4G transmission
Note:
- Bands support varies depending on the product
- In Test Mode the transmission simultaneously on both 2g or 3g or 4g is not
allowed
Note 1: in Test Mode the other AT commands doesn’t work.
Note 2: in Test Mode the DTE speed is the same as in OM; it must be saved
using AT&W&P before switching to TM.
Note 3: in Test Mode the multiplexing protocol control channel can’t be enabled
(see +CMUX)
Note 4: after issuing AT#TESTMODE=”TM” or “OM”, the module reboots.
Note 5: the Test Mode Status is stored in NVM
Note 6: it’s not possible to read RX power level during an ongoing TX
AT#TESTMODE?
Read command reports the currently selected <command> in the format:
#TESTMODE: <TestModeStatus>
Where:
<TestModeStatus> can assume the following values:
- 1 if the module is in Test Mode
- 0 if the module is in Operative Mode
AT#TESTMODE =?
Test command returns the OK result code
5.1.6.1.97. HSDPA Channel Quality Inication - #CQI
#CQI – HSDPA Channel Quality Indication
AT#CQI
SELINT 2
Execution command reports channel quality indication in the form:
#CQI: <cqi>
where
<cqi> - cqi value
0 - 30
31 - not known or not detectable
Note: values are valid only if the module is registered on a WCDMA network
with HSDPA/HSUPA established. There will be no CQI if HSDPA/HSUPA is not
established.
Note: This command is not supported in LTE-only variants.
AT#CQI=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values of the parameters <cqi>.
Page 247 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.98. Ciphering Indication - #CIPHIND
#CIPHIND – Ciphering Indication
AT#CIPHIND =[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables unsolicited result code for cipher
indication. The ciphering indicator feature allows to detect that
ciphering is not switched on and to indicate this to the user. The
ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network
operator setting data in the SIM/USIM. If this feature is not disabled by
the SIM/USIM, then whenever a connection is in place, which is
unenciphered, or changes from ciphered to unenciphered or vice
versa, an unsolicited indication shall be given to the user.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disable #CIPHIND unsolicited result code (factory default)
1 - enable #CIPHIND unsolicited result code
#CIPHIND: <mode>
AT#CIPHIND?
Read command reports the <mode>,<cipher> and <SIM/USIM flag>:
#CIPHIND: <mode>,<cipher>,<SIM/USIM flag>
where
<mode>
0 - #CIPHIND unsolicited result code disabled
1 - #CIPHIND unsolicited result code enabled
<cipher> - cipher status
0 – cipher off
1 – cipher on
2 - unknown (missing network information)
< SIM/USIM flag > - SIM/USIM cipher status indication enabling
0 – disabled
1 – enabled
2 - unknown (flag not read yet)
AT#CIPHIND =?
Test command reports the range for the parameter <mode>
5.1.6.1.99. CMUX Mode Set - #CMUXMODE
#CMUXMODE – CMUX Mode Set
AT#CMUXMODE
=<mode>[,<buffer_size>]
SELINT 2
Set command specifies the CMUX mode
Parameter:
<mode>:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 248 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CMUXMODE – CMUX Mode Set
SELINT 2
1 – Ignore DTR feature is disabled, a transition of the physical DTR line
instructs the DCE to disable the CMUX and switches to the normal
command mode
5 – Ignore DTR feature is enabled, the DCE doesn’t care the physical
DTR line transitions (default)
13 – Ignore DTR feature is enabled, so the DCE will continue the
CMUX session, but the transition of the physical DTR will be
broadcasted to all opened logical channel. The behaviour of the
particular channel depends on its own configuration, e.g. AT&D[<n>]
<buffer_size>:
If not set explicitly, the module preserves the previous value
0 – Disable the buffer_size limitation (default)
28 – 16384 Resize the internal cmux output buffer to the selected
value. When a cmux session will be started using AT+CMUX, this
value might be increased; if it is less than (N1 * 4), it becomes exactly
N1 * 4. The current value can be gotten using the read command.
The cmux out buffer contains the frames ready to be sent for every
DLCI. If the modules receives an MSC indicating a RTS state to lock
the data flow, these frames (already in the buffer) will be sent.
The default size of these buffer is about 32k.
Note: a software or hardware reset restores the default value.
Note: during a cmux session the set command will fail, only the read
and test command can be used
Note: reducing the buffer_size will change the behaviour of cmux.
Several test have been performed using N1=122 at 115200bps =>
buffer_size = 488:
- the bandwidth is decreased by 15%
- the bandwidth is not equally distributed, the first channel has the
max priority, then the second and the third
Note: if the module is downloading a lot of data and the application
processor lock the flow moving the logical RTS (with MSC), the module
can send more than buffer_size data
AT#CMUXMODE?
Read command reports the currently selected <mode> in the format:
#CMUXMODE: <mode>,<buffer_size>
AT#CMUXMODE =?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter
<mode> and <buffer_size>
Response:
#CMUXMODE: (1,5,13),(0,28-16384)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 249 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.100. Fast Dormancy - #FDOR
#FDOR– Fast dormancy
SELINT 2
AT#FDOR=<mode>[,< This command triggers fast dormancy; if all conditions are passed successful
FDDelayTimer>[,<SC SCRI will be send towards the network. SCRI will be sent as a one shot or for
RITimer>]]
every delay timer expiry, depending on the mode specified.
Parameters:
<mode>:
1 – indicate application driven (1 shot) Fast Dormancy to modem
2 – switch ON autonomous Fast Dormancy (AFD)
3 – switch OFF autonomous Fast Dormancy (AFD) – default value
<FDDelayTimer>:
1..60 – integer value in seconds
<SCRITimer>:
0..120 – integer value in seconds
Note: the setting of <mode> is not saved in NVM. The setting of timers is saved
in NVM.
Note: the reject cause from lower layers is reported by the unsolicited indication:
#FDOR: <cause>
where
<cause>
0 - Reject is default cause.
1 - Reject because T323 timer is running
2 - Reject because Protocol Stack is in wrong states.
3 - Reject when No PS signalling connection exists.
4 - Reject when CS signalling connection exists.
5 - Reject when Protocol Stack component (RRC) procedures are running.
6 - Reject when Network deactivated FD, by not sending timer T323 in SIB1.
7 - Reject when from lower layers FD STOP Request is received.
8 - Reject when Protocol Stack component (PDCP) rejects the FD mode.
9 - FD Reject when Protocol Stack component (RLC) buffers are not EMPTY.
10 - Reject due to peer message received when FD procedure is running.
11 - Reject when there is no PAS RAB is established and if we receive
FD_START_REQ.
12 - Reject due to cell_pch/ura_pch states when v316 is reached max limit.
13 - Reject due to ongoing/pending Emergency call.
14 - Reject due to ongoing Call re-establishment.
15 - Reject due to Establishment of Full rate TCH Channel.
16 - Reject due to Establishment of Half rate TCH Channel.
17 - Reject due to Establishment of Half rate TCH Channel for Data Transfer.
18 - Reject due to Location update.
19 - Reject due to MT Paging.
20 - Reject due to other causes, such as Ongoing SS transactions, etc.
21 - Reject due to an ongoing CS procedure while the cell does not support
DTM.
22 - Reject due to Originating Conversational call.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 250 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FDOR– Fast dormancy
AT#FDOR?
23 - Reject due to Originating Streaming call.
24 - Reject due to Originating Interactive call.
25 - Reject due to Originating Background call.
26 - Reject due to Originating Subscribed Traffic call.
27 - Reject due to Terminating Conversational call.
28 - Reject due to Terminating Streaming call.
29 - Reject due to Terminating Interactive call.
30 - Reject due to Terminating Background call.
31 - Reject due to Inter RAT Cell Selection.
32 - Reject due to Inter RAT Cell Change
33 - Reject due to Registration.
34 - Reject due to Detach.
35 - Reject due to Originating Higher Priority.signalling.
36 - Reject due to Originating Low Priority.signalling.
37 - Reject due to Terminating Higher Priority.signalling.
38 - Reject due to Terminating Lower Priority.signalling.
39 -Reject due to Active RAT not being UMTS.
40 - Reject due to Access Stratum being Inactive/Searching.
41 - Reject due to RRC connection is not active.
42 - Reject due to Active Packet Switch connection.
SELINT 2
Read command returns “OK” string along with last accepted mode and timer
values, in the format:
#FDOR: <mode>,< FDDelayTimer >,< SCRITimer>
AT#FDOR=?
Test command returns “OK” string along with supported modes and timer
values.>.
5.1.6.1.101. IMS PDP APN Name Set - #IMSPDPSET
#IMSPDPSET – IMS PDP APN Name Set
AT#IMSPDPSET=<
pdpApnName >
SELINT 2
Set command sets IMS Pdp APN Name.
This name should be one of the APN names set in +CGDCONT command and
appropriated context will be opened for IMS.
Parameter:
<pdpApnName> - from 1 to 255 symbols ANSI fixed string
Note: It can be used with or without quotes.
AT#IMSPDPSET?
Read command reports the current setting of string parameter
<pdpApnName>, in the format:
#IMSPDPSET: <pdpApnName>
(<pdpApnName> is described above)
AT#IMSPDPSET=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the maximum length for string parameter
<pdpApnName>.
Page 251 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.102. PDP authentication parameters - #PDPAUTH
#PDPAUTH – PDP authentication parameters
SELINT 2
Set command specifies PDP authentication parameters values for a PDP
AT#PDPAUTH=
<cid>,<auth_type>,[< context identified by the (local) context identification parameter <cid>.
username>,[<passwo
rd >]]
Parameters:
<cid> - context identifier
1..max - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
The value of max is returned by the Test command.
<auth_type> - authentication type
0 - no authentication (factory default)
1 - PAP authentication
2 - CHAP authentication
<username> - string type, supplied by network provider. Required for
<auth_type> = 1 and 2
<password> - string type, supplied by network provider. Required for
<auth_type> = 1 and 2.
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#PDPAUTH?
Read command returns the PDP authentication parameters, excluding
<password>, set for every PDP, in the format:
#PDPAUTH: <cid1>,< auth_type1 >,<username1><CR><LF>
…
#PDPAUTH:<cidmax>,<auth_typemax >,<usernamemax><CR><LF>]]
AT#PDPAUTH=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters <cid> and
<auth_type> and the maximum allowed length of the string parameters
<password> and <username>
5.1.6.1.103. User Determined User Busy - #CREJ
#CREJ – User Determined User Busy
SELINT 2
AT#CREJ
Execution command disconnects all active calls (like ATH or AT+CHUP), but
setting the “call rejected” cause (cause #21) for disconnection (only if we have
an incoming call that has not been answered yet, and that we want to reject).
AT#CREJ=?
Test command returns the OK result code
5.1.6.1.104. Reboot - #REBOOT
#REBOOT - Reboot
AT#REBOOT
SELINT 2
Execution command reboots immediately the unit.
It can be used to reboot the system after a remote update of the script in order
to have the new one running.
Note: if AT#REBOOT follows an AT command that stores some parameters in
NVM, it is recommended to insert a delay of at least 5 seconds before to issue
AT#REBOOT, to permit the complete NVM storing
Note: AT#REBOOT is an obsolete AT command; please refer to AT#ENHRST
to perform a module reboot
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 252 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#REBOOT - Reboot
SELINT 2
AT#REBOOT=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#REBOOT
OK
… Module Reboots …
5.1.6.1.105. File System Change Current Directory - #CHDIR
#CHDIR - File System Change Current Directory
AT#CHDIR=<path_na
me>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the current working directory in the current drive in the file
system.
Parameter:
<path_name> - directory name, quoted string type (up to max 16 chars
depending on current working directory, case sensitive) or
relative path name, quoted string type (up to max 124 chars depending on
current working directory, case sensitive) or
absolute path name, quoted string type (max 124 chars, case sensitive)
Note: the directory name, relative path name or absolute path name should be
passed between quotes; directory and path names are case sensitive.
Note: path separator can be either \ or /.
Directory name begins with a character different from path separator and is
relative to the current working directory.
Relative path name begins with a character different from path separator and is
relative to the current working directory.
Absolute path name begins with path separator.
System max path name length (current directory name length + file name
length) is 128. System reserves 2 characters for internal use.
Note: if the the directory name, relative path name or absolute path name
<path_name> is not present an error code is reported.
Note: the current directory in the drive 0 in the file system at every power on is
\.
AT#CHDIR?
Read command reports the current working directory in the current drive in the
file system in the format:
#CHDIR: <path_name>
Where:
<path_name> - absolute path name, quoted string type (max 124 chars, case
sensitive)
AT#CHDIR=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#CHDIR?
#CHDIR: "\MOD"
OK
AT#CHDIR="dir1"
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 253 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CHDIR - File System Change Current Directory
SELINT 2
AT#CHDIR?
#CHDIR: "\MOD\dir1"
OK
5.1.6.1.106. File System Make Directory - #MKDIR
#MKDIR – File System Make Directory
SELINT 2
AT#MKDIR=<dir_nam Set command makes a new directory in the current working directory in the file
e>
system.
Parameter:
<dir_name> - directory name, quoted string type (up to max 16 chars
depending on current working directory, case sensitive)
Note: the directory name should be passed between quotes; directory names
are case sensitive.
AT#MKDIR=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#MKDIR="dir1"
OK
5.1.6.1.107. File System Remove Directory - #RMDIR
#RMDIR – File System Remove Directory
SELINT 2
AT#RMDIR=<dir_nam Set command removes the directory from the current working directory in the
e>
file system.
Parameter:
<dir_name> - directory name, quoted string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive)
Note: the directory name should be passed between quotes; directory names
are case sensitive.
Note: if the directory <dir_name> is not present in the current working directory
an error code is reported.
Note: if the directory <dir_name> is not empty, it is not possible to remove it
and an error code is reported.
AT#RMDIR=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#RMDIR="dir1"
OK
5.1.6.1.108. Set Active Firmware Image – AT#FWSWITCH
#FWSWITCH – Set Active Firmware Image
AT#FWSWITCH
=<image_number>
[,<storage_conf>]
SELINT 2
Set command allows enabling a specific firmware image on products
embedding 2 different firmware images.
Parameters:
<image_number> - Firmware Image To Be Enabled
0 – Image 1 (Default)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 254 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
1 – Image 2
<storage_conf> - Setting Storage Configuration
0 – Save the <image_number> value in RAM (Default)
1 – Save the <image_number> value in NVM
AT#FWSWITCH?
Read command reports the current active firmware image:
#FWSWITCH =<image_number>
AT#FWSWITCH=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameters
<image_number>,<storage_conf>
Example
Switch to Image 1:
AT#FWSWITCH =1,1
OK
Note
This AT command performs a system reboot.
With the current AT command implementation, the 0 value for
<storage_conf> does not have any effect, i.e. a system reboot is
performed but the <image_number> value is not actually saved.
Therefore, the enabled <image_number> can be currently saved
using only the 1 value for <storage_conf>.
The behaviour described above is only temporary; future
implementations will allow the enabled <image_number> to be saved
in RAM also.
5.1.6.1.109. Selective master reset - #CMAR
#CMAR – Selective Master Reset
AT#CMAR=<phone lock
code>[,<reset type>]
SELINT 2
This command requests the MT to reset user data. The user data in the
phone will be reset to default values.
Parameters:
<phone lock code> - string type representing an 8 digits security code. It
must be verified before performing the master reset.
<reset type> - the user can select which kind of format to perform. If omitted,
the command performs a complete format (0 by default)
0 – format all
1 – format NVM dynamic
2 – format NVM static fixed
3 – format firmware and AppZone filesystem
Note: issuing the command will cause an NVM and filesystem formatting.
After the formatting is completed the module will automatically reboot. To not
interfere with the formatting process, it is strongly recommended to issue an
AT+CFUN=4 command before starting to format.
AT#CMAR=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns length of phone lock code string and reset type
values.
Page 255 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.1.110. Change maximum TX power level for a supported band - #TXCAL4G
#TXCAL4G - change maximum TX power level for a supported band
AT#TXCAL4G=
<band>
[,<tx_pwr_lev>]
SELINT 2
Set command change the maximum power level for the band specified.
Parameters:
<band>: number of the LTE band whose TX maximum power level must be
changed
<tx_pwr_lev>: maximum tx power level for the band specified, in 1/16dBm
(368 = 23dBm)
NOTE: if <tx_pwr_lev> is not specified, the default value for maximum TX
power level is set for the band <band>
AT#TXCAL4G?
Read command returns the bands supported and the maximum power level set
for each band in the format;
#TXCALEDGE: <band>,<tx_pwr_lev>
#TXCALEDGE: <band>,<tx_pwr_lev>
#TXCALEDGE: <band>,<tx_pwr_lev>
#TXCALEDGE: <band>,<tx_pwr_lev>
#TXCALEDGE: <band>,<tx_pwr_lev>
…
AT#TXCAL4G=?
Test command reports the supported range of parameters values.
5.1.6.1.111. Security Keys management - #SECKEY
SELINT 2
#SECKEY – Security Keys management
AT#SECKEY=
<Action>
[,<keyID>[,<property>
]]
This command allows to set, read and store 3 types of security keys: key0 and
key1 are 128bit long, key3 is 64bit long. Keys could be saved only in RAM for
test purposes
Parameters:
< Action > - specify the action to do
0 set in RAM the binary value for specified Key
(requires at least keyID to be specified,
Property = 1 if OTP)
1 store in FLASH alle keys present in RAM
(requires no other parameters)
2 read specified Key binary value
(requires keyID to be specified)
< keyID > - specify the key to operate with
(must be specified for set or read operation)
0,1 are 128 bit keys
2
is 64 bit key
< property > - specify if the key is OTP, only one time programmable. If OTP, it
can not be re-write
Used only in SET action
0 key re-write is allowed
1 key is OTP
Note: returns OK if the command has been executed,
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 256 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Error in case of parameters not allowed
In set mode, if property is not specified, it is automatically set as 0, not
OTP.
AT#SECKEY=0,1
Is the same as AT#SECKEY=0,1,0
(set Key1 as not OTP if allowed, that is not already OTP)
Using SET action, a copy of the keys in RAM is created until STORE
command is applied.
Therefore any READ of any key before the STORE,
will return the value of the key present in RAM, which
could be different from its value in FLASH
Example of use:
Store in flash any modified keys
at#seckey=1
read key0 value
at#seckey=2,0
#SECKEY: 5555666677778888
set new key0 without OTP property (In RAM) if allowed
at#seckey=0,0
> 9999111155557777
OK
set new key0 with OTP property (In RAM)
at#seckey=0,0,1
> 0000111122223333
OK
Re-write no more allowed for key0
at#seckey=0,0
ERROR
Doing
at#seckey=1
re-write of Key0 is not allowed anymore
AT# SECKEY?
Get only the information about OTP properties of all the keys
and if there exist a copy in RAM.
1 = OTP
0 = not OTP
In case not a copy in RAM is present
AT#SECKEY?
#SECKEY: keys property (IN ROM): 0, 0, 0
If a copy in RAM exists:
#SECKEY: keys property (IN RAM only): 1, 0, 0
note that Key1 here is OTP
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 257 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
AT# SECKEY =?
Returns allowed parameters values
AT#SECKEY=?
#SECKEY: (0-2),(0-2),(0,1)
5.1.6.1.112. Configure the MTU Size - #MTUSIZE
SELINT 2
#MTUSIZE – Configure the MTU size
AT#MTUSIZE=<MTU>
This command permits to set a fixed MTU size by issuing this AT
command before activating a pdp context.
Parameters:
<MTU>- Numeric parameter indicating the MTU size.
0 – Default MTU size used by the network operator .
1 to 1500 – Possible values of MTU size.
Note: <MTU> is automatically saved in NVM.
AT#MTUSIZE?
Read command returns the current settings for <MTU>in the format:
# MTUSIZE: <MTU>
AT# MTUSIZE =?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of parameter <MTU>.
Page 258 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.2.
Easy Scan® Extension AT Commands
NOTE: It is mandatory to issue all the Easy Scan® Extension AT commands with
the module configured in +COPS: 2 mode, that is in detached mode, to avoid any
potential conflict with normal module operations, such as “incoming call”, “periodic
location update, “periodic routing area update” and so on.
Any possible trigger of competing network activity must be deactivated. In this logic
SIM toolkit must be deactivated.
5.1.6.2.1.
Network Survey - #CSURV
#CSURV - Network Survey
AT#CSURV[=
[<s>,<e>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command allows to perform a quick survey through band channels, starting
from channel <s> to channel <e>. Issuing AT#CSURV<CR>, a full band scan is
performed.
Parameters:
<s> - starting channel
<e> - ending channel
After issuing the command the device responds with the string:
Network survey started…
and, after a while, a list of informations, one for each received carrier, is reported,
each of them in the format:
In 2G
(For BCCH-Carrier)
arfcn: <arfcn> bsic: <bsic> rxLev: <rxLev> ber: <ber> mcc: <mcc> mnc: <mnc>
lac: <lac> cellId: <cellId> cellStatus: <cellStatus> numArfcn: <numArfcn> arfcn:
[<arfcn1> ..[ <arfcn64>]] [numChannels: <numChannels> array: [<ba1>
..[<ba32>]] [pbcch: <pbcch> [nom: <nom> rac: <rac> spgc: <spgc> pat: <pat>
nco: <nco> t3168: <t3168> t3192: <t3192> drxmax: <drxmax> ctrlAck: <ctrlAck>
bsCVmax: <bsCVmax> alpha: <alpha> pcMeasCh: <pcMeasCh>]]] mstxpwr:
<mstxpwr> rxaccmin: <rxaccmin> croffset: <croffset> penaltyt: <penaltyt>
t3212: <t3212> CRH: <CRH>
<CR><LF><CR><LF><CR><LF>
where:
<arfcn> - the cell carrier assigned radio channel (BCCH - Broadcast Control Channel)
<bsic> - base station identification code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <bsic> is a
decimal number, else it is at the most a 2-digits octal number
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
<ber> - decimal number; it is the bit error rate (in %)
<mcc> - hexadecimal 3-digits number; it is the mobile country code
<mnc> - hexadecimal 2-digits number; it is the mobile network code
<lac> - location area code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <lac> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellId> - cell identifier; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <cellId> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 259 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURV - Network Survey
SELINT 2
<cellStatus> - string type; it is the cell status
..CELL_SUITABLE - the cell is a suitable cell.
CELL_LOW_PRIORITY - the cell is low priority based on the received system
information.
CELL_FORBIDDEN - the cell is forbidden.
CELL_BARRED - the cell is barred based on the received system information.
CELL_LOW_LEVEL - the cell <rxLev> is low.
CELL_OTHER - none of the above e.g. exclusion timer running, no BCCH
available…etc.
<numArfcn> - decimal number; it is the number of valid channels in the Cell Channel
Description
<arfcnn> - decimal number; it is the arfcn of a valid channel in the Cell Channel
Description (n is in the range 1..<numArfcn>)
<numChannels> - decimal number; it is the number of valid channels in the BCCH
Allocation list; the output of this information for non-serving cells depends on last
#CSURVEXT setting:
1. if #CSURVEXT=0 this information is displayed only for serving cell
2. if #CSURVEXT=1, 2 or 3 this information is displayed also for every
valid scanned BCCH carrier.
<ban> - decimal number; it is the arfcn of a valid channel in the BA list (n is in the
range 1..<numChannels>); the output of this information for non-serving cells
depends on last #CSURVEXT setting:
1. if #CSURVEXT=0 this information is displayed only for serving cell
2. if #CSURVEXT=1 or 2 this information is displayed also for every valid
scanned BCCH carrier.
(The following informations will be printed only if GPRS is supported in the cell)
<pbcch> - packet broadcast control channel
0 - pbcch not activated on the cell
1 - pbcch activated on the cell
<nom> - network operation mode
1
2
3
<rac> - routing area code
0..255 <spgc> - SPLIT_PG_CYCLE support
..0 - SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is not supported on CCCH on this cell
..1 - SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is supported on CCCH on this cell
<pat> - priority access threshold
03..6 <nco> - network control order
0..2 <t3168> - timer 3168
<t3192> - timer 3192
<drxmax> - discontinuous reception max time (in seconds)
<ctrlAck> - packed control ack
<bsCVmax> - blocked sequenc countdown max value
<alpha> - alpha parameter for power control
<pcMeasCh> - type of channel which shall be used for downlink measurements for
power control
0 - BCCH
1 - PDCH
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 260 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURV - Network Survey
SELINT 2
(The following informations will be printed only for #CSURVEXT=3 setting)
<mstxpwr> - decimal TX power level
<rxaccmin> - decimal RX level access min, range 0 - 63
<croffset> - decimal Cell Reselection Offset, range 0 - 63
<penaltyt> - decimal Penalty Time, range 0 - 31
<t3212> - decimal T3212 Periodic Location Update Timer
<CRH> - decimal Cell Reselection Offset
(For non BCCH-Carrier)
arfcn: <arfcn> rxLev: <rxLev>
where:
<arfcn> - decimal number; it is the RF channel
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
In 3G
(For BCCH-Carrier)
uarfcn: <uarfcn> rxLev: <rxLev> mcc: <mcc> mnc: <mnc> scr code: <scrcode>
cellId: <cellId> lac: <lac> cellStatus: <cellStatus> rscp: <rscp> ecio: <ecio>
<CR><LF><CR><LF><CR><LF>
where:
<uarfcn> - the cell carrier frequency designated by UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
<mcc> - hexadecimal 3-digits number; it is the mobile country code
<mnc> - hexadecimal 2-digits number; it is the mobile network code
<scrcode> - decimal number; it is the scrambling code
<cellId> - cell identifier; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <cellId> is a decimal number,
else it is a 8-digits hexadecimal number
<lac> - location area code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <lac> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellStatus> - string type; it is the cell status
..CELL_SUITABLE - the cell is a suitable cell.
CELL_LOW_PRIORITY - the cell is low priority based on the received system
information.
CELL_FORBIDDEN - the cell is forbidden.
CELL_BARRED - the cell is barred based on the received system information.
CELL_LOW_LEVEL - the cell <rxLev> is low.
CELL_OTHER - none of the above e.g. exclusion timer running, no BCCH
available…etc.
<rscp> - decimal number; it is the RSCP level (in dBm)
<ecio> - decimal number; it is the EC/IO ratio level (in dB)
(For non BCCH-Carrier)
uarfcn: <uarfcn> rxLev: <rxLev>
where:
<uarfcn> - decimal number; it is the RF channel
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 261 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURV - Network Survey
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
SELINT 2
In 4G
(For BCCH-Carrier)
earfcn: <earfcn> rxLev: <rxLev> mcc: <mcc> mnc: <mnc> phyCellId:
<phyCellId> cellId: <cellId> tac: <tac> cellStatus: <cellStatus> rsrp: <rsrp> rsrq:
<rsrq> bw: <bw>
<CR><LF><CR><LF><CR><LF>
where:
<earfcn> - the cell carrier frequency designated by EUTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm); in SW versions up to
20.00.xx2 included it unused and set to 0
<mcc> - hexadecimal 3-digits number; it is the mobile country code
<mnc> - hexadecimal 2-digits number; it is the mobile network code
<phyCellId> - decimal number; it is the physical cell id; if #CSURVF last setting is 0,
<phyCellId> is a decimal number, else it is a 8-digits hexadecimal number
<cellId> - cell identifier; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <cellId> is a decimal number,
else it is a 8-digits hexadecimal number
<tac> - tracking area code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <tac> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellStatus> - string type; it is the cell status
..CELL_SUITABLE - the cell is a suitable cell.
CELL_LOW_PRIORITY - the cell is low priority based on the received system
information.
CELL_FORBIDDEN - the cell is forbidden.
CELL_BARRED - the cell is barred based on the received system information.
CELL_LOW_LEVEL - the cell <rxLev> is low.
CELL_OTHER - none of the above e.g. exclusion timer running, no BCCH
available…etc.
<rsrp> - decimal number; it is the RSRP level (in dBm)
<rsrq> - decimal number; it is the RSRQ level (in dB)
<bw> - decimal number; it is downlink the bandwidth (in MHz); in SW versions up to
20.00.xx2 included it unused and set to 0
(For non BCCH-Carrier)
earfcn: <earfcn> rxLev: <rxLev>
where:
<earfcn> - decimal number; it is the RF channel
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
Lastly, the #CSURV output ends in two ways, depending on the last #CSURVF
setting:
if #CSURVF=0 or #CSURVF=1
The output ends with the string:
Network survey ended
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 262 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURV - Network Survey
SELINT 2
if #CSURVF=2
the output ends with the string:
Network survey ended (Carrier: <NoARFCN> BCCh: <NoBCCh>)
where
<NoARFCN> - number of scanned frequencies
<NoBCCH> - number of found BCCh
Example
AT#CSURV
Network survey started…
arfcn: 36 bsic: 49 rxLev: -77 ber: 0.00 mcc: 222 mnc: 10 lac: 20060 cellId: 2716
2 cellStatus: CELL_SUITABLE numArfcn: 0 arfcn: numChannels: 0 array: pbcch: 0 no
m: 0 rac: 0 spgc: 0 pat: 0 nco: 0 t3168: 0 t3192: 0 drxmax: 0 ctrlAck: 0 bsCVmax
: 0 alpha: 0 pcMeasCh: 0 mstxpwr: 0 rxaccmin: 0 croffset: 0 penaltyt: 0 t3212:
0 CRH: 0
uarfcn: 10588 rxLev: -92 mcc: 222 mnc: 88 scr code: 54 cellId: 19406101 lac: 2406
5 cellStatus: CELL_SUITABLE rscp: -101 ecio: -9.0
Network survey ended
OK
Notes and
Platform limits
This command execution takes a long time especially if the full band scan is
performed.
The module must be configured in +COPS: 2 mode.
If present, the parameters:
<s> - starting channel
<e> - ending channel
are only allowed in fixed couples indicating a band.
Only BCCH-carriers are reported.
Non BCCH-carriers are never reported.
In 2G
<s>,<e> fixed couples and the corresponding band, if supported by the product:
0,124 GSM900
975,1023
GSM900
512,885
DCS1800
128,251
GSM850
512,810
PCS1900
0,1023 all supported GSM bands
<ber> is always 0.0.
<numArfcn> is always 0.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 263 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURV - Network Survey
<arfcnn> is always empty.
SELINT 2
<numChannels> is always 0.
<ban> is always empty.
GPRS parameters like <pbcch> are printed only if GPRS is supported in the cell but
their value is not available and will be always 0.
Parameters like <mstxpwr> are printed only for #CSURVEXT=3 setting but their
value is not available and will be always 0.
In 3G
<s>,<e> fixed couples and the corresponding band, if supported by the product:
10562,10838 UMTS BAND I
9662,9938
UMTS BAND II
1537,1738
UMTS BAND IV
4357,4458
UMTS BAND V
4387,4413
UMTS BAND VI
2937,3088
UMTS BAND VIII
712,763
UMTS BAND XIX
0,65535
all supported UMTS bands
In 4G
<s>,<e> fixed couples and the corresponding band, if supported by the product:
0,599 LTE BAND 1
600,1199
LTE BAND 2
1200,1949
LTE BAND 3
1950,2399
LTE BAND 4
2400,2649
LTE BAND 5
2750,3449
LTE BAND 7
3450,3799
LTE BAND 8
4750,4949
LTE BAND 11
5010,5179
LTE BAND 12
5180,5279
LTE BAND 13
5730,5849
LTE BAND 17
6000,6149
LTE BAND 19
6150,6449
LTE BAND 20
6450,6599
LTE BAND 21
8690,9039
LTE BAND 26
0,65534
all supported LTE bands
Consistent scan results are available only if, depending on technology, RXLev or
RSCP or RSRP are better than -100 dBm.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 264 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.2.2.
Network Survey (Numeric Format) - #CSURVC
#CSURVC - Network Survey (Numeric Format)
AT#CSURVC[=
[<s>,<e>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command allows to perform a quick survey through band channels, starting
from channel <s> to channel <e>. Issuing AT#CSURVC<CR>, a full band scan is
performed.
Parameters:
<s> - starting channel
<e> - ending channel
After issuing the command the device responds with the string:
Network survey started…
and, after a while, a list of information lines, one for each received carrier, is reported,
each of them in the format:
In 2G
(For BCCH-Carrier)
<arfcn>,<bsic>,<rxLev>,<ber>,<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<cellId>,<cellStatus>,<numAr
fcn>[,<arfcn1>..[<arfcn64>]]
[,<numChannels>[,<ba1>..[<ba32>]][,<pbcch>[,<nom>,<rac>,<spgc>,<pat>,<nco
>,<t3168>,<t3192>,<drxmax>,<ctrlAck>,<bsCVmax>,<alpha>,<pcMeasCh>]]],
<mstxpwr>,<rxaccmin>,<croffset>,<penaltyt>,<t3212>,<CRH>
<CR><LF><CR><LF><CR><LF>
where:
<arfcn> - the cell carrier assigned radio channel (BCCH - Broadcast Control Channel)
<bsic> - base station identification code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <bsic> is a
decimal number, else it is at the most a 2-digits octal number
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
<ber> - decimal number; it is the bit error rate (in %)
<mcc> - hexadecimal 3-digits number; it is the mobile country code
<mnc> - hexadecimal 2-digits number; it is the mobile network code
<lac> - location area code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <lac> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellId> - cell identifier; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <cellId> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellStatus> - string type; it is the cell status
..0 - the cell is a suitable cell (CELL_SUITABLE).
1 - the cell is low priority based on the received system information
(CELL_LOW_PRIORITY).
2 - the cell is forbidden (CELL_FORBIDDEN).
3 - the cell is barred based on the received system information (CELL_BARRED).
4 - the cell <rxLev> is low (CELL_LOW_LEVEL).
5 - none of the above e.g. exclusion timer running, no BCCH available…etc..
(CELL_OTHER).
<numArfcn> - decimal number; it is the number of valid channels in the Cell Channel
Description
<arfcnn> - decimal number; it is the arfcn of a valid channel in the Cell Channel
Description (n is in the range 1..<numArfcn>)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 265 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURVC - Network Survey (Numeric Format)
SELINT 2
<numChannels> - decimal number; it is the number of valid channels in the BCCH
Allocation list; the output of this information for non-serving cells depends on last
#CSURVEXT setting:
1. if #CSURVEXT=0 this information is displayed only for serving cell
2. if #CSURVEXT=1, 2 or 3 this information is displayed also for every
valid scanned BCCH carrier.
<ban> - decimal number; it is the arfcn of a valid channel in the BA list (n is in the
range 1..<numChannels>); the output of this information for non-serving cells
depends on last #CSURVEXT setting:
1. if #CSURVEXT=0 this information is displayed only for serving cell
2. if #CSURVEXT=1, 2 or 3 this information is displayed also for every
valid scanned BCCH carrier.
(The following information will be printed only if GPRS is supported in the cell)
<pbcch> - packet broadcast control channel
0 - pbcch not activated on the cell
1 - pbcch activated on the cell
<nom> - network operation mode
1
2
3
<rac> - routing area code
0..255 <spgc> - SPLIT_PG_CYCLE support
..0 - SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is not supported on CCCH on this cell
..1 - SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is supported on CCCH on this cell
<pat> - priority access threshold
03..6 <nco> - network control order
0..2 <t3168> - timer 3168
<t3192> - timer 3192
<drxmax> - discontinuous reception max time (in seconds)
<ctrlAck> - packed control ack
<bsCVmax> - blocked sequenc countdown max value
<alpha> - alpha parameter for power control
<pcMeasCh> - type of channel which shall be used for downlink measurements for
power control
0 - BCCH
1 - PDCH
(The following information will be printed only for #CSURVEXT=3 setting)
<mstxpwr> - decimal TX power level
<rxaccmin> - decimal RX level access min, range 0 - 63
<croffset> - decimal Cell Reselection Offset, range 0 - 63
<penaltyt> - decimal Penalty Time, range 0 - 31
<t3212> - decimal T3212 Periodic Location Update Timer
<CRH> - decimal Cell Reselection Offset
<arfcn>,<rxLev>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
(For non BCCH-Carrier)
Page 266 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURVC - Network Survey (Numeric Format)
where:
<arfcn> - decimal number; it is the RF channel
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
SELINT 2
In 3G
(For BCCH-Carrier)
<uarfcn>,<rxLev>,<mcc>,<mnc>,<scrcode>,<cellId>,<lac>,<cellStatus>,<rscp>,<
ecio>
<CR><LF><CR><LF><CR><LF>
where:
<uarfcn> - the cell carrier frequency designated by UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
<mcc> - hexadecimal 3-digits number; it is the mobile country code
<mnc> - hexadecimal 2-digits number; it is the mobile network code
<scrcode> - decimal number; it is the scrambling code
<cellId> - cell identifier; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <cellId> is a decimal number,
else it is a 8-digits hexadecimal number
<lac> - location area code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <lac> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellStatus> - string type; it is the cell status
0 - CELL_SUITABLE - the cell is a suitable cell.
1 - CELL_LOW_PRIORITY - the cell is low priority based on the received system
information.
2 - CELL_FORBIDDEN - the cell is forbidden.
3 - CELL_BARRED - the cell is barred based on the received system information.
4 - CELL_LOW_LEVEL - the cell <rxLev> is low.
5 - CELL_OTHER - none of the above e.g. exclusion timer running, no BCCH
available…etc.
<rscp> - decimal number; it is the RSCP level (in dBm)
<ecio> - decimal number; it is the EC/IO ratio level (in dB)
(For non BCCH-Carrier)
<uarfcn>,<rxLev>
where:
<uarfcn> - decimal number; it is the RF channel
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
In 4G
(For BCCH-Carrier)
<earfcn>,<rxLev>,<mcc>,<mnc>,<phyCellId>,<cellId>,<tac>,<cellStatus>,<rsrp>,
<rsrq>,<bw>
<CR><LF><CR><LF><CR><LF>
where:
<earfcn> - the cell carrier frequency designated by EUTRA Absolute Radio Frequency
Channel Number
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 267 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURVC - Network Survey (Numeric Format)
SELINT 2
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm); in SW versions up to
20.00.xx2 included it unused and set to 0
<mcc> - hexadecimal 3-digits number; it is the mobile country code
<mnc> - hexadecimal 2-digits number; it is the mobile network code
<phyCellId> - decimal number; it is the physical cell id; if #CSURVF last setting is 0,
<phyCellId> is a decimal number, else it is a 8-digits hexadecimal number
<cellId> - cell identifier; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <cellId> is a decimal number,
else it is a 8-digits hexadecimal number
<tac> - tracking area code; if #CSURVF last setting is 0, <tac> is a decimal number,
else it is a 4-digits hexadecimal number
<cellStatus> - string type; it is the cell status
..CELL_SUITABLE - the cell is a suitable cell.
CELL_LOW_PRIORITY - the cell is low priority based on the received system
information.
CELL_FORBIDDEN - the cell is forbidden.
CELL_BARRED - the cell is barred based on the received system information.
CELL_LOW_LEVEL - the cell <rxLev> is low.
CELL_OTHER - none of the above e.g. exclusion timer running, no BCCH
available…etc.
<rsrp> - decimal number; it is the RSRP level (in dBm)
<rsrq> - decimal number; it is the RSRQ level (in dB)
<bw> - decimal number; it is the downlink bandwidth (in MHz); in SW versions up to
20.00.xx2 included it unused and set to 0
(For non BCCH-Carrier)
earfcn: <earfcn> rxLev: <rxLev>
where:
<earfcn> - decimal number; it is the RF channel
<rxLev> - decimal number; it is the receiption level (in dBm)
The last information from #CSURVC depends on the last #CSURVF setting:
#CSURVF=0 or #CSURVF=1
The output ends with the string:
Network survey ended
#CSURVF=2
the output ends with the string:
Network survey ended (Carrier: <NoARFCN> BCCh: <NoBCCh>)
where
<NoARFCN> - number of scanned frequencies
<NoBCCH> - number of found BCCh
Example
AT#CSURVC
Network survey started…
36,49,-80,0.00,222,10,20060,27162,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
10588,-92,222,88,54,19406101,24065,0-100,-8.0
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 268 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CSURVC - Network Survey (Numeric Format)
Network survey ended
SELINT 2
OK
Notes and
Platform limits
This command execution takes a long time especially if the full band scan is
performed.
The information provided by #CSURVC is the same as that provided by #CSURV. The
difference is that the output of #CSURVC is in numeric format only.
The module must be configured in +COPS: 2 mode.
The limits described for #CSURV are also valid for #CSURVC.
5.1.6.2.3.
Network Survey Format - #CSURVF
#CSURVF - Network Survey Format
AT#CSURVF=
[<format>]
AT#CSURVF?
SELINT 2
Set command controls the format of the numbers output by all the Easy Scan®
Parameter:
<format> - numbers format
0 - Decimal
1 - Hexadecimal values, no text
2 - Hexadecimal values with text
Read command reports the current number format, as follows:
<format>
AT#CSURVF=?
5.1.6.2.4.
Test command reports the supported range of values for the parameter
<format>.
<CR><LF> Removing On Easy Scan® Commands - #CSURVNFL
#CSURVNLF - <CR><LF> Removing On Easy Scan® Commands Family
AT#CSURVNLF=
[<value>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the automatic <CR><LF> removing from each
information text line.
Parameter:
<value>
0 - disables <CR><LF> removing; they’ll be present in the information text
(factory default)
1 - remove <CR><LF> from information text
AT#CSURVNLF?
Read command reports whether automatic <CR><LF> removing is currently
enabled or not, in the format:
<value>
AT#CSURVNLF=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the range of values for parameter <value>.
Page 269 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.2.5.
Extended network survey - #CSURVEXT
#CSURVNLF - <CR><LF> Removing On Easy Scan® Commands Family
SELINT 2
AT#CSURVEXT
[=<value>]
Set command enables/disables extended network survey.
AT#CSURVEXT?
Read command reports whether extended network survey is currently enabled
or not, in the format:
Parameter:
<value>
0 - disables extended network survey (factory default)
1 - enables extended network survey; all the network survey execution
commands (#CSURV, #CSURVC) display the BAList for every valid scanned
BCCh carrier
2 - enables extended network survey; all the network survey execution
commands (#CSURV, #CSURVC) display the BAList for every valid scanned
BCCh carrier and, if GPRS is supported in the cell, they report some GPRS
informations carried by the System Information 13 of the BCCh
3 - enables more extended network survey; all the network survey execution
commands (#CSURV, #CSURVC). It displays transmit power level, receiving
level access min, Cell Reselection Offset, Penalty Time, T3212 Periodic
Location Update Timer and Cell Reselection Offset
<value>
AT#CSURVEXT=?
Test command reports the range of values for parameter <value>.
Notes and
Platform limits
#CSURVEXT configuration has effect on 2G cells only.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 270 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.3.
5.1.6.3.1.
AT Run Commands
Enable SMS Run AT Service - #SMSATRUN
#SMSATRUN – Enable SMS AT Run service
AT#SMSATRUN=
<mod>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the SMS AT RUN service.
Parameter:
< mod >
0: Service Disabled
1: Service Enabled
Note1: When the service is active on a specific AT instance (see
AT#SMSATRUNCFG), that instance cannot be used for any other scope,
except for OTA service that has the highest priority.
For example in the multiplexer request to establish the Instance, the request
will be rejected.
Note2: the current settings are stored in NVM.
AT#SMSATRUN?
Read command returns the current settings of <mode> and the value of
<stat> in the format:
# SMSATRUN: <mod>,<stat>
where:
<stat> - service status
0 – not active
1 - active
AT#SMSATRUN =?
Notes:
5.1.6.3.2.
Test command returns the supported values for the SMSATRUN parameters
•
By default the SMS ATRUN service is disabled
It can be activated by the command AT#SMSATRUN.
Set SMS Run AT Service parameters - #SMSATRUNCFG
#SMSATRUNCFG – Set SMS AT Run Parameters
AT#SMSATRUNCFG=
<instance>
[,<urcmod>
[,<timeout>]]
SELINT 2
Set command configures the SMS AT RUN service.
Parameter:
<instance>:
AT instance that will be used by the service to run the AT Command.
Range 1 - 5, default 3.
<urcmod>:
0 – disable unsolicited message
1 - enable an unsolicited message when an AT command is
requested via SMS (default).
When unsolicited is enabled, the AT Command requested via SMS is
indicated to TE with unsolicited result code:
#SMSATRUN: <Text>
e.g.:
#SMSATRUN: AT+CGMR;+CGSN;+GSN;+CCLK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 271 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SMSATRUNCFG – Set SMS AT Run Parameters
SELINT 2
Unsolicited is dumped on the instance that requested the service
activation.
<timeout>:
It defines in minutes the maximum time for a command execution. If
timeout expires the module will be rebooted. Range 1 – 60, default 5.
Note 1: the current settings are stored in NVM.
Note 2: the instance used for the SMS AT RUN service is the same used
for the EvMoni service. Therefore, when the #SMSATRUNCFG sets the
<instance> parameter, the change is reflected also in the <instance>
parameter of the #ENAEVMONICFG command, and viceversa.
Note 3: the set command returns ERROR if the command
AT#ENAEVMONI? returns 1 as <mod> parameter or the command
AT#SMSATRUN? returns 1 as <mod> parameter
AT#SMSATRUNCFG?
Read command returns the current settings of parameters in the format:
#SMSATRUNCFG:<instance>,<urcmod>,<timeout>
AT#SMSATRUNCFG=?
5.1.6.3.3.
Test command returns the supported values for the SMSATRUNCFG
parameters
SMS AT Run White List - #SMSATWL
#SMSATWL – SMS AT Run White List
AT#SMSATWL=
<action>
,<index>
[,<entryType>
[,<string>]]
SELINT 2
Set command to handle the white list.
<action >:
0 – Add an element to the WhiteList
1 – Delete an element from the WhiteList
2 – Print and element of the WhiteList
< index >: Index of the WhiteList. Range 1-8
< entryType >:
0 – Phone Number
1 – Password
NOTE: A maximum of two Password Entry can be present at same time in the
white List
<string>: string parameter enclosed between double quotes containing or the
phone number or the password
Phone number shall contain numerical characters and/or the character “+” at the
beginning of the string and/or the character “*” at the end of the string.
Password shall be 16 characters length
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 272 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SMSATWL – SMS AT Run White List
SELINT 2
NOTE: When the character “*” is used, it means that all the numbers that begin
with the defined digit are part of the white list.
E.g.
“+39*” All Italian users can ask to run AT Command via SMS
“+39349*”
All vodafone users can ask to run AT Command via SMS.
AT#SMSATWL?
Read command returns the list elements in the format:
#SMSATWL: [<entryType>,<string>]
AT#SMSATWL=?
Test command returns the supported values for the parameter <action>,
<index> and <entryType>
Note
It will return ERROR if executed using SMSATRUN digest mode or TCPATRUN
server mode
5.1.6.3.4.
Set TCP Run AT Service parameter - #TCPATRUNCFG
#TCPATRUNCFG– Set TCP AT Run Service Parameters
AT#TCPATRUNCFG=
<connId>
,<instance>
,<tcpPort>
,<tcpHostPort>
,<tcpHost>
[,<urcmod>
[,<timeout>
[,<authMode>
[,<retryCnt>
[,<retryDelay>]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command configures the TCP AT RUN service Parameters:
<connId>
socket connection identifier. Default 1.
Range 1..6. This parameter is mandatory.
<instance>:
AT instance that will be used by the service to run the AT Command.
Default 2. Range 1 - 5. This parameter is mandatory.
<tcpPort>
Tcp Listen port for the connection to the service in server mode. Default
1024. Range 1...65535. This parameter is mandatory.
<tcpHostPort>
Tcp remote port of the Host to connect to, in client mode. Default 1024.
Range 1...65535. This parameter is mandatory.
<tcpHost>
IP address of the Host, string type.
This parameter can be either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
- any host name to be solved with a DNS query
This parameter is mandatory. Default “”.
<urcmod>:
0 – disable unsolicited messages
1 - enable an unsolicited message when the TCP socket is
connected or disconnect ( default ).
When unsolicited is enabled, an asynchronous TCP Socket connection is
indicated to TE with unsolicited result code:
#TCPATRUN: <iphostaddress>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 273 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TCPATRUNCFG– Set TCP AT Run Service Parameters
SELINT 2
When unsolicited is enabled, the TCP socket disconnection is indicated to
TE with unsolicited result code:
#TCPATRUN: <DISCONNECT>
Unsolicited is dumped on the instance that requested the service
activation.
<timeout>:
Define in minutes the maximum time for a command execution. If timeout
expires the module will be rebooted. The default value is 5 minutes.
Range 1…5.
<authMode>:
determines the authentication procedure in server mode:
0 – ( default ) when connection is up, username and password (in
this order and each of them followed by a Carriage Return) have to be
sent to the module before the first AT command.
1 – when connection is up, the user receives a request for
username and, if username is correct, a request for password. Then a
message of ”Login successfull” will close authentication phase.
Note: if username and/or password are not allowed (see
AT#TCPATRUNAUTH) the connection will close immediately.
<retryCnt>:
in client mode, at boot or after a socket disconnection, this parameter
represents the number of attempts that are made in order to re-connect to
the Host. Default: 0. Range 0…5.
<retryDelay>:
in client mode, delay between one attempt and the other. In minutes.
Default: 2. Range 1…3600.
Note2: the current settings are stored in NVM.
Note 4: the set command returns ERROR if the command
AT#TCPATRUNL? returns 1 as <mod> parameter or the command AT#
TCPATRUND? returns 1 as <mod> parameter
AT#TCPATRUNCFG?
Read command returns the current settings of parameters in the format:
#TCPATRUNCFG:
<connId>,<instance>,<tcpPort>,<tcpHostPort>,<tcpHost>,<urcmod>,
<timeout>,<authMode>,<retryCnt>,<retryDelay>
AT#TCPATRUNCFG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported values for the TCPATRUNCFG
parameters
Page 274 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.3.5.
TCP Run AT Service in listen (server) mode - #TCPATRUNL
#TCPATRUNL– Enables TCP AT Run Service in listen (server) mode
AT#TCPATRUNL=
<mod>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the TCP AT RUN service in server mode.
When this service is enabled, the module tries to put itself in TCP listen
state.
Parameter:
< mod >
0: Service Disabled
1: Service Enabled
Note1: If SMSATRUN is active on the same instance (see
AT#TCPATRUNCFG) the command will return ERROR.
Note2: when the service is active it is on a specific AT instance (see
AT#TCPATRUNCFG), that instance cannot be used for any other scope.
For example, if the multiplexer requests to establish the Instance, the
request will be rejected.
Note3: the current settings are stored in NVM.
AT#TCPATRUNL?
Read command returns the current settings of <mode> and the value of
<stat> in the format:
#TCPATRUNL: <mod>,<stat>
where:
<stat> - connection status
0 – not in listen
1 - in listen or active
AT#TCPATRUNL=?
5.1.6.3.6.
Test command returns the supported values for the TCPATRUNL
parameters
TCP AT Run Firewall List - #TCPATRUNFRWL
#TCPATRUNFRWL - TCP AT Run Firewall List
AT#TCPATRUNFRWL=
<action>,
<ip_addr>,
<net_mask>
SELINT 2
Set command controls the internal firewall settings for the TCPATRUN
connection.
Parameters:
<action> - command action
0 - remove selected chain
1 - add an ACCEPT chain
2 - remove all chains (DROP everything); <ip_addr> and <net_mask> has
no meaning in this case.
<ip_addr> - remote address to be added into the ACCEPT chain; string
type, it can be any valid IP address in the format:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
<net_mask> - mask to be applied on the <ip_addr>; string type, it can be
any valid IP address mask in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Command returns OK result code if successful.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 275 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TCPATRUNFRWL - TCP AT Run Firewall List
SELINT 2
Firewall general policy is DROP, therefore all packets that are not included
into an ACCEPT chain rule will be silently discarded.
When a packet comes from the IP address incoming_IP, the firewall chain
rules will be scanned for matching with the following criteria:
incoming_IP & <net_mask> = <ip_addr> & <net_mask>
If criteria is matched, then the packet is accepted and the rule scan is
finished; if criteria is not matched for any chain the packet is silently dropped.
Note1: A maximum of 5 firewall can be present at same time in the List.
Note2: the firewall list is saved in NVM
AT# TCPATRUNFRWL?
Read command reports the list of all ACCEPT chain rules registered in the
Firewall settings in the format:
#TCPATRUNFRWL: <ip_addr>,<net_mask>
#TCPATRUNFRWL: <ip_addr>,<net_mask>
…
OK
AT#TCPATRUNFRWL=?
Test command returns the allowed values for parameter <action>.
Note
It will return ERROR if executed using SMSATRUN digest mode or
TCPATRUN server mode
5.1.6.3.7.
TCP AT Run Authentication Parameters List - #TCPATRUNAUTH
#TCPATRUNAUTH - TCP AT Run Authentication Parameters List
AT#TCPATRUNAUTH=
<action>,
<userid>,
<passw>
SELINT 2
Execution command controls the authentication parameters for the
TCPATRUN connection.
Parameters:
<action> - command action
0 - remove selected chain
1 - add an ACCEPT chain
2 - remove all chains (DROP everything); < userid > and < passw > has
no meaning in this case.
< userid > - user to be added into the ACCEPT chain; string type,
maximum length 50
< passw > - password of the user on the < userid >; string type, maximum
length 50
Command returns OK result code if successful.
Note1: A maximum of 3 entry (password and userid) can be present at
same time in the List.
Note2: the Authentication Parameters List is saved in NVM.
AT#TCPATRUNAUTH?
Read command reports the list of all ACCEPT chain rules registered in the
Authentication settings in the format:
#TCPATRUNAUTH: <user_id>,<passw>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 276 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TCPATRUNAUTH - TCP AT Run Authentication Parameters List
#TCPATRUNAUTH: <user_id>,<passw>
….
OK
AT#TCPATRUNAUTH=?
5.1.6.3.8.
SELINT 2
Test command returns the allowed values for parameter <action>.
TCP AT Run in dial (client) mode - #TCPATRUND
#TCPATRUND – Enables TCP Run AT Service in dial (client) mode
AT#TCPATRUND=<mod>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the
TCP AT RUN service in client mode. When this service is enabled, the
module tries to open a connection to the Host (the Host is specified in
AT#TCPATRUNCFG).
Parameter:
< mod >
0: Service Disabled
1: Service Enabled
Note1: If SMSATRUN is active on the same instance (see
AT#TCPATRUNCFG) the command will return ERROR.
Note2: when the service is active it is on a specific AT instance (see
AT#TCPATRUNCFG), that instance cannot be used for any other scope.
For example if the multiplexer request to establish the Instance, the
request will be rejected.
Note3: the current setting are stored in NVM
Note4: if the connection closes or at boot, if service is enabled and context
is active, the module will try to reconnect for the number of attempts
specified in AT#TCPATRUNCFG; also the delay between one attempt and
the other will be the one specified in AT#TCPATRUNCFG.
AT#TCPATRUND?
Read command returns the current settings of <mode> and the value of
<stat> in the format:
#TCPATRUND: <mod>,<stat>
where:
<stat> - connection status
0 - not connected
1 – connected or connecting at socket level
2 - not connected but still trying to connect, attempting every delay
time (specified in AT#TCPATRUNCFG)
AT#TCPATRUND =?
5.1.6.3.9.
Test command returns the supported values for the TCPATRUND
parameters
Closing TCP Run AT Socket - #TCPATRUNCLOSE
#TCPATRUNCLOSE – Closes TCP Run AT Socket
AT#TCPATRUNCLOSE
SELINT 2
Closes the socket used by TCP ATRUN service.
Note: TCP ATRUN status is still enabled after this command, so the
service re-starts automatically.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 277 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TCPATRUNCLOSE – Closes TCP Run AT Socket
AT#TCPATRUNCLOSE =?
SELINT 2
Test command returns OK
5.1.6.3.10. TCP AT Run Command Sequence - #TCPATCMDSEQ
#TCPATCMDSEQ – TCP AT Run Command Sequence
AT#TCPATCMDSEQ=
<mod>
SELINT 2
Set command enable/disable, for TCP Run AT service, a feature that
allows giving more than one AT command without waiting for responses.
It does not work with commands that uses the prompt '>' to receive the
message body text (e.g. “at+cmgs”)
Parameter:
< mod >
0: Service Disabled (default)
1: Service Enabled
AT# TCPATCMDSEQ?
Read command returns the current settings of parameters in the format:
#TCPATCMDSEQ: <mod>
AT# TCPATCMDSEQ =?
Test command returns the supported values for the TCPATCMDSEQ
parameters
5.1.6.3.11. TCP Run AT service to a serial port - #TCPATCONSER
#TCPATCONSER – Connects the TCP Run AT service to a serial port
AT#TCPATCONSER=
<port>,<rate>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the TCP Run AT in transparent mode, in order to
have direct access to the hardware port specified. Data will be
transferred directly, without being elaborated, between the TCP Run AT
service and the hardware port specified.
If the CMUX protocol is running the command will return ERROR.
Parameter:
< port >
0 – USIF0
1 – USIF1
2 – USB0
3 – USB1
4 – USB2
5 – USB3
6 – USB4
Not all of these ports will be available at the same time.
The ports available will be displayed by the test command. They depend
on the AT#PORTCFG command.
Please refer to that AT command and to the “HE Family Ports
Arrangements User Guide” for a detailed explanation of all port
configurations
< rate >
baud rate for data transfer. Allowed values are
300,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200.
Note1: the command has to be issued from the TCP ATRUN instance
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 278 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TCPATCONSER – Connects the TCP Run AT service to a serial port
SELINT 2
Note2: After this command has been issued, if no error has occurred,
then a “CONNECT” will be returned by the module to advise that the
TCP ATRUN instance is in online mode and connected to the port
specified.
Note3: To exit from online mode and close the connection, the escape
sequence (+++) has to be sent on the TCP ATRUN instance
Note4: for USB ports and SPI the rate parameter is dummy
AT#TCPATCONSER =?
Test command returns the supported values for the TCPATCONSER
parameters
5.1.6.3.12. Run AT command execution - #ATRUNDELAY
#ATRUNDELAY – Set the delay on Run AT command execution
AT#ATRUNDELAY=
<srv>,<delay>
SELINT 2
Set command enables the use of a delay before the execution of AT
command received by Run AT service (TCP and SMS). It affects just AT
commands given through Run AT service.
<srv>
0 – TCP Run AT service
1 - SMS Run AT service
<delay> Value of the delay, in seconds. Range 0..30.
Default value 0 for both services (TCP and SMS).
Note1 - The use of the delay is recommended to execute some AT
commands that require network interaction. For more details see the RUN
AT User Guide.
Note2: The delay is valid till a new AT#ATRUNDELAY is set.
AT#ATRUNDELAY?
Read command returns the current settings of parameters in the format:
#ATRUNDELAY: 0, <delayTCP>
#ATRUNDELAY: 1, <delaySMS>
OK
AT#ATRUNDELAY=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported values for the ATRUNDELAY
parameters
Page 279 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.4.
5.1.6.4.1.
Consume Commands
Configure consume parameters - #CONSUMECFG
#CONSUMECFG – configure consume parameters
SELINT 2
AT#CONSUMECFG=< This command sets the parameters related to the consume functionality
rule_id>[,<service_ty
pe>[,<rule_enable>[,< Parameters:
period>[,<limit_amou
<rule_id>
nt>[,<action_id>]]]]]
Index of the rule to apply to a defined <service_type>
Range: (0-10)
The available rules are 10 and their identifier ranges from 1 to 10. The special
case of <rule_id>=0 is explained below in a note.
<service_type>
Type of service to count:
0 – No service (default)
1 – SMS Sent
2 – SMS Received
3 – Total SMS
4 – CS MO Calls
5 – CS MT Calls
6 – Total CS Calls
7 – IP All Data Sent
8 – IP All Data Received
9 – IP All Data
10 – IP All Data Sent (with Header)
11 – IP All Data Received (with Header)
12 – IP All Data (with Header)
<rule_enable>
Enable the counter on the rule
0 – rule disabled (default)
1 – rule enabled
<period>
Time period over which the service type data are counted:
0 – life (entire module life) (default)
1 – 8760 (hours)
<limit_amount>
Limit amount of data to count. 0 is default value and means no set limit: in this
case only the counter is active.
0 – 4294967295 KBytes, for <service_type>=7,8,9,10,11 and 12
0 – 65535 number of SMS, for <service_type>=1,2, and 3
0 – 65535 minutes, for <service_type>=4,5 and 6
<action_id>
Identifier of the action to trigger when the threshold limit has been reached. It
corresponds to the AT command associated to the event CONSUMEX, where
X=1,…5. (Refer to #EVMONI command)
Range: (0-5); 0 means no action associated: in this case only the counter is
active.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 280 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CONSUMECFG – configure consume parameters
SELINT 2
Note: the Set command #CONSUMECFG=0 has a special behaviour: for all the
enabled rules, the data and time of related counters are reset (if they are not-life
counters)
Note: the values set by command are directly stored in NVM and don’t depend
on the specific AT instance
Note: the life counters are disabled if <enable> parameter of
AT#ENACONSUME is equal to 0
Note: a rule can be changed only setting <rule_enable>=0. The data and time
of related counter are also reset (if it’s not a life counter).
Note: when the period expires, the counted data are reset, so the counting in the
next period starts from 0.
Note: if a service is blocked, then the related (life or not) counter is stopped also
in terms of time (as well as in terms of data obviously).
AT#CONSUMECFG?
Read command returns the current settings for each rule in the format:
#CONSUMECFG:
<rule_id>,<service_type>,<rule_enable>,<period>,<limit_amount>,<action_
id>
AT#CONSUMECFG=? Test command reports the supported range of values for all parameters
5.1.6.4.2.
Enable consume funztionality - #ENACONSUME
#ENACONSUME – enable consume functionality
SELINT 2
AT#ENACONSUME=< Set command enables/disables the consume functionality.
enable>[,<storing_mo
de>[,<storing_period Parameters:
>]]
<enable>
0 – disable consume functionality (default)
1 – disable consume functionality except life counters
2 – enable consume functionality
<storing_mode>:
0 – the counters are saved in NVM at every shuthdown (default)
1 – the counters are saved in NVM at every shuthdown and periodically at
regular intervals specified by <storing_period> parameter
<storing_period> - number of hours after that the counters are saved; numeric
value in hours; range (0,8-24); 0 is default value and means no set period (as
<storing_mode>=0)
Note: the values set by command are directly stored in NVM and don’t depend
on the specific AT instance
Note: when the functionality is disabled with <enable>=0, the data counters are
stopped but not reset: to reset them (except life counters) set <rule_enable>=0
with AT#CONSUMECFG command.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 281 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENACONSUME – enable consume functionality
SELINT 2
Note: when the functionality is disabled with <enable>=1, the data counters are
stopped except life counters.
Note: the life counters are never reset, neither in terms of counted data nor in
terms of time
AT#ENACONSUME?
Read command returns the current settings for all parameters in the format:
#ENACONSUME: <enable>,<storing_mode>,<storing_period>
AT#ENACONSUME=? Test command reports the supported range of values for all parameters
5.1.6.4.3.
Report consume statistics - #STATSCONSUME
#STATSCONSUME – report consume statistics
SELINT 2
AT#STATSCONSUME[= Execution command reports the values of the life counters for every type of
<counter_type>]
service or the values of period counters for every rule.
Parameter:
<counter_type>
Type of counter: range (0-1)
0 – period counter: the command returns the values of period counters for
every rule defined with AT#CONSUMECFG command in the format:
#STATSCONSUME:
<rule_1>,<service_type>,<counted_data>,<threshold>,<current_time>,<p
eriod><CR><LF>#STATSCONSUME:
<rule_2>,<service_type>,<counted_data>,<threshold>,<current_time>,<p
eriod><CR><LF>….<CR><LF>>#STATSCONSUME:
<rule_10>,<service_type>,<counted_data>,<threshold>,<current_time>,<
period>
where
<rule_i>
Index of the rule defined with AT#CONSUMECFG
<service_type>
Type of service:
1 – SMS Sent
2 – SMS Received
3 – Total SMS
4 – CS MO Calls
5 – CS MT Calls
6 – Total CS Calls
7 – IP All Data Sent
8 – IP All Data Received
9 – IP All Data
10 – IP All Data Sent (with Header)
11 – IP All Data Received (with Header)
12 – IP All Data (with Header)
<counted_data>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 282 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STATSCONSUME – report consume statistics
Number of data counted during <current_time>
SELINT 2
<threshold>
Limit amount of data to count (set in parameter <limit_amount> with
AT#CONSUMECFG)
<current_time>
Number of passed hours in the current <period>
<period>
Number of total hours in the period where the data are counted (corresponds
to the value set in <period> with AT#CONSUMECFG)
1 – life counter: the command returns the values of life counters for every
service type in the format:
#STATSCONSUME:
<service_1>,<life_data>,<current_time><CR><LF>#STATSCONSUME:
<service_2>,<life_data>,<current_time><CR><LF>…<CR><LF>#STATSC
ONSUME: <service_12>,<life_data>,<current_time>
where
<service_i> is defined as <service_type> above
<life_data>
Number of data counted during entire life time period
<current_time>
Number of passed hours during entire life time period
Note: issuing AT#STATSCONSUME without parameters has the same effect
as AT#STATSCONSUME=0
AT#STATSCONSUME=
?
5.1.6.4.4.
Test command reports the supported range of values for <counter_type>
Block/unblock a type of service - #BLOCKCONSUME
#BLOCKCONSUME – block/unblock a type of service
AT#BLOCKCONSUME=<s
ervice_type>,<block>
SELINT 2
Execution command blocks/unblocks a type of service
Parameter:
<service_type>
Type of service:
1 – SMS Sending
2 – SMS Receiving
3 – SMS Sending/ Receiving
4 – CS MO Calls
5 – CS MT Calls
6 – MO/MT CS Calls
7 – IP Data
<block>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 283 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#BLOCKCONSUME – block/unblock a type of service
0 – unblock the service specified in <service_type>
1 – block the service specified in <service_type>
SELINT 2
Note: even if the service “SMS Received” has been blocked, an SMS
ATRUN digest SMS can be received and managed.
Note: the type of service 7 “IP Data” comprises all the IP services (i.e. IP
,with or without header, sent, receive and sent/receive data)
AT# BLOCKCONSUME?
Read command reports the status blocked/unblocked of every type of
service in the following format:
#BLOCKCONSUME: <service_type>,<block>
AT# BLOCKCONSUME=?
5.1.6.4.5.
Test command reports the supported range of values for <service_type>
and <block> parameters
#SGACT/#SSENDLINE configuration - #IPCONSUMECFG
#IPCONSUMECFG – #SGACT/#SSENDLINE configuration
AT#IPCONSUMECFG=
[<connId>
[,<txProt>
[,<remoteHost>
[,<remotePort>
[,<authIMEI/ICCIDEna>
[,<unused_A>
[,<unused_B>
[,<unused_C>
]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
This command configures #SGACT authentication and #SSENDLINE
connection parameters.
Parameters:
Following settings take effect on successive #SSENDLINE
command:
<connId>: - socket connection identifier
1(default)..6
Note: verify <connId> is currently available(i.e: not already connected) by
multisocket commands(#SD,#SL,…) before entering successive
#SSENDLINE command
<txProt> - transmission protocol
0 – TCP(default)
1 – UDP
<remoteHost> - address of the remote host, string type.
This parameter can be either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
- any host name to be solved with a DNS query.
Default “”
<remotePort> - remote host port to contact
1..65535
Default 1024
Following setting takes effect on successive #SGACT command:
<authIMEI/ICCIDEna> - enables PDP context activation
(#SGACT) authentication(user/pwd) with ICCID/IMEI
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 284 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#IPCONSUMECFG – #SGACT/#SSENDLINE configuration
SELINT 2
0 – disable #SGACT authentication with IMEI/ICCID as user/pwd(default)
1 – enable #SGACT authentication with with IMEI/ICCID as user/pwd
Note: <authIMEI/ICCIDEna> setting takes effect when successive
#SGACT not indicating <userId> and <pwd> will be used
Note: the values set by command are directly stored in NVM and doesn’t
depend on the specific CMUX instance.
AT#IPCONSUMECFG?
Read command reports the currently configuration parameters in the
format:
#IPCONSUMECFG: <connId>,<txProt>,<remoteHost>
,<remotePort>,<authIMEI/ICCIDEna>,<0>,<0>,<0>
<CR><LF>
AT#IPCONSUMECFG=?
5.1.6.4.6.
Test command reports the supported range of values for all the parameters
Open a connection, send data, close connection - #SSENDLINE
#SSENDLINE – #SGACT/#SSENDLINE configuration
AT#SSENDLINE=<data>
SELINT 2
This command permits to open a TCP/UDP connection,
send specified data and close the TCP/UDP connection.
The remote host/port of the connection have to be previously
specified with #IPCONSUMECFG command.
Parameters:
<data> - text to send, shall be enclosed between double quotes.
Note: maximum allowed amount of data is 380 octets
Note: in case of UDP obviously only local opening/closure is done,
datagram is sent with <data> contained in the payload.
AT#SSENDLINE=?
Test command reports the maximum length of <data> parameter
Example
at+cgdcont=1,"IP",”APN"
OK
at#ipconsumecfg=1,0,"remoteHost",remotePort
OK
// Socket with <connId> 1 will be used by #ssendline;
// TCP will be the transmission protocol;
// connection will be opened with “remoteHost”/remotePort
at#sgact=1,1
#SGACT: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
OK
at#ssendline="test sample"
// TCP connection with “remoteHost”/remotePort is opened ,
// data between double quotes are sent,
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 285 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSENDLINE – #SGACT/#SSENDLINE configuration
// then TCP connection is closed
OK
5.1.6.5.
5.1.6.5.1.
SELINT 2
Event Monitor Commands
Enable EvMoni Service - #ENAEVMONI
#ENAEVMONI – Enable EvMoni Service
AT#ENAEVMONI=
<mod>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the EvMoni service.
Parameter:
< mod >
0: Service Disabled (default)
1: Service Enabled
Note1: When the service is active on a specific AT instance, that instance
cannot be used for any other scope, except for OTA service that has the
highest priority. For example in the multiplexer request to establish the
Instance, the request will be rejected.
Note2: the current settings are stored in NVM.
AT#ENAEVMONI?
Read command returns the current settings of <mode> and the value of
<stat> in the format:
# ENAEVMONI: <mod>,<stat>
where:
<stat> - service status
0 – not active (default)
1 - active
AT#ENAEVMONI=
5.1.6.5.2.
Test command returns the supported values for the ENAEVMONI
parameters
EvMoni Service parameter - #ENAEVMONICFG
#ENAEVMONICFG – Set EvMoni Service Parameters
AT#ENAEVMONICFG=<in
stance>
[,<urcmod>
[,<timeout>]]
SELINT 2
Set command configures the EvMoni service.
Parameter:
<instance>:
AT instance that will be used by the service to run the AT Command. Range
1 - 5. (Default: 3)
<urcmod>:
0 – disable unsolicited message
1 - enable an unsolicited message when an AT command is
executed after an event is occurred (default)
When unsolicited is enabled, the AT Command is indicated to TE with
unsolicited result code:
#EVMONI: <Text>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 286 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENAEVMONICFG – Set EvMoni Service Parameters
SELINT 2
e.g.:
#EVMONI: AT+CGMR;+CGSN;+GSN;+CCLK
Unsolicited is dumped on the instance that requested the service activation.
<timeout>:
It defines in minutes the maximum time for a command execution. If timeout
expires the module will be rebooted. (Default: 5)
Note 1: the current settings are stored in NVM.
Note 2: the instance used for the EvMoni service is the same used for the
SMS AT RUN service. Therefore, when the #ENAEVMONICFG sets the
<instance> parameter, the change is reflected also in the <instance>
parameter of the #SMSATRUNCFG command, and viceversa.
Note 3: the set command returns ERROR if the command
AT#ENAEVMONI? returns 1 as <mod> parameter or the command
AT#SMSATRUN? returns 1 as <mod> parameter
AT#ENAEVMONICFG?
Read command returns the current settings of parameters in the format:
#ENAEVMONICFG:<instance>,<urcmod>,<timeout>
AT# ENAEVMONICFG=?
5.1.6.5.3.
Test command returns the supported values for the ENAEVMONICFG
parameters
Event Monitoring - #EVMONI
#EVMONI – Set the single Event Monitoring
AT#EVMONI=
<label>,
<mode>,
[,<paramType >
,<param>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the single event monitoring, configures the related
parameter and associates the AT command
<label>: string parameter (that has to be enclosed between double quotes) indicating
the event under monitoring. It can assume the following values:
• VBATT - battery voltage monitoring (not yet implemented)
• DTR - DTR monitoring (not yet implemented)
• ROAM - roaming monitoring
• CONTDEACT - context deactivation monitoring
• RING - call ringing monitoring (not yet implemented)
• STARTUP – module start-up monitoring
• REGISTERED – network registration monitoring
• GPIO1 – monitoring on a selected GPIO in the GPIO range (not yet
implemented)
• GPIO2 – monitoring on a selected GPIO in the GPIO range (not yet
implemented)
• GPIO3 – monitoring on a selected GPIO in the GPIO range (not yet
implemented)
• GPIO4 – monitoring on a selected GPIO in the GPIO range (not yet
implemented)
• GPIO5 – monitoring on a selected GPIO in the GPIO range (not yet
implemented)
• ADCH1 – ADC High Voltage monitoring (not yet implemented)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 287 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#EVMONI – Set the single Event Monitoring
SELINT 2
• ADCL1 – ADC Low Voltage monitoring (not yet implemented)
• DTMF1 –monitoring on user defined DTMF string (not yet implemented)
• DTMF2 –monitoring on user defined DTMF string (not yet implemented)
• DTMF3 –monitoring on user defined DTMF string (not yet implemented)
• DTMF4 –monitoring on user defined DTMF string (not yet implemented)
• SMSIN – monitoring on incoming SMS
• CONSUME1 – used to define an action to be used in consume functionality
(see parameter <action_id> in #CONSUMECFG command) (not yet
implemented)
• CONSUME2 – used to define an action to be used in consume functionality
(see parameter <action_id> in #CONSUMECFG command) (not yet
implemented)
• CONSUME3 – used to define an action to be used in consume functionality
(see parameter <action_id> in #CONSUMECFG command) (not yet
implemented)
• CONSUME4 – used to define an action to be used in consume functionality
(see parameter <action_id> in #CONSUMECFG command) (not yet
implemented)
• CONSUME5 – used to define an action to be used in consume functionality
(see parameter <action_id> in #CONSUMECFG command) (not yet
implemented)
<mode>:
0 – disable the single event monitoring (default)
1 – enable the single event monitoring
< paramType >: numeric parameter indicating the type of parameter contained in
<param>. The 0 value indicates that <param> contains the AT command string to
execute when the related event has occurred. Other values depend from the type of
event.
<param>: it can be a numeric or string value depending on the value of
<paramType> and on the type of event.
If <paramType> is 0, then <param> is a string containing the AT command:
• It has to be enclosed between double quotes
• It has to start with the 2 chars AT (or at)
• If the string contains the character ”, then it has to be replaced with the 3
characters \22
• the max string length is 96 characters
• if it is an empty string, then the AT command is erased
•
•
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
If <label> is VBATT, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 2.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the battery voltage threshold
in the range 0 – 500, where one unit corresponds to 10 mV (therefore
500 corresponds to 5 V). (Default: 0)
o if <paramType> = 2, <param> indicates the time interval in seconds
after that the voltage battery under the value specified with
<paramType> = 1 causes the event. The range is 0 – 255. (Default: 0)
If <label> is DTR, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 2.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the status high or low under
monitoring. The values are 0 (low) and 1 (high). (Default: 0)
o if <paramType> = 2, <param> indicates the time interval in seconds
after that the DTR in the status specified with <paramType> = 1 causes
the event. The range is 0 – 255. (Default: 0)
Page 288 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#EVMONI – Set the single Event Monitoring
SELINT 2
• If <label> is ROAM, <paramType> can assume only the value 0. The event
under monitoring is the roaming state.
• If <label> is CONTDEACT, <paramType> can assume only the value 0. The
event under monitoring is the context deactivation.
• If <label> is RING, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 1.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the numbers of call rings after
that the event occurs. The range is 1-50. (Default: 1)
• If <label> is STARTUP, <paramType> can assume only the value 0. The event
under monitoring is the module start-up.
• If <label> is REGISTERED, <paramType> can assume only the value 0. The
event under monitoring is the network registration (to home network or in
roaming) after the start-up and the SMS ordening.
• If <label> is GPIOX, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 3.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the GPIO pin number;
supported range is from 1 to a value that depends on the hardware.
(Default: 1)
o if <paramType> = 2, <param> indicates the status high or low under
monitoring. The values are 0 (low) and 1 (high) . (Default: 0)
o if <paramType> = 3, <param> indicates the time interval in seconds
after that the selected GPIO pin in the status specified with
<paramType> = 1 causes the event. The range is 0 – 255. (Default: 0)
• If <label> is ADCH1, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 3.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the ADC pin number;
supported range is from 1 to a value that depends on the hardware.
(Default: 1)
o if <paramType> = 2, <param> indicates the ADC High voltage
threshold in the range 0 – 2000 mV. (Default: 0)
o if <paramType> = 3, <param> indicates the time interval in seconds
after that the selected ADC pin above the value specified with
<paramType> = 1 causes the event. The range is 0 – 255. (Default: 0)
• If <label> is ADCL1, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 3.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the ADC pin number;
supported range is from 1 to a value that depends on the hardware.
(Default: 1)
o if <paramType> = 2, <param> indicates the ADC Low voltage
threshold in the range 0 – 2000 mV. (Default: 0)
o if <paramType> = 3, <param> indicates the time interval in seconds
after that the selected ADC pin under the value specified with
<paramType> = 1 causes the event. The range is 0 – 255. (Default: 0)
• If <label> is DTMFX, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0 - 2.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the DTMF string; the single
DTMF characters have to belong to the range ((0-9),#,*,(A-D)); the
maximum number of characters in the string is 15
o if <paramType> = 2, <param> indicates the timeout in milliseconds. It
is the maximum time interval within which a DTMF tone must be
detected after detecting the previous one, to be considered as
belonging to the DTMF string. The range is (500 – 5000). (Default:
1000)
• If <label> is SMSIN, <paramType> can assume values in the range 0-1.
o if <paramType> = 1, <param> indicates the text that must be received
in incoming SMS to trigger AT command execution rings after that the
event occurs; the maximum number of characters in the SMS text string
is 15. If no text is specified, AT command execution is triggered after
each incoming SMS
• If <label> is CONSUMEX, <paramType> can assume only the value 0.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 289 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#EVMONI – Set the single Event Monitoring
SELINT 2
Note: the DTMF string monitoring is available only if the DTMF decode has been
enabled (see #DTMF command)
AT# EVMONI?
Read command returns the current settings for each event in the format:
#EVMONI: <label>,<mode>,<param0>[,<param1>[,<param2>[,<param3>]]]
Where <param0>, <param1>, <param2> and <param3> are defined as before for
<param> depending on <label> value
AT#EVMONI=?
5.1.6.5.4.
Test command returns values supported as a compound value
Send Message - #CMGS
#CMGS - Send Message
(PDU Mode)
AT#CMGS=
<length>,<pdu>
SELINT 2
(PDU Mode)
Execution command sends to the network a message.
Parameter:
<length> - length of the PDU to be sent in bytes (excluding the SMSC address
octets).
7..164
<pdu> - PDU in hexadecimal format (each octet of the PDU is given as two IRA
character long hexadecimal number) and given in one line.
Note: when the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>) equals
zero, the SMSC address set with command +CSCA is used; in this case the
SMSC Type-of-Address octet shall not be present in the <pdu>.
If message is successfully sent to the network, then the result is sent in the
format:
#CMGS: <mr>
where
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in
integer format.
Note: if message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
(Text Mode)
AT#CMGS=<da>
,<text>
(Text Mode)
Execution command sends to the network a message.
Parameters:
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS).
<text> - text to send
The entered text should be enclosed between double quotes and formatted as
follows:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 290 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CMGS - Send Message
SELINT 2
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is used
and current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-User-DataHeader-Indication is not set, then ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM
alphabet, according to 3GPP TS 27.005, Annex A.
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme
is used or current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-UserData-Header-Indication is set, the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit octet (e.g.
the ‘asterisk’ will be entered as 2A (IRA50 and IRA65) and this will be converted
to an octet with integer value 0x2A)
If message is successfully sent to the network, then the result is sent in the
format:
#CMGS: <mr>
where
<mr> - message reference number; 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-Message-Reference in
integer format.
Note: if message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
AT#CMGS=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the #CMGS: <mr> or #CMS
ERROR: <err> response before issuing further commands.
5.1.6.5.5.
Write Message To Memory - #CMGW
#CMGW - Write Message To Memory
(PDU Mode)
AT#CMGW=
<length>,<pdu>
SELINT 2
(PDU Mode)
Execution command writes in the <memw> memory storage a new message.
Parameter:
<length> - length in bytes of the PDU to be written.
7..164
<pdu> - PDU in hexadecimal format (each octet of the PDU is given as two IRA
character long hexadecimal number) and given in one line.
If message is successfully written in the memory, then the result is sent in the
format:
#CMGW: <index>
where:
<index> - message location index in the memory <memw>.
If message storing fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
(Text Mode)
AT#CMGW=<da>
,<text>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
(Text Mode)
Execution command writes in the <memw> memory storage a new message.
Page 291 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CMGW - Write Message To Memory
SELINT 2
Parameters:
<da> - destination address, string type represented in the currently selected
character set (see +CSCS).
<text> - text to write
The entered text should be enclosed between double quotes and formatted as
follows:
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that GSM03.38 default alphabet is
used and current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040 TP-UserData-Header-Indication is not set, then ME/TA converts the entered text into
GSM alphabet, according to 3GPP TS 27.005, Annex A.
- if current <dcs> (see +CSMP) indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding
scheme is used or current <fo> (see +CSMP) indicates that 3GPP TS 23.040
TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set, the entered text should consist of two
IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into 8-bit
octet (e.g. the ‘asterisk’ will be entered as 2A (IRA50 and IRA65) and this
will be converted to an octet with integer value 0x2A)
If message is successfully written in the memory, then the result is sent in the
format:
#CMGW: <index>
where:
<index> - message location index in the memory <memw>.
If message storing fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
AT#CMGW=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Reference
3GPP TS 27.005
Note
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the #CMGW: <index> or +CMS
ERROR: <err> response before issuing further commands.
5.1.6.5.6.
AT Command Delay - #ATDELAY
#ATDELAY – AT Command Delay
AT#ATDELAY=
<delay>
SELINT 2
Set command sets a delay in second for the execution of following AT
command.
Parameters:
<delay> - delay in 100 milliseconds intervals; 0 means no delay
Note: <delay> is only applied to first command executed after #ATDELAY
AT#ATDELAY=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameter
<delay>
Example
Delay “at#gpio=1,1,1” execution of 5 seconds:
at#gpio=1,0,1;#atdelay=50;#gpio=1,1,1
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 292 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.6.
5.1.6.6.1.
Multisocket AT Commands
Socket Status - #SS
#SS - Socket Status
AT#SS[=<connId>]
SELINT 2
Execution command reports the current status of the socket:
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
The response format is:
#SS: <connId>,<state>,<locIP>,<locPort>,<remIP>,<remPort>
where:
<connId> - socket connection identifier, as before
<state> - actual state of the socket:
0 - Socket Closed.
1 - Socket with an active data transfer connection.
2 - Socket suspended.
3 - Socket suspended with pending data.
4 - Socket listening.
5 - Socket with an incoming connection. Waiting for the user accept or
shutdown command.
6 - Socket resolving DNS.
7 - Socket connecting.
<locIP> - IP address associated by the context activation to the socket.
<locPort> - two meanings:
- the listening port if we put the socket in listen mode.
- the local port for the connection if we use the socket to connect to a
remote machine.
<remIP> - when we are connected to a remote machine this is the remote IP
address.
<remPort> - it is the port we are connected to on the remote machine.
Note: issuing #SS<CR> causes getting information about status of all the
sockets; the response format is:
#SS: <connId1>,<state1>,<locIP1>,<locPort1>,<remIP1>,<remPort1>
<CR><LF>
…
#SS: <connId6>,<state6>,<locIP6>,<locPort6>,<remIP6>,<remPort6>
AT#SS=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the range for parameter <connId>.
Page 293 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SS - Socket Status
Example
SELINT 2
AT#SS
#SS: 1,3,91.80.90.162,61119,88.37.127.146,10510
#SS: 2,4,91.80.90.162,1000
#SS: 3,0
#SS: 4,0
#SS: 5,3,91.80.73.70,61120,88.37.127.146,10509
#SS: 6,0
OK
Socket 1: opened from local IP 91.80.90.162/local port 61119 to remote IP
88.37.127.146/remote port 10510
is suspended with pending data
Socket 2: listening on local IP 91.80.90.162/local port 1000
Socket 5: opened from local IP 91.80.73.70/local port 61120 to remote IP
88.37.127.146/remote port 10509
is suspended with pending data
AT#SS=2
#SS: 2,4,91.80.90.162,1000
OK
We have information only about socket number 2
5.1.6.6.2.
Socket Info - #SI
#SI - Socket Info
AT#SI[=<connId>]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to get information about socket data traffic.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
The response format is:
#SI: <connId>,<sent>,<received>,<buff_in>,<ack_waiting>
where:
<connId> - socket connection identifier, as before
<sent> - total amount (in bytes) of sent data since the last time the socket
connection identified by <connId> has been opened
<received> - total amount (in bytes) of received data since the last time the
socket connection identified by <connId> has been opened
<buff_in> - total amount (in bytes) of data just arrived through the socket
connection identified by <connId> and currently buffered, not yet
read
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 294 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SI - Socket Info
SELINT 2
<ack_waiting> - total amount (in bytes) of sent and not yet acknowledged data
since the last time the socket connection identified by
<connId> has been opened
Note: not yet acknowledged data are available only for TCP connections; the
value <ack_waiting> is always 0 for UDP connections.
Note: issuing #SI<CR> causes getting information about data traffic of all the
sockets; the response format is:
#SI: <connId1>,<sent1>,<received1>,<buff_in1>,<ack_waiting1>
<CR><LF>
…
#SI: <connId6>,<sent6>,<received6>,<buff_in6>,<ack_waiting6>
AT#SI=?
Test command reports the range for parameter <connId>.
Example
AT#SI
#SI: 1,123,400,10,50
#SI: 2,0,100,0,0
#SI: 3,589,100,10,100
#SI: 4,0,0,0,0
#SI: 5,0,0,0,0
#SI: 6,0,98,60,0
OK
Sockets 1,2,3,6 are opened with some data traffic.
For example socket 1 has 123 bytes sent, 400 bytes received, 10 byte waiting to
be read and 50 bytes waiting to be acknowledged from the remote side.
AT#SI=1
#SI: 1,123,400,10,50
OK
We have information only about socket number 1
5.1.6.6.3.
Socket Type - #ST
#ST – Socket Type
AT#ST
[=<ConnId>]
SELINT 2
Set command reports the current type of the socket ( TCP/UDP ) and its
direction (Dialer / Listener )
Parameter:
< ConnId > - socket connection identifier
1..6
The response format is:
#ST: <connId>,<type>,<direction>
where
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 295 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ST – Socket Type
< connId > - socket connection identifier
1..6
< type > - socket type
0 – No socket
1 – TCP socket
2 – UDP socket
< direction > - direction of the socket
0 – No
1 – Dialer
2 – Listener
SELINT 2
Note: issuing #ST<CR> causes getting information about type of all the
sockets; the response format is:
#ST: <connId1>,<type1>,<direction1>
<CR><LF>
…
#ST: <connId6>,< type 6>,< direction 6>
AT#ST=?
Test command reports the range for parameter <connId>.
Example
single socket:
AT#ST=3
#ST: 3,2,1
Socket 3 is an UDP dialer.
All sockets:
AT#ST
#ST: 1,0,0
#ST: 2,0,0
#ST: 3,2,1
#ST: 4,2,2
#ST: 5,1,1
#ST: 6,1,2
Socket 1 is closed.
Socket 2 is closed.
Socket 3 is an UDP dialer
Socket 4 is an UDP listener
Socket 5 is a TCP dialer
Socket 6 is a TCP listener
5.1.6.6.4.
Context Activation - #SGACT
#SGACT - Context Activation
AT#SGACT=<cid>,
<stat>[,<userId>,
<pwd>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to activate or deactivate either the GSM context or
the specified PDP context.
Moreover it binds or unbinds Easy IP application to the specified PDP context
( or GSM context ).
Page 296 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SGACT - Context Activation
SELINT 2
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identifier
0 - specifies the GSM context (not yet available)
1..max - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
The value of max is returned by the Test command
<stat>
0 - deactivate the context
1 - activate the context
<userId> - string type, used only if the context requires it
<pwd> - string type, used only if the context requires it
Note: context activation/deactivation returns ERROR if there is not any socket
associated to it (see AT#SCFG).
Note: In LTE network, default PDP context(cid 1) is activated by piggybacking
on LTE attach procedure and maintained until detached from NW. This
command with cid 1 is just binding or unbinding application to the default PDP
context.
AT#SGACT?
Returns the state of all the contexts that have been defined
#SGACT: <cid1>,<Stat1><CR><LF>
…
#SGACT: <cidmax>,<Statmax>
where:
<cidn> - as <cid> before
<statn> - context status
0 - context deactivated
1 - context activated and bound to Easy IP application
AT#SGACT=?
Test command reports the range for the parameters <cid> and <stat>
Note
It is strongly recommended to use the same command (e.g. #SGACT) to
activate the context, deactivate it and interrogate about its status.
5.1.6.6.5.
Socket Shutdown - #SH
#SH - Socket Shutdown
AT#SH=<connId>
SELINT 2
This command is used to close a socket.
Parameter:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
Note: socket cannot be closed in states “resolving DNS” and “connecting”
( see AT#SS command )
AT#SH=?
5.1.6.6.6.
Test command reports the range for parameter <connId>.
Socket Configuration - #SCFG
#SCFG - Socket Configuration
AT#SCFG=
<connId>,<cid>,
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command sets the socket configuration parameters.
Page 297 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SCFG - Socket Configuration
SELINT 2
<pktSz>,<maxTo>, Parameters:
<connTo>,<txTo>
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..10
<cid> - PDP context identifier
0 - specifies the GSM context
1.. max - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
The value of max is returned by the Test command
<pktSz> - packet size to be used by the TCP/UDP/IP stack for data sending.
0 - select automatically default value(300).
1..1500 - packet size in bytes.
<maxTo> - exchange timeout (or socket inactivity timeout); if there’s no data
exchange within this timeout period the connection is closed.
0 - no timeout
1..65535 - timeout value in seconds (default 90 s.)
<connTo> - connection timeout; if we can’t establish a connection to the remote
within this timeout period, an error is raised.
10..1200 - timeout value in hundreds of milliseconds (default 600)
<txTo> - data sending timeout; after this period data are sent also if they’re less
than max packet size.
0 - no timeout
1..255 - timeout value in hundreds of milliseconds (default 50)
256 – set timeout value in 10 milliseconds
257 – set timeout value in 20 milliseconds
258 – set timeout value in 30 milliseconds
259 – set timeout value in 40 milliseconds
260 – set timeout value in 50 milliseconds
261 – set timeout value in 60 milliseconds
262 – set timeout value in 70 milliseconds
263 – set timeout value in 80 milliseconds
264 – set timeout value in 90 milliseconds
Note: these values are automatically saved in NVM.
Note: if DNS resolution is required, max DNS resolution time(20 sec) has to be
considered in addition to <connTo>
AT#SCFG?
Read command returns the current socket configuration parameters values for all
the six sockets, in the format:
#SCFG: <connId1>,<cid1>,<pktsz1>,<maxTo1>,<connTo1>,<txTo1>
<CR><LF>
...
#SCFG: <connId6>,<cid6>,<pktsz6>,<maxTo6>,<connTo6>,<txTo6>
<CR><LF>
AT#SCFG=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the subparameters.
Example
at#scfg?
#SCFG: 1,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 2,2,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 3,2,250,90,600,50
#SCFG: 4,1,300,90,600,50
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 298 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SCFG - Socket Configuration
#SCFG: 5,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 6,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 7,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 8,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 9,2,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 10,2,300,90,600,50
SELINT 2
OK
5.1.6.6.7.
Socket Configuration Extended - #SCFGEXT
#SCFGEXT - Socket Configuration Extended
AT#SCFGEXT=
<conned>,<srMode>,
<recvDataMode>,
<keepalive>,
[,<ListenAutoRsp>
[,<sendDataMode>]
]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the socket configuration extended parameters.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<srMode> - SRing unsolicited mode
0 - Normal (default):
SRING : <connId> where <connId> is the socket connection identifier
1 – Data amount:
SRING : <connId>,<recData> where <recData> is the amount of data
received on the socket connection number <connId>
2 - Data view:
SRING : <connId>,<recData>,<data> same as before and <data> is data
received displayed following <dataMode> value
3 – Data view with UDP datagram informations:
SRING : <sourceIP>,<sourcePort><connId>,<recData>,
<dataLeft>,<data> same as before with <sourceIP>,<sourcePort> and
<dataLeft> that means the number of bytes left in the UDP datagram
<recvDataMode> - data view mode for received data
in command mode(AT#SRECV or <srMode> = 2)
0- text mode (default)
1- hexadecimal mode
<keepalive> - Set the TCP Keepalive value in minutes
0 – Deactivated (default)
1 – 240 – Keepalive time in minutes
<ListenAutoRsp> - Set the listen auto-response mode, that affects the
commands AT#SL and AT#SLUDP
0 - Deactivated (default)
1 – Activated
<sendDataMode> - data mode for sending data
in command mode(AT#SSEND)
0 - data represented as text (default)
1 - data represented as sequence of hexadecimal numbers (from 00 to FF)
Each octet of the data is given as two IRA character long hexadecimal number
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 299 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Note: these values are automatically saved in NVM.
Note: Keepalive is available only on TCP connections.
Note: for the behaviour of AT#SL and AT#SLUDP in case of auto-response
mode or in case of no auto-response mode, see the description of the two
commands.
AT#SCFGEXT?
Read command returns the current socket extended configuration parameters
values for all the six sockets, in the format:
#SCFGEXT:<connId1>, <srMode1>,<dataMode1>,<keepalive1>,
<ListenAutoRsp1>,0<CR><LF>
...
#SCFGEXT:<connId6>, <srMode6>,<dataMode6>,<keepalive6>,
<ListenAutoRsp6>,0<CR><LF>
AT#SCFGEXT=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the
subparameters.
Example
Socket 1 set with data view sring, text data mode, a keepalive time of 30
minutes and listen auto-response set.
Socket 3 set with data amount sring, hex recv data mode, no keepalive and
listen auto-response not set.
Socket 4 set with hex recv and send data mode
at#scfgext?
#SCFGEXT: 1,2,0,30,1,0
#SCFGEXT: 2,0,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT: 3,1,1,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT: 4,0,1,0,0,1
#SCFGEXT: 5,0,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT: 6,0,0,0,0,0
OK
5.1.6.6.8.
Socket configuration Extended 2 - #SCFGEXT2
#SCFGEXT2 - Socket Configuration Extended
AT#SCFGEXT2=
<connId>,<bufferStart>,
[,<abortConnAttempt>
[,<unused_B >
[,<unused_C >[,<noCarrierMode>]]]]
Set command sets the socket configuration extended
parameters for features not included in #SCFGEXT
command.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<bufferStart> - Set the sending timeout method based on new
data received from the serial port.
(<txTo> timeout value is set by #SCFG command)
Restart of transmission timer will be done when new data
are received from the serial port.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 300 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
0 - old behaviour for transmission timer
(#SCFG command 6th parameter old behaviour,
start only first time if new data are received from the
serial port)
1 - new behaviour for transmission timer:
restart when new data received from serial port
Note: is necessary to avoid overlapping of the two methods.
Enabling new method, the old method for transmission
timer(#SCFG) is automatically disabled to avoid overlapping.
Note: check if new data have been received from serial port
is done with a granularity that is directly related to #SCFG
<txTo> setting with a maximum period of 1 sec.
<abortConnAttempt> - Enable connection
attempt(#SD/#SKTD) abort before CONNECT(online mode) or
OK(command mode)
0 – Not possible to interrupt connection attempt
1 – It is possible to interrupt the connection attempt
(<connTo> set by #SCFG or
DNS resolution running if required)
and give back control to AT interface by
reception of a character.
As soon as the control has been given to the AT interface
the ERROR message will be received on the interface itself.
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
<noCarrierMode> - permits to choose NO CARRIER
indication format when the socket is closed as follows
0 – NO CARRIER
(default)
Indication is sent as usual, without additional information
1 – NO CARRIER:<connId>
Indication of current <connId> socket connection identifier
is added
2 – NO CARRIER:<connId>,<cause>
Indication of current <connId> socket connection identifier
and closure <cause> are added
For possible <cause> values, see also #SLASTCLOSURE
Note: like #SLASTCLOSURE, in case of subsequent
consecutive
closure causes are received, the original disconnection cause
is indicated.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 301 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Note: in the case of command mode connection and remote
closure
with subsequent inactivity timeout closure without retrieval of
all
available data(#SRECV or SRING mode 2), it is indicated
cause 1 for both possible FIN and RST from remote.
AT#SCFGEXT2?
Read command returns the current socket extended
configuration parameters values for all the six sockets, in the
format:
#SCFGEXT2:<connId1>,<bufferStart1>,0,0,0,0<CR><LF>
...
#SCFGEXT2:<connId6>,<bufferStart6>,0,0,0,0<CR><LF>
AT#SCFGEXT2=?
Example
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the
subparameters.
AT#SCFGEXT2=1,1
OK
AT#SCFGEXT2=2,1
OK
AT#SCFGEXT2?
#SCFGEXT2: 1,1,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT2: 2,1,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT2: 3,0,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT2: 4,0,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT2: 5,0,0,0,0,0
#SCFGEXT2: 6,0,0,0,0,0
OK
AT#SCFG?
#SCFG: 1,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 2,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 3,1,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 4,2,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 5,2,300,90,600,50
#SCFG: 6,2,300,90,600,50
OK
AT#SCFG=1,1,300,90,600,30
OK
Current configuration: socket with connId 1 and 2 are
configured with new transmission timer behaviour.
<txTo> corresponding value has been changed(#SCFG) for
connId 1, for connId 2 has been left to default value.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 302 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.6.9.
Socket configuration Extended 3 - #SCFGEXT3
#SCFGEXT3 - Socket Configuration Extended 3
AT#SCFGEXT3=
<connId
>,<immRsp>[,
<closureTypeCmdMo
deEnabling>
[,<fastsring>[,<unuse
d_C>[,<unused_D>]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the socket configuration extended parameters for features
not included in #SCFGEXT command nor in #SCFGEXT2 command
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<immRsp> - Enables AT#SD command mode immediate response
0 – factory default, means that AT#SD in command mode (see AT#SD) returns
after the socket is connected
1 – means that AT#SD in command mode returns immediately. Then the state
of the connection can be read by the AT command AT#SS
<closureTypeCmdModeEnabling> Setting this parameter, successive #SD or #SL with <closureType>
parameter 255 setting takes effect in command mode.
It has been introduced due to retrocompatibility reason regarding
<closureType> behaviour in command mode.
0 – factory default, #SD or #SL <closureType> 255 in command mode has no
effect
1 – #SD or SL <closureType> 255 in command mode takes effect
<fastsring> - Enables the fast SRING (active only when AT#SCFGEXT
parameter <srmode>=2) in TCP and UDP sockets
0 – factory default, means that SRING unsolicited is received periodically if data
are available every 200ms.
1 – means that if data are available SRING unsolicited is received asynchronous
as fast as possible.
Note: parameters are saved in NVM
AT#SCFGEXT3?
Read command returns the current socket extended configuration parameters
values for all the six sockets, in the format:
#SCFGEXT3:<connId1>,<immRsp1>, <closureTypeCmdModeEnabling>,<
fastsring >,0,0<CR><LF>
...
#SCFGEXT3:<connId6>,<immRsp6>, <closureTypeCmdModeEnabling>, <
fastsring >,0,0<CR><LF>
AT#SCFGEXT3=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
5.1.6.6.10. Socket Dial - #SD
#SD - Socket Dial
AT#SD=<connId>,
<txProt>,<rPort>,
<IPaddr>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command opens a remote connection via socket.
Parameters:
Page 303 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SD - Socket Dial
[,<closureType>
[,<lPort>
[,<connMode>]]]
SELINT 2
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<txProt> - transmission protocol
0 - TCP
1 - UDP
<rPort> - remote host port to contact
1..65535
<IPaddr> - address of the remote host, string type. This parameter can be
either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
- any host name to be solved with a DNS query
<closureType> - socket closure behaviour for TCP when remote host has
closed
0 - local host closes immediately (default)
255 - local host closes after an AT#SH or immediately in case of an abortive
disconnect from remote.
<lPort> - UDP connections local port
1..65535
<connMode> - Connection mode
0 - online mode connection (default)
1 - command mode connection
Note: <closureType> parameter is valid for TCP connections only and has no
effect (if used) for UDP connections.
Note: <lPort> parameter is valid for UDP connections only and has no effect (if
used) for TCP connections.
Note: if we set <connMode> to online mode connection and the command is
successful we enter in online data mode and we see the intermediate result
code CONNECT. After the CONNECT we can suspend the direct interface to
the socket connection (nb the socket stays open) using the escape sequence
(+++): the module moves back to command mode and we receive the final
result code OK after the suspension. After such a suspension, it’s possible to
resume it in every moment (unless the socket inactivity timer timeouts, see
#SCFG) by using the #SO command with the corresponding <connId>.
Note: if we set <connMode> to command mode connection and the
command is successful, the socket is opened and we remain in command
mode and we see the result code OK.
Note: if there are input data arrived through a connected socket and not yet
read because the module entered command mode before reading them (after
an escape sequence or after #SD has been issued with <connMode> set to
command mode connection), these data are buffered and we receive the
SRING URC (SRING presentation format depends on the last #SCFGEXT
setting); it’s possible to read these data afterwards issuing #SRECV. Under the
same hypotheses it’s possible to send data while in command mode issuing
#SSEND
Note: resume of the socket(#SO) after suspension or closure(#SH)
has to be done on the same instance on which the socket was opened through
#SD. In fact, suspension has been done on the instance itself.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 304 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SD - Socket Dial
SELINT 2
Note: <closureType> 255 takes effect on a command mode
connection(<connMode> set to 1 or online mode connection suspended with
+++) only if #SCFGEXT3 <closureTypeCmdModeEnabling> parameter has
been previously enabled.
Note: if PDN connection has not properly opened then +CME ERROR: 556
(context not opened) will be given.
AT#SD=?
Test command reports the range of values for all the parameters.
Example
Open socket 1 in online mode
AT#SD=1,0,80,”www.google.com”,0,0,0
CONNECT
…
Open socket 1 in command mode
AT#SD=1,0,80,”www.google.com”,0,0,1
OK
5.1.6.6.11. Socket Restore - #SO
#SO - Socket Restore
AT#SO=<connId>
SELINT 2
Execution command resumes the direct interface to a socket connection which
has been suspended by the escape sequence.
Parameter:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
AT#SO=?
Test command reports the range of values for <connId> parameter.
5.1.6.6.12. Socket Listen - #SL
#SL - Socket Listen
AT#SL=<connId>,
<listenState>,
<listenPort>
>[,<closure type>]
SELINT 2
This command opens/closes a socket listening for an incoming TCP
connection on a specified port.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<listenState> 0 - closes socket listening
1 - starts socket listening
<listenPort> - local listening port
1..65535
<closure type> - socket closure behaviour for TCP when remote host has
closed
0 - local host closes immediately (default)
255 - local host closes after an AT#SH or immediately in case of an abortive
disconnect from remote.
Note: if successful, the command returns a final result code OK.
If the ListenAutoRsp flag has not been set through the command
AT#SCFGEXT (for the specific connId), then, when a TCP connection request
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 305 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SL - Socket Listen
SELINT 2
comes on the input port, if the sender is not filtered by internal firewall (see
#FRWL), an URC is received:
SRING : <connId>
Afterwards we can use #SA to accept the connection or #SH to refuse it.
If the ListenAutoRsp flag has been set, then, when a TCP connection request
comes on the input port, if the sender is not filtered by the internal firewall (see
command #FRWL), the connection is automatically accepted: the CONNECT
indication is given and the modem goes into online data mode.
If the socket is closed by the network the following URC is received:
#SL: ABORTED
Note: when closing the listening socket <listenPort> is a don’t care
Parameter
Note: <closureType> 255 takes effect on a command mode connection
(connection accepted through AT#SA=<connId>,1 or online mode connection
suspended with +++) only if #SCFGEXT3 <closureTypeCmdModeEnabling>
parameter has been previously enabled.
AT#SL?
Read command returns all the actual listening TCP sockets.
AT#SL=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the subparameters.
Example
Next command opens a socket listening for TCP on port 3500 without.
AT#SL=1,1,3500
OK
5.1.6.6.13. Socket Listen UDP - #SLUDP
#SLUDP - Socket Listen UDP
SELINT 2
AT#SLUDP=<connId> This command opens/closes a socket listening for an incoming UDP
connection on a specified port.
,
<listenState>,
Parameters:
<listenPort>
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<listenState> 0 - closes socket listening
1 - starts socket listening
<listenPort> - local listening port
1..65535
Note: if successful, the command returns a final result code OK.
If the ListenAutoRsp flag has not been set through the command
AT#SCFGEXT (for the specific connId), then, when an UDP connection
request comes on the input port, if the sender is not filtered by internal firewall
(see #FRWL), an URC is received:
+SRING : <connId>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 306 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SLUDP - Socket Listen UDP
SELINT 2
Afterwards we can use #SA to accept the connection or #SH to refuse it.
If the ListenAutoRsp flag has been set, then, when an UDP connection request
comes on the input port, if the sender is not filtered by the internal firewall (see
command #FRWL), the connection is automatically accepted: the CONNECT
indication is given and the modem goes into online data mode.
If the socket is closed by the network the following URC is received:
#SLUDP: ABORTED
Note: when closing the listening socket <listenPort> is a don’t care
parameter
AT#SLUDP?
Read command returns all the actual listening UDP sockets.
AT#SLUDP=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the subparameters.
Example
Next command opens a socket listening for UDP on port 3500.
AT#SLUDP=1,1,3500
OK
5.1.6.6.14. Socket Accept - #SA
#SA - Socket Accept
AT#SA=<connId>
[,<connMode>]
SELINT 2
Execution command accepts an incoming socket connection after an URC
SRING: <connId>
Parameter:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<connMode> - Connection mode, as for command #SD.
0 - online mode connection (default)
1 - command mode connection
Note: the SRING URC has to be a consequence of a #SL issue.
Note: setting the command before to having received a SRING will result
in an ERROR indication, giving the information that a connection request
has not yet been received
AT#SA=?
Test command reports the range of values for all the parameters.
5.1.6.6.15. Socket Info Extended - #SIEXT
#SIEXT – Socket Info Extended
AT#SIEXT[=<connId>]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to get information about socket data traffic.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
The response format is:
#SIEXT: <connId>,<retx>,<oos>,<rsrvd1>,<rsrvd2>
where:
<connId> - socket connection identifier, as before
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 307 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
<retx> - total amount of retransmissions of outgoing packets since the last
time the socket connection identified by <connId> has been opened
<oos> - total amount of ingoing out of sequence packets (packets which
sequence number is greater than the next expected one) since
the last time the socket connection identified by <connId> has
been opened
<rsrvd1/2> - reserved fields for future development of new statistics. Currently
they’re always equal to 0
Note: parameters associated with a socket identified by <connId> are cleared
when the socket itself is connected again (#SD or #SA after #SL). Until then, if
previous connection has been established and closed, old values are yet
available.
Note: both <retx> and <oos> parameters are available only for TCP
connections; their value is always 0 for UDP connections.
Note: issuing #SIEXT<CR> causes getting information about data traffic of all
the sockets; the response format is:
#SI: <connId1>,<retx1>,<oos1>,<rsrvd1_1>,< rsrvd2_1>
<CR><LF>
…
#SI: <connId6>,<retx6>,<oos6>,< rsrvd1_6>,< rsrvd2_6>
AT#SIEXT=?
Test command reports the range for parameter <connId>.
5.1.6.6.16. Detect the cause of a Socket disconnection - #SLASTCLOSURE
#SLASTCLOSURE – Detect the cause of a socket disconnection
AT#SLASTCLOSURE=
[<connId>]
SELINT 2
Execution command reports socket disconnection cause
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
The response format is:
#SLASTCLOSURE: <connId>,<cause>
where:
<connId> - socket connection identifier, as before
<cause> - socket disconnection cause:
0 – not available(socket has not yet been closed)
1.- remote host TCP connection close due to FIN/END: normal remote
disconnection decided by the remote application
2 -.remote host TCP connection close due to RST, all others cases in which
the socket is aborted without indication from peer (for instance because peer
doesn't send ack after maximum number of retransmissions/peer is no more
alive).
All these cases include all the "FATAL" errors after recv or send on the TCP
socket(named as different from EWOULDBLOCK)
3.- socket inactivity timeout
4.- network deactivation(PDN connection deactivation
from network)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 308 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Note: any time socket is re-opened, last disconnection
cause is reset. Command report 0(not available).
Note: user closure cause(#SH) is not considered and
if a user closure is performed after remote disconnection,
remote disconnection cause remains saved and is not
overwritten.
Note: if more consecutive closure causes are received,
the original disconnection cause is saved.
(For instance: if a TCP FIN is received from remote
and later a TCP RST because we continue to send data,
FIN cause is saved and not overwritten)
Note: also in case of <closureType>(#SD) set to 255, if the socket has not
yet been closed by user after the escape sequence, #SLASTCLOSURE
indicates remote disconnection cause if it has been received.
Note: in case of UDP, cause 2 indicates abnormal(local)
disconnection. Cause 3 and 4 are still possible.
(Cause 1 is obviously never possible)
Note: in case of command mode connection and remote closure with
subsequent inactivity timeout closure without
retrieval of all available data(#SRECV or SRING mode 2),
it is indicated cause 1 for both possible FIN and RST from remote.
AT#SLASTCLOSURE=? Test command reports the supported range for parameter <connId>
5.1.6.6.17. Receive Data In Command Mode - #SRECV
#SRECV - Receive Data In Command Mode
AT#SRECV=
<connId>,
<maxByte>,[<UDPInfo>]
SELINT 2
Execution command permits the user to read data arrived through a
connected socket, but buffered and not yet read because the module
entered command mode before reading them; the module is notified of
these data by a SRING URC, whose presentation format depends on the
last #SCFGEXT setting.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<maxByte> - max number of bytes to read
1..1500
<UDPInfo>
0 – UDP information disabled ( default )
1 – UDP information enabled: data are read just until the end of the
datagram and the response carries information about the remote IP
address and port and about the remaining bytes in the datagram.
AT#SRECV=<connId>,<maxBytes>,1
#SRECV: <sourceIP>,<sourcePort><connId>,<recData>,
<dataLeft>
data
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 309 of 464
UDP
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SRECV - Receive Data In Command Mode
SELINT 2
Note: issuing #SRECV when there’s no buffered data raises an error.
AT#SRECV=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameters
< connId > < maxByte > and <UDPInfo>
Example
SRING URC (<srMode> be 0, <dataMode> be 0) telling data have just
come through connected socket identified by <connId>=1 and are now
buffered
SRING: 1
Read in text format the buffered data
AT#SRECV=1,15
#SRECV: 1,15
stringa di test
OK
Or:
if the received datagram, received from <IPaddr and <IPport> is of 60 bytes
AT#SRECV=1,15,1
#SRECV: <IPaddr>,<IPport>,1,15,45
stringa di test
OK
SRING URC (<srMode> be 1, <dataMode> be 1) telling 15 bytes data have
just come through connected socket identified by <connId>=2 and are now
buffered
SRING: 2,15
Read in hexadecimal format the buffered data
AT#SRECV=2,15
#SRECV: 2,15
737472696e67612064692074657374
OK
Or:
if the received datagram, received from <IPaddr and <IPport> is of 60 bytes
AT#SRECV=2,15
#SRECV: <IPaddr>,<IPport>,2,15,45
737472696e67612064692074657374
OK
SRING URC (<srMode> be 2, <dataMode> be 0) displaying (in text format)
15 bytes data that have just come through connected socket identified by
<connId>=3; it’s no necessary to issue #SRECV to read the data; no data
remain in the buffer after this URC
SRING: 3,15, stringa di test
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 310 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.6.18. Send Data In Command Mode - #SSEND
#SSEND - Send Data In Command Mode
AT#SSEND=
<connId>
SELINT 2
Execution command permits, while the module is in command mode, to send
data through a connected socket.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
The device responds to the command with the prompt
<greater_than><space> and waits for the data to send.
To complete the operation send Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex); to exit without writing
the message send ESC char (0x1B hex).
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported
Note: the maximum number of bytes to send is 1500 bytes
; trying to send more data will cause the surplus to be discarded and lost.
Note: it’s possible to use #SSEND only if the connection was opened by #SD,
else the ME is raising an error.
Note: a byte corresponding to BS char(0x08) is treated with its corresponding
meaning; therefore previous byte will be cancelled(and BS char itself will not be
sent)
AT#SSEND=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter
< connId >
Example
Send data through socket number 2
AT#SSEND=2
>Test<CTRL-Z>
OK
5.1.6.6.19. Send UDP data to a specific remote host - #SSENDUDP
#SSENDUDP – send UDP data to a specific remote host
AT#SSENDUDP=<connId>
,<remoteIP>,<remotePort>
SELINT 2
This command permits, while the module is in command mode, to send
data over UDP to a specific remote host.
UDP connection has to be previously completed with a first remote host
through #SLUDP / #SA.
Then, if we receive data from this or another host, we are able to send
data to it.
Like command #SSEND, the device responds with ‘> ‘ and waits for the
data to send.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<remoteIP> - IP address of the remote host in dotted decimal notation,
string type: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 311 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
<remotePort> - remote host port
1..65535
Note: after SRING that indicates incoming UDP data and issuing
#SRECV to receive data itself, through #SS is possible to check last
remote host (IP/Port).
Note: if successive resume of the socket to online mode
Is performed(#SO), connection with first remote host
is restored as it was before.
AT#SSENDUDP=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<connId>,<remoteIP> and <remotePort>
Example
Starts listening on <LocPort>(previous setting of firewall through #FRWL
has to be done)
AT#SLUDP=1,1,<LocPort>
OK
SRING: 1 // UDP data from a remote host available
AT#SA=1,1
OK
SRING: 1
AT#SI=1
#SI: 1,0,0,23,0 // 23 bytes to read
OK
AT#SRECV=1,23
#SRECV:1,23
message from first host
OK
AT#SS=1
#SS: 1,2,<LocIP>,<LocPort>,<RemIP1>,<RemPort1>
OK
AT#SSENDUDP=1,<RemIP1>,<RemPort1>
>response to first host
OK
SRING: 1 // UDP data from a remote host available
AT#SI=1
#SI: 1,22,23,24,0 // 24 bytes to read
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 312 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
OK
AT#SRECV=1,24
#SRECV:1,24
message from second host
OK
AT#SS=1
#SS: 1,2,<LocIP>,<LocPort>,<RemIP2>,<RemPort2>
OK
Remote host has changed, we want to send
a reponse:
AT#SSENDUDP=1,<RemIP2>,<RemPort2>
>response to second host
OK
5.1.6.6.20. Send UDP data to a specific remote host extended #SSENDUDPEXT
#SSENDUDPEXT – send UDP data to a specific remote host extended
AT#SSENDUDPEXT
=<connId>,<bytestosend>,
,<remoteIP>,<remotePort>
SELINT 2
This command permits, while the module is in command mode, to
send data over UDP to a specific remote host
including all possible octets(from 0x00 to 0xFF)
As indicated about #SSENDUDP:
UDP socket has to be previously opened through #SLUDP / #SA,
then we are able to send data to different remote hosts
Like #SSENDEXT, the device responds with the prompt ‘> ‘ and
waits for the data to send, operation is automatically completed
when <bytestosend> have been sent.
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
<bytestosend> - number of bytes to be sent
1-1500
<remoteIP> - IP address of the remote host in dotted decimal
notation, string type: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
<remotePort> - remote host port
1..65535
AT#SSENDUDPEXT=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for
parameters
<connId>,<bytestosend>,<remoteIP> and <remotePort>
Page 313 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.6.21. Send data in Command Mode extended - #SSENDEXT
#SSENDEXT - Send Data In Command Mode extended
AT#SSENDEXT=
<connId>,
<bytestosend>
SELINT 2
Execution command permits, while the module is in command mode, to
send data through a connected socket including all possible octets
(from 0x00 to 0xFF).
Parameters:
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
< bytestosend > - number of bytes to be sent
Please refer to test command for range
The device responds to the command with the prompt
<greater_than><space> and waits for the data to send.
When <bytestosend> bytes have been sent, operation is automatically
completed.
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: it’s possible to use #SSENDEXT only if the connection was opened by
#SD, else the ME is raising an error.
Note: all special characters are sent like a generic byte.
(For instance: 0x08 is simply sent through the socket and don’t behave like a
BS, i.e. previous character is not deleted)
AT#SSENDEXT=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameters < connId
> and <bytestosend>
Example
Open the socket in command mode:
at#sd=1,0,<port>,"IP address",0,0,1
OK
Give the command specifying total number of bytes as second parameter:
at#ssendext=1,256
> .............................. ; // Terminal echo of bytes sent is displayed here
OK
All possible bytes(from 0x00 to 0xFF) are sent on the socket as generic bytes.
5.1.6.6.22. IP Easy Authentication Type - #SGACTAUTH
#SGACTAUTH – Easy GRPS Authentication Type
AT#SGACTAUTH=
<type>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the authentication type for IP Easy
This command has effect on the authentication mode used on AT#SGACT
Parameter
<type>
0 - no authentication
1 - PAP authentication (factory default)
2 - CHAP authentication
Note: the parameter is not saved in NWM
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 314 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SGACTAUTH – Easy GRPS Authentication Type
AT#SGACTAUTH?
SELINT 2
Read command reports the current IP Easy authentication type, in the format:
#SGACTAUTH: <type>
AT#SGACTAUTH =?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <type>.
5.1.6.6.23. Context activation and configuration - #SGACTCFG
#SGACTCFG - Context Activation and Configuration
AT#SGACTCFG=
<cid>,
<retry>,
[,<delay >
[,<urcmode >]]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to enable or disable the automatic
activation/reactivation of the context for the specified PDP context, to set the
maximum number of attempts and to set the delay between an attempt and the
next one. The context is activated automatically after every GPRS Attach or
after a NW PDP CONTEXT deactivation if at least one IPEasy socket is
configured to this context (see AT#SCFG).
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identifier (see +CGDCONT command)
1.. max - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The value of max is returned by the Test command
<retry> - numeric parameter which specifies the maximum number of context
activation attempts in case of activation failure. The value belongs to the
following range: 0 - 15
0 - disable the automatic activation/reactivation of the context (default)
<delay> - numeric parameter which specifies the delay in seconds between an
attempt and the next one. The value belongs to the following range: 180 - 3600
< urcmode > - URC presentation mode
0 - disable unsolicited result code (default)
1 - enable unsolicited result code, after an automatic activation/reactivation, of
the local IP address obtained from the network. It has meaning only if
<auto>=1. The unsolicited message is in the format:
#SGACT: <ip_address>
reporting the local IP address obtained from the network.
Note: the URC presentation mode <urcmode> is related to the current AT
instance only. Last <urcmode> setting is saved for every instance as extended
profile parameter, thus it is possible to restore it even if the multiplexer control
channel is released and set up, back and forth.
Note: < retry > and <delay> setting are global parameter saved in NVM
Note: if the automatic activation is enabled on a context, then it is not allowed to
modify by the command AT#SCFG the association between the context itself
and the socket connection identifier; all the other parameters of command
AT#SCFG are modifiable while the socket is not connected
AT#SGACTCFG?
Read command reports the state of all the contexts, in the format:
#SGACTCFG: <cid1>,<retry1>,<delay1>, < urcmode >CR><LF>
…
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 315 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SGACTCFG - Context Activation and Configuration
SELINT 2
#SGACTCFG: <cidmax>,<retrymax>,<delaymax>,< urcmode >
where:
<cidn> - as <cid> before
<retryn> - as <retry> before
<delayn> - as <delay> before
< urcmode > - as < urcmode > before
AT#SGACTCFG=?
Test command reports supported range of values for parameters <cid>
>,<retry>,<delay>and < urcmode >
5.1.6.6.24. Context activation and configuration extended - #SGACTCFGEXT
#SGACTCFGEXT - context activation configuration extended
AT#SGACTCFGEXT=
<cid>,
<abortAttemptEnable>
[,<unused>
[,<unused>
[,<unused>
]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to enable new features related to
context activation.
Parameters:
<cid> - PDP context identifier (see +CGDCONT command)
1.. max - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The value of max is returned by the Test command
< abortAttemptEnable >
0 – old behaviour: no abort possible while attempting context activation
1 – abort during context activation attempt is possible by sending a byte on
the serial port.
It takes effect on successive GPRS context activation attempt through
#SGACT command in the following manner.
While waiting for AT#SGACT=<cid>,1 response(up to 150 s) is possible to
abort attempt by sending a byte and get back AT interface control(NO
CARRIER indication).
Note:
If we receive delayed CTXT ACTIVATION ACCEPT after abort, network will
be automatically informed of our aborted attempt through
relative protocol messages(SM STATUS) and will also close on
its side.
Otherwise, if no ACCEPT is received after abort, network will be informed later
of our PDP state through other protocol messages
(routing area update for instance).
AT#SGACTCFGEXT?
Read command reports the state of all the defined contexts, in the format:
#SGACTCFGEXT: <cid1>,< abortAttemptEnable1 >,0,0,0<CR><LF>
…
#SGACTCFGEXT:<cidmax>,<abortAttemptEnablemax>,0,0,0<CR><LF>
where:
<cidn> - as <cid> before
< abortAttemptEnable n> - as < abortAttemptEnable > before
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#SGACTCFGEXT=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports supported range of values for all parameters
Page 316 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.6.25. PAD command features - #PADCMD
#PADCMD – PAD command features
AT#PADCMD=<mode>
SELINT 2
This command sets features of the pending data flush to socket, opened
with AT#SD command.
Parameters:
<mode>:
Bit 1: 1 - enable forwarding; 0 – disable forwarding;
Other bits reserved;
Note: forwarding depends on character defined by AT#PADFWD
AT#PADCMD?
Read command reports the state of all the five contexts, in the format:
#SGACTCFGEXT: <cid1>,< abortAttemptEnable1 >,0,0,0<CR><LF>
…
#SGACTCFGEXT: <cid5>,< abortAttemptEnable5 >,0,0,0<CR><LF>
where:
<cidn> - as <cid> before
< abortAttemptEnable n> - as < abortAttemptEnable > before
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#PADCMD=?
Test command reports supported range of values for all parameters
5.1.6.6.26. PAD forward character - #PADFWD
#PADCMD – PAD command features
AT#PADFWD=<char>
[,<mode>]
SELINT 2
This command sets the char that immediately flushes pending data to
socket, opened with AT#SD command.
Parameters:
<char>:
a number, from 0 to 255, that specifies the asci code of the char used to
flush data
<mode>:
flush mode,
0 – normal mode (default);
1 – reserved;
Note: use AT#PADCMD to enable the socket char-flush activity.
AT#PADFWD?
Read command reports the currently selected <char> and <mode> in the
format:
#PADFWD: <char>,mode
AT#PADFWD=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<char> and <mode>.
5.1.6.6.27. Base64 encoding/decoding of socket sent/received data - #BASE64
#BASE64 – Base64 encoding/decoding of socket sent/received data
AT#BASE64=
<connId>,<enc>,<dec>
[,<unused_B >
[,<unused_C >]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command enables base64 encoding and/or decoding of data
sent/received to/from the socket in online or in command mode.
Parameters:
Page 317 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#BASE64 – Base64 encoding/decoding of socket sent/received data
<connId> - socket connection identifier
1..6
SELINT 2
<enc>
0 – no encoding of data received from serial port.
1 - MIME RFC2045 base64 encoding of data received from serial port that
have to be sent to <connId> socket.
Note: as indicated from RFC2045 the encoded output stream is represented
in lines of no more than 76 characters each.
Lines are defined as sequences of octets separated by a CRLF sequence.
2 - RFC 3548 base64 encoding of data received from serial port that have
to be sent to <connId> socket.
Note: as indicated from RFC3548 CRLF have not to be added.
<dec>
0 – no decoding of data received from socket <connId>.
1 - MIME RFC2045 base64 decoding of data received from socket
<connId> and sent to serial port.
(Same rule as for <enc> regarding line feeds in the received file that has to
be decoded)
2 - RFC3548 base64 decoding of data received from socket <connId> and
sent to serial port.
(Same rule as for <enc> regarding line feeds in the
received file that has to be decoded)
Note: it is possible to use command to change current <enc>/<dec>
settings for a socket already opened in command mode or in online mode
after suspending it.
(In this last case obviously it is necessary to set AT#SKIPESC=1).
Note: to use #BASE64 in command mode, if data to send exceed maximum
value for #SSENDEXT command, they have to be divided in multiple parts.
These parts have to be a multiple of 57 bytes, except for the last one, to
distinguish EOF condition.
(Base64 encoding rules)
For the same reason if #SRECV command is used by the application to
receive data, a multiple of 78 bytes has to be considered.
Note: to use #SRECV to receive data with <dec> enabled, it is necessary to
consider that:
reading <maxByte> bytes from socket, user will get less due
to decoding that is performed.
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#BASE64?
Read command returns the current <enc>/<dec> settings for all the six
sockets, in the format:
#BASE64:<connId1><enc1>,<dec1>,0,0<CR><LF>
...
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 318 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#BASE64 – Base64 encoding/decoding of socket sent/received data
#BASE64:<connId6>,<enc6>,<dec6>,0,0<CR><LF>
SELINT 2
AT#BASE64=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the
subparameters.
Example
AT#SKIPESC=1
OK
AT#SD=<connId>,<txProt>,<rPort>,<IPaddr>
CONNECT
//Data sent without modifications(default)
………
+++ (suspension)
OK
at#base64=<connId>,1,0
OK
AT#SO=<connId>
CONNECT
// Data received from serial port are encoded
// base64 before to be sent on the socket
………………
+++ (suspension)
OK
at#base64=<connId>,0,1
OK
AT#SO=<connId>
CONNECT
// Data received from socket are decoded
// base64 before to be sent on the serial port
+++ (suspension)
…………………
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 319 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.7.
5.1.6.7.1.
SSL Commands
Open a socket SSL to a remote server - #SSLD
#SSLD – Opens a socket SSL to a remote server
AT#SSLD=<SSId>,
<rPort>,<IPAddress>,
<ClosureType>[,
<connMode>[,
<Timeout>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command opens a remote connection via socket secured through
SSL. Both command and online modes can be used.
In the first case ‘OK’ is printed on success, and data exchange can be
performed by means of #SSLSEND and #SSLRECV commands.
In online mode ‘CONNECT’ message is printed, and data can be
sent/received directly to/by the serial port. Communication can be
suspended by issuing the escape sequence (by default +++) and restored
with #SSLO command.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket
<rPort> - Remote TCP port to contact
1..65535
<IPAddress> address of the remote host, string type. This parameter
can be either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
any host name to be solved with a DNS query
<ClosureType> 0 – only value 0 supported
<connMode> - connection mode
0 – online mode connection.
1 – command mode connection (factory default).
<Timeout> - time-out in 100 ms units. It represents the maximum allowed
TCP inter-packet delay. It means that, when more data is expected during
the handshake, the module awaits <Timeout> * 100 msecs for the next
packet. If no more data can be read, the module gives up the handshake
and raises an ERROR response.
Note: IT’S NOT the total handshake timeout or, in other words, it’s not the
absolute maximum time between the #SSLD issue and the
CONNECT/OK/ERROR response. Though by changing this parameter you
can limit the handshake duration (for example in case of congested network
or busy server), there’s no way to be sure to get the command response
within a certain amount of time, because it depends on the TCP connection
time, the handshake time and the computation time (which depends on the
authentication mode and on the size of keys and certificates).
10..5000 - hundreds of ms (factory default is 100)
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 320 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLD – Opens a socket SSL to a remote server
SELINT 2
Note: if timeout is not set for SSL connection the default timeout value, set
by AT#SSLCFG, is used.
Note: in online mode the socket is closed after an inactivity period
(configurable with #SSLCFG, with a default value of 90 seconds), and the
‘NO CARRIER’ message is printed.
Note: in online mode data are transmitted as soon as the data packet size is
reached or as after a transmission timeout. Both these parameters are
configurable by using #SSLCFG.
Note: if there are input data arrived through a connected socket and not yet
read because the module entered command mode before reading them
(after an escape sequence or after #SSLD has been issued with
<connMode> set to command mode connection), these data are buffered
and we receive the SSLSRING URC (if any of its presentation formats have
been enabled by means the #SSLCFG command); it’s possible to read
these data afterwards issuing #SSLRECV. Under the same hypotheses it’s
possible to send data while in command mode issuing #SSLSEND.
Note: Before opening a SSL connection the GPRS context must have been
activated by AT#SGACT=x,1.
Note: Before opening a SSL connection, make sure to have stored the
needed secure data (CA certificate), using AT#SSLSECDATA.
Note: in case of CA Certificate already stored(for instance: SUPL), it could
be possible to avoid #SSLSECDATA command.
.
AT#SSLD=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters:
#SSLD: (1),(1-65535),,(0),(0,1),(10-5000)
.
5.1.6.7.2.
Enable a SSL socket - #SSLEN
#SSLEN – Enable a SSL socket
AT#SSLEN=<SSId>,
<Enable>
SELINT 2
This command enables a socket secured by SSL
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 – Until now SSL block manages only one socket
<Enable>
0 – deactivate secure socket [default]
1 – activate secure socket
Note: if secure socket is not enabled only test requests can be made for
every SSL command except #SSLS (SSL status) which can be issued also
if the socket is disabled.
Read commands can be issued if at least a <SSId> is enabled.
Note: these values are automatically saved in NVM.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 321 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLEN – Enable a SSL socket
SELINT 2
Note: a SSL socket cannot be disabled by issuing #SSLEN=1,0 if it is
connected.
AT#SSLEN?
Read command reports the currently enable status of secure socket in the
format:
#SSLEN: <SSId>,<Enable><CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
OK
AT#SSLEN=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the
parameters:
#SSLEN: (1),(0,1)
5.1.6.7.3.
Close a SSL socket - #SSLH
#SSLH – Close a SSL socket
AT#SSLH=<SSId>[,
<ClosureType>]
SELINT 2
This command allows closing the SSL connection.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket.
< ClosureType >:
0 – only value 0 is supported
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
AT#SSLH=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters:
#SSLH: (1),(0)
5.1.6.7.4.
Restore a SSL socket after a +++ - #SSLO
#SSLO – Restore a SSL socket after a +++
AT#SSLO=<SSId>
SELINT 2
This command allows to restore a SSL connection (online mode)
suspended by an escape sequence (+++). After the connection restore, the
CONNECT message is printed.
Please note that this is possible even if the connection has been started in
command mode (#SSLD with <connMode> parameter set to 1).
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket.
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 322 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLO – Restore a SSL socket after a +++
SELINT 2
- Note: Before opening a SSL connection the GPRS context must have
been activated by AT#SGACT=X,1.
- Note: if an error occur during reconnection the socket can not be
reconnected then a new connection has to be done.
AT#SSLO=?
5.1.6.7.5.
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters:
#SSLO: (1)
Read Data from a SSL socket - #SSLRECV
#SSLRECV – Read data from a SSL socket
AT#SSLRECV=<SSId>,
<MaxNumByte>
[,<TimeOut>]
SELINT 2
This command allows receiving data arrived through a connected secure
socket, but buffered and not yet read because the module entered
command mode before reading them. The module can be notified of these
data by a SSLSRING URC, which enabling and presentation format
depends on last #SSLCFG setting.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket.
<MaxNumByte> - max number of bytes to read
1..1000
< Timeout > - time-out in 100 ms units
1..5000 - hundreds of ms (factory default is 100)
If no data are received the device respondes:
#SSLRECV: 0<CR><LF>
TIMEOUT<CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
OK
If the remote host closes the connection the device respondes:
#SSLRECV: 0<CR><LF>
DISCONNECTED<CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
OK
If data are received the device respondes:
#SSLRECV: NumByteRead<CR><LF>
...(Data read)... <CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
OK
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
Note: if timeout is not set for SSL connection the default timeout value, set
through AT#SSLCFG, is used.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 323 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLRECV – Read data from a SSL socket
SELINT 2
Note: before receiving data from the SSL connection it has to be
established using AT#SSLD
AT#SSLRECV=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters:
#SSLRECV: (1),(1-1000),(10-5000)
5.1.6.7.6.
Report the status of a SSL socket - #SSLS
#SSLS – Report the status of a SSL socket
AT#SSLS=<SSId>
SELINT 2
This command reports the status of secure sockets.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manages only one socket
If secure socket is connected the device responds to the command:
#SSLS: <SSId>,2,<CipherSuite>
otherwise:
#SSLS: <SSId>,<ConnectionStatus>
Where <CipherSuite> can be as follows:
0 - unknown
1 - TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
2 - TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
3 - TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
4 - TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_MD5
5 - TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
N - RFC value + 100
Note: for all other(i.e.: N) possible values,
<CipherSuite> is RFC value + 100
otherwise:
#SSLS: <SSId>,<ConnectionStatus>
<ConnectionStatus> available values are:
0 – Socket Disabled
1 – Connection closed
2 – Connection open
Note: this command can be issued even if the <SSId> is not enabled.
AT#SSLS=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
#SSLS: (1)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 324 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.7.7.
Manage the security data - #SSLSECDATA
#SSLSECDATA – Manage the security data
AT#SSLSECDATA
=<SSId>,<Action>,
<DataType>[,<Size>]
SELINT 2
This command allows to store, delete and read security data
(Certificate, CAcertificate, private key) into NVM.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manages only one socket.
<Action> - Action to do.
0 – Delete data from NVM.
1 – Store data into NVM.
2 – Read data from NVM .
<DataType>
0 – Certificate
1 – CA certificate
2 - RSA Private key
<Size> - Size of security data to be stored
1..4000
- If the <Action> parameter is 1 (store data into NVM) the device
responds to the command with the prompt ‘>’ and waits for the data to
store.
Note: secured data have to be in PEM or in DER format,
depending on < cert_format > chosen with #SSLSECCFG.
If no < cert_format> has been specified with #SSLSECCFG PEM format is
assumed.
PEM format(see #SSLSECCFG command):To complete the operation send
Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex); to exit without writing the message send ESC char
(0x1B hex).
DER format(see #SSLSECCFG command)::
When <size> bytes are entered, the certificate is automatically stored.
ESC or Ctrl-Z don’t take effect, because they are considered as possible
octets contained in the certificate.
If data are successfully stored, then the response is OK; if it fails for some
reason, an error code is reported.
If the <Action> parameter is 2 (read data from NVM), data specified by
<DataType> parameter is shown in the following format:
#SSLSECDATA: <connId>,<DataType>
<DATA>
OK
If <DataType> data has not been stored (or it has been deleted) the
response has the following format:
#SSLSECDATA: <connId>,<DataType>
No data stored
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 325 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLSECDATA – Manage the security data
SELINT 2
OK
Note: <size> parameter is mandatory if the <write> action is issued, but it
has to be omitted for <delete> or <read> actions are issued.
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
Note: If socket is connected an error code is reported.
Note: in case of CA Certificate already stored(for instance: SUPL), it could
be possible to avoid #SSLSECDATA command.
AT#SSLSECDATA?
Read command reports what security data are stored in the format:
#SSLSECDATA: <SSId 1>,<CertIsSet>,<CAcertIsSet>,<PrivKeyIsSet>
<CertIsSet>, <CAcertIsSet>, <PrivKeyIsset> are 1 if related data
are stored into NVM otherwise 0.
AT#SSLSECDATA=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters:
#SSLSECDATA: (1),(0-2), ,(0-2),(1-4000)
5.1.6.7.8.
Send data through a SSL socket - #SSLSEND
#SSLSEND – Send data through a SSL socket
AT#SSLSEND=<SSId>[,
< Timeout >]
SELINT 2
This command allows sending data through a secure socket.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket.
< Timeout > - socket send timeout, in 100 ms units.
1..5000 - hundreds of ms (factory default is 100)
The device responds to the command with the prompt ‘>’ and waits for the
data to send.
To complete the operation send Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex); to exit without
writing the message send ESC char (0x1B hex).
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported
Note: the maximum number of bytes to send is 1023; trying to send more
data will cause the surplus to be discarded and lost.
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 326 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLSEND – Send data through a SSL socket
SELINT 2
Note: if timeout is not set for SSL connection the default timeout value, set
by AT#SSLCFG, is used.
Note: Before sending data through the SSL connection it has to be
established using AT#SSLD.
AT#SSLSEND=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters:
#SSLSEND: (1),(1-5000)
5.1.6.7.9.
Send data through a secure sockect in Command Mode - #SSLSENDEXT
#SSLSENDEXT – Send data through a secure socket in Command Mode extended SELINT 2
AT#SSLSENDEXT=
<SSId>,<bytestosend>[,
<Timeout>]
This command allows sending data through a secure socket.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket.
<bytestosend> - number of bytes to be sent
Please refer to test command for range
<Timeout> - time-out in 100 ms units
1..5000 - hundreds of ms (factory default is 100)
The device responds to the command with the prompt ‘>’
<greater_than><space> and waits for the data to send.
When <bytestosend> bytes have been sent, operation is automatically
completed.
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using AT#SSLEN only test requests
can be made.
Note: if timeout is not set for SSL connection the default timeout value, set
by AT#SSLCFG, is used.
- Note: Before sending data through the SSL connection it has to be
established using AT#SSLD.
- Note: all special characters are sent like a generic byte.
(For instance: 0x08 is simply sent through the socket and don’t behave like
a BS, i.e. previous character is not deleted).
AT#SSLSENDEXT=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameters
<SSId> , <bytestosend> and <Timeout>.
#SSLSENDEXT: (1),(1-1500),(1-5000)
Example
Open the socket in command mode:
at#ssld=1,443,<port>,"IP address",0,1
OK
Give the command specifying total number of bytes as second parameter:
at#sslsendext=1,256,100
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 327 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLSENDEXT – Send data through a secure socket in Command Mode extended SELINT 2
5.1.6.7.10. Configure security parameters of a SSL socket - #SSLSECCFG
#SSLSECCFG – Configure security parameters of a SSL socket
AT#SSLSECCFG=
<SSId>,
<CipherSuite>,
<auth_mode>
[,<cert_format>]
SELINT 2
This command allows configuring SSL connection parameters.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manage only one socket
<CipherSuite>
0 - Chiper Suite is chosen by remote Server [default]
1 - TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
2 - TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
3 - TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
4 - TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA
5 - TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
Note: when o value is chosen, cipher suites supported
are indicated to the server within TLS handshake
(i.e.: client hello) as follows:
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
Note: TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA is not included as default(0),
but it is possible to set it(4) if required.
<auth_mode>
0 – SSL Verify None[default]
1 – Manage server authentication
2 – Manage server and client authentication if requested by the remote
server
<cert_format> is an optional parameter. It selects the format of the
certificate to be stored via #SSLSECDATA command
0 - DER format
1 - PEM format[default]
Note - it is supposed that the module is just powered on and the
AT#SSLSECCFG command is entered without <cert_format> parameter,
the default format is PEM. In this case the AT#SSLSECCFG? read
command doesn’t return the setting of the format in order to meet retro
compatibility with other families. Now, let’s assume that AT#SSLSECCFG
command is entered again, but using the <cert_format> parameter for the
first time: if the read command is entered, it reports the parameter value just
used. If subsequently the <cert_format> is omitted, the AT#SSLSECCFG?
read command reports the parameter value entered the last time.
Note: Server CAcertificate has to be stored through AT#SSLSECDATA.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 328 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLSECCFG – Configure security parameters of a SSL socket
SELINT 2
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using #SSLEN only test requests can
be made. Read command can be issued if at least a <SSId> is enabled.
Note: these values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#SSLSECCFG?
Read command reports the currently selected parameters in the format:
#SSLSECCFG: <SSId1>,<CipherSuite>,<auth_mode>[,<cert_format>]
AT#SSLSECCFG=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
5.1.6.7.11. Configure additional parameters of a SSL socket - #SSLSECCFG2
#SSLSECCFG2 – Configure additional parameters of a SSL socket
AT#SSLSECCFG2=
<SSId>,
<version>
[,<unused_A>
[,<unused_B>
[,<unused_C>
[,<unused_D>]]]]
SELINT 2
This command allows configuring additional SSL connection parameters.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 – Until now SSL block manage only one socket
<version> - SSL/TLS protocol version
(default is 1, i.e.: TLSv1.0)
0 – protocol version SSLv3
1 – protocol version TLSv1.0
2 – protocol version TLSv1.1
3 – protocol version TLSv1.2
Note: parameter is automatically saved in NVM
AT#SSLSECCFG2?
Read command reports the currently selected parameters in the format:
#SSLSECCFG2: <SSId>,<version>,0,0,0,0
AT#SSLSECCFG2=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for all the parameters
5.1.6.7.12. Configure general parameters of a SSL socket - #SSLCFG
#SSLCFG – Configure general parameters of a SSL socket
AT#SSLCFG=<SSId>,
<cid>,<pktSz>,
<maxTo>,
<defTo>,<txTo>[,
<sslSRingMode >[,
<noCarrierMode >[,
<UNUSED_1>[,
<UNUSED_2>]]]]
SELINT 2
This command allows configuring SSL connection parameters.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manages only one socket
<cid> - PDP Context Identifier. Dummy.
The PDP context used by SSL is specified in AT#PROTOCOLCFG (see)
<pktSz> - packet size to be used by the SSL/TCP/IP stack for data
sending.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 329 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLCFG – Configure general parameters of a SSL socket
0 - select automatically default value (300).
1..1500 - packet size in bytes.
SELINT 2
<maxTo> - exchange timeout (or socket inactivity timeout); in online mode,
if there’s no data exchange within this timeout period the connection is
closed.
0 - no timeout
1..65535 - timeout value in seconds (default 90 s.)
<defTo> - Timeout that will be used by default whenever the corresponding
parameter of each command is not set.
10…5000 - Timeout in tenth of seconds (default 100).
<txTo> - data sending timeout; in online mode after this period data are
sent also if they’re less than max packet size.
0 - no timeout
1..255 - timeout value in hundreds of milliseconds (default 50).
<sslSRingMode> - sslSRing unsolicited mode.
0 – SSLSRING disabled
1 – SSLSRING enabled in the format
SSLSRING: <SSId>,<recData>
where <SSId> is the secure socket identifier and <recData> is the amount
of data received and decoded by the SSL socket.
A new unsolicited is sent whenever the amount of data ready to be read
changes. Only a record is decoded at once so, any further record is
received and decoded only after the first have been read by the user by
means of the #SSLRECV command.
2 – SSLSRING enabled in the format
SSLSRING: <SSId>,<dataLen>,<data>
where <SSId> is the secure socket identifier, <dataLen> is the length of the
current chunk of data (the minimum value between the available bytes and
1300) and <data> is data received (<dataLen> bytes) displayed in ASCII
format.
<noCarrierMode> - this parameter permits to choose NO CARRIER
indication format when the secure socket is closed as follows:
0 – NO CARRIER
(default)
Indication is sent as usual, without additional information
1 – NO CARRIER:SSL,<SSId>
Indication of current <SSId> secure socket connection is added. The fixed
“SSL” string allows the user to distinguish secure sockets from TCP sockets
2 – NO CARRIER:SSL,<SSId>,<cause>
Indication of current <SSId> secure socket connection and closure
<cause> are added.
Following the possible <cause> values are listed:
0 – not available (secure socket has not yet been closed
1 – the remote TCP connection has been closed ( RST, or any fatal error in
send/recv are all included within this case)
2 – socket inactivity timeout
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 330 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SSLCFG – Configure general parameters of a SSL socket
SELINT 2
3 – network deactivation (PDP context deactivation from network)
4 – SSL “Close Notify Alert” message has been received
5 – the remote TCP connection has been closed(FIN)
after all data have been retrieved from socket
6 – Closure due to any other SSL alert different from the previous ones.
Note: if secure socket is not enabled using #SSLEN only test requests can
be made. Read command can be issued if at least a <SSId> is enabled.
Note: these parameters cannot be changed if the secure socket is
connected.
Note: these values are automatically saved in NVM
AT#SSLCFG?
Read command reports the currently selected parameters in the format:
#SSLCFG:
<SSId1>,<cid>,<pktSz>,<maxTo>,<defTo><txTo>,<sslSRingMode>,<no
CarrierMode>,0,0
AT#SSLCFG=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
#SSLCFG: (1),(1),(0-1500),(0-65535),(10-5000),(0-255),(0-2),(0-2),(0),(0)
5.1.6.7.13. Configure application SSL parameters - #APPSSLCFG
#APPSSLCFG - Configure application SSL parameters
AT#APPSSLCFG=
<appName>
[,<CipherSuite>,
<SecLevel>,
<TLSVer>]
SELINT 2
This command allows the configuration of the security parameters of the
applications supported by the module.
It also allows the addition, the configuration and the deletion of the same set of
SSL parameters used by custom applications from AppZone.
Configuration of existing applications and addition of new ones are done by
specifying all the parameters. Deletion of custom entries are performed by
sending only <appName> parameter.
<appName> - A string containing the name of the application which SSL
parameters need to be configured.
Configuration: if the string matches an entry already present in the
applications list, and all the parameters of the command are defined, the
corresponding security parameters will be changed. The string comparison
is case insensitive. Addition: if the string is not present in the current list of
applications, a new entry is created. The application name can contain only
alphanumeric parameters, stored in upper case, and the maximum allowed
length is 8. All the parameters are mandatory.
Deletion: if the string matches an entry already present in the applications
list and only this parameter is set, the corresponding entry is deleted.
Note: five slots are totally available for applications parameters. Any
attempt to add further entries raises an error.
Note: native applications cannot be deleted. Any attempt to delete them
raises an error.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 331 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#APPSSLCFG - Configure application SSL parameters
SELINT 2
<CipherSuite> - Cipher suite used in the secure connection (default may be
different for any native application)
0 - Cipher Suite is chosen by remote Server
1 - TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
2 - TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
3 - TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
4 - TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_SHA
5 - TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
<SecLevel> - Security level (default may be different for any native
application)
0 – SSL Verify None
1 – Manage server authentication
<TLSVer> - SSL/TLS protocol version used by the current application
(default may be different for any native application)
0 – protocol version SSLv3
1 – protocol version TLSv1.0
2 – protocol version TLSv1.1
3 – protocol version TLSv1.2
AT#APPSSLCFG?
Read command reports the currently selected parameters for each configured
application in the format:
#APPSSLCFG: “app 1”,<CipherSuite 1>,<SecLevel 1>,<TLSVer N>
…
#APPSSLCFG: “app N”,<CipherSuite N>,<SecLevel N>,<TLSVer N>
AT#APPSSLCFG=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
Depending on the number of applications defined, the <appName> parameter
range has two different formats: it shows either the list of all defined application
names, if the memory is full, or the maximum permitted length for any new
application name (8), if the memory is not full.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 332 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.7.14. Secure Socket Info - #SSLI
#SSLI – Secure Socket Info
AT#SSLI[=<SSId>]
SELINT 2
Execution command is used to get information about secure socket data
traffic.
Parameters:
<SSId> - Secure Socket Identifier
1 - Until now SSL block manages only one socket
The response format is:
#SSLI:
<SSId>,<DataSent>,<DataRecv>,<PendingData>,<TCPConnWaitingAck
>
where:
<SSId> - secure socket connection identifier, as before
<DataSent> - total amount(in bytes) of data sent to the TLS/SSL
connection since the beginning of the connection itself
(obviously: not yet encoded into TLS/SSL record)
<DataRecv> - total number of bytes received from the TLS/SSL connection
since
the beginning of the connection itself
(obviously: already decoded from TLS/SSL record)
<PendingData> - number of bytes available to be read from the TLS/SSL
record that is currently being processed
(obviously: already decoded from TLS/SSL record)
<TCPConnWaitingAck> - indication of the underlying TCP socket
condition, if there are TCP/IP packets sent but not yet acknowledged or not
0 – no TCP/IP packets sent waiting for ack
1 – yes TCP/IP packets sent waiting for ack
AT#SSLI=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
#SSLI: (1)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 333 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.
FTP AT Commands
5.1.6.8.1.
FTP Time-Out - #FTPTO
#FTPTO - FTP Time-Out
AT#FTPTO=
[<tout>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the time-out used when opening either the FTP control
channel or the FTP traffic channel.
Parameter:
<tout> - time-out in 100 ms units
100..5000 - hundreds of ms (factory default is 100)
Note: The parameter is not saved in NVM.
AT#FTPTO?
Read command returns the current FTP operations time-out, in the format:
#FTPTO: <tout>
AT#FTPTO=?
5.1.6.8.2.
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <tout>
FTP Open - #FTPOPEN
#FTPOPEN - FTP Open
AT#FTPOPEN=
[<server:port>,
<username>,
<password>[,
<mode>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command opens an FTP connection toward the FTP server.
Parameters:
<server:port> - string type, address and port of FTP server (factory default port
21).
<username> - string type, authentication user identification string for FTP.
<password> - string type, authentication password for FTP.
<mode>
0 - active mode (factory default)
1 - passive mode
Note: Before opening an FTP connection the PDP context ( or GSM context )
must have been activated by AT#SGACT=x,1 command.
The context ‘x’ is the one used by FTP, as specified in AT#PROTOCOLCFG
(see).
AT#FTPOPEN=?
5.1.6.8.3.
Test command returns the OK result code.
FTP Close - #FTPCLOSE
#FTPCLOSE - FTP Close
SELINT 2
AT#FTPCLOSE
Execution command closes an FTP connection.
AT#FTPCLOSE=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 334 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.4.
FTP Config - #FTPCFG
#FTPCFG – description
SELINT 2
AT#FTPCFG=<tout>,<IPPignor <tout> - time-out in 100 ms units
ing>[,<FTPSEn>]
100..5000 - hundreds of ms (factory default is 100)
Set command sets the time-out used when opening either the FTP
control channel or the FTP traffic channel.
Note: The parameter is not saved in NVM.
<IPPignoring>
0: No IP Private ignoring. During a FTP passive mode connection client
uses the IP address received from server, even if it is a private IPV4
address.
1: IP Private ignoring enabled. During a FTP passive mode connection
if the server sends a private IPV4 address the client doesn’t consider
this and connects with server using the IP address used in
AT#FTPOPEN.
[,<FTPSEn>]
0 – Disable FTPS security: all FTP commands will perform plain FTP
connections.
1 – Enable FTPS security: from now on any FTP session opened
through FTP commands will be compliant to FTPS protocol, providing
authentication and encrypted communication.
Note: in FTPS mode, FTP commands response time is generally
bigger than in normal FTP mode. This latency is mainly due to the SSL
handshake that has to be done at the opening of the FTP session
(#FTPOPEN) and whenever a data exchange is required (#FTPPUT,
#FTPGET etcetera).
- Note: FTP security cannot be enabled if an SSL socket has been
activated by means of #SSLD or #SSLFASTD. Moreover, trying to
dial an SSL socket when <enable>=1 raises an error.
- Note: any <enable> change is forbidden during an open FTP
connection (with or without security). Furthermore, SSL
configuration settings are forbidden during FTPS connections
AT#FTPCFG?
Read command reports the currently selected parameters in the
format:
#FTPCFG: <tout>,<IPPignoring>,<FTPSEn>
AT+FTPCFG=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter(s)
<tout>,<IPPignoring> and <FTPSEn>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 335 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.5.
FTP Put - #FTPPUT
#FTPPUT - FTP Put
AT#FTPPUT=
[[<filename>],
[<connMode>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, opens a data
connection and starts sending <filename> file to the FTP server.
If the data connection succeeds, a CONNECT indication is sent.
afterward a NO CARRIER indication is sent when the socket is closed.
Note: if we set <connMode> to 1, the data connection is openedand we remain
in command mode and we see the result code OK
(instead of CONNECT)
Parameters:
<filename> - string type, name of the file (maximum length 200 characters)
<connMode>
0 - online mode
1 – command mode
Note: use the escape sequence +++ to close the data connection.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
AT#FTPPUT=?
Test command reports the maximum length of <filename> and the supported
range of values of <connMode>. The format is:
#FTPPUT: <length>, (list of supported <connMode>s)
where:
<length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of <filename>
5.1.6.8.6.
FTP Get - #FTPGET
#FTPGET - FTP Get
AT#FTPGET=
[<filename>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, opens a data
connection and starts getting a file from the FTP server.
If the data connection succeeds a CONNECT indication is sent.
The file is received on the serial port.
Parameter:
<filename> - file name, string type.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned in case no
FTP connection has been opened yet.
Note: Command closure should always be handled by application. In
order to avoid download stall situations a timeout should be implemented
by the application.
AT#FTPGET=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the OK result code.
Page 336 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.7.
FTP GET in command mode - #FTPGETPKT
#FTPGETPKT - FTP Get in command mode
AT#FTPGETPKT=
<filename>
[,<viewMode>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, opens a data
connection and starts getting a file from the FTP server while remaining in
command mode.
The data port is opened and we remain in command mode and we see the
result code OK.
Retrieval from FTP server of “remotefile” is started, but data are only buffered
in the module.
It’s possible to read data afterwards issuing #FTPRECV command
Parameters:
<filename> - file name, string type. (maximum length: 200 characters).
<viewMode> - permit to choose view mode
(text format or Hexadecimal)
0 – text format (default)
1 – hexadecimal format
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned in case
no FTP connection has been opened yet.
Note: Command closure should always be handled by application. In order to
avoid download stall situations a timeout should be implemented by the
application.
AT#FTPGETPKT?
Read command reports current download state for <filename> with
<viewMode> chosen, in the format:
#FTPGETPKT: <remotefile>,<viewMode>,<eof>
<eof> 0 = file currently being transferred
1 = complete file has been transferred to FTP client
AT#FTPGETPKT=?
5.1.6.8.8.
Test command returns the OK result code.
FTP Type - #FTPTYPE
#FTPTYPE - FTP Type
AT#FTPTYPE=
[<type>]
SELINT 2
Set command, issued during an FTP connection, sets the file transfer type.
Parameter:
<type> - file transfer type:
0 - binary
1 - ascii
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
#FTPTYPE?
Read command returns the current file transfer type, in the format:
#FTPTYPE: <type>
#FTPTYPE=?
Test command returns the range of available values for parameter <type>:
#FTPTYPE: (0,1)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 337 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.9.
FTP Read Message - #FTPMSG
#FTPMSG - FTP Read Message
SELINT 2
AT#FTPMSG
Execution command returns the last response from the server.
AT#FTPMSG=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.8.10. FTP Delete - #FTPDELE
#FTPDELE - FTP Delete
AT#FTPDELE=
[<filename>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, deletes a file from the
remote working directory.
Parameter:
<filename> - string type, it’s the name of the file to delete.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
Note: In case of delayed server response, it is necessary to check if ERROR
indication is temporary due to timing out while waiting.
In this case #FTPMSG response will result temporary empty.
(Checking later #FTPMSG response will match with delayed server response)
AT#FTPDELE=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.8.11. FTP Print Working Directory - #FTPPWD
#FTPPWD - FTP Print Working Directory
AT#FTPPWD
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, shows the current
working directory on FTP server.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
AT#FTPPWD=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.8.12. FTP Change Working Directory - #FTPCWD
#FTPCWD - FTP Change Working Directory
AT#FTPCWD=
[<dirname>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, changes the working
directory on FTP server.
Parameter:
<dirname> - string type, it’s the name of the new working directory.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
AT#FTPCWD=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the OK result code.
Page 338 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.13. FTP List - #FTPLIST
#FTPLIST - FTP List
AT#FTPLIST[=
[<name>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, opens a data connection
and starts getting from the server the list of contents of the specified directory or
the properties of the specified file.
Parameter:
<name> - string type, it’s the name of the directory or file.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
Note: issuing AT#FTPLIST<CR> opens a data connection and starts getting from
the server the list of contents of the working directory.
AT#FTPLIST=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.8.14. Get file size - #FTPFSIZE
#FTPFSIZE – Get file size from FTP server
AT#FTPFSIZE=
<filename>
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, permits to get file size of
<filename> file.
Note:
FTPTYPE=0 command has to be issued before FTPFSIZE command, to set file
transfer type to binary mode.
AT# FTPFSIZE=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.8.15. FTP Append - #FTPAPP
#FTPAPP - FTP Append
AT#FTPAPP=
[[<filename>],
connMode>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during an FTP connection, opens a data connection
and append data to existing <filename> file.
If the data connection succeeds, a CONNECT indication is sent, afterward a NO
CARRIER indication is sent when the socket is closed.
Note: if we set <connMode> to 1, the data connection is openedand we remain in
command mode and we see the result code OK
(instead of CONNECT)
Parameter:
<filename> - string type, name of the file.
<connMode>
0 - online mode
1 – command mode
Note: use the escape sequence +++ to close the data connection.
Note: The command causes an ERROR result code to be returned if no FTP
connection has been opened yet.
AT#FTPAPP=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the maximum length of <filename> and the supported
range of values of <connMode>. The format is:
Page 339 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FTPAPP - FTP Append
SELINT 2
#FTPAPP: <length>, (list of supported <connMode>s)
where:
<length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of <filename>
5.1.6.8.16. Set restart position - # FTPREST
#FTPREST – Set restart position for FTP GET
AT#FTPREST=
<restartposition>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the restart position for successive FTPGET
(or FTPGETPKT) command.
It permits to restart a previously interrupted FTP download from
the selected position in byte.
Parameter:
<restartposition> position in byte of restarting for successive FTPGET (or
FTPGETPKT)
Note:
It’s necessary to issue FTPTYPE=0 before successive FTPGET
(or FTPGETPKT command) to set binary file transfer type.
Note:
Setting <restartposition> has effect on successive FTP download.
After successive successfully initiated FTPGET(or FTPGETPKT) command
<restartposition> is automatically reset.
Note: value set for <restartposition> has effect on next data transfer(data port
opened by FTPGET or FTPGETPKT).
Then <restartposition> value is automatically assigned to 0 for next download.
AT#FTPREST?
Read command returns the current <restartposition>
#FTPREST: <restartposition>
AT#FTPREST=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the OK result code.
Page 340 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.17. Receive Data In Command Mode - #FTPRECV
#FTPRECV – Receive Data In Command Mode
AT#FTPRECV=
<blocksize>
SELINT 2
Execution command permits the user to transfer at most <blocksize> bytes of
remote file, provided that retrieving from the FTP server has been started with
a previous #FTPGETPKT command, onto the serial port.
This number is limited to the current number of bytes of the remote file which
have been transferred from the FTP server.
Parameters:
< blocksize > - max number of bytes to read
1..3000
Note: it’s necessary to have previously opened FTP data port and started
download and buffering of remote file through #FTPGETPKT command
Note: issuing #FTPRECV when there’s no FTP data port opened
raises an error.
Note: data port will stay opened if socket is temporary waiting to receive
data(FTPRECV returns 0 and FTPGETPKT gives a EOF 0 indication).
AT#FTPRECV?
Read command reports the number of bytes currently received from FTP server,
in the format:
#FTPRECV: <available>
AT#FTPRECV=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for
<blocksize> parameter.
Example
AT#FTPRECV?
#FTPRECV: 3000
OK
Read required part of the buffered data:
AT#FTPRECV=400
#FTPRECV: 400
Text row number 1
Text row number 2
Text row number 3
Text row number 4
Text row number 5
Text row number 6
Text row number 7
Text row number 8
* 1111111111111111111111111 *
* 2222222222222222222222222 *
* 3333333333333333333333333 *
* 4444444444444444444444444 *
* 5555555555555555555555555 *
* 6666666666666666666666666 *
* 7777777777777777777777777 *
* 88888888888888888888
OK
AT#FTPRECV =200
#FTPRECV: 200
88888 *
Text row number 9 * 9999999999999999999999999 *
Text row number 10 * AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA *
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 341 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FTPRECV – Receive Data In Command Mode
Text row number 12 * BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB *
Text row number 13 * CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
SELINT 2
OK
Note: to check when you have received complete file it’s possible to use
AT#FTPGETPKT read command:
AT#FTPGETPKT?
#FTPGETPKT: sample.txt,0,1
OK
(you will get <eof> set to 1)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 342 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.8.18. FTPAPPEXT - #FTPAPPEXT
#FTPAPPEXT –
AT#FTPAPPEXT=
<bytestosend>[,< eof >]
SELINT 2
This command permits to send data on a FTP data port while
the module is in command mode.
FTP data port has to be previously opened through #FTPPUT
(or #FTPAPP) with <connMode> parameter set to command mode
connection.
Parameters:
< bytestosend > - number of bytes to be sent
1..1500
<eof> - data port closure
0 – normal sending of data chunk
1 – close data port after sending data chunk
The device responds to the command with the prompt
<greater_than><space> and waits for the data to send.
When <bytestosend> bytes have been sent, operation is
automatically completed.
If (all or part of the) data are successfully sent, then
the response is:
#FTPAPPEXT: <sentbytes>
OK
Where <sentbytes> are the number of sent bytes.
Note: <sentbytes> could be less than <bytestosend>
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code
is reported.
AT#FTPAPPEXT=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<bytestosend> and <eof>
Example
AT#FTPOPEN=”IP”,username,password
OK
AT#FTPPUT=<filename>,1 -> the new param 1 means that we open
the connection in
command mode
OK
// Here data socket will stay opened, but interface will be
//available(command mode)
AT#FTPAPPEXT=Size
>… write here the binary data. As soon Size byte are written, data are
sent and OK is returned
#FTPAPPEXT: <SentBytes>
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 343 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
………
// Last #FTPAPPEXT will close the data socket, because
// second(optional) parameter has this meaning:
AT#FTPAPPEXT=Size,1
>…write here the binary data. As soon Size byte are written, data are
sent and OK is returned
#FTPAPPEXT: <SentBytes>
OK
// If the user has to reopen the data port to send another
// (or append to the same) file, he can restart with the
// FTPPUT(or FTPAPP.)
//Then FTPAPPEXT,… to send the data chunks on the //reopened data
port.
// Note: if while sending the chunks the data port is closed
// from remote, user will be aware of it because #FTPAPPEXT // will
indicate ERROR and cause (available if previously //issued the
command AT+CMEE=2) will indicate that
//socket has been closed.
// Also in this case obviously, data port will have to be //reopened with
FTPPUT and so on…(same sequence)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 344 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.9.
Enhanced IP Easy Extension AT Commands
5.1.6.9.1.
Query DNS - #QDNS
#QDNS - Query DNS
AT#QDNS=
[<host name>]
SELINT 2
Execution command executes a DNS query to solve the host name into an IP
address.
Parameter:
<host name> - host name, string type.
If the DNS query is successful then the IP address will be reported in the result
code, as follows:
#QDNS: <host name>,<IP address>
where
<host name> - string type
<IP address> - string type, in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
Note: the command has to activate the context if it was not previously activated.
In this case the context is deactivated after the DNS query.
AT#QDNS=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Note
This command requires that the authentication parameters are correctly set and
that the network is present.
Note
This command is available only on the first AT instance (see AT#PORTCFG) or
on the first virtual port of CMUX and works on the PDN connection 1 and on the
first ConnId ( see AT#SCFG )
5.1.6.9.2.
DNS Response Caching - #CACHEDNS
#CACHEDNS – DNS Response Caching
AT#CACHEDNS=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables caching a mapping of domain names to IP addresses, as
does a resolver library.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - caching disabled; it cleans the cache too
1 - caching enabled
Note: the validity period of each cached entry (i.e. how long a DNS response
remains valid) is determined by a value called the Time To Live (TTL), set by
the administrator of the DNS server handing out the response.
Note: If the cache is full (8 elements) and a new IP address is resolved, an
element is deleted from the cache: the one that has not been used for the
longest time.
Note: it is recommended to clean the cache, if command +CCLK has been
issued while the DNS Response Caching was enabled.
AT#CACHEDNS?
Read command reports whether the DNS Response Caching is currently
enabled or not, in the format:
#CACHEDNS: <mode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 345 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#CACHEDNS – DNS Response Caching
AT#CACHEDNS=?
SELINT 2
Test command returns the currently cached mapping along with the range of
available values for parameter <mode>, in the format:
#CACHEDNS: [<hostn1>,<IPaddr1>,[…,[<hostnn>,<IPaddrn>,]]](0,1)
where:
<hostnn> - hostname, string type
<IPaddrn> - IP address, string type, in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
5.1.6.9.3.
Manual DNS Selection - #DNS
#DNS – Manual DNS Selection
AT#DNS=<cid>,
<primary>,
<secondary>
SELINT 2
Set command allows to manually set primary and secondary DNS servers either
for a PDP context defined by +CGDCONT
Parameters:
<cid> - context identifier
0 - specifies the GSM context
1.. max - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The value of max is returned by the Test command
<primary> - manual primary DNS server, string type, in the format
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” used for the specified cid; we’re using this value instead of
the primary DNS server come from the network (default is “0.0.0.0”)
<secondary> - manual secondary DNS server, string type, in the format
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” used for the specified cid; we’re using this value instead of
the secondary DNS server come from the network (default is “0.0.0.0”).
Note: if <primary> is ”0.0.0.0” and <secondary> is not “0.0.0.0”, then issuing
AT#DNS=… raises an error.
Note: if <primary> is ”0.0.0.0” we’re using the primary DNS server come from
the network as consequence of a context activation.
Note: if <primary> is not ”0.0.0.0” and <secondary> is “0.0.0.0”, then we’re
using only the manual primary DNS server.
Note: the context identified by <cid> has to be previously defined, elsewhere
issuing AT#DNS=… raises an error.
Note: issuing AT#DNS=… raises an error if the context identified by <cid> has
already been activated by AT commands.
AT#DNS?
Read command returns the manual DNS servers set either for every defined
PDP context and for the single GSM context (only if defined), in the format:
[#DNS: <cid>,<primary>,<secondary>[<CR><LF>
#DNS: <cid>,<primary>,<secondary>]]
AT#DNS=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the <cid>
parameter.only, in the format:
#DNS: (0-15),,
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 346 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.9.4.
Socket Listen Ring Indicator - #E2SLRI
#E2SLRI - Socket Listen Ring Indicator
AT#E2SLRI=[<n>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the Ring Indicator pin response to a Socket
Listen connect and, if enabled, the duration of the negative going pulse
generated on receipt of connect.
Parameter:
<n> - RI enabling
0 - RI disabled for Socket Listen connect (factory default)
50..1150 - RI enabled for Socket Listen connect; a negative going pulse is
generated on receipt of connect and <n> is the duration in ms of this pulse.
AT#E2SLRI?
Read command reports whether the Ring Indicator pin response to a Socket
Listen connect is currently enabled or not, in the format:
#E2SLRI: <n>
AT#E2SLRI=?
5.1.6.9.5.
Test command returns the allowed values for parameter <status>.
Firewall Setup - #FRWL
#FRWL - Firewall Setup
AT#FRWL=
[<action>,
<ip_address>,
<net mask>]
SELINT 2
Execution command controls the internal firewall settings.
Parameters:
<action> - command action
0 - remove selected chain
1 - add an ACCEPT chain
2 - remove all chains (DROP everything); <ip_addr> and <net_mask> has no
meaning in this case.
3 – enable firewall and save this setting in NVM
4 – disable firewall and save this setting in NVM (default)
<ip_addr> - remote address to be added into the ACCEPT chain; string type, it
can be any valid IP address in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
<net_mask> - mask to be applied on the <ip_addr>; string type, it can be any
valid IP address mask in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Command returns OK result code if successful.
Note: the firewall applies for incoming (listening) connections only.
When enabled, firewall general policy is DROP, therefore all packets that are
not included into an ACCEPT chain rule will be silently discarded.
When a packet comes from the IP address incoming_IP, the firewall chain rules
will be scanned for matching with the following criteria:
incoming_IP & <net_mask> = <ip_addr> & <net_mask>
If criteria is matched, then the packet is accepted and the rule scan is finished; if
criteria is not matched for any chain the packet is silently dropped.
AT#FRWL?
Read command reports the list of all ACCEPT chain rules registered in the
Firewall settings in the format:
#FRWL: <ip_addr>,<net_mask>,<status>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 347 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FRWL - Firewall Setup
#FRWL: <ip_addr>,<net_mask>,<status>
….
OK
SELINT 2
where:
<status> - firewall status
0 – not enabled (default)
1 - enabled
AT#FRWL=?
5.1.6.9.6.
Test command returns the allowed values for parameter <action>.
Firewall Setup for IPV6 addresses - #FRWLIPV6
#FRWLIPV6 - Firewall Setup for IPV6 addresses
AT#FRWLIPV6=
[<action>,
<ip_address>,
<net mask>]
SELINT 2
Execution command controls the internal firewall settings for IPV6 addresses.
Parameters:
<action> - command action
0 - remove selected chain
1 - add an ACCEPT chain
2 - remove all chains (DROP everything); <ip_addr> and <net_mask> has no
meaning in this case.
3 – enable firewall and save this setting in NVM
4 –disable firewall and save this setting in NVM (default)
<ip_addr> - remote address to be added into the ACCEPT chain; string type, it
can be any valid IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
or in the format yyyy:yyyy:yyyy:yyyy:yyyy: yyyy:yyyy:yyyy
<net_mask> - mask to be applied on the <ip_addr>; string type, it can be any
valid IP address mask in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
or in the format yyyy:yyyy:yyyy:yyyy:yyyy: yyyy:yyyy:yyyy
Command returns OK result code if successful.
Note: the firewall applies for incoming (listening) connections only.
When enabled, firewall general policy is DROP, therefore all packets that are
not included into an ACCEPT chain rule will be silently discarded.
When a packet comes from the IP address incoming_IP, the firewall chain rules
will be scanned for matching with the following criteria:
incoming_IP & <net_mask> = <ip_addr> & <net_mask>
If criteria is matched, then the packet is accepted and the rule scan is finished; if
criteria is not matched for any chain the packet is silently dropped.
AT#FRWLIPV6?
Read command reports the list of all ACCEPT chain rules registered in the
Firewall settings in the format:
#FRWLIPV6: <ip_addr>,<net_mask>,<status>
#FRWLIPV6: <ip_addr>,<net_mask>,<status>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 348 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#FRWLIPV6 - Firewall Setup for IPV6 addresses
….
OK
SELINT 2
where:
<status> - firewall status
0 – not enabled (default)
1 - enabled
AT#FRWLIPV6=?
5.1.6.9.7.
Test command returns the allowed values for parameter <action>.
Configure cid and IID parameters - #IIDIPV6
#IIDIPV6 – Configure cid and IID parameters
AT#IIDIPV6=<cid>,<II
D>
SELINT 2
This command permits to have a fixed IID in IPV6 address associated to a
certain cid
Parameters:
<cid> - Numeric parameter indicating the cid of the fixed IID.
<IID> - String parameter indicating the IID (IPv6 Interface Identifier). String type
can be any valid IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx or in
the format yyyy:yyyy:yyyy:yyyy.
If the <IID> is set 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0 for a certain <cid>, all the IPv6 address for that
<cid> is set by the network.
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#IIDIPV6?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined in the format:
#IIDIPV6: <cid>,<IID>
AT#IIDIPV6=?
Test command returns the supported range of parameter <cid> and the
maximum length of <IID>.
Example
Suppose to use the IID "1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8" on the cid 3
1) at#iidipv6=3,1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8
OK
2) set a socket to use the cid 3
at#scfg=2,3
OK
3) at#sgact=3,1
#SGACT: 254.128.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.106.53.29.248.1
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 349 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
4) open a socket listen or a dial with socket 2
at#sl=2,1,5555
5) verify the IID set by at#iidipv6 with at#ss
at#ss
#SS: 1,0
#SS: 2,4,"38.0.16.4.176.28.38.82.1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8",5555
#SS: 3,0
#SS: 4,0
#SS: 5,0
#SS: 6,0
OK
Known limitation:
After the at#sgact it is necessary to wait few seconds, in order to permit the
IPv6 Stateless Auto Configuration, before open a socket dial or listen.
5.1.6.9.8.
GPRS Data Volume - #GDATAVOL
#GDATAVOL - GPRS Data Volume
AT#GDATAVOL=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Execution command reports, for every active PDP context, the amount of data
the last GPRS session (and the last GSM session, if GSM context is active)
received and transmitted, or it will report the total amount of data received and
transmitted during all past GPRS (and GSM) sessions, since last reset.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - it resets the GPRS data counter for the all the available PDP contexts (115) and GSM data counter for GSM context 0
1 - it reports the last GPRS session data counter for the all the set PDP
contexts (i.e. all the PDP contexts with APN parameter set using +CGDCONT),
in the format:
#GDATAVOL: <cidn>,<totn>,<sentn>,<receivedn>[<CR><LF>
#GDATAVOL: <cidm>,<totm>,<sentm>,<receivedm>[…]]
where:
<cidn> - PDP context identifier
0 - specifies the GSM context
1..15 - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
<totn> - number of bytes either received or transmitted in the last GPRS (or
GSM) session for <cidn> PDP context;
<sentn> - number of bytes transmitted in the last GPRS (or GSM) session for
<cidn> PDP context;
<receivedn> - number of bytes received in the last GPRS (or GSM) session for
<cidn> PDP context;
2 - it reports the total GPRS data counter, since last reset, for the all the set
PDP contexts (i.e. all the PDP context with APN parameter set using
+CGDCONT), in the format:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 350 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#GDATAVOL - GPRS Data Volume
SELINT 2
#GDATAVOL: <cidn>,<totn>,<sentn>,<receivedn>[<CR><LF>
#GDATAVOL: <cidm>,<totm>,<sentm>,<receivedm>[…]]
where:
<cidn> - PDP context identifier
0 - specifies the GSM context
1..15 - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
<totn> - number of bytes either received or transmitted, in every GPRS (or
GSM) session since last reset, for <cidn> PDP context;
<sentn> - number of bytes transmitted, in every GPRS (or GSM) session since
last reset, for <cidn> PDP context;
<receivedn> - number of bytes received, in every GPRS (or GSM) session
since last reset, for <cidn> PDP context;
Note: last GPRS and GSM session counters are not saved in NVM so they are
loosen at power off.
Note: total GPRS and GSM session counters are saved on NVM.
AT#GDATAVOL=?
5.1.6.9.9.
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter <mode>.
ICMP Ping Support - #ICMP
#ICMP - ICMP Ping Support
AT#ICMP=<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the ICMP Ping support.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disable ICMP Ping support (default)
1 - enable firewalled ICMP Ping support: the module is sending a proper
ECHO_REPLY only to a subset of IP Addresses pinging it; this subset of IP
Addresses has been previously specified through #FRWL (see)
2 - enable free ICMP Ping support; the module is sending a proper
ECHO_REPLY to every IP Address pinging it.
NOTE: the default value for NA products is 2.
AT#ICMP?
Read command returns whether the ICMP Ping support is currently enabled or
not, in the format:
#ICMP: <mode>
AT#ICMP=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameters
< mode>.
5.1.6.9.10. PING request - #PING
#PING – Send PING request
SELINT 2
This command is used to send Ping Echo Request messages and to receive the
AT#PING=
<IPaddr>[,<retryNum corresponding Echo Reply.
>[,<len>[,<timeout>[,<
ttl>]]]]
Parameters:
<IPaddr> - address of the remote host, string type. This parameter can be
either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 351 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#PING – Send PING request
SELINT 2
- any host name to be solved with a DNS query
<retryNum> - the number of Ping Echo Request to send
1-64 (default 4)
<len> - the lenght of Ping Echo Request message
32-1460 (default 32)
<timeout> - the timeout, in 100 ms units, waiting a single Echo Reply
1-600 (default 50)
<ttl> - time to live
1-255 (default 128)
Once the single Echo Reply message is receive a string like that is displayed:
#PING: <replyId>,<Ip Address>,<replyTime>,<ttl>
Where:
<replyId> - Echo Reply number
<Ip Address> - IP address of the remote host
<replyTime> - time, in 100 ms units, required to receive the response
<ttl> - time to live of the Echo Reply message
Note1: when the Echo Request timeout expires (no reply received on time) the
response will contain <replyTime> set to 600 and <ttl> set to 255
Note2: To receive the corresponding Echo Reply is not required to enable
separately AT#ICMP
Note3: Before send PING Request the GPRS context must have
been activated by AT#SGACT=x,1 command. The context ‘x’ is the one used by
PING, as specified in AT#PROTOCOLCFG (see).
AT#PING=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the #PING command
parameters.
Example
AT#PING=”www.telit.com”
#PING: 01,"81.201.117.177",6,50
#PING: 02,"81.201.117.177",5,50
#PING: 03,"81.201.117.177",6,50
#PING: 04,"81.201.117.177",5,50
OK
5.1.6.9.11. DNS from Network - #NWDNS
#NWDNS – DNS from Network
AT#NWDNS=
[<cid>[,<cid>
[,…]]]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns either the primary and secondary DNS addresses
for the GSM context (if specified) and/or a list of primary and secondary DNS
addresses for the specified PDP context identifiers
Parameters:
<cid> - context identifier
0 - specifies the GSM context (see +GSMCONT).
1..15 - numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
(see +CGDCONT command).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 352 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#NWDNS – DNS from Network
SELINT 2
Note: if no <cid> is specified, the DNS addresses for all defined contexts are
returned.
Note: issuing the command with more than 6 parameters raises an error.
Note: the command returns only one row of information for every specified
<cid>, even if the same <cid> is present more than once.
The command returns a row of information for every specified <cid> whose
context has been already defined. No row is returned for a <cid> whose context
has not been defined yet. Response format is:
#NWDNS: <cid>,<PDNSaddress>,<SDNSaddress>[<CR><LF>
#NWDNS: <cid>,<PDNSaddress>,<SDNSaddress> […]]
where:
<cid> - context identifier, as before
<PDNSaddress>,<SDNSaddress> - primary and secondary DNS addresses
set through AT#DNS command. If not set, they are the primary and secondary
DNS addresses assigned during the PDP(or GSM) context activation.
AT#NWDNS=?
Test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
5.1.6.9.12. Configure protocol parameters - #PROTOCOLCFG
#PROTOCOLCFG – configure protocol parameters
SELINT 2
AT#PROTOCOLCFG=< This command sets the configuration parameters needed to specific protocols
protocol>,<cid>[,<UNU
SED_1>[,<UNUSED_2>[ Parameters:
,<UNUSED_3>]]]]
<protocol> - string that represents the protocol
<cid> - cid of the PDP context to be used for the specified protocol
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#PROTOCOLCFG?
Read command returns the current settings in the format:
#PROTOCOLCFG: "FTP",1,0,0,0<CR><LF>
#PROTOCOLCFG: "SMTP",1,0,0,0<CR><LF>
#PROTOCOLCFG: "PING",1,0,0,0<CR><LF>
#PROTOCOLCFG: "SSL",1,0,0,0<CR><LF>
#PROTOCOLCFG: "NTP",2,0,0,0<CR><LF>
Note: the list could be different between a product and the other.
AT#PROTOCOLCFG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the range of supported values for all the parameters.
Page 353 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.10.
SMS AT Commands
5.1.6.10.1. Move Short Message to other memory - #SMSMOVE
#SMSMOVE – Move Short Message to other memory
AT#SMSMOVE=
<index>
SELINT 2
Execution command moves selected Short Message from current memory to
destination memory.
Parameter:
<index> - message index in the memory selected by +CPMS command. It can
have values form 1 to N, where N depends on the available space (see +CPMS)
Note: if the destination memory is full, an error is returned.
AT#SMSMOVE?
Read command reports the message storage status of the current memory and
the destination memory in the format:
#SMSMOVE:
<curr_mem>,<used_curr_mem>,<total_curr_mem>,<dest_mem>,<used_des
t_mem>,<total_dest_mem>
Where:
- <curr_mem> is the current memory, selected by +CPMS command. It can
assume the values “SM” or “ME”
- <used_curr_mem> is the number of SMs stored in the current memory
- <total_curr_mem> is the max number of SMs that the current memory
can contain
- <dest_mem> is the destination memory. It can assume the values “SM”
or “ME”
- <used_dest_mem> is the number of SMs stored in the destination
memory
- <total_dest_mem> is the max number of SMs that the destination
memory can contain
AT#SMSMOVE=?
Test command reports the supported values for parameter <index>
Example
AT#SMSMOVE?
#SMSMOVE: "ME",3,100,"SM",0,50
OK
//the current memory is ME where 3 SMs are stored; the destination memory is
SIM that is empty
AT+CMGL=ALL
+CMGL: 1,"STO UNSENT","32XXXXXXXX","",
test 1
+CMGL: 2,"STO UNSENT","32XXXXXXXX","",
test 2
+CMGL: 3,"STO UNSENT","32XXXXXXXX","",
test 3
OK
//list the SMs to discover the memory index
AT#SMSMOVE=1
OK
//move the SM in the first position of ME to SIM
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 354 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SMSMOVE – Move Short Message to other memory
AT#SMSMOVE?
#SMSMOVE: "ME",2,100,"SM",1,50
SELINT 2
OK
//now we have 2 SMs in ME and 1 in SIM
5.1.6.10.2. SMS Commands Operation Mode - #SMSMODE
#SMSMODE - SMS Commands Operation Mode
AT#SMSMODE=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the check for presence of SMS Service Centre
Address in the FDN phonebook
Parameter:
<mode>
1 - disables the check for presence of SMS SCA in FDN
2 – enables the check for presence of SMS SCA in the FDN phonebook when
FDN are enabled; if the SMS SCA is not present, then a SMS cannot be sent
(default)
AT#SMSMODE?
Read command reports whether the check of SMS SCA in FDN is enabled or
not, in the format:
#SMSMODE: <mode>
(<mode> described above)
AT#SMSMODE=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <mode>
Page 355 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.11.
E-mail Management AT Commands
5.1.6.11.1. E-mail SMTP Server - #ESMTP
#ESMTP - E-mail SMTP Server
AT#ESMTP=
[<smtp>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the SMTP server address, used for E-mail sending.
SMTP server can be specified as IP address or as nick name.
Parameter:
<smtp> - SMTP server address, string type. This parameter can be either:
- any valid IP address in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
-
any host name to be solved with a DNS query in the format: <host
name>
(factory default is the empty string “”)
Note: the max length for <smtp> is the output of Test command.
AT#ESMTP?
Read Command reports the current SMTP server address, in the format:
#ESMTP: <smtp>
AT#ESMTP=?
Test command returns the max length for the parameter <smtp>.
Example
AT#ESMTP="smtp.mydomain.com"
OK
Note
The SMTP server used shall be inside the APN space (the smtp server provided
by the network operator) or it must allow the Relay, otherwise it will refuse to
send the e-mail.
5.1.6.11.2. E-mail Sender Address - #EADDR
#EADDR - E-mail Sender Address
AT#EADDR=
[<e-add>]
AT#EADDR?
SELINT 2
Set command sets the sender address string to be used for sending the e-mail.
Parameter:
<e-addr> - sender address, string type.
- any string value up to max length reported in the Test command.
(factory default is the empty string “”)
Read command reports the current sender address, in the format:
#EADDR: <e-addr>
AT#EADDR=?
Test command returns the maximum allowed length of the string parameter <eaddr>.
Example
AT#EADDR="me@email.box.com"
OK
AT#EADDR?
#EADDR: "me@email.box.com"
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 356 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.11.3. E-mail Authentication User Name - #EUSER
#EUSER - E-mail Authentication User Name
AT#EUSER=
[<e-user>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the user identification string to be used during the
authentication step of the SMTP.
Parameter:
<e-user> - e-mail authentication User ID, string type.
- any string value up to max length reported in the Test command.
(factory default is the empty string “”)
Note: if no authentication is required then the <e-user> parameter shall be
empty "".
AT#EUSER?
Read command reports the current user identification string, in the format:
#EUSER: <e-user>
AT#EUSER=?
Test command returns the maximum allowed length of the string parameter <euser>.
Example
AT#EUSER="myE-Name"
OK
AT#EUSER?
#EUSER: "myE-Name"
OK
5.1.6.11.4. E-mail Authentication Password - #EPASSW
#EPASSW - E-mail Authentication Password
AT#EPASSW=
[<e-pwd>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the password string to be used during the authentication step
of the SMTP.
Parameter:
<e-pwd> - e-mail authentication password, string type.
- any string value up to max length reported in the Test command.
(factory default is the empty string “”)
Note: if no authentication is required then the <e-pwd> parameter shall be
empty "".
AT#EPASSW=?
Test command returns the maximum allowed length of the string parameter <epwd>.
Example
AT#EPASSW="myPassword"
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 357 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.11.5. E-mail Sending - #EMAILD
#EMAILD - E-mail Sending
AT#EMAILD=[<da>,
<subj>
]
SELINT 2
Execution command sends an e-mail message if GPRS context has already been
activated by AT#SGACT=x,1or
The context ‘x’ is the one used by SMTP, as specified in AT#PROTOCOLCFG
(see).
It is also possible to send an e-mail on the GSM context, if it has already been
activated by AT#SGACT=0,1.
Parameters:
<da> - destination address, string type. (maximum length 100 characters)
<subj> - subject of the message, string type. (maximum length 100 characters)
The device responds to the command with the prompt '>' and awaits for the
message body text.
To complete the operation send Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex); to exit without writing the
message send ESC char (0x1B hex).
If e-mail message is successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If message sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: if the length of one of the string type parameters exceeds the maximum
length, then the string is truncated.
Note: Care must be taken to ensure that during the command execution, no other
commands are issued.
To avoid malfunctions is suggested to wait for the OK or ERROR / +CMS
ERROR:<err> response before issuing further commands.
Note: maximum length for message body is 1500 trying to send more data will
cause the surplus to be discarded and lost.
AT#EMAILD=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT#EMAILD=”me@myaddress.com”,”subject of the mail”
>message body… this is the text of the mail message…
CTRL-Z
..wait..
OK
Message has been sent.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 358 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.11.6. E-mail Parameters Save - #ESAV
#ESAV - E-mail Parameters Save
AT#ESAV
SELINT 2
Execution command stores the e-mail parameters in the NVM of the device.
The e-mail parameters to store are:
- E-mail User Name
- E-mail Password
- E-mail Sender Address
- E-mail SMTP server
AT#ESAV=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Note
If some parameters have not been previously specified then a default value will
be taken.
5.1.6.11.7. E-mail Parameters Reset - #ERST
#ERST - E-mail Parameters Reset
AT#ERST
SELINT 2
Execution command resets the e-mail parameters to the “factory default”
configuration and stores them in the NVM of the device.
The e-mail parameters to reset are:
- E-mail User Name
- E-mail Password
- E-mail Sender Address
- E-mail SMTP server
AT#ERST=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.11.8. SMTP Read Message - #EMAILMSG
#EMAILMSG - SMTP Read Message
SELINT 2
AT#EMAILMSG
Execution command returns the last response from SMTP server.
AT#EMAILMSG=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
5.1.6.11.9. Send mail with attachment - #SMTPCL
#SMTPCL – send mail with attachment
AT#SMTPCL=
<da>,<subj>,<att>
[,<filename>,<encod>]
SELINT 2
This command permits to send an email with different types of attachments if
GPRS context has already been activated
(#SGACT).
After sending message body text (as with #EMAILD), the command switch to
online mode if attachment has to be sent.
While in online mode data received on the serial port are transmitted on the
SMTP socket as MIME attachment.
The escape sequence has to be sent to close the SMTP connection.
Encoding of data received on the serial port is performed if required (binary
data), before transmission on the SMTP socket.
Parameters:
<da> - destination address, string type.
(maximum length 100 characters)
<subj> - subject of the message, string type.
(maximum length 100 characters)
<att> - attached file flag
0 – no attachment
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 359 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
1 – attach a txt file
2 – attach a binary file(jpg,bin,pdf,...)
<filename> - attached file name
(maximum length 50 characters)
<encod> -Content-Transfer-Encoding used for attachment
0 – “7bit” means data all represented as short lines of
US-ASCII data
1 – “base64” designed to represent arbitrary sequences of
octets in a form that need not be humanly readable
Note: if no attachment (<att> 0) has to be sent, the behavior is the same as
with #EMAILD.
OK after CTRL-Z is returned(if connection was successful),
the switch to online mode is not performed.
Note:
If a txt file (<att>=1) is attached, only <encod>0(“7bit”) is possible.
If a binary file (<att>=2) is attached, only <encod>1(“base64”) is possible.
Note: if <att>=0 and <filename> is present and not empty, the
attachment won’t be considered
Note: if <att> 1 or 2 and <filename> is not present, command
will return an ERROR
Note: default SMTP port (25) is used
AT#SMTPCL=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<da>,<subj>,<att>[,<filename>,<encod>]
Examples
at#smtpcl="me@myaddress.com","test1",1,"sample.txt",0
>message body...this is the text of the mail message…
Send CTRL-Z
CONNECT
…data received on the serial port are sent as attachment….
Send escape sequence to close the SMTP connection
+++
NO CARRIER
at#smtpcl="me@myaddress.com","test2",2,"image.jpg",1
>message body...this is the text of the mail message…
Send CTRL-Z
CONNECT
…data received on the serial port are base64-encoded and sent as
attachment….
Send escape sequence to close the SMTP connection
+++
NO CARRIER
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 360 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.11.10. E-mail SMTP Port - #ESMTPPORT
#ESMTPPORT – E-mail SMTP Port
SELINT 2
AT#ESMTPPORT=<Port> This command permits to set SMTP port
Parameters:
<Port> - SMTP port to contact (default 25)
25..465,587
Note: SMTP protocol is used on the selected port
Note: the value set by command is directly stored in NVM
AT#ESMTPPORT?
Read command reports the currently selected <Port> in the format:
#ESMTPPORT: <Port >
AT#ESMTPPORT=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter < Port >
5.1.6.11.11. Configure SMTP parameters - #SMTPCFG
#SMTPCFG - Configure SMTP parameters
SELINT 2
AT#SMTPCFG=<ssl_enable This command sets the parameters needed to the SMTP connection
d>[,<port>[,<mode>[,<UNU Parameters:
SED_1>[,<pkt_size>[,<UNU
SED_2>]]]]]
<ssl_enabled> - Numeric parameter indicating if the SSL encryption is
enabled.
0 – SSL encryption disabled (default)
1 – SSL encryption enabled
<port>: SMTP port to contact (default 25)
25..465,587
<mode> - SMTP start session command
0 – SMTP start session command HELO (default)
1 – SMTP start session command EHLO
<pkt_size> - send size for attachment sending
(see #SMTPCL command)
0 – select automatically default value(1024).
1..1500 – send size in bytes.
Note: the SSL encryption can be enabled only if <Enable> parameter of
#SSLEN is set to 0, <FTPSEn> parameter of #FTPCFG is set to 0 and
<ssl_enabled> parameter of #HTTPCFG is set to 0.
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#SMTPCFG?
Read command returns the current settings in the format:
#SMTPCFG:<ssl_enabled>,<port>,<mode>,0,<pkt_size>,0
<CR><LF>
AT#SMTPCFG=?
Test command returns the supported range of parameters
<ssl_enabled>, <port>, <mode> and <pkt_size> in the format:
#SMTPCFG: (list of supported <ssl_enabled>s),(list of supported
<port>s),(list of supported <mode>s),(0),(list of supported
<pkt_size>s) ,(0)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 361 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.12.
HTTP Client AT Commands
5.1.6.12.1. Configure HTTP Parameters - #HTTPCFG
#HTTPCFG – configure HTTP parameters
AT#HTTPCFG=<prof_id>[,<
server_address>[,<server_
port>[,<auth_type>[,<usern
ame>[,<password>[,<ssl_e
nabled>[,<timeout>[,<cid>[,
<pkt_size>][,
<UNUSED_1>[,
<UNUSED_2>]]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
This command sets the parameters needed to the HTTP connection
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier.
Range: 0-2
<server_address> - String parameter indicating the IP address of the
HTTP server.
This parameter can be either:
- any valid IP address in the format: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
- any host name to be solved with a DNS query
Default: “” for first and second profile; "m2mlocate.telit.com" for third
profile.
<server_port> - Numeric parameter indicating the TCP remote port of the
HTTP server to connect to.
Default: 80 for first and second profile; 9978 for third profile. Range
1...65535.
<auth_type> - Numeric parameter indicating the HTTP authentication
type.
0 – no authentication (default)
1 – basic authentication
<username> - String parameter indicating authentication user
identification string for HTTP.
<password> - String parameter indicating authentication password for
HTTP.
<ssl_enabled> - Numeric parameter indicating if the SSL encryption is
enabled.
0 – SSL encryption disabled (default)
1 – SSL encryption enabled
<timeout>: Numeric parameter indicating the time interval in seconds to
wait for receiving data from HTTP server. Range: (1- 65535).
Default: 120.
<cid> - Numeric parameter indicating the PDP Context Identifier.
Range: (0- max, where the value of max is returned by the Test command
Default: 3 (for LE910-SV V2 and LE910-SV1)
Default: 1 (for ALL products except LE910-SV V2 and LE910-SV1)
<pkt_size> - send(#HTTPSND) or recv(#HTTPRCV) size for data sending
or receiving.
0 – select automatically default value(300).
1..1500 – send or recv size in bytes.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 362 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#HTTPCFG – configure HTTP parameters
SELINT 2
Note: an ERROR is issued if <UNUSED_1> and <UNUSED_2>
parameters are set with a value different from 0.
Note: a special form of the Set command, #HTTPCFG=<prof_id>, causes
the values for profile number <prof_id> to reset to default values.
Note: only one profile can use the SSL encryption.
Note: the SSL encryption can be enabled only if <Enable> parameter of
#SSLEN is set to 0 and <FTPSEn> parameter of #FTPCFG is set to 0.
Note: if it’s needed to configure security parameters, it is possible to use
#SSLSECCFG/#SSLSECDATA commands as usual for #SSLD
Note: values are automatically saved in NVM.
AT#HTTPCFG?
Read command returns the current settings for each defined profile in the
format:
#HTTPCFG:
<prof_id>,<server_address>,<server_port>,<auth_type>,<username>
,<password>,<ssl_enabled>,<timeout>,<cid>,<pkt_size>,0,0<CR><LF
>[<CR><LF>#HTTPCFG:
<prof_id>,<server_address>,<server_port>,<auth_type>,<username
>,<password>,<ssl_enabled>,<timeout>,<cid>,<pkt_size>,0,0]<CR>
<LF>[…]]
AT#HTTPCFG=?
Test command returns the supported range of parameters <prof_id>,
<server_port>, <auth_type>, <ssl_enabled>, <timeout>, <cid> and
<pkt_size> and the maximum length of <server_address>,
<username> and <password> parameters in the format:
# HTTPCFG: (list of supported <prof_id>s),<s_length>,(list of
supported <server_port>s), (list of supported
<auth_type>s),<u_length>,<p_length>,(list of supported
<ssl_enabled>s),(list of supported <timeout>s),(list of supported
<cid>s) ,(list of supported <pkt_size>s)
where:
<s_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <server_address>.
<u_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <username>.
<p_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <password>
5.1.6.12.2. Send HTTP GET, HEAD or DELETE request - #HTTPQRY
#HTTPQRY – send HTTP GET, HEAD or DELETE request
AT#HTTPQRY=<prof_id>,<
command>,<resource>[,<e
xtra_header_line>]
SELINT 2
Execution command performs a GET, HEAD or DELETE request to HTTP
server.
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier.
Range: 0-2
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 363 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#HTTPQRY – send HTTP GET, HEAD or DELETE request
SELINT 2
<command>: Numeric parameter indicating the command requested to
HTTP server:
0 – GET
1 – HEAD
2 – DELETE
<resource>: String parameter indicating the HTTP resource (uri), object
of the request
<extra_header_line>: String parameter indicating optional HTTP header
line
If sending ends successfully, the response is OK; otherwise an error code
is reported.
Note: the HTTP request header sent with #HTTPQRY always contains the
“Connection: close” line, and it can not be removed.
When the HTTP server answer is received, then the following URC is put
on the serial port:
#HTTPRING:
<prof_id>,<http_status_code>,<content_type>,<data_size>
Where:
<prof_id> is defined as above
<http_status_code> is the numeric status code, as received from the
server (see RFC 2616)
<content_type> is a string reporting the “Content-Type” header line, as
received from the server (see RFC 2616)
<data_size> is the byte amount of data received from the server. If the
server doesn’t report the "Content-Length:" header line, the parameter
value is 0.
Note: if there are no data from server or the server doesn’t answer within
the time interval specified in <timeout> parameter of #HTTPCFG
command, then the URC #HTTPRING <http_status_code> parameter
has value 0.
AT#HTTPQRY=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the parameters
<prof_id> and <command> and the maximum length of <resource>
parameter in the format:
#HTTPQRY: (list of supported <prof_id>s),(list of supported
<command>s),<r_length>,<m_length>
where:
<r_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <resource>.
<m_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <extra_header_line>.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 364 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.12.3. Send HTTP POST or PUT request - #HTTPSND
#HTTPSND – send HTTP POST or PUT request
SELINT 2
AT#HTTPSND=<prof_id>,< Execution command performs a POST or PUT request to HTTP server
command>,<resource>,<da and starts sending data to the server.
ta_len>[,<post_param>[,<e
xtra_header_line>]]
The device shall prompt a three character sequence
<greater_than><greater_than><greater_than>
(IRA 62, 62, 62)
after command line is terminated with <CR>; after that the data can be
entered from TE, sized <data_len> bytes.
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier.
Range: 0-2
<command>: Numeric parameter indicating the command requested to
HTTP server:
0 – POST
1 – PUT
<resource>: String parameter indicating the HTTP resource (uri), object
of the request
<data_len>: Numeric parameter indicating the data length to input in
bytes
<post_param>: Numeric/string parameter indicating the HTTP Contenttype identifier, used only for POST command, optionally followed by colon
character (:) and a string that extends with sub-types the identifier:
“0[:extension]” – “application/x-www-form-urlencoded” with optional
extension
“1[:extension]” – “text/plain” with optional extension
“2[:extension]” – “application/octet-stream” with optional extension
“3[:extension]” – “multipart/form-data” with optional extension
other content – free string corresponding to other content type and
possible sub-types
<extra_header_line>: String parameter indicating optional HTTP header
line
If sending ends successfully, the response is OK; otherwise an error code
is reported.
Note: the HTTP request header sent with #HTTPSND always contains the
“Connection: close” line, and it can not be removed.
When the HTTP server answer is received, then the following URC is put
on the serial port:
#HTTPRING:
<prof_id>,<http_status_code>,<content_type>,<data_size>
Where:
<prof_id> is defined as above
<http_status_code> is the numeric status code, as received from the
server (see RFC 2616)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 365 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#HTTPSND – send HTTP POST or PUT request
SELINT 2
<content_type> is a string reporting the “Content-Type” header line, as
received from the server (see RFC 2616)
<data_size> is the byte amount of data received from the server. If the
server doesn’t report the "Content-Length:" header line, the parameter
value is 0.
Note: if there are no data from server or the server doesn’t answer within
the time interval specified in <timeout> parameter of #HTTPCFG
command, then the URC #HTTPRING <http_status_code> parameter
has value 0.
AT#HTTPSND=?
Test command returns the supported range of parameters <prof_id>,
<command> and <data_len> and the maximum length of <resource>,
<post_param> and <extra_header_line> parameters in the format:
# HTTPSND: (list of supported <prof_id>s),(list of supported
<command>s), <r_length>, (list of supported
<data_len>s),<p_length>,<m_length>
where:
<r_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <resource>.
<p_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <post_param>.
<m_length> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of
parameter <extra_header_line>
Example
Post 100 byte without “Content-type” header
AT#HTTPSND=0,0,”/”,100
>>>
Post 100 byte with “application/x-www-form-urlencoded”
AT#HTTPSND=0,0,”/”,100,0
>>>
Post 100 byte with “multipart/form-data” and extension
AT#HTTPSND=0,0,”/”,100,”3:boundary=----FormBoundary”
>>>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 366 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.12.4. Receive HTTP server data - #HTTPRCV
#HTTPRCV – receive HTTP server data
AT#HTTPRCV=<prof_id>[,
<maxByte>]
SELINT 2
Execution command permits the user to read data from HTTP server in
response to a previous HTTP module request. The module is notified of
these data by the #HTTPRING URC.
The device shall prompt a three character sequence
<less_than><less_than><less_than>
(IRA 60, 60, 60)
followed by the data.
If reading ends successfully, the response is OK; otherwise an error code
is reported.
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier.
Range: 0-2
< maxByte > - Max number of bytes to read at a time
Range: 0,64-1500 (default is 0 which means infinite size)
Note: if <maxByte> is unspecified, server data will be transferred all in
once.
Note: If the data are not present or the #HTTPRING <http_status_code>
parameter has value 0, an error code is reported.
AT#HTTPRCV=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for <prof_id>
parameter in the format:
# HTTPRCV: (list of supported <prof_id>s)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 367 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.13.
Script Management Commands
5.1.6.13.1. Write Script - #WSCRIPT
#WSCRIPT - Write Script
AT#WSCRIPT=
[<script_name>,
<size>,
[,<hidden>]]
SELINT 2
Execution command causes the MODULE to store a file in the Easy Script® related
NVM, naming it <script_name>
The file should be sent using RAW ASCII file transfer.
It is important to set properly the port settings. In particular:
Flow control: hardware.
Baud rate: 115200 bps
Parameters:
<script_name> - name of the file in NVM, string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive).
<size> - file size in bytes
<hidden> - file hidden attribute
0 - file content is readable with #RSCRIPT (default).
1 - file content is readable with #RSCRIPT (no effect).
The device shall prompt a five character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><greater_than><greater_than>
(IRA 13, 10, 62, 62, 62)
after command line is terminated with <CR>; after that a file can be entered from
TE, sized <size> bytes.
The operations completes when all the bytes are received.
If writing ends successfully, the response is OK; otherwise an error code is
reported.
Note: the file name should be passed between quotes; every textual script file must
have .py extension, whilst every pre-compiled executable script file must have .pyo
extension; file names are case sensitive.
Note: when sending the script be sure that the line terminator is <CR><LF> and
that your terminal program does not change it.
AT#WSCRIPT=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#WSCRIPT="First.py ",54,0
>>> here receive the prompt; then type or send the textual script, sized 54 bytes
OK
Textual script has been stored
Note
It’s recommended to use the extension .py only for textual script files and the
extension .pyo only for pre-compiled executable script files.
5.1.6.13.2. Read Script - #RSCRIPT
SELINT 2
#RSCRIPT - Read Script
AT#RSCRIPT=
[<script_name>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Execution command reports the content of file <script_name>.
Parameter:
<script_name> - file name, string type (max 16 chars, case sensitive).
Page 368 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#RSCRIPT - Read Script
SELINT 2
The device shall prompt a five character sequence
<CR><LF><less_than><less_than><less_than>
(IRA 13, 10, 60, 60, 60)
followed by the file content.
Note: If the file <script_name> is not present an error code is reported.
AT#RSCRIPT=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#RSCRIPT="First.py "
hereafter receive the prompt; then the script is displayed, immediately
after the prompt
<<<import MDM
MDM.send('AT\r',10)
Ans=MDM.receive(20)
OK
5.1.6.13.3. List Script Names - #LCSCRIPT
#LCSCRIPT - List Script Names
AT#LCSCRIPT
SELINT 2
Execution command reports either the list of file names for the files
currently stored in the Easy Script® related NVM, adding CRC16
information, and the available free NVM memory in the format:
[#LCSCRIPT: <script_name1>,<size1>[,<crc1>]…
[<CR><LF>#LCSCRIPT: <script_namen>,<sizen>[,<crcn>]]]
<CR><LF>#LCSCRIPT: free bytes: <free_NVM>
where:
<script-namen> - file name, quoted string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive)
<sizen> - size of script in bytes
<crcn> - CRC16 poly (x^16+x^12+x^5+1) of script in hex format
<free_NVM> - size of available NVM memory in bytes
Note: CRC16 is calculated using the standard reversed CRC16-CCITT
x^16+x^12+x^5+1 polynomial (0x1021 representation, reversed) with
initial value FFFF.
Note: if one file currently stored in NVM is in use than CRC16 cannot be
calculated and execution command does not report <crcn> for that file.
AT#LCSCRIPT=
<script_name>
Execution command reports size and CRC16 information of file
<script_name> in the format:
[#LCSCRIPT: <script_name>,<size>[,<crc>]]
where:
<script-name> - file name, quoted string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive)
<size> - size of script in bytes
<crc> - CRC16 poly (x^16+x^12+x^5+1) of script in hex format
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 369 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#LCSCRIPT - List Script Names
SELINT 2
Parameter:
<script_name> - file name, string type (max 16 chars, case sensitive).
Note: CRC16 is calculated using the standard reversed CRC16-CCITT
x^16+x^12+x^5+1 polynomial (0x1021 representation, reversed) with
initial value FFFF.
Note: if file <script_name> is in use than CRC16 cannot be calculated
and execution command does not report <crc>.
Note: if file <script_name> is not in the list of files stored in NVM
execution command exits with error message.
AT#LCSCRIPT=?
Test command returns OK result code.
Example
AT#LCSCRIPT
#LCSCRIPT: “First.py”,51,8FD6
#LCSCRIPT: “Second.py”,178,A034
#LCSCRIPT: “Third.py”,120,7C48
#LCSCRIPT: free bytes: 20000
OK
AT#LCSCRIPT=“Second.py”
#LCSCRIPT: “Second.py”,178,A034
OK
If file Third.py is already in use.
AT#LCSCRIPT
#LCSCRIPT: “First.py”,51,8FD6
#LCSCRIPT: “Second.py”,178,A034
#LCSCRIPT: “Third.py”,120
#LCSCRIPT: free bytes: 20000
OK
5.1.6.13.4. Delete Script - #DSCRIPT
SELINT 2
#DSCRIPT - Delete Script
AT#DSCRIPT=
[<script_name>]
Execution command deletes a file from Easy Script® related NVM
memory.
Parameter:
<script_name> - name of the file to delete, string type (max 16 chars,
case sensitive)
Note: if the file <script_name> is not present an error code is reported.
AT#DSCRIPT=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns OK result code.
Page 370 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#DSCRIPT - Delete Script
Example
SELINT 2
AT#DSCRIPT="Third.py"
OK
5.1.6.13.5. Delete All Scripts - #DASCRIPTS
SELINT 2
#DASCRIPT – Delete All Scripts
AT#DSCRIPT=
[<script_name>]
Execution command deletes all files from Easy Script® related NVM
memory.
Note: if product supports directories execution command deletes all files
from current working directory, it does not delete directories.
AT#DSCRIPT=?
Test command returns OK result code.
5.1.6.13.6. File System Change Current Drive - #CHDRIVE
#CHDRIVE – File System Change Current Drive
AT#CHDRIVE=<drive>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the current drive in the file system.
Parameter:
<drive> - integer type, current drive integer value
Note: at the the only available drive value in the file system is 0 and may
be extended in future.
Note: if the current drive value in the file system is not 0 then AT
commands related to SCRIPT family and MMS family that make use of
the file system will have
ERROR
response.
AT#CHDRIVE?
Read command reports the current drive in the file system in the format:
#CHDRIVE: <drive>
AT#CHDRIVE=?
Test command returns the allowed values for parameter <drive>.
Example
AT#CHDRIVE?
#CHDRIVE: 0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 371 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.14.
SIM Toolkit Commands
5.1.6.14.1. SIM Tookit Interface Activation - #STIA
#STIA - SIM Toolkit Interface Activation
AT#STIA=
[<mode>
[,<timeout>]]
SELINT 2
Set command is used to activate the SAT sending of unsolicited indications when a
proactive command is received from SIM.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 - disable SAT
1 - enable SAT without unsolicited indication #STN (default)
2 - enable SAT and extended unsolicited indication #STN (see #STGI)
3 - enable SAT and reduced unsolicited indication #STN (see #STGI)
17 - enable SAT without unsolicited indication #STN and 3GPP TS 23.038 alphabet
used
18 - enable SAT and extended unsolicited indication #STN (see #STGI) and 3GPP
TS 23.038 alphabet used
19 - enable SAT and reduced unsolicited indication #STN (see #STGI)and 3GPP TS
23.038 alphabet used
33 - enable SAT without unsolicited indication #STN and UCS2 alphabet used
34 - enable SAT and extended unsolicited indication #STN (see #STGI)and UCS2
alphabet used
35 - enable SAT and reduced unsolicited indication #STN (see #STGI)and UCS2
alphabet used
<timeout> - time-out for user responses
1.. 2 - time-out in minutes (default 2). Any ongoing (but unanswered) proactive
command will be aborted automatically after <timeout> minutes. In this case, the
terminal response is either “ME currently unable to process command”, or if
applicable, “No response from user”. In addition an unsolicited indication will be sent
to the external application:
#STN: <cmdTerminateValue>
where:
<cmdTerminateValue> is defined as <cmdType> + terminate offset; the
terminate offset equals 100.
Note: every time the SIM application issues a proactive command that requires
user interaction an unsolicited code will be sent, if enabled with #STIA command, as
follows:
• if <mode> parameter of #STIA command has been set to 3 (reduced
unsolicited indication) an unsolicited indication will be sent, indicating the type
of proactive command issued by the SIM:
#STN: <cmdType>
• if <mode> parameter of #STIA command has been set to 2 (extended
unsolicited indication) the format of the unsolicited indication depends on the
specific command:
if <cmdType>=1 (REFRESH)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 372 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STIA - SIM Toolkit Interface Activation
SELINT 2
an unsolicited notification will be sent to the user:
#STN: <cmdType>,<refresh type>
where:
<refresh type>
0 - SIM Initialization and Full File Change Notification;
1 - File Change Notification;
2 - SIM Initialization and File Change Notification;
3 - SIM Initialization;
4 - SIM Reset
In this case neither #STGI nor #STSR commands are required:
• AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
• AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will answer OK but do nothing.
if <cmdType>=17 (SEND SS)
if <cmdType>=19 (SEND SHORT MESSAGE)
if <cmdType>=20 (SEND DTMF)
if <cmdType>=32 (PLAY TONE)
an unsolicited notification will be sent if allowed by SIM (see GSM 11.14):
#STN: <cmdType>[,<text>]
where:
<text> - (optional) text to be displayed to user
In these cases neither #STGI nor #STSR commands are required:
• AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
• AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will answer OK but do nothing.
In case of SEND SHORT MESSAGE (<cmdType>=19) command if sending to
network fails an unsolicited notification will be sent
#STN: 119
if <cmdType>=33 (DISPLAY TEXT)
an unsolicited notification will be sent if allowed by SIM (see GSM 11.14):
#STN: <cmdType>[,<cmdDetails>[,<text>]
where:
<cmdDetails> - unsigned Integer used as a bit field.
0..255 - used as a bit field:
bit 1:
0 - normal priority
1 - high priority
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 373 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STIA - SIM Toolkit Interface Activation
bits 2 to 7: reserved for future use
bit 8:
0 - clear message after a delay
1 - wait for user to clear message
<text> - (optional) text to be displayed to user
In this case:
1.1.1.1.1.1.
required:
•
•
2.1.1.1.1.1.
SELINT 2
if <cmdDetails>/bit8 is 0 neither #STGI nor #STSR commands are
AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will answer OK but do nothing.
If <cmdDetails>/bit8 is 1 #STSR command is required
if <cmdType>=40 (SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT)
an unsolicited notification will be sent:
#STN: <cmdType>[,<text>]
where:
<text> - (optional)text to be displayed to user
In these cases neither #STGI nor #STSR commands are required:
• AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
• AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will answer OK but do nothing.
if <cmdType>=18 (SEND USSD)
an unsolicited notification will be sent to the user:
#STN: <cmdType>[,<text>]
where:
<text> - optional text string sent by SIM
In this case:
•
•
•
AT#STSR=18,20 can be sent to end USSD transaction.
AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will answer OK but do nothing.
if <cmdType>=5 (SET UP EVENT LIST)
an unsolicited notification will be sent:
#STN: <cmdType>[,<event list mask>]
where:
<event list mask> - (optional)hexadecimal number representing the list of events to
monitor (see GSM 11.14)
- '00' = MT call
- '01' = Call connected
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 374 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STIA - SIM Toolkit Interface Activation
- '02' = Call disconnected
- '03' = Location status
- '04' = User activity
- '05' = Idle screen available
- '06' = Card reader status (if class "a" is supported)
- '07' = Language selection
- '08' = Browser Termination (if class "c" is supported)
- '09' = Data available (if class "e" is supported)
- '0A' = Channel status (if class "e" is supported)
SELINT 2
The hexadecimal number is actually a bit mask, where each bit, when set, indicates
that the corresponding event has to be monitored (e.g., if <event list mask> is
0x0001, it means that MT call has to be monitored).
In these cases neither #STGI nor #STSR commands are required:
• AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
• AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will answer OK but do nothing.
if <cmdType>=64 (OPEN CHANNEL)
an unsolicited notification will be sent to the user:
#STN: <cmdType>[,<text>]
where:
<text> - optional text string sent by SIM
In this case:
•
•
•
AT#STSR=64,34 can be sent to reject request.
AT#STGI is accepted anyway.
AT#STSR=<cmdType>,0 will start connection.
All other commands:
the unsolicited indication will report just the proactive command type:
#STN: <cmdType>
Note: if the call control or SMS control facility in the SIM is activated, when the
customer application makes an outgoing call, or sends an SS or USSD, or an SMS,
the following #STN unsolicited indication could be sent, according to GSM 11.14, to
indicate whether the outgoing call has been accepted, rejected or modified by the
SIM, or if the SMS service centre address or destination has been changed:
#STN: <cmdTerminateValue>,<Result>[,<TextInfo>[,<Number>
[,<MODestAddr>]]]
where
<cmdTerminateValue>
150 - SMS control response
160 - call/SS/USSD response
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 375 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STIA - SIM Toolkit Interface Activation
SELINT 2
<Result>
0 - Call/SMS not allowed
1 - Call/SMS allowed
2 - Call/SMS allowed with modification
<Number> - Called number, Service Center Address or SS String in ASCII format.
<MODestAddr> - MO destination address in ASCII format.
<TextInfo> - alpha identifier provided by the SIM in ASCII format.
Note: an unsolicited result code
#STN: 254
is sent if the user has indicated the need to end the proactive SIM application
session (AT#STSR=<cmdType>,16 i.e. “proactive SIM application session
terminated by the user” according to GSM 11.14).
The TA does not need to respond directly, i.e. AT#STSR is not required.
It is possible to restart the SAT session from the main menu again with the command
AT#STGI=37.
Note: The settings are saved on user profile and available on following reboot. SIM
Toolkit activation/deactivation is only performed at power on.
Note: if #ENS=1 then the <mode> parameter is set to 2
AT#STIA?
Read command can be used to get information about the SAT interface in the
format:
#STIA: <state>,<mode>,<timeout>,<SatProfile>
where:
<state> - the device is in one of the following state:
0 - SIM has not started its application yet
1 - SIM has started its application (SAT main menu ready)
<mode> - SAT and unsolicited indications enabling status (see above)
<timeout> - time-out for user responses (see above)
<SatProfile> - SAT Terminal Profile according to GSM 11.14, i. e. the list of SIM
Application Toolkit facilities that are supported by the ME. The profile cannot be
changed by the TA.
Note: In SAT applications usually an SMS message is sent to the network provider
containing service requests, e.g. to send the latest news. The provider returns a
message with the requested information.
Before activating SAT it is recommended to set the SMS text mode with command
AT+CMGF=1 and to enable unsolicited indications for incoming SMS messages with
command +CNMI.
AT#STIA=?
Test command returns the range of available values for the parameters <mode> and
<timeout>.
Note
Just one instance at a time, the one which first issued AT#STIA=n (with n different
from zero), is allowed to issue SAT commands, and this is valid till the same
instance issues AT#STIA=0.
After power cycle another instance can enable SAT.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 376 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STIA - SIM Toolkit Interface Activation
Note
SELINT 2
A typical SAT session on AT interface starts after an #STN: 37 unsolicited code is
received, if enabled(see above). At that point usually an AT#STGI=37 command is
issued (see #STGI), and after the SAT main menu has been displayed on TE an
AT#STSR=37,0,x command is issued to select an item in the menu (see #STSR).
5.1.6.14.2. SIM Tookit Get Information - #STGI
SELINT 2
#STGI - SIM Tookit Get Information
AT#STGI=
[<cmdType>]
#STGI set command is used to request the parameters of a proactive command
from the ME.
Parameter:
<cmdType> - proactive command ID according to GSM 11.14 (decimal); these are
only those command types that use the AT interface; SAT commands which are not
using the AT interface (not MMI related SAT commands, e.g. PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION) are executed without sending any indication to the user
1 - REFRESH
5 – SET UP EVENT LIST
16 - SET UP CALL
17 - SEND SS
18 - SEND USSD
19 - SEND SHORT MESSAGE
20 - SEND DTMF
32 - PLAY TONE
33 - DISPLAY TEXT
34 - GET INKEY
35 - GET INPUT
36 - SELECT ITEM
37 - SET UP MENU
40 – SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT
64 – OPEN CHANNEL
Requested command parameters are sent using an #STGI indication:
#STGI: <parameters>
where <parameters> depends upon the ongoing proactive command as follows:
if <cmdType>=1 (REFRESH)
#STGI: <cmdType>,<refresh type>
where:
<refresh type>
0 - SIM Initialization and Full File Change Notification;
1 - File Change Notification;
2 - SIM Initialization and File Change Notification;
3 - SIM Initialization;
4 - SIM Reset
if <cmdType>=5 (SET UP EVENT LIST)
#STGI: <cmdType>,<event list mask>
where:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 377 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STGI - SIM Tookit Get Information
SELINT 2
<event list mask> - hexadecimal number representing the list of events to monitor
(see GSM 11.14):
- '00' = MT call
- '01' = Call connected
- '02' = Call disconnected
- '03' = Location status
- '04' = User activity
- '05' = Idle screen available
- '06' = Card reader status (if class "a" is supported)
- '07' = Language selection
- '08' = Browser Termination (if class "c" is supported)
- '09' = Data available (if class "e" is supported)
- '0A' = Channel status (if class "e" is supported)
The hexadecimal number is actually a bit mask, where each bit, when set, indicates
that the corresponding event has to be monitored (e.g., if <event list mask> is
0x0001, it means that MT call has to be monitored).
if <cmdType>=16 (SET UP CALL)
#STGI: <cmdType>,<commandDetails>,[<confirmationText>],
<calledNumber>where:
<commandDetails> - unsigned integer, used as an enumeration
0 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call
1 Set up call, but only if not currently busy on another call, with redial
2 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold
3 Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold, with redial
4 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any)
5 Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any), with redial
<confirmationText> - string for user confirmation stage
<calledNumber> - string containing called number
if <cmdType>=17 (SEND SS)
if <cmdType>=18 (SEND USSD)
if <cmdType>=19 (SEND SHORT MESSAGE)
if <cmdType>=20 (SEND DTMF)
if <cmdType>=32 (PLAY TONE)
if <cmdType>=40 (SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT)
if <cmdType>=64 (OPEN CHANNEL)
#STGI: <cmdType>[,<text>]
where:
<text> - text to be displayed to user
if <cmdType>=33 (DISPLAY TEXT)
#STGI: <cmdType>,<cmdDetails>[,<text>]
where:
<cmdDetails> - unsigned Integer used as a bit field.
0..255 - used as a bit field:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 378 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STGI - SIM Tookit Get Information
bit 1:
0 - normal priority
1 - high priority
bits 2 to 7: reserved for future use
bit 8:
0 - clear message after a delay
1 - wait for user to clear message
<text> - text to be displayed to user
SELINT 2
if <cmdType>=34 (GET INKEY)
#STGI: <cmdType>,<commandDetails>,<text>
where:
<commandDetails> - unsigned Integer used as a bit field.
0..255 - used as a bit field:
bit 1:
0 - Digits only (0-9, *, # and +)
1 - Alphabet set;
bit 2:
0 - SMS default alphabet (GSM character set)
1 - UCS2 alphabet
bit 3:
0 - Character sets defined by bit 1 and bit 2 are enabled
1 - Character sets defined by bit 1 and bit 2 are disabled and the "Yes/No"
response is requested
bits 4 to 7:
0
bit 8:
0 - No help information available
1 - Help information available
<text> - String as prompt for text.
if <cmdType>=35 (GET INPUT)
#STGI: <cmdType>,<commandDetails>,<text>,<responseMin>,
<responseMax>[,<defaultText>]
where:
<commandDetails> - unsigned Integer used as a bit field.
0..255 - used as a bit field:
bit 1:
0 - Digits only (0-9, *, #, and +)
1 - Alphabet set
bit 2:
0 - SMS default alphabet (GSM character set)
1 - UCS2 alphabet
bit 3:
0 - ME may echo user input on the display
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 379 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STGI - SIM Tookit Get Information
SELINT 2
1 - User input shall not be revealed in any way. Hidden entry mode (see GSM
11.14) is only available when using digit input. In hidden entry mode only characters
(‘0’-‘9’, ‘*’ and ‘#‘) are allowed.
bit 4:
0 - User input to be in unpacked format
1 - User input to be in SMS packed format
bits 5 to 7:
0
bit 8:
0 - No help information available
1 - Help information available
<text> - string as prompt for text
<responseMin> - minimum length of user input
0..255
<responseMax> - maximum length of user input
0..255
<defaultText> - string supplied as default response text
if <cmdType>=36 (SELECT ITEM)
The first line of output is:
#STGI: <cmdType>,<commandDetails>,<numOfItems>[,<titleText>]
<CR><LF>
One line follows for every item, repeated for <numOfItems>:
#STGI: <cmdType>,<itemId>,<itemText>[,<nextActionId>]
where:
<commandDetails> - unsigned Integer used as a bitfield
0..255 - used as a bit field:
bit 1:
0 - Presentation type is not specified
1 - Presentation type is specified in bit 2
bit 2:
0 - Presentation as a choice of data values if bit 1 = '1'
1 - Presentation as a choice of navigation options if bit 1 is '1'
bit 3:
0 - No selection preference
1 - Selection using soft key preferred
bits 4 to 7:
0
bit 8:
0 - No help information available
1 - Help information available
<numOfItems> - number of items in the list
<titleText> - string giving menu title
<itemId> - item identifier
1..<numOfItems>
<itemText> - title of item
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 380 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STGI - SIM Tookit Get Information
SELINT 2
<nextActionId> - the next proactive command type to be issued upon execution of
the menu item.
0 - no next action information available.
if <cmdType>=37 (SET UP MENU)
The first line of output is:
#STGI: <cmdType>,<commandDetails>,<numOfItems>,<titleText>
<CR><LF>
One line follows for every item, repeated for <numOfItems>:
#STGI: <cmdType>,<itemId>,<itemText>[,<nextActionId>]
where:
<commandDetails> - unsigned Integer used as a bitfield
0..255 - used as a bit field:
bit 1:
0 - no selection preference
1 - selection using soft key preferred
bit 2 to 7:
0
bit 8:
0 - no help information available
1 - help information available
<numOfItems> - number of items in the list
<titleText> - string giving menu title
<itemId> - item identifier
1..<numOfItems>
<itemText> - title of item
<nextActionId> - the next proactive command type to be issued upon execution of
the menu item.
0 - no next action information available.
Note: upon receiving the #STGI response, the TA must send #STSR command (see
below) to confirm the execution of the proactive command and provide any required
user response, e.g. selected menu item.
AT#STGI?
The read command can be used to request the currently ongoing proactive
command and the SAT state in the format
#STGI: <state>,cmdType>
where:
<state> - SAT interface state (see #STIA)
<cmdType> - ongoing proactive command
An error message will be returned if there is no pending command.
AT#STGI=?
Test command returns the range for the parameters <state> and <cmdType>.
Note
The unsolicited notification sent to the user:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 381 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STGI - SIM Tookit Get Information
SELINT 2
#STN: 37
is an indication that the main menu of the SIM Application has been sent to the TA. It
will be stored by the TA so that it can be displayed later at any time by issuing an
AT#STGI=37 command.
A typical SAT session on AT interface starts after an #STN: 37 unsolicited code is
received, if enabled. At that point usually an AT#STGI=37 command is issued, and
after the SAT main menu has been displayed on TE an AT#STSR=37,0,x command
is issued to select an item in the menu (see below). The session usually ends with a
SIM action like sending an SMS, or starting a call. After this, to restart the session
from the beginning going back to SAT main menu it is usually required an
AT#STSR=37,16 command.
The unsolicited notification sent to the user:
#STN:237
is an indication that the main menu of the SIM Application has been removed from
the TA, and it is no longer available. In this case AT#STGI=37 command response
will be always ERROR.
5.1.6.14.3. SIM Tookit Send Response - #STSR
#STSR - SIM Tookit Send Response
AT#STSR=
[<cmdType>,
<userResponse>
[,<data>]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
The write command is used to provide to SIM user response to a command and
any required user information, e.g. a selected menu item.
Parameters:
<cmdType> - integer type; proactive command ID according to GSM 11.14 (see
#STGI)
<userResponse> - action performed by the user
0 - command performed successfully (call accepted in case of call setup, start
connection in case of open channel request)
16 - proactive SIM session terminated by user
17 - backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user
18 - no response from user
19 - help information required by the user
20 - USSD/SS Transaction terminated by user
32 - TA currently unable to process command
34 - user has denied SIM call setup request
35 - user cleared down SIM call before connection or network release
<data> - data entered by user, depending on <cmdType>, only required if
<Result> is 0:
Get Inkey
<data> contains the key pressed by the user; used character set should be the one
selected with +CSCS.
Note: if, as a user response, a binary choice (Yes/No) is requested by the SIM
application using bit 3 of the <commandDetails> parameter the valid content of
the <inputString> is:
a) “IRA”, ”8859-1”, ”PCCP437” charsets: “Y” or “y” (positive answer) and “N” or “n”
(negative answer)
b) UCS2 alphabet “0079” or “0059” (positive answer) and “006E” or “004E”
(negative answer)
Page 382 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#STSR - SIM Tookit Send Response
SELINT 2
Get Input
<data> - contains the string of characters entered by the user (see above)
Select Item
<data> - contains the item identifier selected by the user
Note:
Use of icons is not supported. All icon related actions will respond with no icon
available.
AT#STSR?
The read command can be used to request the currently ongoing proactive
command and the SAT state in the format
#STSRI: <state>,<cmdType>
where:
<state> - SAT interface state (see #STIA)
<cmdType> - ongoing proactive command
An error message will be returned if there is no pending command.
AT#STSR=?
Test command returns the range for the parameters <state> and <cmdType>.
5.1.6.14.4. SIM Tookit terminal Attach - #STTA
#STTA – SIM Toolkit Terminal Attach
AT#STTA=<state>
SELINT 2
This command attaches/detaches the SIM Toolkit application to the AT instance
reserved for this use (see #STACFG).
Parameters:
<state>: attached state
0 – SIM Toolkit detaches
1 – SIM Toolkit attaches
If SIM Toolkit application has been already attached/detached the command does
nothing and returns OK.
AT#STTA?
Read command reports the current <state> in the format:
#STTA: <state>
AT#STTA=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <state>
Note
The AT instance reserved for the SIM Toolkit application is setted by the command
#STACFG (default is #3).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 383 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.14.5. Configure SIM Toolkit Application parameters - #STACFG
#STACFG – Configure SIM Toolkit Application parameters
SELINT 2
AT#STACFG=<instance> [, Set command configures the SIM Toolkit Application.
<UNUSED_1>[,
<UNUSED_2>]
Parameters:
<instance>:
AT instance that will be used by the SIM Toolkit Application (see #STTA).
Range 1 - 5, default 3.
<UNUSED_1>: reserved for future use
<UNUSED_2>: reserved for future use
Note: <instance> parameter can be setted only if <state> parameter of
#STTA is set to 0, otherwise the set command returns ERROR.
Note: an ERROR is issued if <UNUSED_1> and <UNUSED_2>
parameters are set with a value different from 0.
AT#STACFG?
Read command returns the current settings of parameters in the format:
# STACFG:<instance>,0,0
AT#STACFG=?
Test command returns the supported values for the #STACFG
parameters
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 384 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.15.
Phonebook AT Commands
5.1.6.15.1. Read Group Entries - #CPBGR
#CPBGR- Read Group Entries
AT#CPBGR=
<index1>
[,<index2>]
SELINT 2
Execution command returns Grouping information Alpha String (GAS) USIM file
entries in location number range <index1>...<index2>. If <index2> is omitted,
only location <index1> is returned. These strings are the names used for groups
an ADN entry could belong to.
Parameters:
<index1> - integer type, value in the range of location numbers of GAS.
<index2> - integer type, value in the range of location numbers of GAS.
The response format is:
[#CPBGR: <index1>,<text>[<CR><LF>
#CPBGR: <index2>,<text>[…]]]
where:
<indexn> - the location number of the GAS entry
<text> - the alphanumeric text associated to the entry
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters <indexn>
and the maximum length of <text> field, in the format:
AT#CPBGR=?
#CPBGR: (<minIndex> - <maxIndex>),<tlength>
where:
<minIndex> - the minimum <index> number, integer type
<maxIndex>- the maximum <index> number, integer type
<tlength> - maximum <text> field length, integer type
5.1.6.15.2. Write Group Entries - #CPBGW
#CPBGW - Write Group Entry
AT#CPBGW=
<index>,<text>
SELINT 2
Execution command writes Grouping information Alpha String (GAS) USIM file entry
in location number <index>.
Parameters:
<index> - integer type, value in the range of location numbers of the GAS file.
<text> - the text associated to the entry, string type
Note: If record number <index> already exists, it will be overwritten.
AT#CPBGW=?
Test command returns location range supported by the current storage as a
compound value, and maximum length of <text> field. The format is:
+CPBGW: (list of supported <index>s),<tlength>
where:
<tlength> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of field <text> in
bytes; actual maximum number of characters that can be stored depends upon
<text> coding (see +CSCS)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 385 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.
GNSS AT Commands
5.1.6.16.1. GNSS Receiver Configuration
5.1.6.16.1.1. GNSS Device Type Set – AT$GPSD
$GPSD - GNSS Device Type Set
AT$GPSD=
<device_type>
[,<sub_device_type>]
SELINT 2
Set command defines which GNSS receiver is connected to the module. It
reserves the Serial port #1 of the module (TRACE) to receive the data
stream coming from the attached GNSS module.
Parameter:
<device type>
0 - none; the serial port is not connected to the GNSS device and available
for standard use
1 - currently has no meaning, maintained for backward compatibility
2 - serial port connected to the GNSS serial port: controlled mode. This
configuration is for SiRF StarIV-based GNSS modules support only (JF2FLASH, JF2-ROM and JF2-ROM+EEPROM)
3 - serial port connected to the GNSS serial port: controlled mode. This
configuration is for SiRF StarIV-based GNSS modules support only (JN3FLASH, JN3-ROM and JN3-ROM+EEPROM).
4 - serial port connected to the GNSS serial port: controlled mode. This
configuration is for ST TeseoII-based GNSS modules support only (SL869)
5 - serial port connected to the GNSS serial port: controlled mode. This
configuration is for SiRF StarV-based GNSS modules support only (SE868V2)
6 - serial port connected to the GNSS serial port: controlled mode. This
configuration is for MediaTek MT3333-based GNSS modules support only
(e.g. SL871)
<sub_device type>
0 - Flash device: Flash based module (default).
1 - ROM device: ROM based module.
2 - ROM + EEPROM (or SPI Flash) device: EEPROM (or SPI Flash) based
module.
Note: The <sub_device type> can be used with SiRF Star-based GNSS
modules (JF2/JN3/SE868-V2) only, i.e. when AT$GPSD=2, AT$GPSD=3 or
AT$GPSD=5.
AT$GPSD?
Read command reports the current value of <device_type> and
<sub_device_type> parameters, in the format:
$GPSD: <device_type>,<sub_device_type>
AT$GPSD=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter
<device_type>,<sub_device_type>
Example
AT$GPSD=0
OK
AT$GPSD=2,1
OK
AT$GPSD=4,2
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 386 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSD - GNSS Device Type Set
ERROR
Note
SELINT 2
The current setting is stored through AT$GPSSAV
5.1.6.16.1.2. GPIO Configuration for GNSS Control – AT$GPSGPIO
$GPSGPIO – GPIO Configuration for GNSS Control
AT$GPSGPIO=
<on_off>,
<system_on>,
<boot>,
<reset>
AT$GPSGPIO?
SELINT 2
Execution command sets the GPIO pins to be used to drive JF2 (SE868),
JN3 (SL868), SL869, SE868-V2 and SL871 GNSS modules.
Parameters:
<on_off> GPIO pin number to be used to drive the
JF2/JN3/SL869/SE868-V2’s ON-OFF signal (default = 1)
<system_on> - GPIO pin number to be used to drive the JF2/SE868-V2’s
SYSTEM-ON signal (default = 2)
<boot> - GPIO pin number to be used to drive the JF2-Flash/JN3Flash/SL869’s BOOT signal (default = 3)
<reset> - GPIO pin number to be used to drive the JF2-Flash/JN3-Flash’s
RESET signal (default = 4)
Read command reports the currently selected configuration in the format:
$GPSGPIO: <on_off>,<system_on>,<boot>,<reset
AT$GPSGPIO=?
Test command reports supported range of values for parameters <on_off>,
<system_on>, <boot> and <reset>
Note: the extended GPIO range is reported along with the available
customer GPIO range.
Example
- For a JF2-Flash (AT$GPSD=2,0):
AT$GPSGPIO=4,5,6,7
OK
AT$GPSGPIO?
$GPSGPIO: 4,5,6,7
OK
- For a JF2-ROM (AT$GPSD=2,1):
AT$GPSGPIO=4,5,0,0
OK
OR
AT$GPSGPIO=4,5,6,7
OK
AT$GPSGPIO?
$GPSGPIO: 4,5,0,0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 387 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSGPIO – GPIO Configuration for GNSS Control
SELINT 2
- For a JF3-ROM (AT$GPSD=3,1):
AT$GPSGPIO=4,0,0,0
OK
OR
AT$GPSGPIO=4,5,6,7
OK
AT$GPSGPIO?
$GPSGPIO: 4,0,0,0
OK
- Set Command to configure GPIOs from extended GPIO range:
AT$GPSGPIO=131,132,130,128
OK
- Test Command showing extended GPIO range:
AT$GPSGPIO=?
$GPSGPIO: (1-8,128-131),(1-8,132-133),(1-8,128-131),(1-8,128-131)
OK
Note
The GPIO configuration specified through this command must be coherent
with the specific GNSS module that has to be used, i.e. the configuration
specified through the AT$GPSD command. Therefore the GPIOs
corresponding to unnecessary signals (e.g. <system_on>, <boot> and
<reset> for a JN3-ROM) should be set to zero: this allows to reserve and use
the minimum number of GPIOs.
See the Hardware User Guide to check the number of available GPIO pins.
The GPIO configuration correctness and functionality (i.e. possible conflicts
with the GPIO configuration applied through AT#GPIO) are under the
customer’s sole responsibility.
If any of the V24 signals has been previously configured as GPIO through
AT#V24CFG, it can be set by the extended GPIO range (GPIO # from 128 to
133) to drive the external GNSS receiver.
Extended GPIOs and V24 signals correspondence is shown below:
GPIO #128  DCD
GPIO #129  CTS
GPIO #130  RING
GPIO #131  DSR
GPIO #132  DTR
GPIO #133  RTS
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 388 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSGPIO – GPIO Configuration for GNSS Control
SELINT 2
See the Example section above for an example on how to set such GPIOs.
An ERROR is returned whenever trying to set a GPIO, from the extended
GPIO range, its corresponding V24 signal has not been previously
configured as GPIO through AT#V24CFG.
The current GPIO configuration can be stored through AT$GPSSAV.
The Command is available in “Controlled Mode” only
5.1.6.16.1.3. Set the GNSS Serial Port Speed – AT$GPSSERSPEED
$GPSSERSPEED – Set the GNSS Serial Port Speed
AT$GPSSERSPEED=
<speed>
SELINT 2
Execution command sets the GNSS serial port communication speed.
Parameters:
<speed> - 4800(default)
9600
AT$GPSSERSPEED?
Read command returns the selected serial speed in the format
$GPSSERSPEED: <speed>
AT$GPSSERSPEED=?
Test command returns the available range for <speed>
Example
AT$GPSSERSPEED = 4800
OK
Note
This command can be used with SiRF-based GNSS modules, such as JF2,
JN3 and SE868-V2 (AT$GPSD=2, AT$GPSD=2,1, AT$GPSD=2,2,
AT$GPSD=3, AT$GPSD=3,1, AT$GPSD=3,2 or AT$GPSD=5,2), and
MT3333-based GNSS modules such as SL871 (AT$GPSD=6).
The current setting is stored through $GPSSAV.
The module must be restarted to use the new configuration.
5.1.6.16.1.4. GNSS Controller Power Management – AT$GPSP
$GPSP – GNSS Controller Power Management
AT$GPSP=<status>
SELINT 2
Set command allows to manage power-up or down of the GNSS controller
Parameter:
<status>
0 - GNSS controller is powered down
1 - GNSS controller is powered up
\AT$GPSP?
Read command reports the current value of the <status> parameter, in the
format:
$GPSP: <status>
The <status> parameter does not report the real power status of the GNSS
module but only the value set through the set command above. The <status>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 389 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSP – GNSS Controller Power Management
SELINT 2
parameter, once stored through the AT$GPSSAV command, specifies the
power status of the GNSS module (ON or OFF) at system start-up.
AT$GPSP=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter
<status>
Example
AT$GPSP=0
OK
Note
The command is available in “controlled mode” only.
The current setting is stored through $GPSSAV
5.1.6.16.1.5. GNSS Antenna LNA Control – AT$GPSAT
$GPSAT – GNSS Antenna LNA Control
AT$GPSAT=
<type>
AT$GPSAT?
SELINT 2
Set command selects the GNSS antenna used.
Parameter:
<type>
0 - Disable External GNSS Antenna LNA (default):
GNSS chip Internal LNA Gain Mode is High and
GPS_EXT_LNA_EN signal is Low
1 - Enable External GNSS Antenna LNA:
GNSS chip Internal LNA Gain Mode is Low and GPS_EXT_LNA_EN
signal is High
Read command returns the current value of <type> in the format:
$GPSAT: <type>
AT$GPSAT=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter <type>
Example
AT$GPSAT=1
OK
Note
The command is available in “controlled mode” only
This command is currently available for SiRFIV-based GNSS modules (JF2
and JN3) only, i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=2 or AT$GPSD=3.
This command must be issued only when the GNSS receiver is operating in
Full Power Mode (see $GPSPS), otherwise it might have no effect
Since the AT$GPSAT command performs a hardware reconfiguration of the
GNSS receiver, issuing two consecutive AT$GPSAT commands should be
avoided, otherwise the reconfiguration might fail: an ERROR is returned in
the latter case
If the <type> parameter has been set to 1, the External GNSS Antenna LNA
is directly driven by the GNSS receiver according to its current power mode
(i.e. the External GNSS Antenna LNA is turned off whenever the GNSS
receiver is in power saving mode)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 390 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSAT – GNSS Antenna LNA Control
SELINT 2
Please refer to the HW User Guide for the compatible GNSS antennas and
their usage
Note: the current setting is stored through $GPSSAV
5.1.6.16.1.6. Save GNSS Parameters Configuration – AT$GPSSAV
$GPSSAV - Save GNSS Parameters Configuration
SELINT 2
AT$GPSSAV
Execution command stores the current GNSS parameters in the NVM of the
GSM module.
AT$GPSSAV=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$GPSSAV
OK
Note
The module must be restarted to use the new configuration
5.1.6.16.1.7. Restore GNSS Parameters to Default – AT$GPSRST
$GPSRST - Restore GNSS Parameters To Default
SELINT 2
AT$GPSRST
Execution command resets the GNSS parameters to “Factory Default”
configuration and stores them in the NVM of the GSM module.
AT$GPSRST=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$GPSRST
OK
Note
The module must be restarted to use the new configuration
5.1.6.16.1.8. Set CPU Clock for ST TESEOII – AT$GPSSTCPUCLK
$GPSSTCPUCLK – Set CPU Clock for ST TESEOII
AT$GPSSTCPUCLK=
<cpu_clock>
SELINT 2
Set command allows changing the CPU Clock Frequency for ST TESEOIIbased GNSS modules (e.g. SL869, GE910-GNSS).
Parameter:
<cpu_clock>:
0 – 52 MHz
1 – 104 MHz
2 – 156 MHz
3 – 208 MHz
Note: The <cpu_clock> setting is saved into TESEOII NVM and retained
until a NVM erase or a next firmware upgrade of the GNSS receiver is
performed.
AT$GPSSTCPUCLK?
Read command reports the current setting for the CPU Clock Frequency in
the format:
$GPSSTCPUCLK: <cpu_clock>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 391 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSSTCPUCLK – Set CPU Clock for ST TESEOII
SELINT 2
Note: An ERROR is returned if the CPU Clock Frequency has never been
changed.
AT$GPSSTCPUCLK=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the parameter
<cpu_clock>
Note
Note: This command can be used with ST TESEOII-based GNSS modules
only (AT$GPSD=4).
Please refer to the Software Application Note of the GNSS receiver used for
further information on the CPU Clock Frequency used by default.
5.1.6.16.1.9. GNSS 5Hz Navigation Mode – AT$GNSS5HZ
$GNSS5HZ – GNSS 5Hz Navigation Mode
AT$GNSS5HZ=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command allows enabling the 5Hz Navigation Mode on a SiRFStar V
Flash-based GNSS receiver (e.g. SE868-V3).
Parameter:
<mode>
0 – Disable 5Hz Navigation Mode (default)
1 – Enable 5Hz Navigation Mode
AT$GNSS5HZ?
Read command reports the current value of the <mode> parameter, in the
format:
$GNSS5HZ: <mode>
AT$GNSS5HZ=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter <mode>
Note
The command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 392 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.2. GNSS Power Saving Modes Management
5.1.6.16.2.1. Set the GNSS Module in Power Saving Mode – AT$GPSPS
$GPSPS - Set The GNSS Module In Power Saving Mode
AT$GPSPS=
<mode>
[,<PTF_Period>]
SELINT 2
Set command allows setting the GNSS module in Power saving mode.
Parameters:
<mode> - the GNSS receiver can operate in four power modes:
0 – Full Power Mode, power saving disabled (default). Full-power mode is
also known as Continuous Navigation mode. This is the most accurate
navigation mode and supports the most dynamic motion scenarios.
1 – TricklePower Mode. TricklePower mode is a duty cycled mode in which
the system selects a minimum rate of navigation solution updates and
minimizes average current.
2 – Push-To-Fix Mode. Push-to-Fix mode (PTF) is designed for
applications that require infrequent position reporting. The SiRF Star receiver
generally stays in the Hibernate system power state but wakes up
periodically to refresh position, time, ephemeris data and RTC calibration. A
pulse on the external ON_OFF line to the receiver acts as a position update
request.
3 – Micro Power Mode. Micro Power mode (MPM) is a very low power
maintenance mode that delivers continuous availability of the navigation
solution. It is intended for low dynamics applications. It continuously
maintains ephemeris data as well as a low level of uncertainty in the
estimates of position, time, and receiver clock error. It achieves this by
keeping the SiRF Star receiver in the Hibernate power state and leaving
Hibernate only as needed to maintain these conditions.
4 – SmartGNSS I Mode. SmartGNSS I autonomously manages GNSS
system usage based on signal conditions to save power. The adaptive
mechanism uses fewer system resources during strong signal conditions
and uses more resources during weak signal conditions in order to maintain
navigation performance.
5 – SmartGNSS II Mode. SmartGNSS II includes the benefits of
SmartGNSS I and achieves further power reduction by minimizing the usage
of the secondary GNSS constellation
<PTF_Period> - Push-To-Fix update period, numeric value in seconds;
when mode is Push-To-Fix, the receiver turns on periodically according to
this parameter (default value is 1800 sec). This parameter does have
meaning only when <mode>=2.
AT$GPSPS?
Read command returns the current power saving mode and push-to-fix
period, in the format:
$GPSPS: <mode>,<PTF_Period>
AT$GPSPS=?
Test command returns the available range for <mode> and <PTF_Period>
Note
Available in “controlled mode” only
Push-To-Fix and Micro Power modes support is not available for JN3
because it does not have an ON_OFF input. Therefore, when AT$GPSD=3,
only Full Power and TricklePower modes are supported. In addition, in this
case, the <PTF_Period> parameter is accepted but not used.
Micro Power Mode support is not currently available for SE868-V2.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 393 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSPS - Set The GNSS Module In Power Saving Mode
SELINT 2
SmartGNSS I and SmartGNSS II Modes are available on SiRF Star V Flashbased
GNSS receivers only (e.g. SE868-V3)
This command is currently available for SiRF-based GNSS modules (JF2,
JN3, SE868-V2 and SE868-V3) only, i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=2,
AT$GPSD=3 or AT$GPSD=5.
5.1.6.16.2.2. Wake Up GNSS from Power Saving Mode – AT$GPSWK
$GPSWK - Wake Up GNSS From Power Saving Mode
SELINT 2
AT$GPSWK
Execution command allows waking the GNSS module up when a power
saving or standby mode has been previously enabled.
AT$GPSWK=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Note
Available in “controlled mode” only.
This command is currently available for Sirf-based and MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. JF2, JN3, SE868-V2 and SL871), i.e. whenever
is AT$GPSD=2, AT$GPSD=3, AT$GPSD=5 or AT$GPSD=6.
Notes for SiRF-based GNSS modules only:
If the GNSS module has been configured to work in TricklePower Mode, it
will start up, get a fix and then continue to work in power saving mode.
If the GNSS module has been configured to work in Push-To-Fix Mode,
issuing AT$GPSWK allows to wake it up before the Push-To-Fix update
period; once a new fix will be got, the GNSS module will return to Push-ToFix mode.
If the GNSS module has been configured to work in Micro Power Mode, it
will be set to Full Power Mode (same as issuing AT$GPSPS=0 command).
Notes for MediaTek MT3333-based GNSS modules only:
If the GNSS module has been configured to work in any of the supported
Standby modes, the current Standby mode will be disabled.
5.1.6.16.2.3. Set the Periodic Power Saving Mode for MTK – AT$GPSMTKPPS
$GPSMTKPPS - Set the Periodic Power Saving Mode for MTK
AT$GPSMTKPPS=
<mode>[,
<runtime>,
<sleeptime>,
<second_runtime>,
<second_sleeptime>]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command allows setting the MediaTek MT3333-based GNSS modules’
Periodic Power Saving Mode settings.
Parameters:
<mode> - the GNSS receiver can operate in five different Periodic Power
Saving modes:
0 – Normal mode (Periodic Power Saving mode disabled)
1 – Periodic Backup mode
2 – Periodic Standby mode
8 – AlwaysLocate™ standby mode
9 – AlwaysLocate™ backup mode
<runtime> - Full Power (or Normal) Period in milliseconds
1000...518400000
Page 394 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSMTKPPS - Set the Periodic Power Saving Mode for MTK
SELINT 2
<sleeptime> - Low Power Period (backup/standby) in milliseconds
1000... 518400000
<second_runtime> - Full Power (or Normal) Period in milliseconds for
extended acquisition if GNSS acquisition fails during <runtime>
0 – Disable
1000...518400000 – Enable (should be larger than the set <runtime> value)
<second_sleeptime> - Low Power Period (backup/standby) in milliseconds for
extended sleep if GNSS acquisition fails during <runtime>
0 – Disable
1000...518400000
Note: The <runtime>, <sleeptime>, <second_runtime>,
<second_sleeptime> parameters must be set if <mode> is 1 or 2 otherwise
ERROR is returned
Note: The <runtime>, <sleeptime>, <second_runtime>,
<second_sleeptime> parameters must be omitted if <mode> is 0, 8 or 9
otherwise ERROR is returned
Note: <mode> values different from 0 can be set only when the GNSS module
is powered ON and operating in Full (or Normal) Power mode.
Note: the <mode> value 0 can be set only when the GNSS module is operating
in any of the Periodic Power Saving modes. Issuing AT$GPSMTKPPS=0 the
GNSS module switches back to Full (or Normal) Power mode as soon as it
wakes up according to the <sleeptime> and <second_sleeptime> values set.
AT$GPSMTKPPS?
Read command returns the current Periodic Power Saving mode in the format:
$GPSMTKPPS:
<mode>[,<runtime>,<sleeptime>,<second_runtime>,<second_sleeptime>]
AT$GPSMTKPPS=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<mode>,<runtime>,<sleeptime>,<second_runtime>,<second_sleeptime>
Note
Available in “controlled mode” only.
This command is currently available for MediaTek MT3333-based GNSS
modules (e.g. SL871) only, i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
5.1.6.16.2.4. Set Standby Mode for MTK – AT$GPSMTKSTDBY
$GPSMTKSTDBY - Set Standby Mode for MTK
AT$GPSMTKSTDBY=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command allows setting the MediaTek MT3333-based GNSS modules in
Standby mode.
Parameters:
<mode> - the GNSS receiver can operate in three Standby modes:
0 – Standby Mode disabled (default). This value cannot be set and may be
reported by the read command only.
1 – Stop Mode
2 – Sleep Mode
AT$GPSMTKSTDBY?
Read command returns the current Standby mode in the format:
$GPSMTKSTDBY: <mode>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 395 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSMTKSTDBY - Set Standby Mode for MTK
SELINT 2
AT$GPSMTKSTDBY=?
Test command returns the available range for <mode>
Note
This command is available in “controlled mode” only, for MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. SL871), i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
Stop or Sleep Standby modes can be set only when the GNSS module is
powered ON and operating in full power mode.
The GNSS module can be forced to exit from the standby modes through the
AT$GPSWK command.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 396 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.3. GNSS General Management
5.1.6.16.3.1. GNSS Software Version – AT$GPSSW
$GPSSW - GNSS Software Version
AT$GPSSW
SELINT 2
Execution command returns the GNSS module software version in the
format:
$GPSSW: <sw version>
AT$GPSSW?
Read command has the same meaning as the Execution command
AT$GPSSW=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
For SiRF IV-based modules (e.g. JF2, JN3 and GE864-GPS):
AT$GPSSW
$GPSSW: GSD4e_4.0.2-P1 05/26/2010 146
OK
For STM TeseoII-based modules (e.g. SL869 and GE910-GNSS):
AT$GPSSW
$GPSSW: SL869 v3.0.0.1 -STD -N96
OK
For SiRF V-based modules (e.g. SE868-V2):
AT$GPSSW
$GPSSW: 5xp__5.5.2-R32+5xpt_5.5.2-R32
OK
For MT3333-based modules (e.g. SL871):
AT$GPSSW
$GPSSW: AXN_3.60_3333_14080800,C012,MT33-1.,1.106
OK
Note
The command is available in “controlled mode” only.
The GNSS Module software version is available in few seconds at first GPS
module startup
5.1.6.16.3.2. GNSS Reset – AT$GPSR
$GPSR - GNSS Reset
AT$GPSR=
<reset_type>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Execution command allows to reset the GNSS controller.
Parameter:
<reset_type>
0 – Factory reset: this option clears all the GNSS memory including Clock
Drift, Extended Ephemeris files stored into flash memory and applied
software patch in case a ROM-based receiver is being used.
1 – Coldstart (No Almanac, No Ephemeris): this option clears all data that is
currently stored in the internal memory of the GNSS receiver including Last
Position, Almanac, Ephemeris and Time. However, the stored Clock Drift
and Extended Ephemeris are retained.
2 – Warmstart (No ephemeris): this option clears Ephemeris and Last
Position only. Almanac and Extended Ephemeris are retained.
3 – Hotstart (with stored Almanac and Ephemeris): the GNSS receiver
restarts by using all data that is currently stored in the internal memory of the
Page 397 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSR - GNSS Reset
SELINT 2
GNSS receiver: valid Almanac, Ephemeris and Extended Ephemeris are
therefore retained and used.
AT$GPSR=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter
<reset_type>
Example
AT$GPSR=0
OK
Note
The command is available in “controlled mode” only
This command must be issued only when the GNSS receiver is operating in
Full Power Mode (see $GPSPS), otherwise it might have no effect.
Since the Factory Reset (<reset_type>=0) performs a hardware
reconfiguration of the GNSS receiver, issuing two consecutive AT$GPSR
commands should be avoided, otherwise the reconfiguration might fail: an
ERROR is returned in the latter case.
5.1.6.16.3.3. Direct Access to GNSS Module – AT$GPSCON
$GPSCON - Direct Access to GNSS Module
SELINT 2
AT$GPSCON
Execution command allows setting the cellular module in transparent mode
in order to have a direct access to the serial port of the GNSS module. The
cellular module will directly transfer the received data to the GNSS module
(and vice-versa), without checking or elaborating it.
AT$GPSCON=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Note
The command can be used in “controlled mode” only.
In case of an incoming call from cellular module, this will be visible on the
RING pin of serial port.
The escape sequence is “+++”.
The suggested Serial Port Speed for SirfIV-based modules (e.g. JF2 and
JN3) is 57600.
The suggested Serial Port Speed for SirfV-based modules (e.g. SE868-V2)
is 115200.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 398 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.4. GNSS Positioning Information
5.1.6.16.4.1. Unsolicited NMEA Data Configuration – AT$GPSNMUN
$GPSNMUN - Unsolicited NMEA Data Configuration
AT$GPSNMUN=
<enable>
[,<GGA>,<GLL>,
<GSA>,<GSV>,
<RMC>,<VTG >]
AT$GPSNMUN?
SELINT 2
Set command allows to activate an Unsolicited stream of GNSS data
(in NMEA format) through the standard cellular module serial port and
defines which NMEA sentences will be relayed
Parameters:
<enable>
0 - NMEA data stream de-activated (default)
1 - NMEA data stream activated with the following unsolicited
response syntax:
$GPSNMUN: <NMEA SENTENCE><CR>
2 - NMEA data stream activated with the following unsolicited
response syntax:
<NMEA SENTENCE><CR>
3 - dedicated NMEA data stream; it is not possible to send AT
commands; with the escape sequence ‘+++’ the user can return to
command mode
<GGA> - Global Positioning System Fix Data
0 - disable (default)
1 - enable
<GLL> - Geographic Position - Latitude/Longitude
0 - disable (default)
1 - enable
<GSA> - GNSS DOP and Active Satellites
0 - disable (default)
1 - enable
<GSV> - GNSS Satellites in View
0 - disable (default)
1 - enable
<RMC> - Recommended Minimum Specific GNSS Data
0 - disable (default)
1 - enable
<VTG> - GNSS Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
0 - disable (default)
1 – enable
Read command returns whether the unsolicited GNSS NMEA data
stream is currently enabled or not, along with the current NMEA mask
configuration, in the format:
$GPSNMUN:<enable>,<GGA>,<GLL>,<GSA>,<GSV>,<RMC>,<VTG
>
AT$GPSNMUN=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<enable>, <GGA>, <GLL>, <GSA>, <GSV>, <RMC>, <VTG>
Example
Set the GSA as available sentence in the unsolicited message:
AT$GPSNMUN=2,0,0,1,0,0,0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 399 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSNMUN - Unsolicited NMEA Data Configuration
Turn-off the unsolicited mode:
SELINT 2
AT$GPSNMUN=0
OK
Read the current NMEA mask configuration:
AT$GPSNMUN?
$GPSNMUN: 2,0,0,1,0,0,0
OK
The unsolicited message will be:
$GPGSA,A,3,23,20,24,07,13,04,02,,,,,,2.4,1.6,1.8*3C
Reference
NMEA 0183 Specifications
Note
The command is available in “Controlled Mode” only
The available NMEA sentences and their talker (GN, GP and GL)
depend on the GNSS receiver used and its firmware configuration.
Please refer to the Software Application Note of the GNSS receiver
used for further information on the available NMEA data set.
SirfIV-based GNSS modules (e.g. JF2, JN3):
The fields PDOP and VDOP are not available
5.1.6.16.4.2. Get Acquired Position Information – AT$GPSACP
$GPSACP – Get Acquired Position Information
AT$GPSACP
SELINT 2
Execution command returns information about the latest GNSS position in
the format:
$GPSACP: <UTC>,<latitude>,<longitude>,<hdop>,<altitude>,
<fix>,<cog>,<spkm>,<spkn>,<date>,<nsat>
where:
<UTC> - UTC time (hhmmss.sss) referred to GGA sentence
<latitude> - format is ddmm.mmmm N/S (referred to GGA sentence)
where:
dd - degrees
00..90
mm.mmmm - minutes
00.0000..59.9999
N/S: North / South
<longitude> - format is dddmm.mmmm E/W (referred to GGA sentence)
where:
ddd - degrees
000..180
mm.mmmm - minutes
00.0000..59.9999
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 400 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSACP – Get Acquired Position Information
SELINT 2
E/W: East / West
<hdop> - x.x - Horizontal Diluition of Precision (referred to GGA sentence)
<altitude> - x.x Altitude - mean-sea-level (geoid) in meters (referred to GGA
sentence)
<fix> 0 or 1 - Invalid Fix
2 - 2D fix
3 - 3D fix
<cog> - ddd.mm - Course over Ground (degrees, True) (referred to VTG
sentence)
where:
ddd - degrees
000..360
mm - minutes
00..59
<spkm> - x.x Speed over ground (Km/hr) (referred to VTG sentence)
<spkn> - x.x- Speed over ground (knots) (referred to VTG sentence)
<date> - ddmmyy Date of Fix (referred to RMC sentence)
where:
dd - day
01..31
mm - month
01..12
yy - year
00..99 - 2000 to 2099
<nsat> - nn - Total number of satellites in use (referred to GGA sentence)
00..12
AT$GPSACP?
Read command has the same meaning as the Execution command
AT$GPSACP=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$GPSACP
$GPSACP:
122330.000,4542.8106N,01344.2720E,2.25,338.0,3,0.0,0.02,0.01,240613,0
4
OK
Note
If the GNSS receiver is turned off or its serial line is not physically connected
to the cellular module, the answer might be empty as shown below.
AT$GPSACP
$GPSACP:
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 401 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.4.3. GNSS Estimated Position Errors – AT$GNSSEPE
$GNSSEPE – GNSS Estimated Position Errors
AT$GNSSEPE?
SELINT 2
Read command reports the Estimated Horizontal and Vertical Position Errors
for the last GNSS position fix, for SiRF StarIV and SiRF StarV based GNSS
receivers, in the format:
$GNSSEPE: <ehpe>,<evpe>
Where:
<ehpe> - Estimated Horizontal Position Error in meters
<evpe> - Estimated Vertical Position Error in meters
AT$GNSSEPE=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Note
The command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
If a GNSS position fix has not been got yet, the answer will be as follows:
AT$GNSSEPE?
$GNSSEPE: 0.00,0.00
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 402 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.5. GNSS SiRFInstantFix™
5.1.6.16.5.1. GPS SiRFInstantFix™ – AT$GPSIFIX
$GPSIFIX – GPS SiRFInstantFix™
AT$GPSIFIX=
<enable>[,
<cgee>,
<sgee>[,
<update>]]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables SiRFInstantFix™ feature available on SiRF
StarIV based modules.
Parameters:
<enable> - SiRFInstantFix Usage
0 – Disable (default)
1 – Enable
<cgee> - Client Generated Extended Ephemeris (CGEE)
0 – Disable
1 – Enable (default)
<sgee> - Server Generated Extended Ephemeris (SGEE)
0 – Disable (default)
1 – Enable
<update> - SGEE File Update Mode
0 – Upon Aiding Data Requests coming from GPS chip
1..168 – Update rate in hours (168 is the max update rate in case of 7-days
SGEE files usage)
Note: If <enable>=0, the rest of parameters must be omitted otherwise
ERROR is returned
Note: If <enable>=1 and the rest of parameters is omitted, the default
configuration, or a previous stored one, is used
Note: If <sgee>=1, the <update> parameter must be set otherwise ERROR
is returned
Note: If <sgee>=1 the following URC is used to warn, according to the
<update> value, that the SGEE file has to be updated:
$SIFIXEV: SGEE File Update Requested
Note: If <sgee>=0, the <update> parameter must be omitted otherwise
ERROR is returned
AT$GPSIFIX?
Read command reports the currently selected SiRFInstantFix configuration
in the format:
$GPSIFIX: <enable>[,<cgee>,<sgee>[,<update>]]
AT$GPSIFIX=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<enable>, <cgee>, <sgee>,<update>
Example
AT$GPSIFIX=0
OK
AT$GPSIFIX=1,1,0
OK
Note
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SiRFInstantFix parameters are stored in NVM, along with all current GPS
parameters, if OK is returned (same as AT$GPSSAV).
Page 403 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSIFIX – GPS SiRFInstantFix™
SELINT 2
SiRFInstantFix default configuration may be restored by issuing the
AT$GPSRST command.
The Command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
5.1.6.16.5.2. GNSS SiRFInstantFix™ – AT$GNSSIFIX
$GNSSIFIX – GNSS SiRFInstantFix™
AT$GNSSIFIX=
<navsystem>,
<cgee>,
<sgee>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the SiRFInstantFix™ feature available on
SiRF StarV-based GNSS modules.
Parameters:
<navsystem> - Constellation for which the SiRFInstantFix™ feature has to
be enabled
0 – GPS
1 – GLONASS
<cgee> - Client Generated Extended Ephemeris (CGEE)
0 – Disable
1 – Enable
<sgee> - Server Generated Extended Ephemeris (SGEE)
0 – Disable
1 – Enable
Note: SE868-V2 firmware comes with CGEE and SGEE enabled by default
for both GPS and GLONASS constellations.
Note: if <sgee>=1 the following URC is used to warn, according to the
<navsystem> value, that the SGEE file has to be updated:
-
For GPS
$SIFIXEV: GPS SGEE File Update Requested
-
For GLONASS
$SIFIXEV: GLONASS SGEE File Update Requested
AT$GNSSIFIX?
Read command reports the current SiRFInstantFix™ configuration, for both
GPS and GLONASS, in the format:
$GNSSIFIX: 0,<cgee>,<sgee>
$GNSSIFIX: 1,<cgee>,<sgee>
AT$GNSSIFIX=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<navsystem>, <cgee>, <sgee>
Example
AT$GNSSIFIX=0,1,0
OK
AT$GNSSIFIX=1,1,1
OK
Note
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
The Command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
Page 404 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.5.3. Get SGEE File for SiRFInstantFix™ – AT$FTPGETIFIX
$FTPGETIFIX – Get SGEE File for SiRFInstantFix™
AT$FTPGETIFIX=
<filename>,
<filesize>
[,<navsystem>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during a FTP connection, opens a data
connection, downloads a SGEE file from the FTP server and injects it into
SiRF StarIV or StarV GNSS receiver.
Parameters:
<filename> - file name, string type
<filesize> - SGEE file size in bytes
<navsystem> - Constellation for which the SGEE file has to be downloaded
and injected
0 – GPS (default)
1 – GLONASS
Note: the <navsystem> parameter has a meaning for Sirf StarV-based
receivers (e.g. SE868-V2) only; if omitted, the default value will be used
(GPS).
Therefore, when a Sirf StarIV-based receiver is used, the <navsystem>
parameter is accepted but it does not have any effect.
AT$FTPGETIFIX=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$FTPGETIFIX="packedDifference.f2p3enc.ee",30970
OK
AT$FTPGETIFIX="packedDifference.f2p1enc.ee",10742
+CME ERROR: SGEE file is not newer than the last stored one
Note
Whenever a FTP connection has not been opened yet, an ERROR result
code is returned.
Whenever an error happens during the SGEE file injection stage, an ERROR
result code is returned
In this case the possible <err> values reported by +CME ERROR (numeric
format followed by verbose format) may be:
920
921
922
923
SGEE update initialization stage failed
SGEE file is not newer than the last stored one
SGEE update generic error
SGEE file open error
The command closure should always be handled by the customer
application. In order to avoid download stall situations a timeout should be
implemented by the application.
The Command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 405 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.5.4. Get SGEE File for SiRFInstantFix™ – AT$HTTPGETIFIX
$HTTPGETIFIX – Get SGEE File for SiRFInstantFix™
AT$HTTPGETIFIX=
< prof_id >,
<filesize>
[,<navsystem>]
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during a HTTP connection, downloads a SGEE
file from the HTTP server and injects it into the SiRF StarIV or StarV GNSS
receiver, after a HTTP query using a specific Profile Id, GET option, SGEE
file name has been sent.
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier. Range: 0-2
<filesize> - SGEE file size in bytes
<navsystem> - Constellation for which the SGEE file has to be downloaded
and injected
0 – GPS (default)
1 – GLONASS
Note: the <navsystem> parameter has a meaning for Sirf StarV-based
receivers (e.g. SE868-V2) only; if omitted, the default value will be used
(GPS).
Therefore, when a Sirf StarIV-based receiver is used, the <navsystem>
parameter is accepted but it does not have any effect.
AT$HTTPGETIFIX=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$HTTPGETIFIX=0,30970
OK
AT$HTTPGETIFIX=0,10742
+CME ERROR: SGEE file is not newer than the last stored one
Note
Whenever a HTTP configuration has not been done yet, an ERROR result
code is returned.
Whenever an error happens during the SGEE file injection stage, an ERROR
result code is returned
In this case the possible <err> values reported by +CME ERROR (numeric
format followed by verbose format) may be:
920
921
922
923
SGEE update initialization stage failed
SGEE file is not newer than the last stored one
SGEE update generic error
SGEE file open error
The Command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 406 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.16.6. GNSS Patch Management
5.1.6.16.6.1. Write Patch on Flash – AT$WPATCH
$WPATCH – Write Patch on Flash
AT$WPATCH=
<patch_file_name>,
<size>
SELINT 2
Execution command allows storing a SiRF software patch onto the module’s
flash memory.
Parameters:
<patch_file_name> - name of the file in NVM, string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive).
<size> - file size in bytes
The file should be sent using RAW ASCII file transfer.
It is important to set properly the port settings. In particular:
Flow control: hardware.
Baud rate: 115200 bps
The device shall prompt a three character sequence:
<greater_than><greater_than><greater_than>
(IRA 62, 62, 62)
then the command line is terminated with a <CR>; after that a file can be sent
from TE, sized <size> bytes.
The operations completes when all the bytes are received.
If writing ends successfully, the response is OK; otherwise an error code is
reported.
AT$WPATCH=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$WPATCH = “GSD4E_4.1.2.pd2",5472
>>> here the prompt is received: depending on your editor settings it’s possible
that the prompt overrides the above line; then type or send the patch, sized 54
bytes
OK
Patch has been stored.
Note
Note: This command can be used with SIRF ROM-based GPS modules only
(AT$GPSD=2,1, AT$GPSD=2,2, AT$GPSD=3,1, AT$GPSD=3,2 or
AT$GPSD=5,2).
Note: The patch file must have a “.pd2” or “.pd3” (AT$GPSD=5,2) extension.
5.1.6.16.6.2. Enable Patch – AT$EPATCH
$EPATCH – Enable Patch
SELINT 2
AT$EPATCH=
Execution command allows enabling the usage of a SiRF software patch saved
[<patch_file_name>] onto the module’s flash memory.
Parameters:
<patch_file_name> - name of the file in NVM, string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive).
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 407 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$EPATCH – Enable Patch
SELINT 2
The execution command returns OK but the patching is confirmed by the
following unsolicited:
- “Patch Manager: Patched”
Other unsolicited messages can be due to errors occurred during the patching
procedure or patch storage errors:
-“Patch Manager: Error opening Patch File”
-“Patch Manager: Error processing Patch File”
-“Patch Manager: Error on Start Request”
-“Patch Manager: Error on Load Request”
-“Patch Manager: Error on Exit Request”
AT$EPATCH?
Read command displays the patch currently in use in the format:
$EPATCH: <patch_file_name>
AT$EPATCH=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$EPATCH = “GSD4E_4.1.2.pd2"
OK
Patch Manager: Patched.
- The SiRF GNSS module has been patched
Note
This command can be used with SIRF ROM-based GNSS modules only
(AT$GPSD=2,1, AT$GPSD=2,2, AT$GPSD=3,1, AT$GPSD=3,2 or
AT$GPSD=5,2).
The patch file must have a “.pd2” or “.pd3” (AT$GPSD=5,2) extension.
A previously applied patch can be removed from the GNSS Patch RAM by
issuing a Factory Reset or by powering the GNSS module down and removing
the VBatt.
However, if automatic patch application hasn’t been disabled, the patch will be
automatically reapplied.
If the <patch_file_name> is omitted, the automatic patch application, at the next
startup of the cellular module, is disabled.
However, the current patch remains applied until it will be not removed as
explained above.
The configuration specified through AT$EPATCH can be saved by means of the
AT$GPSSAV command.
The “AT$EPATCH” command returns ERROR.
5.1.6.16.6.3. List Available Patch – AT$LPATCH
$LPATCH – List Available Patch
SELINT 2
AT$LPATCH
Execution command displays the available SiRF software patch saved onto the
module’s flash memory.
AT$LPATCH=?
Test command returns the OK result code
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 408 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$LPATCH – List Available Patch
Example
SELINT 2
AT$LPATCH
$LPATCH: "GSD4E_4.1.2.pd2",5472
OK
Note
This command can be used with SIRF ROM-based GPS modules only
(AT$GPSD=2,1, AT$GPSD=2,2, AT$GPSD=3,1, AT$GPSD=3,2 or
AT$GPSD=5,2).
The patch file must have a “.pd2” or “.pd3” (AT$GPSD=5,2) extension.
5.1.6.16.6.4. Delete Patch from NVM – AT$DPATCH
$DPATCH – Delete Patch from NVM
AT$DPATCH=
<patch_file_name>
SELINT 2
Execution command deletes a SiRF software patch stored onto the module’s
flash memory.
Parameters:
<patch_file_name> - name of the file in NVM, string type (max 16 chars, case
sensitive).
The execution command returns OK.
AT$DPATCH=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$DPATCH = “GSD4E_4.1.2.pd2"
OK
Note
This command can be used with SIRF ROM-based GNSS modules only
(AT$GPSD=2,1, AT$GPSD=2,2, AT$GPSD=3,1 AT$GPSD=3,2 or
AT$GPSD=5,2).
5.1.6.16.7. GNSS ST-AGPSTM
5.1.6.16.7.1. Enable ST-AGPSTM Usage – AT$GPSSTAGPS
$GPSSTAGPS – Enable ST-AGPSTM Usage
AT$GPSSTAGPS=
<enable>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the STAGPS™ feature available on ST TESEOIIbased GNSS modules.
Parameters:
<enable>:
0 – Disable
1 – Enable
AT$GPSSTAGPS?
Read command reports the currently selected STAGPS™ configuration in the
format:
$GPSSTAGPS: <enable>
AT$GPSSTAGPS=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter <enable>
Page 409 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$GPSSTAGPS – Enable ST-AGPSTM Usage
Note
SELINT 2
This command can be used with ST TESEOII-based GNSS modules only
(AT$GPSD=4).
Since the current STAGPS™ configuration is not saved in NVM this command
has to be issued at every power-cycle of both the GNSS receiver and the GSM
module.
5.1.6.16.7.2. Get ST-AGPS Seed File for ST-AGPS™ – AT$HTTPGETSTSEED
$HTTPGETSTSEED – Get ST-AGPS Seed File for ST-AGPS™
AT$HTTPGETSTSEED=
<prof_id>,
<filesize>
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during a HTTP connection, downloads a STAGPS seed file from the HTTP server and creates a decoded version of the
file itself.
The decoded seed file is stored onto the module's NVM and can be injected
later on by means of the AT$INJECTSTSEED command.
The ST-AGPS seed file size must be retrieved, before issuing the
AT$HTTPGETSTSEED command, by sending a HTTP query using a
specific Profile Id, GET option and the ST-AGPS seed file name.
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier. Range: 0-2
<filesize> - ST-AGPS seed file size in bytes
AT$HTTPGETSTSEED=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$HTTPGETSTSEED=0,2199
OK
Note
The Command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
Whenever a HTTP configuration has not been done yet, an ERROR result
code is returned.
5.1.6.16.7.3. Inject Decoded ST-AGPS Seed File – AT$INJECTSTSEED
$INJECTSTSEED – Inject Decoded ST-AGPS Seed File
AT$INJECTSTSEED
SELINT 2
Execution command injects a decoded ST-AGPS seed, previously
downloaded and stored onto the module's NVM, into TESEOII-based GNSS
receivers.
Note: whenever an error happens during the decoded ST-AGPS seed file
injection stage, an ERROR result code is returned
In this case the possible <err> values reported by +CME ERROR (numeric
format followed by verbose format) may be:
970
971
972
973
974
STAGPS Seed file open error
STAGPS Seed file exceeds the maximum allowed one
STAGPS pre-configuration error
STAGPS seed injection error
STAGPS re-configuration error
Note: a decoded ST-AGPS seed can be injected only if the GNSS receiver
has a valid UTC time from a previous fix, i.e. it is in a warm start condition.
AT$INJECTSTSEED=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the OK result code
Page 410 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$INJECTSTSEED – Inject Decoded ST-AGPS Seed File
Note
SELINT 2
The command is available in “Controlled Mode” only.
5.1.6.16.8. GNSS MTK EPO
5.1.6.16.8.1. Get EPO File for MT EPO Aiding – AT$HTTPGETEPO
$HTTPGETEPO – Get EPO File for MT EPO Aiding
AT$HTTPGETEPO=
<prof_id>,
<filesize>
SELINT 2
Execution command, issued during a HTTP connection, downloads an EPO
file from the HTTP server and stores it on the cellular module’s NVM for
future use.
The EPO file can be injected later on by means of the AT$INJECTEPO
command.
The EPO file size must be retrieved, before issuing the AT$HTTPGETEPO
command, by sending a HTTP query using a specific Profile Id, GET option
and the EPO file name.
Parameters:
<prof_id> - Numeric parameter indicating the profile identifier. Range: 0-2
<filesize> - EPO file size in bytes
Note: whenever a HTTP configuration has not been done yet, an ERROR
result code is returned
AT$HTTPGETEPO=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$HTTPGETEPO=0,129024
OK
Note
This command is available in “controlled mode” only, for MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. SL871), i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
5.1.6.16.8.2. Inject EPO Aiding File – AT$INJECTEPO
$INJECTEPO – Inject EPO Aiding File
AT$INJECTEPO
SELINT 2
Execution command injects an EPO file, previously downloaded and stored
onto the cellular module's NVM, into MT3333-based GNSS receivers (e.g.
SL871).
Note: whenever an error happens during the EPO file injection stage, an
ERROR result code is returned.
In this case the possible <err> values reported by +CME ERROR (numeric
format followed by verbose format) may be:
980
985
986
987
988
GNSS file open error
Invalid EPO file
EPO MTK binary configuration error
EPO injection error
EPO NMEA configuration error
Note: only EPO files up to 14-days validity are currently supported.
Therefore, if a 30-days EPO file is used, only data for the first 14 days will be
injected.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 411 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$INJECTEPO – Inject EPO Aiding File
SELINT 2
AT$INJECTEPO=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Note
This command is available in “controlled mode” only, for MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. SL871), i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
5.1.6.16.8.3. Query EPO Data Status – AT$QUERYEPO
$QUERYEPO – Query EPO Data Status
AT$QUERYEPO
SELINT 2
Execution command queries the EPO data status, in MT3333-based GNSS
receivers (e.g. SL871), whose answer will be in the form:
$QUERYEPO: <SET>,<FWN>,<FTOW>,<LWN>,<LTOW>,
<FCWN>,<FCTOW>,<LCWN>,<LCTOW>
Where:
<SET> - Total number of EPO data set stored into the GNSS receiver. The EPO
prediction for one day is made up of 4 EPO data sets.
<FWN> - GPS week number of the first set of EPO data stored into the GNSS
receiver.
<FTOW> - GPS TOW of the first set of EPO data stored into the GNSS receiver.
<LWN> - GPS week number of the last set of EPO data stored into the GNSS
receiver.
<LTOW> - GPS TOW of the last set of EPO data stored into the GNSS receiver.
<FCWN> - GPS week number of the first set of EPO data currently used.
<FCTOW> - GPS TOW of the first set of EPO data currently used.
<LCWN> - GPS week number of the last set of EPO data currently used.
<LCTOW> - GPS TOW of the last set of EPO data currently used.
AT$QUERYEPO=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Example
AT$QUERYEPO
$QUERYEPO: 56,1832,259200,1834,237600,1832,367200,1832,367200
OK
Note
This command is available in “controlled mode” only, for MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. SL871), i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
5.1.6.16.8.4. Delete EPO Data – AT$CLEAREPO
$CLEAREPO – Delete EPO Data
SELINT 2
AT$CLEAREPO
Execution command deletes all the EPO data from MT3333-based GNSS
receivers (e.g. SL871).
AT$CLEAREPO=?
Test command returns the OK result code
Note
This command is available in “controlled mode” only, for MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. SL871), i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
5.1.6.16.8.5. Enable EASY – AT$EASY
$EASY – Enable EASY
AT$EASY=<enable>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command allows enabling or disabling the EASY feature on MT3333-based
GNSS receivers (e.g. SL871).
Page 412 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
$EASY – Enable EASY
SELINT 2
Parameters:
<enable> - Enable/Disable the EASY feature
0 – Disable
1 – Enable
AT$EASY?
Read command reports the current EASY status in the format:
$EASY: <enable>,<extension_day>
Where:
<extension_day> - Number of days for which the prediction has been already
done
0 – EASY enabled and prediction not finished yet or not available
1..3 – EASY enabled and prediction finished for 1, 2 and 3 days respectively
AT$EASY=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameter <enable>
Note
This command is available in “controlled mode” only, for MediaTek MT3333based GNSS modules (e.g. SL871), i.e. whenever is AT$GPSD=6.
The EASY feature is supported starting from SL871 firmware version
AXN_3.60_3333_14080800,C012,MT33-1.,1.106
The default EASY configuration depends on the specific SL871 firmware
version used.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 413 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.
Audio Commands
5.1.6.17.1. Audio Basic Configuration
5.1.6.17.1.1. Select Ringer Sound - #SRS
#SRS - Select Ringer Sound
AT#SRS=
[<n>,<tout>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets the ringer sound.
Parameters:
<n> - ringing tone
0 - current ringing tone
1..max - ringing tone number, where max can be read by issuing the Test
command AT#SRS=?.
<tout> - ringing tone playing timer in units of seconds.
0 - ringer is stopped (if present) and current ringer sound is set.
1..60 - ringer sound playing for <tout> seconds and, if <n> > 0, ringer sound <n>
is set as default ringer sound.
Note: when the command is issued with <n> > 0 and <tout> > 0, the <n> ringing
tone is played for <tout> seconds and stored as default ringing tone.
Note: if command is issued with <n> > 0 and <tout> = 0, the playing of the ringing
is stopped (if present) and <n> ringing tone is set as current.
Note: if command is issued with <n> = 0 and <tout> > 0 then the current ringing
tone is played for <tout> seconds.
Note: if both <n> and <tout> are 0 then the default ringing tone is set as current
and ringing is stopped.
Note: If all parameters are omitted then the behaviour of Set command is the same
as Read command
AT#SRS?
Read command reports current selected ringing and its status in the form:
#SRS: <n>,<status>
where:
<n> - ringing tone number
1..max
<status> - ringing status
0 - selected but not playing
1 - currently playing
AT#SRS=?
Test command reports the supported values for the parameters <n> and <tout>
5.1.6.17.1.2. Select Ringer Path - #SRP
#SRP - Select Ringer Path
AT#SRP=[<n>]
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<n>: (0-3)
AT#SRP?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Read command reports the set value of the parameter <n> in the format:
Page 414 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SRP - Select Ringer Path
#SRP: <n>.
SELINT 2
AT#SRP=?
Test command reports the supported values for the parameter <n>.
Example
AT#SRP=?
#SRP: (0-3)
OK
AT#SRP=3
OK
5.1.6.17.1.3. Handsfree Microphone Gain - #HFMICG
#HFMICG - Handsfree Microphone Gain
SELINT 2
AT#HFMICG=
[<level>]
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
AT#HFMICG?
Read command returns the current set value for parameter <level>, in
the format:
Parameter:
<level>: 0..7 - (factory default = 4)
#HFMICG: <level>
AT#HFMICG=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<level>.
5.1.6.17.1.4. Handset Microphone Gain - #HSMICG
#HSMICG - Handset Microphone Gain
SELINT 2
AT#HSMICG=
[<level>]
Set command sets the handset microphone input gain
AT#HSMICG?
Read command returns the current set value for parameter <level>, in
the format:
Parameter:
<level>: handset microphone input gain
0..7 - handset microphone gain (+6dB/step)
#HSMICG: <level>
AT#HSMICG=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<level>.
5.1.6.17.1.5. Handsfree Receiver Gain - #HFRECG
#HFRECG - Handsfree Receiver Gain
AT#HFRECG=
<level>
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<level>:
0..6 - (factory default = 0)
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT#HFRECG?
Read command returns the current value of parameter <level>, in the
format:
#HFRECG: <level>
AT#HFRECG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<level>.
Page 415 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.1.6. Handset Receiver Gain - #HSRECG
#HSRECG - Handset Receiver Gain
AT#HSRECG=
<level>
SELINT 2
Set command sets the handset analogue output gain
Parameter:
<level>: handset analogue output gain
0..6 - handset analogue output (-3dB/step, default value = 0)
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT#HSRECG?
Read command returns the current handset analog output gain, in the
format:
#HSRECG: <level>
AT#HSRECG=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<level>.
5.1.6.17.1.7. Set Handset Sidetone - #SHSSD
#SHSSD - Set Handset Sidetone
AT#SHSSD=
<mode>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the sidetone on handset audio output.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables the handset sidetone (factory default)
1 - enables the handset sidetone
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT#SHSSD?
Read command reports whether the handset sidetone is currently
enabled or not, in the format:
#SHSSD: <mode>
AT#SHSSD=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
5.1.6.17.1.8. Set Handset Sidetone - #SHFSD
#SHFSD - Set Handsfree Sidetone
AT#SHFSD=
<mode>
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables the handsfree sidetone (factory default)
1 - enables the handsfree sidetone
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT#SHFSD?
Read command reports whether the handsfree sidetone is currently
enabled or not, in the format:
#SHFSD: <mode>
AT#SHFSD=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 416 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.1.9. Speaker Mute Control - #SPKMUT
#SPKMUT - Speaker Mute Control
AT#SPKMUT=<n>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the global muting of the speaker audio
line,
for every audio output ( ring, incoming sms, voice, Network coverage)
Parameter:
<n>
0 - mute off, speaker active (factory default)
1 - mute on, speaker muted.
Note: this command mutes/activates both speaker audio paths, internal
speaker and external speaker.
AT#SPKMUT?
Read command reports whether the muting of the speaker audio line
during a voice call is enabled or not, in the format:
#SPKMUT: <n>
AT#SPKMUT=?
Test command reports the supported values for <n> parameter.
5.1.6.17.1.10. Digital Microphone Gain - #DIGMICG
#DIGMICG – Digital Microphone Gain
SELINT 2
AT#DIGMICG=<gain_level> This command allows setting the microphone digital gain through 46
levels by 1 dB steps
Parameters:
<gain_level>: digital microphone input gain
0..45 - digital microphone input gain (+1dB/step, factory default = 0 )
NOTE:
This command substitutes the #HSMICG command and has the same
default values.
AT# DIGMICG?
Read command returns the current digital microphone gain level, in the
format:
#DIGMICG: <gain_level>
AT# DIGMICG =?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<gain_level>.
5.1.6.17.1.11. Open Audio Path - #OAP
#OAP - Open Audio Loop
AT#OAP=[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command sets Open Audio Path.
Parameter:
0 - disables Open Audio Path (default)
1 - enables Open Audio Path
AT#OAP?
Read command reports whether the Open Audio Path is currently
enabled or not, in the format:
#OAP: <mode>
AT#OAP=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
Page 417 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#OAP - Open Audio Loop
Note
SELINT 2
The audio loop will be established between microphone and speaker
using sidetone scaling value.
AT#OAP command is intended for testing purposes only. Thus, care must
be taken to ensure that during the command execution no other audio
interacting commands are issued.
5.1.6.17.1.12. TeleType Writer - #TTY
#TTY - TeleType Writer
AT#TTY=<support>
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the TTY functionality.
Parameter:
<support>
0 - disable TTY functionality (factory default)
1 - enable TTY functionality
Note: the value set by command is directly stored in NVM and doesn’t
depend on the specific AT instance.
AT#TTY?
Read command returns whether the TTY functionalityis currently enabled
or not, in the format:
#TTY: <support>
AT#TTY=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameter
<support>.
Page 418 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.2. Tones Configuration
5.1.6.17.2.1. Signaling Tones Mode - #STM
#STM - Signaling Tones Mode
AT#STM=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the signaling tones output on the audio
path
Parameter:
<mode> - signaling tones status
0 - signaling tones disabled
1 - signaling tones enabled
2 - all tones disabled
Note:
AT#STM=0 has the same effect as AT+CALM=2;
AT#STM=1 has the same effect as AT+CALM=0.
AT#STM?
Read command reports whether the current signaling tones status is
enabled or not, in the format:
#STM: <mode>
AT#STM=?
Test command reports supported range of values for parameter <mode>.
5.1.6.17.2.2. Tone Playback - #TONE
#TONE - Tone Playback
AT#TONE=<tone>
[,<duration>]
SELINT 2
Execution command allows the reproduction of DTMF tones, standard
free tone, standard busy tone and a set of user defined tones for a certain
time.
Parameters:
<tone> - ASCII characters, range is ((0-9),#,*,(A-D),(G-L),Y,Z);
- (0-9), #,*,(A-D): DTMF tone
- (G-L): User Defined Tones
- Y: free tone
- Z: busy tone
<duration> - Duration of current tone in 1/10 of Sec.
1..300 - tenth of seconds (default is 30)
Note: See AT#UDTSET command to set user defined tones
AT#TONE=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<tone> and <duration>.
5.1.6.17.2.3. Extended tone generation - #TONEEXT
#TONEEXT – Extended tone generation
AT# TONEEXT=
<toneId>,<act
SELINT 2
Execution command allows the reproduction of DTMF tones, standard
free tone, standard busy tone and a set of user defined tones for a infinite
time, or stop the running tone
Parameters:
< toneId > - ASCII characters in the set (0-9), #,*,(A-D),(G-L),Y,Z ;
- (0-9), #,*,(A-D) : DTMF tone
- (G-L) : User Defined Tones9F9F 2.
- y : free tone
2
See also AT#UDTSET, AT#UDTRST and AT#UDTSAV command description following in this document.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 419 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#TONEEXT – Extended tone generation
- z: busy tone
< act > - Action to be performed.
- 0: Stop the <toneId> if running.
- 1: Start the <toneId>.
AT#TONEEXT=?
Test command returns the range of supported values for parameter
<toneId>,<act>.
5.1.6.17.2.4. User Defined Tone SET - #UDTSET command
#STM - Signaling Tones Mode
AT#UDTSET=
<tone>
,<F1>,<A1>
[,<F2>,<A2>
[,<F3>,<A3>]]
SELINT 2
SELINT 2
Set command sets frequency and amplitude composition for a User
Defined Tone.
Parameters:
<tone> - tone index (G,H,I,J,K,L)
<Fi> - frequency in Hz; range is (300,3000) in step of 1 Hz
<Ai> - amplitude in dB; range is (10,100) in step of 1 dB
Note: Ai = 100 is equal to the max value of the single tone. Lower values
attenuate output to the difference between 100 and the selected amplitude
(ex: Ai = 80 is equal to 100-80 = -20dB).
Note: issuing AT&F1 or AT&Z has the effect to set the parameters with the
last saved in NVM values
Note: Ai = 0 and Fi = 0 are only values for uninitialized parameters and
can’t be issued by AT command. Every time the set command is issued,
the unspecified parameters are automatically reset to zero.
(Ai,Fi) issuing needs also (Aj,Fj) with j<i.
AT# UDTSET?
Read command returns the current settings for the tones:
#UDTSET: G,<F1>,<A1>,<F2>,<A2>,<F3>,<A3>
#UDTSET: H, <F1>,<A1>,<F2>,<A2>,<F3>,<A3>
#UDTSET: I, <F1>,<A1>,<F2>,<A2>,<F3>,<A3>
#UDTSET: J, <F1>,<A1>,<F2>,<A2>,<F3>,<A3>
#UDTSET: K, <F1>,<A1>,<F2>,<A2>,<F3>,<A3>
#UDTSET: L, <F1>,<A1>,<F2>,<A2>,<F3>,<A3>
AT# UDTSET=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for <tone>, <Fi>
and <Ai> parameters.
5.1.6.17.2.5. User Defined Tone SAVE - #UDTSAV command
#UDTSAV – User Defined Tone SAVe
AT#UDTSAV
SELINT 2
Execution command allows the reproduction of DTMF tones, standard
free tone, standard busy tone and a set of user defined tones for a infinite
time, or stop the running tone
Parameters:
< toneId > - ASCII characters in the set (0-9), #,*,(A-D),(G-L),Y,Z ;
- (0-9), #,*,(A-D) : DTMF tone
- (G-L) : User Defined Tones9F9F 3.
- y : free tone
3
See also AT#UDTSET, AT#UDTRST and AT#UDTSAV command description following in this document.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 420 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#UDTSAV – User Defined Tone SAVe
- z: busy tone
< act > - Action to be performed.
- 0: Stop the <toneId> if running.
- 1: Start the <toneId>.
AT#UDTSAV=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT#UDTSAV
OK
SELINT 2
Current tones are saved in NVM
5.1.6.17.2.6. User Defined Tone Reset - #UDTRST command
# UDTRST – Extended tone generation
SELINT 2
AT#UDTRST
Execution command resets to the default set the actual values of
frequency and amplitude parameters that can be set with the command
#UDTSET.
AT#UDTRST=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT#UDRST
OK
The default value tones are restored in NVM
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 421 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.3. Audio Profiles
5.1.6.17.3.1. Audio Profile Selection - #PSEL
#PSEL – Audio Profile Selection
AT#PSEL=<prof>
SELINT 2
Set command selects the active audio profile
Parameter:
<prof>: current profile
0 - standard profile
1..3 - extended profile, modifiable.
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT#PSEL?
The read command returns the active profile in the format:
#PSEL:<prof>
AT#PSEL=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<prof>.
5.1.6.17.3.2. Audio Profile Configuration Save - #PSAV
#PSAV - Audio Profile Configuration Save
AT#PSAV
SELINT 2
Execution command saves the actual audio parameters in the NVM of the
device.
It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
The audio parameters to store are:
AT#PSAV=?
Example
Uplink path biquad filters
Downlink path biquad filters
Test command returns the OK result code.
AT#PSAV
OK
Current audio profile is saved in NVM
5.1.6.17.3.3. Audio Profile Factory Configuration - #PRST
#PRST - Audio Profile Factory Configuration
AT#PRST
SELINT 2
Execution command resets the actual audio parameters in the NVM of the
device to the default set. It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
The audio parameters to reset are:
-
Uplink path biquad filters
Downlink path biquad filters
AT#PRST=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
AT#PRST
OK
Current audio profile is reset
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 422 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.4. Audio Filters
5.1.6.17.4.1. Uplink Path Biquad Filters - #BIQUADIN
#BIQUADIN - Uplink Path Biquad Filters
AT#BIQUADIN=
<aF0>
[,<aF1>
[,<aF2>
[,<bF1>
[,<bF2>
[,<aS0>
[,<aS1>
[,<aS2>
[,<bS1>
[,<bS2>
]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows to configure the parameters of the two cascaded
H
( z) ⋅ H
First
Second
digital biquad filters
not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
( z ) in Uplink path (sending). It is
Parameters:
<aFn>,<bFn>,<aSn>,<bSn> - they all are specific parameters for the
calculation of digital biquad filters as follows:
a F 0 + 2 ⋅ a F 1 ⋅ z −1 + a F 2 ⋅ z −2
H F ( z) =
1 + 2 ⋅ bF 1 ⋅ z −1 + bF 2 ⋅ z − 2
H S ( z) =
aS 0 + 2 ⋅ aS 1 ⋅ z −1 + aS 2 ⋅ z −2
1 + 2 ⋅ bS 1 ⋅ z −1 + bS 2 ⋅ z − 2
-32768..32767 - each value has to be interpreted as signed fixed point
number in two’s complement format with 15 fractional bits in a 16 bit word
(Q15)
Note: in the above formulas pay attention to the multiplier (2) for
parameters <aF1>, <aS1>, <bF1> and <bS1>
Parameters can be saved in NVM using AT#PSAV command and are
available for audio profiles 1,2,3. For audio profile 0 the values are fixed.
AT#BIQUADIN?
Read command returns the parameters for the active profile in the
format:
#BIQUADIN:
<aF0>,<aF1>,<aF2>,<bF1>,<bF2>,<aS0>,<aS1>,<aS2>,<bS1>,<bS2>
It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
AT#BIQUADIN=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<aF0>, <aF1>, <aF2>, <bF1>, <bF2>, <aS0>, <aS1>, <aS2>, <bS1>, <bS2>
5.1.6.17.4.2. Extended Uplink Path Biquad Filters - #BIQUADINEX
#BIQUADINEX - Uplink Path Biquad Filters
AT#BIQUADINEX=
<aF0>
[,<aF1>
[,<aF2>
[,<bF1>
[,<bF2>
[,<aS0>
[,<aS1>
[,<aS2>
[,<bS1>
[,<bS2>
]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows to configure the parameters of the two cascaded
H
( z) ⋅ H
First
Second
digital biquad filters
not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
( z ) in Uplink path (sending). It is
Parameters:
<aFn>,<bFn>,<aSn>,<bSn> - they all are specific parameters for the
calculation of digital biquad filters as follows:
H F ( z) =
a F 0 + 2 ⋅ a F 1 ⋅ z −1 + a F 2 ⋅ z −2
1 + 2 ⋅ bF 1 ⋅ z −1 + bF 2 ⋅ z − 2
aS 0 + 2 ⋅ aS 1 ⋅ z −1 + aS 2 ⋅ z −2
H S ( z) =
1 + 2 ⋅ bS 1 ⋅ z −1 + bS 2 ⋅ z − 2
-32768..32767 - each value has to be interpreted as signed fixed point
number in two’s complement format with 15 fractional bits in a 16 bit word
(Q15)
Note: in the above formulas pay attention to the multiplier (2) for
parameters <aF1>, <aS1>, <bF1> and <bS1>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 423 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#BIQUADINEX - Uplink Path Biquad Filters
SELINT 2
Parameters can be saved in NVM using AT#PSAV command and are
available for audio profiles 1,2,3. For audio profile 0 the values are fixed.
AT#BIQUADINEX?
Read command returns the parameters for the active profile in the
format:
#BIQUADINEX:
<aF0>,<aF1>,<aF2>,<bF1>,<bF2>,<aS0>,<aS1>,<aS2>,<bS1>,<bS2>
It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
AT#BIQUADINEX=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<aF0>, <aF1>, <aF2>, <bF1>, <bF2>, <aS0>, <aS1>, <aS2>, <bS1>, <bS2>
5.1.6.17.4.3. Uplink Path Biquad Filters - #BIQUADOUT
#BIQUADOUT - Downlink Path Biquad Filters
AT#BIQUADOUT=
<aF0>
[,<aF1>
[,<aF2>
[,<bF1>
[,<bF2>
[,<aS0>
[,<aS1>
[,<aS2>
[,<bS1>
[,<bS2>
]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
Set command allows to configure the parameters of the two cascaded
H
( z) ⋅ H
First
Second
digital biquad filters
is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
( z ) in Downlink path (receiving). It
Parameters:
<aFn>,<bFn>,<aSn>,<bSn> - they all are specific parameters for the
calculation of digital biquad filters as follows:
H F ( z) =
a F 0 + 2 ⋅ a F 1 ⋅ z −1 + a F 2 ⋅ z −2
1 + 2 ⋅ bF 1 ⋅ z −1 + bF 2 ⋅ z − 2
aS 0 + 2 ⋅ aS 1 ⋅ z −1 + aS 2 ⋅ z −2
H S ( z) =
1 + 2 ⋅ bS 1 ⋅ z −1 + bS 2 ⋅ z − 2
-32768..32767 - each value has to be interpreted as signed fixed point
number in two’s complement format with 15 fractional bits in a 16 bit word
(Q15)
Note: in the above formulas pay attention to the multiplier (2) for
parameters <aF1>, <aS1>, <bF1> and <bS1>
Parameters can be saved in NVM using AT#PSAV command and are
available for audio profiles 1,2,3. For audio profile 0 the values are fixed.
AT#BIQUADOUT?
Read command returns the parameters for the active profile in the
format:
#BIQUADOUT:
<aF0>,<aF1>,<aF2>,<bF1>,<bF2>,<aS0>,<aS1>,<aS2>,<bS1>,<bS2>
It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
AT#BIQUADOUT=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<aF0>, <aF1>, <aF2>, <bF1>, <bF2>, <aS0>, <aS1>, <aS2>, <bS1>, <bS2>
5.1.6.17.4.4. Extended Uplink Path Biquad Filters - #BIQUADOUTEX
#BIQUADOUTEX - Downlink Path Biquad Filters
AT#BIQUADOUTEX=
<aF0>
[,<aF1>
[,<aF2>
[,<bF1>
[,<bF2>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command allows to configure the parameters of the two cascaded
H
( z) ⋅ H
First
Second
digital biquad filters
is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
( z ) in Downlink path (receiving). It
Parameters:
Page 424 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#BIQUADOUTEX - Downlink Path Biquad Filters
SELINT 2
[,<aS0>
<aFn>,<bFn>,<aSn>,<bSn> - they all are specific parameters for the
calculation of digital biquad filters as follows:
[,<aS1>
[,<aS2>
a F 0 + 2 ⋅ a F 1 ⋅ z −1 + a F 2 ⋅ z −2
H
z
=
(
)
F
[,<bS1>
1 + 2 ⋅ bF 1 ⋅ z −1 + bF 2 ⋅ z − 2
[,<bS2>
aS 0 + 2 ⋅ aS 1 ⋅ z −1 + aS 2 ⋅ z −2
]]]]]]]]]
H S ( z) =
1 + 2 ⋅ bS 1 ⋅ z −1 + bS 2 ⋅ z − 2
-32768..32767 - each value has to be interpreted as signed fixed point
number in two’s complement format with 15 fractional bits in a 16 bit word
(Q15)
Note: in the above formulas pay attention to the multiplier (2) for
parameters <aF1>, <aS1>, <bF1> and <bS1>
Parameters can be saved in NVM using AT#PSAV command and are
available for audio profiles 1,2,3. For audio profile 0 the values are fixed.
AT#BIQUADOUTEX?
Read command returns the parameters for the active profile in the
format:
#BIQUADOUTEX:
<aF0>,<aF1>,<aF2>,<bF1>,<bF2>,<aS0>,<aS1>,<aS2>,<bS1>,<bS2>
It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
AT#BIQUADOUTEX=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<aF0>, <aF1>, <aF2>, <bF1>, <bF2>, <aS0>, <aS1>, <aS2>, <bS1>, <bS2>
Page 425 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.5. Echo Canceller Configuration
5.1.6.17.5.1. Handsfree Echo Canceller - #SHFEC
#SHFEC - Handsfree Echo Canceller
AT#SHFEC=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<mode>
(0,1) - (0 is factory default)
Note: This setting returns to default after power off.
AT# SHFEC?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode>, in the format:
#SHFEC: <mode>
AT# SHFEC=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
5.1.6.17.5.2. Handset Echo Canceller - #SHSEC
#SHSEC - Handset Echo Canceller
AT#SHSEC=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<mode>
(0,1) - (0 is factory default)
Note: This setting returns to default after power off.
AT# SHSEC?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode>, in the format:
#SHSEC: <mode>
AT# SHSEC=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
5.1.6.17.5.3. Handsfree Echo Canceller - #SHFAGC
#SHFAGC - Handsfree Automatic Gain Control
AT#SHFAGC=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<mode>
(0,1) - (0 is factory default)
Note: This setting returns to default after power off.
AT# SHFAGC?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode>, in the format:
#SHFAGC: <mode>
AT# SHFAGC=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
Page 426 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.5.4. Handset Echo Canceller - #SHSAGC
#SHSAGC - Handset Automatic Gain Control
AT#SHSAGC=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the automatic gain control function on
audio handset input.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables automatic gain control for handset mode (default)
1 - enables automatic gain control for handset mode
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT# SHSAGC?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode>, in the format:
#SHSAGC: <mode>
AT# SHSAGC=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
5.1.6.17.5.5. Handsfree Echo Canceller - #SHFNR
#SHFEC - Handsfree Noise Reduction
AT#SHFNR=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
It has no effect and is included only for backward compatibility.
Parameter:
<mode>
(0,1) - (0 is factory default)
Note: This setting returns to default after power off.
AT# SHFNR?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode>, in the format:
#SHFNR: <mode>
AT# SHFNR=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
5.1.6.17.5.6. Handset Echo Canceller - #SHSNR
#SHSNR - Handset Noise Reduction
AT#SHSNR=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the noise reduction function on audio
handset input.
Parameter:
<mode>
0 - disables noise reduction for handset mode (default)
1 - enables noise reduction for handset mode
Note: This parameter is saved in NVM issuing AT&W command.
AT# SHSNR?
Read command reports the value of parameter <mode>, in the format:
#SHSNR: <mode>
AT# SHSNR=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter
<mode>.
Page 427 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.5.7. Echo Reducer Configuration - #ECHOCFG
#ECHOCFG – Echo Reducer Configuration
AT#ECHOCFG=<par_1>
[,<par_2>[,…,<par_N>]]
SELINT 2
Set command writes values in echo reducer parameters. It is not allowed if
active audio profile is 0.
The module responds to the set command with the prompt '>' and waits for
the data to send.
Parameters:
<par_1>
0
– configure all parameters, module awaits 39 values
1,2,..,39 – configure single parameters, module awaits 1 value
<par_i> with i = {2;N}
1,2,..,39 – configure every parameter specified
After '>' to complete the operation send Ctrl-Z char (0x1A hex); to exit
without writing the message send ESC char (0x1B hex).
Data shall be written in Hexadecimal Form with 4 digits for every <par_i>
value provided by set command.
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Parameters can be saved in NVM using AT#PSAV command and are
available for audio profiles 1,2,3. For audio profile 0 the values are fixed.
Note: Configuring single parameters, it is allowed to enter a maximum of 32
parameters.
Note: the default configuration is targeted for almost all common acoustic
echo scenarios; if further tuning is needed the customer can change by
oneself only the following parameters:
<par_14>
0..32767 - factory default value is 18384
Additional gain: increasing this parameter average echoes are more
attenuated
<par_15>
0..16384 - factory default value is 2000
Total gain lower limit: increasing this parameter small echoes are more
attenuated
<par_16>
0..16384 - factory default value is 10000
Total gain upper limit: increasing this parameter load echoes are more
attenuated
<par_32>
0..32767 - factory default value is 6000
NR Attenuation factor: decreasing this parameter increases allowed
attenuation
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 428 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ECHOCFG – Echo Reducer Configuration
SELINT 2
<par_33>
0..32767 - factory default value is 8000
Overestimation factor 0: decreasing this parameter increases noise
reduction and decreases speech quality below 500Hz
<par_34>
0..32767 - factory default value is 8000
Overestimation factor 1: decreasing this parameter increases noise
reduction and decreases speech quality above 500Hz
The remaining parameters could be changed but under the supervision of
Telit Technical Support.
AT#ECHOCFG?
Read command reports the currently set parameters in the format:
#ECHOCFG: <par_1><par2>…<parN>
<par_i>:
Full set of registers values dumped in hexadecimal form, 39 words (156
characters).
It is not allowed if active audio profile is 0.
AT#ECHOCFG=?
Test command reports supported range of values for all parameters in the
format:
#ECHOCFG: <i>, (<low_i>-<high_i>)
Where
<i>:
Parameter index
<low_i>:
Lower limit of <par_i>
<high_i>:
High limit of <par_i>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 429 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.6. Embedded DTMF Decoder
5.1.6.17.6.1. Embedded DTMF decoder enabling - #DTMF
#DTMF – Embedded DTMF decoder enabling
AT#DTMF=
[<mode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the embedded DTMF decoder.
Parameters:
<mode>:
0 – disable DTMF decoder (default)
1 – enables DTMF decoder
2 – enables DTMF decoder without URC notify
Note: if <mode>=1, the receiving of a DTMF tone is pointed out with an unsolicited
message through AT interface in the following format:
#DTMFEV: x
with x as the DTMF digit
Note: the duration of a tone should be not less than 50ms.
Note: the value set by command is not saved and a software or hardware reset
restores the default value.
The value can be stored in NVM using profiles.
Note: When DTMF decoder is enabled, PCM playing and recording are automatically
disabled (AT#SPCM will return error).
AT# DTMF?
Read command reports the currently selected <mode> in the format:
#DTMF: <mode>
AT# DTMF=?
Test command returns the supported range of values of parameter <mode>.
5.1.6.17.6.2. Embedded DTMF decoder configuration - #DTMFCFG
#DTMFCFG – Embedded DTMF decoder configuration
SELINT 2
AT#DTMFCFG=<scaling>
Set command allows configuration of the embedded DTMF decoder.
,<threshold_1>,<threshold_
2>[,<std_twist>,<rev_twist> Parameters:
]
<scaling>:
3..11 – this is the scaling applied to the pcm samples in order to manage
arithmetic operations. The default value is 7.
<threshold_1>:
1000..20000 – this is the numeric threshold used to detect DTMF tones.
The default value is 2500.
<threshold_2>:
1000..20000 – this is the numeric threshold used to start DTMF decoding.
The default value is 1500.
<std_twist>:
0..20 – standard twist threshold. It is an optional parameter and the default
value is 9.
<rev_twist >:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 430 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#DTMFCFG – Embedded DTMF decoder configuration
SELINT 2
0..20 – reverse twist threshold. It is an optional parameter and the default
value is 5.
Note: The default values were chosen after a fine tuning, so every
change should be done very carefully to avoid wrong decoding.
Note: the values set by command are not saved and a software or
hardware reset restores the default value.
Note: Default values are referred to standard DMTF decoder
(AT#DTMF=1).
Note: It is supposed that the module is just powered on and the
AT#DTMFCFG command is entered without < std_twist> and <rev_twist>
parameters. In this case the read command doesn’t return the setting of
the <std_twist> and <rev_twist> in order to meet retro compatibility with
other families. Now, let’s assume that AT#DTMFCFG command is entered
again, but using the < std_twist> and <rev_twist> parameters for the first
time: if the read command is entered, it reports the parameter value just
used. If subsequently the <std_twist> and <rev_twist> are omitted, the
read command reports the parameter value entered the last time.
AT# DTMFCFG?
Read command reports the currently selected value in the format:
# DTMFCFG:
<scaling>,<threshold_1>,<threshold_2>[,<std_twist>[,<rev_twist >]]
AT# DTMFCFG=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports supported range of values for all parameters.
Page 431 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.7. Digital Voice Interface
5.1.6.17.7.1. Digital Voiceband Interface - #DVI
#DVI - Digital Voiceband Interface
AT#DVI=<mode>
[,<dviport>,
<clockmode>]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables the Digital Voiceband Interface.
Parameters:
<mode> - enables/disables the DVI.
0 - disable DVI;
1 - enable DVI; audio is forwarded to the DVI block
2 - reserved
<dviport>
2 - DVI port 2 will be used.
<clockmode>
0 - DVI slave
1 - DVI master (factory default)
AT# DVI?
Read command reports last setting, in the format:
#DVI: <mode>,<dviport>,<clockmode>
AT# DVI=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameters
<mode>,<dviport> and <clockmode>
5.1.6.17.7.2. Digital Voice Interface Extension - #DVIEXT
#DVIEXT – Digital Voiceband Interface Extension
SELINT 2
AT#DVIEXT=<config
>,[<samplerate>,[<
samplewidth>,[<audio
mode>,>,[<edge>]]]]
Set command configures the Digital Voiceband Interface.
Parameters:
<config>
0 – Burst Mode
1 – Normal Mode (factory default)
<samplerate>
0 – audio scheduler sample rate 8KHz (factory default)
1 - audio scheduler sample rate 16KHz
<samplewidth>
0 – 16 bits per sample (factory default)
1 – 18 bits per sample
2 – 20 bits per sample
3 – 24 bits per sample
4 – 32 bits per sample
<audiomode>
0 – Mono Mode
1 – Dual Mono (factory default)
<edge>
0 – data bit is transmitted on falling edge of clock and sampled on rising
edge of
clock (factory default)
1 – data bit is transmitted on rising edge of clock and sampled on falling
edge of
clock
Note: <edge> parameters is valid only in Burst Mode, in Normal Mode
shall be 0.
AT#DVIEXT?
Read command reports last setting, in the format:
#DVIEXT: <config>,<samplerate>,< samplewidth >,<audiomode>,
<edge>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 432 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#DVIEXT – Digital Voiceband Interface Extension
AT#DVIEXT=?
Test command reports the range of supported values for parameters:
<config>,<samplerate>,< samplewidth >,<audiomode>,<edge>
5.1.6.17.7.3. DVI Clock Activation - #DVICLK
#DVI - Digital Voiceband Interface
AT#DVICLK=<clk>
SELINT 2
SELINT 2
Set command configures and activates the DVICLK clock signal.
Parameters:
<clk>
0 – Disable (factory default)
1 – DVI Clock activated at 256KHz
2 – DVI Clock activated at 384KHz
3 – DVI Clock activated at 512KHz
Note: the commands #DVI, #DVIEXT, #OAP can turn off the DVICLK
signal or change its frequency.
Note: after setting the DVICLK frequency through #DVICLK command, a
voice call does not modify the DVICLK setting.
AT#DVICLK?
Read command reports last setting, in the format:
#DVICLK: <clk>
AT#DVICLK=?
Test command reports the range of parameter <clk>
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 433 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.17.8. Audio file and stream management
5.1.6.17.8.1. PCM Play and Receive - #SPCM
#SPCM - PCM Play And Receive
AT#SPCM=<mo
de>,<dir>[,<for
mat>]
SELINT 2
Set command allows user either to send speech sample coming from microphone or
downlink audio channel to serial port in PCM format, or to play a PCM stream coming
from serial port to speaker or uplink audio channel.
As showed in the table below if <mode> = 3 and <dir> = 1 then the speech coming
from serial port with selected PCM <format> is sent to uplink and, at the same time,
the speech coming from downlink is sent to serial port with selected PCM <format>.
An active speech call is needed when sending/receiving to/from audio channel.
Parameters:
<mode>: action to be execute;
1 - play PCM stream from serial to selected direction <dir>.
2 - send speech from selected direction <dir> to serial.
3 - send/receive speech to/from selected direction <dir>
<dir>: Select the audio path.
0 - send/receive to/from audio front end
1 - send/receive to/from audio channel
2 - reserved
< format >: PCM bits format
0 - 8 bit (factory default)
1 - 16 bit
Note: Execution command switches module in online mode. Module moves back to
command mode either after entering the escape sequence +++ or as a consequence
of a DTR transition.
Note: Using 16 bit it is mandatory to set +IPR at least to 230400.
The following table summarizes the status of audio path during a speech call for
different configurations and with sidetone disabled:
mode = 1
mode = 2
mode = 3
Uplink off / Downlink
off
PCM stream from
microphone
Not supported
dir = 0
Uplink off / Downlink
on
PCM stream on
speaker
dir = 1
Uplink on / Downlink
off
PCM stream on
Uplink
Uplink off / Downlink
on
PCM stream from
Downlink
Uplink on / Downlink
on
PCM stream to/from
Uplink/Downlink
Sidetone is active for default.
Note: When DTMF decoder is enabled, PCM playing and recording are automatically
disabled (AT#SPCM will return error).
AT#SPCM=?
Test command returns the supported range of values for parameters
<mode>, <dir> and <format>.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 434 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SPCM - PCM Play And Receive
SELINT 2
#SPCM: <mode>,<dir>,<format>
Example
AT#SPCM=1,0,0
CONNECT
+++
NO CARRIER
Note: after the CONNECT, 8Khz 8bit PCM stream has to be sent to serial port
AT#SPCM=2,0,0
CONNECT
+++
NO CARRIER
Note: after the CONNECT, 8Khz 8bit PCM stream can be read from serial port
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 435 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.18.
Jammed Detection & Report AT Commands
5.1.6.18.1. Enhanced Jammed Detect & Report 2 - #JDRENH2
#JDRENH2 – Enhanced Jammed Detect & Report 2
AT#JDRENH2=<m
ode>[,<SAT2G>,
<SAT3G>,
<CARRNUM>,
<P_RxLev_T2G>,
<P_EcN0_T3G>,
<P_RSCP_T3G>[,<
spare>[,<spare>[,<
spare>[,<spare>]]]]
]
SELINT 2
Set command allows to control the Jammed Detect & Report feature.
The MODULE can detect if a communication Jammer is active in its range and give
indication to the user of this condition either on the serial line with an unsolicited
code or on a dedicated GPIO by rising it.
Parameters:
<mode> - behaviour mode of the Jammed Detect & Report
0 - disables Jammed Detect & Report (factory default)
1 - enables the Jammed Detect; the Jammed condition is reported on pin
GPIO2/JDR
GPIO2/JDR Low - Normal Operating Condition
GPIO2/JDR High - Jammed Condition.
2 - enables the Jammed Detect; the Jammed condition is reported with a single
unsolicited result code on serial line, in the format:
#JDR: <status>
where:
<status>
JAMMED - Jammed condition detected
OPERATIVE - Normal Operating condition restored. This code will be shown only
after a jammed condition has occurred.
3 - enables the Jammed Detect; the MODULE will make both the actions as for
<mode>=1 and <mode>=2.
4 - enables the Jammed Detect; the Jammed condition is reported with an
unsolicited code every 3s on serial line, in the format:
#JDR: <status>
where:
<status>
JAMMED - Jammed condition detected
OPERATIVE - Normal Operating condition restored. This code will be shown only
after a jammed condition has occurred.
5 - enables the Jammed Detect; the MODULE will make both the actions as for
<mode>=1 and <mode>=4.
6 - enables the Jammed Detect (this value is available only for 10.00.xxx release);
the Jammed condition is reported in the format:
#JDR: <status>
where:
<status>
JAMMED - Jammed condition detected
OPERATIVE - Normal Operating condition restored. This code will be shown
only after a jammed condition has occurred
UNKNOWN – default state before first successful PLMN searching
NOTICE: if you change the <mode> parameter of the AT#JDRENH2 command, it
will be automatically changed the <mode> parameter of the AT#JDR command,
without notice.
- Set the starting absolute threshold of RxLevel 2G Network.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 436 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#JDRENH2 – Enhanced Jammed Detect & Report 2
SELINT 2
After a frequency scan in 2G bands, if the power measured of a carrier is above of
<SAT2G> that carrier is counted as possible jammed carrier.
0...63 (Factory default is 45).
<SAT3G> - Set the starting absolute threshold of RSSI 3G Network.
After a frequency scan in 3G bands, if the power measured of a carrier is above of
<SAT3G> that carrier is counted as possible jammed carrier.
0...63 (Factory default is 35).
<CARRNUM> - Set the minimum number of possible jammed carriers to consider
that the module is under jamming condition.
0…200 (Factory default is 100).
<P_RxLev_T2G> - Set the threshold of RxLev in 2G Network. The threshold
(RxLev_Thr) is calculated as RxLev_Thr=RxLev_Av*(1+(<P_RxLev_T2G>/100))
where RxLev_Av is the average of the last 10 RxLev measures.
0…100 (Factory default is 15).
<P_EcN0_T3G> - Set the threshold of EcN0 in 3G Network. The threshold
(EcN0_Thr) is calculated as EcN0_Thr= EcN0_Av*(1-(<P_EcN0_T3G>/100))
where EcN0_Av is the average of the last 10 EcN0 measures.
0…100 (Factory default is 70).
<P_RSCP_T3G> - Set the threshold of RSCP in 3G Network. The threshold
(RSCP_Thr) is calculated as RSCP_Thr= RSCP_Av*(1-(<P_RSCP_T3G>/100))
where RSCP_Av is the average of the last 10 RSCP measures.
0…100 (Factory default is 20).
All the parameter settings are saved in NVM memory.
AT#JDRENH2?
Read command reports the current behaviour mode, in the format:
#JDRENH2:
<mode>,<SAT2G>,<SAT3G>,<CARRNUM>,<P_RxLev_T2G>,<P_EcN0_T3G>,
<P_RSCP_T3G>,0,0,0,0
AT#JDRENH2=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the parameters
#JDRENH2:
(<mode>),(<SAT2G>),(<SAT3G>),(<CARRNUM>),(<P_RxLev_T2G>),(<P_EcN0
_T3G>),(<P_RSCP_T3G>),(0),(0),(0),(0)
5.1.6.18.2. LTE Jammed Detect & Report - #JDR4GCFG
#JDR4GCFG – LTE Jammed Detect & Report
AT#JDR4GCFG=<P_RSR
P_T4G>,<P_RSRQ_T4G>
,<P_RSSNR_T4G>[,<spar
e>[,<spare>[,<spare>[,<s
pare>[,<spare>[,<spare>]
]]]]]
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
SELINT 2
Set command allows to configure the LTE Jammed Detect & Report feature.
Parameters:
<P_RSRP_T4G> - Set the threshold of RSRP. The threshold (RSRP_Thr) is
calculated as
RSRP_Thr= RSRP_Av*(1+(<P_RSRP_T4G>/100)) where RSRP_Av is the
average of the last 8 RSRP measures.
0..100(Factory default is 30)
Page 437 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#JDR4GCFG – LTE Jammed Detect & Report
SELINT 2
<P_RSRQ_T4G> - Set the threshold of RSRQ. The threshold (RSRQ_Thr)
is calculated as
RSRQ_Thr= RSRQ_Av*(1-(<P_RSRQ_T4G>/100)) where RSRQ_Av is the
average of the last 8 RSRQ measures.
0..100(Factory default is 90)
<P_RSSNR_T4G> - Set the threshold of RSRP. The threshold
(RSSNR_Thr) is calculated as
RSSNR _Thr= RSSNR _Av*(1+(<P_RSSNR_T4G>/100)) where RSSNR
_Av is the average of the last 8 RSRP measures.
0..100(Factory default is 80)
NB: See AT#JDRENH2 to set the enable of the LTE Jammed Detect &
Report feature.
AT#JDR4GCFG?
Read command reports the current settings, in the format:
#JDR4GCFG:
<P_RSRP_T4G>,<P_RSRQ_T4G>,<P_RSSNR_T4G>,0,0,0,0,0,0
AT#JDR4GCFG=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the parameters
#JDR4GCFG:
(<P_RSRP_T4G>),(<P_RSRQ_T4G>),(<P_RSSNR_T4G>),(0),(0),(0),(0),(0)
,(0)
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 438 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.19.
m2mAIR Cloud Commands
The following AT commands regard the deviceWISE functionality.
Here is a basic interaction diagram:
5.1.6.19.1. Configure deviceWISE parameters - #DWCFG
#DWCFG – configure deviceWISE parameters
AT#DWCFG=[<serverUrl
>[,<deviceIDSelector>[,<
appToken>[,<security>[,
<heartBeat>[,<autoReco
nnect>[,<overflowHandli
ng>[,<atrunInstanceId>[,
<serviceTimeout>[,<cont
extID>[,<unused_1>[,<un
used_2>]]]]]]]]]]]]
SELINT 2
This command sets the parameters related to the deviceWISE functionality
Parameters:
<serverUrl> - String parameter indicating the URL of the M2M Service
instance in address:port form.
<deviceIDSelector> 0 – 1 (0=IMEI 1=CCID/ESN), basically 0 if not SIM card
or CDMA ID installed
<appToken> - The secure application token provided in the Management
Portal, typically a string of 16 characters..
<security> - Flag indicating if the SSL encryption is enabled.
0 – SSL encryption disabled (default)
1 – SSL encryption enabled
If SSL encryption enabling is required, some initial settings have
to be done as follows. For further details, refer to “SSL/TLS User Guide”.
SSL channel has to be enabled as follows:
AT#SSLEN=1,1
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 439 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
OK
If server authentication is needed, #SSLSECCFG has to be set
as follows:
AT#SSLSECCFG=1,0,1,0
OK
Then, CA Certificate(DER format) has to be stored as follows:
AT#SSLSECDATA=1,1,1,<size>
>
…………………. // store CA Certificate
OK
Note: Only the configuration SSL commands listed above are admitted. DW
connection in secure mode cannot be used contemporarily to any command
starting an SSL connection (including SSL sockets, FTPS, secure SMTP and
HTPS).
<heartBeat> - If no packets are received in the number of seconds specified
in the heartbeat field, a heartbeat message will be sent to keep the
connection alive.
Default: 60
Range: 10 - 86400
<autoReconnect> - Flag indicating if the connection manager should
automatically reconnect to the service.
0 – auto-reconnect disabled
1 – auto-reconnect lazy - reconnect on next send and every 3600 seconds.
2 – auto-reconnect moderate (default) - reconnect 120 seconds, then every
3600 seconds after the first day.
3 – auto-reconnect aggressive - reconnect every 120 seconds.
<overflowHandling> - Flag indicating if the way to handle overflows in data
management.
0 – FIFO (default)
1 – LIFO
<atrunInstanceId> - AT instance that will be used by the service to run the
AT Command.
Default 4
Range 0 – 4
<serviceTimeout> - It defines in seconds the maximum time interval for a
service request to the server.
Default 5
Range 1 – 120
<contextID> - the PDP context used for the network connection.
- For all products except LE910-SV_V2 and LE910-SV1:
Default 1
Range 1 – 5
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 440 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
- For LE910-SV_V2 and LE910-SV1 products:
Default 3
Range 3 – 5
AT#DWCFG?
Read command returns the current settings in the format:
#DWCFG:
<serverUrl>,<deviceIDSelector>,<appToken>,<security>,<heartBeat>,<a
utoReconnect>,<overflowHandling>,<atrunInstanceId>,<serviceTimeou
t>,<contextID>,0,0
AT#DWCFG=?
Test command returns the supported range of parameters
<deviceIDSelector>, <security>, <heartBeat>,
<AutoReconnect>,<overflowHandling>,<atrunInstanceId> ,
<serviceTimeout>,<contextID>, <unused_1> and <unused_2>, and the
maximum length of <serverUrl> and <appToken> parameters.
5.1.6.19.2. Connect to M2M Service - #DWCONN
#DWCONN – connect to M2M Service
AT#DWCONN=<connect>
SELINT 2
Set command connects/disconnects to the M2M Service.
Parameters:
<connect> - flag to connect/disconnect to the M2M Service
0 – disconnect (default)
1 – connect
Note: AT#DWCONN=1 performs the socket connection and the MQTT
connection. AT#DWCONN=0 performs the socket disconnection.
Note: the PDN connectionused for the network connection is the first
(<cid>=1 has to be previously defined with AT+CGDCONT command and
activated with AT#SGACT command)
Note: if the secure mode connection has been enabled, it cannot be used
contemporarily to any command starting an SSL connection (including SSL
sockets, FTPS, secure SMTP and HTPS).
AT#DWCONN?
Read command returns the current settings for all parameters in the
format:
#DWCONN: <connect>>,<status>
Where:
<connect> is defined as above
<status> is the real connection status. Values:
0 = disconnected
1 = trying to connect
2 = connected
3 = waiting to connect
AT#DWCONN=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for all parameters
Page 441 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.19.3. Query connection status - #DWSTATUS
SELINT 2
#DWSTATUS – query connection status
AT#DWSTATUS
Execution command returns the status of the connection, including some runtime
statistics. Note, all statistics should be stored in RAM, not NVM.
The Cloud will return a generic structure
#DWSTATUS:
<connected><lastErrorCode>,<latency>,<pktsIn>,<pktsOut>,<bytesIn>,<byt
esOut>
<connected> : 3 = waiting to connect, 2 = connected, 1 = trying to connect, 0 =
disconnected
<lastErrorCode>: last error code encountered by the client
<latency> : milliseconds measured between last request and reply.
<pktsIn> : number of packets received, tracked by the server
<pktsOut> : number of packets sent.
<bytesIn> : number of bytes received, TCP/IP payload
<bytesOut> : number of bytes sent.
AT#DWSTATUS=?
Test command reports OK result code
5.1.6.19.4. Send data to M2M Service - #DWSEND
#DWSEND – send data to M2M Service
SELINT 2
AT#DWSEND=<type>,<par Execution command permits to send formatted data to the M2M Service.
am_>[,<param_2>[,…[<par
am_n>]]]
Parameters:
<type> - type code for the type of message to send.
0 - normal request
1 - method request
2 - method update
3 - method ack
The meaning of the following parameters (<param_1> … <param_n>)
changes depending on the value of the first parameter <type>:
Type 0 message format (API execution request):
<param_1> - command – the API command to execute.
<param_2+> - string parameters required by the method, in the format
<key_i>,<value_i>. They are key-value pairs indicating the i-th parameter,
with i=0,…,12. If the current API does not require input variables, these
parameters can be omitted.
Type 1 message format (remote method execution request):
<param_1> - “thingKey” – the key of a thing to execute.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 442 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
<param_2> - timeout – time to wait in milliseconds before returning an
error for the request.
<param_3> - method – the method key of a thing to execute.
<param_4> - is singleton – 0 or 1. 1 if no more than one of these instances
can exist.
<param_5+> - string parameters required by the method, in the format
<key_i>,<value_i>. They are key-value pairs indicating the i-th parameter,
with i=0,…,10. If the current method does not require input variables, these
parameters can be omitted.
Type 2 message format (method update):
<param_1> - id – the identification of the method instance.
<param_2> - message – a message represents the current status of the
method.
Type 3 message format (method acknowledgement):
<param_1> - id – the identification of the method instance.
<param_2> - status – the integer result status for the execution.
0 is reserved for OK.
<param_3 when status is set to non-zero> - error message associated with
the status.
<param_3+ when status is set to zero> - return parameters of the method.
Key-value pairs should be used. param_i should be the name of the
element and param_i+1 should be the value of the element. If the current
method does not require output variables, these parameters can be
omitted.
Note: there is no limit on the length of the single <param_i>, but there is a
limit in the total length of the AT command string, that cannot exceed 400
characters. If this threshold is exceeded, then an ERROR is raised.
There is also a limit of 20 messages on the receive queue. If the queue is
full, the consequent send will still succeed but the response for that
particular request will be dropped until an item is removed from this queue
(See command AT#DWRCV and AT#DWRCVR).
Note: the response to the AT#DWSEND command reports the <msgId>
value that identifies the sending.
Note: if data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: it’s possible to use AT#DWSEND only if the connection has been
opened with AT#DWCONN.
AT#DWSEND=?
Test command reports the maximum length of <type> parameter.
5.1.6.19.5. Send raw data to M2M Service - #DWSENDR
#DWSENDR – send raw data to M2M Service
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 443 of 464
SELINT 2
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
AT#DWSENDR=<dataLen> Execution command permits to send raw data to the M2M Service.
Content must be valid JSON.
Parameters:
<dataLen> - number of bytes to be sent
Range: 1 - 1500
The module responds to the command with the prompt
<greater_than><space> and waits for the data to send.
When <dataLen> bytes have been sent, operation is automatically
completed.
If data are successfully sent, then the response is OK.
If data sending fails for some reason, an error code is reported.
Note: the response to the AT#DWSENDR command reports the <msgId>
value that identifies the sending.
There is also a limit of 20 messages on the receive queue. If the queue is
full, the consequent send will still succeed but the response for that
particular request will be dropped until an item is removed from this queue
(See command AT#DWRCV and AT#DWRCVR).
Note: it’s possible to use AT#DWSENDR only if the connection has been
opened with AT#DWCONN
AT#DWSENDR=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for <dataLen>
parameter
5.1.6.19.6. Receive data from M2M Service - #DWRCV
#DWRCV – Receive data from M2M Service
AT#DWRCV=<msgId>
SELINT 2
Execution command permits the user to read formatted data arriving from
M2M Service; the module is notified of these data by the URC #DWRING.
Parameters:
<msgId> - index of the data message to receive, as indicated in the URC
#DWRING
Range: >=1
If the received data are the consequence of a previous data sending issued by
AT#DWSEND, then the <msgId> value is the same of the <msgId> value
reported in the answer of AT#DWSEND.
The incoming Server data are notified by the URC #DWRING with the
following format:
#DWRING: <type>,<msgId>,<len>
where:
<type> - type of message to receive
<msgId> - index of the data message to receive
<len> - length of data message to receive
If the incoming data are accepted with AT#DWRCV, then the formatted data
are received and showed with the following URC:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 444 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#DWRCV – Receive data from M2M Service
SELINT 2
#DWDATA:
<msgId>,<error>,<len>,<param_1>[,<param_2>[,…[,<param_n>]]]
where:
<msgId> - defined as above
<error> - error code of the message to receive, 0 if there is no error.
<len> - defined as above
<param_i> - string parameter indicating the i-th parameter associated to the
type specified
Note: it is possible to use AT#DWRCV only if the connection has been
opened with AT#DWCONN, else the ME is raising an error.
If the data received are the consequence of a previous data sending issued by
AT#DWSEND, then they can be read only using AT#DWRCV command and
not AT#DWRCVR command (i.e.: AT#DWRCV and AT#DWRCVR are not
interchangeable).
AT#DWRCV=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for all parameters.
5.1.6.19.7. Receive raw data from M2M Service - #DWRCVR
#DWRCVR – Receive raw data from M2M Service
SELINT 2
AT#DWRCVR=<msgId> Execution command permits the user to read raw data arriving from M2M
Service; the module is notified of these data by the URC #DWRING.
Parameters:
<msgId> - index of the data message to receive, as indicated in the URC
#DWRING
Range: >=1
If the data received are the consequence of a previous data sending (issued
by AT#DWSENDR), then the <msgId> value is the same of the <msgId>
value reported in the answer of AT#DWSENDR.
The incoming Server data are notified by the URC #DWRING with the
following format:
#DWRING: <type>,<msgId>,<len>
where:
<type> - type of the data message to receive
<msgId> - index of the data message to receive
<len> - length of data message to receive
If the incoming data are accepted with AT#DWRCVR, then the data are
received and showed with the following URC:
#DWRDATA: <msgId>,<error>,<len>,<data>
where:
<msgId> - defined as above
<error> - error code of the message to receive, 0 if there is no error.
<len> - defined as above
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 445 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#DWRCVR – Receive raw data from M2M Service
<data> - M2M Service data
SELINT 2
Note: it is possible to use AT#DWRCVR only if the connection has been
opened with AT#DWCONN, else the ME is raising an error.
If the data received are the consequence of a previous data sending issued by
AT#DWSENDR, then they can be read only using AT#DWRCVR command
and not AT#DWRCV command (i.e.: AT#DWRCV and AT#DWRCVR are not
interchangeable).
AT#DWRCVR=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for all parameters.
5.1.6.19.8. List information on messages pending from M2M Service - #DWLRCV
#DWLRCV – List information on messages pending from M2M Service
AT#DWLRCV
SELINT 2
Execution command permits the user to obtain information regarding the
messages pending from M2M Service in the following format:
#DWLRCV:
<msg_number>[,<msgId_1>,<msg_1_len>[,<msgId_2>,<msg_2_len>[,……
<msgId_n>,<msg_n_len>]]]
where:
<msg_number> - number of messages pending from M2M Service
Range: >=0
<msgId_i> - index of the i-th data message to receive
<msg_i_len> - length of the i-th data message to receive
Note: it is possible to use AT#DWLRCV only if the connection has been opened
with AT#DWCONN, else the ME is raising an error.
AT#DWLRCV=?
Test command reports OK result code
5.1.6.19.9. Enable Agent Features - #DWEN
SELINT 2
#DWEN – enable agent features
AT#DWEN=<feat>,<en>[,<opti Set command permits to enable/disable up to 8 different deviceWISE
on1>[,<option2>[,<option3>[,< features.
option4>[,<option5>]]]]]
Parameters:
<feat> - feature to enable or disable; range (0-7)
0 – remote at commands
1 … 7 – reserved for future use.
<en> - enable or disable the features
0 – disable the feature
1 – enable the feature
<optionX> where X=1,..,5 - optional parameters depending on the
feature (string)
Note: feature 0 (Remote AT commands) has no option.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 446 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
Note: the <en> value is considered only at the very first connection to
M2M Service (AT#DWCONN=1) after a device power on or reboot
AT#DWEN?
Read command returns the current settings for each feature in the
format:
#DWEN:
<feat>,<en>,<option1>,<option2>,<option3>,<option4>,<option5>
AT#DWEN=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<feat> and <en> and the maximum length of <optionX> (where
X=1,..,5) parameters
Page 447 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.20.
Software Management Service (SWM) AT Commands
5.1.6.20.1. SWM Client Enable / Disable - #SWMENA
#SWMENA – SWM Client Enable / Disable
AT#SWMENA=<mode>
SELINT 2
Execution command, used to enable/disable the SWM Client feature.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 – disable (default)
1 – enable
Note: <mode> parameter is only intended for client initiated SWM sessions
management. SWM NIA sessions could be executed independently.
AT#SWMENA?
Read command reports the current setting of SWM Client <mode> and
<status> in the format:
#SWMENA: <mode>,<status>
where:
<status> - service status
0 – not connected
1 – connected
Note: issuing #SWMENA=0 resets any pending update process by
resetting the SWM OMADM client to its default values and also by deleting
all the files needed by the SMW OMADM client currently present in the
"/swm" folder in the file system.
Note: SWM Client could also be enabled by an incoming SWM NIA SMS
message, even in case it is not enabled already. The SMS reception should
activate the client if any other OMADM campaign is not concurrently
ongoing, and at the end of it, the SWM client is automatically disabled in
order to restore the starting condition.
Note: if SWM client was not user activated and a NIA SMS has been
correctly received, the PDN connection is activated to manage the SWM
campaign, and at the end of it the PDN connection is deactivated to restore
the previous condition; if the SWM client was already user-activated, the
NIA campaign should maintain the PDN connection active status.
AT#SWMENA=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the <mode>
parameter.
Example
// starting condition
AT#SWMENA?
#SWMENA: 0,0
OK
//after SWM NIA SMS reception and during SWM campaign management
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 0,1
OK
…
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 448 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SWMENA – SWM Client Enable / Disable
SELINT 2
//after SWM NIA SMS end-of-management
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 0,0
OK
…
//SWM client user activation
AT#SWMENA=1
OK
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 1,1
OK
5.1.6.20.2. Configure SWM Client Parameters - #SWMCFG
#SWMCFG – Configure SWM Client Parameters
AT#SWMCFG=[<max_avail
_size_ext_storage>
[,<pdpId>[,<enableInRoami
ng>[,<enableReleaseNoteU
RL>[,<pollingIntervalInHou
rs>[,<bootupPollingInterval
>[,<recoveryPollingInterval
>[,<secureConnection>]]]]]]
]
SELINT 2
Set command configures the parameters related to SWM Client.
Parameters:
<max_avail_size_ext_storage> - maximum available size in bytes of the
external storage. For external application updates. Default: 0.
<pdpId> - PDP context identifier the SWM client should use on the
module. Range: 1-5; Default: 1
<enableInRoaming> - Flag indicating if DM sessions are allowed in
cellular roaming conditions.
0 – DM sessions not allowed in roaming (default)
1 – DM sessions allowed in roaming
<enableReleaseNoteURL> - Flag indicating if unsolicited ring
notifications for #SWMCHKUPD and #SWMRING will contain the release
note strings even if they are present in the DM session.
0 – release note not present in URC (default)
1 – release note present in URC
<pollingIntervalInHours> - Integer parameter indicating the span of time
in hours between automatic DM session initiations by the SWM client.
Valid value is >=0. A value of 0 means no polling. Default is stored parsed
as part of the DM tree: 168.
<bootupPollingInterval> - Integer parameter indicating the span of time
in minutes between device boot and a one time DM session initiation by
the SWM client. Valid value is >=0. A value of 0 means that the SWM
Client launches
a DM session immediately. Default is stored parsed as part of the DM
tree: 60.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 449 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SWMCFG – Configure SWM Client Parameters
SELINT 2
<recoveryPollingInterval> - Integer parameter indicating the next polling
clock time when the device initiated (polling) session has failed. The value
should be smaller than <pollingIntervalInHours>. Valid value is >=0. A
value of 0 means no polling. Default is stored parsed as part of the DM
tree: 2.
<secureConnection> - Flag indicating if the SSL encryption is enabled.
Not yet implemented.
0 – SSL encryption disabled (default)
1 – SSL encryption enabled (not yet implemented)
Note: if SSL encryption is enabled, another secure socket will not be
available for the application.
Note: if the parameter <max_avail_size_ext_storage> has value 0, then
the external application handling is not supported/required.
Note: the configuration has to be done before enabling SWM. Issuing the
AT#SWMCFG set command after AT#SWMENA=1 will raise an error.
AT#SWMCFG?
Read command reports the current values of parameters in the format:
#SWMCFG:
<max_avail_size_ext_storage>,<pdpId>,<enableInRoaming>,<enable
ReleaseNoteURL>,<pollingIntervalInHours>,<bootupPollingInterval>,
<recoveryPollingInterval>,<secureConnection>
AT#SWMCFG=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for all the
parameters.
5.1.6.20.3. Configure Bootstrap - # SWMBOOTSTRAP
#SWMBOOTSTRAP – Configure Bootstrap
AT#SWMBOOTSTRAP=<se
rverId>,<name>,<serverUR
L>,<serverAuthType>,<ser
verAuthName>,<serverAut
hSecret>,<serverAuthData
>,<clientAuthType>,<client
AuthName>,<clientAuthSec
ret>,<clientAuthData>
SELINT 2
Set command configures the DM parameters like server URL and access
credentials, required for the DM sessions.
Parameters:
<serverId> - string parameter that identifies the server. Only
alphanumeric characters are allowed.
<name> - string parameter indicating the name of the bootstrap
parameters set
<serverURL> - string parameter indicating the URL of the SWM server in
address:port form. The address substring shall start with “http://” or
“https://”, otherwise an error is raised.
<serverAuthType> - integer parameter indicating the authentication type
at the server side:
0 – BASIC
1 – DIGEST
2 – HMAC
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 450 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SWMBOOTSTRAP – Configure Bootstrap
SELINT 2
<serverAuthName> - string parameter indicating the username in the
server authentication
<serverAuthSecret> - string parameter indicating the password in the
server authentication
<serverAuthData> - string parameter indicating the nonce in the server
authentication
<clientAuthType> - integer parameter indicating the authentication type
at the client side:
0 – BASIC
1 – DIGEST
2 – HMAC
<clientAuthName> - string parameter indicating the username in the
client authentication
<clientAuthSecret> - string parameter indicating the password in the
client authentication
<clientAuthData> - string parameter indicating the nonce in the client
authentication
Note: the command is allowed only if SWM Client is enabled (i.e.
AT#SWMENA? answers 1 for <mode> parameter)
Note: if the user wants to omit <serverAuthName>,
<serverAuthSecret>, <serverAuthData>, <clientAuthName>,
<clientAuthSecret> or <clientAuthData> parameters, a void string such
as “” should be inserted for each of them.
Note: the client supports only 15 possible Bootstrap account changes.
Every successive attempt to change it will result in an ERROR. To reset
this condition, SWM client should be switched off (#SWMENA=0).
AT#SWMBOOTSTRAP?
Read command reports the current values of parameters in the format:
#SWMBOOTSTRAP:
<serverId>,<name>,<serverURL>,<serverAuthType>,<serverAuthNa
me>,<serverAuthSecret>,<serverAuthData>,<clientAuthType>,<clie
ntAuthName>,<clientAuthSecret>,<clientAuthData>
The showed values are those of the tree.
AT#SWMBOOTSTRAP=?
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Test command reports the supported range of values for all the
parameters.
Page 451 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.20.4. Enable/Disable Self Registration - #SWMREG
#SWMREG –Enable/Disable Self Registration
AT#SWMREG=<mode>[,<d
omainName>[,<PIN>]]
SELINT 2
Set command enables/disables in the SWM Client the self-registration
functionality to an SWM Center service domain. In case self-registration is
enabled, the SWM client will use the domainName and PIN combination
to register upon first OMA-DM session to the correct customer domain
(account) in the SWM Center server.
Parameters:
<mode>
0 – disable (default)
1 – enable
<domainName> - String parameter indicating the SWM Center domain
name to register to. If absent, then a predefined default one is used from
the DM tree configuration.
<PIN> - String parameter indicating the PIN code for registration into the
domain. If absent, then a predefined default one is used from the DM tree
configuration.
Note: after a successful self-registration, any later attempt are accepted
but will not have any effect.
Note: the self-registration failure is notified with the following URC:
#SWMRING: 1[, <notificationDescription>]
Note: the self-registration is possible only if SWM has previously been
enabled by issuing AT#SWMENA=1 command.
Note: the self-registration <mode>, <domainName> and <PIN>
parameters are not reset after the SWM Client disabling, as they refer to
parameters that affect the server behaviour.
AT#SWMREG?
Read command reports the current setting of <mode> parameter in the
format:
#SWMREG: <mode>
The registration credentials are not reported for security reasons.
AT#SWMREG=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the <mode> par
ameter and the maximum length of <domainName> and <PIN> paramete
rs in the format:
#SWMREG: (list of supported <mode>s),<domainLength>,<pinLengt
h>
where:
<domainLength> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of fi
eld <domainName>
<pinLength> - integer type value indicating the maximum length of field
<PIN>.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 452 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.20.5. Check updates - #SWMCHKUPD
#SWMCHKUPD – Check updates
AT#SWMCHKUPD
SELINT 2
Execution command, used to trigger a DM Session for querying the OMADM server for a pending update.
Note: if successful, the command returns a final result code OK. Then,
when an update checking is done, a URC is received:
#SWMCHKUPD:<isUpdateAvailable>[,
<totalPackageSizeInBytes>[,<description>[,<releaseNoteURL>]]]
where:
<isUpdateAvailable>
0 – No update is available.
1 – Update is available.
<totalPackageSizeInBytes> - Size of update package in bytes.
<description> - Description of the release package
<releaseNoteURL> - OMA-DM Server URL where the package release
note is located.
Note: The <totalPackageSizeInBytes> parameter is optional and will be
present in the response in case an update package is pending on the
OMA-DM server side. The <releaseNoteURL> parameter is optionally
available if there is a descriptive release note string associated with the
update package and if <enableReleaseNoteURL>=1 in #SWMCFG.
Note: the command raises an error if issued before AT#SWMENA=1.
AT#SWMCHKUPD=?
Test command returns the OK result code.
Example
Update is available)
AT#SWMCHKUPD
OK
#SWMCHKUPD: 1,4096, Minor Bug Fixes and Added Functionality
(No Update is available)
AT#SWMCHKUPD
OK
#SWMCHKUPD: 0
5.1.6.20.6. Download update package from OMA-DM software mngmt server - #SWMGETDP
#SWMGETDP – Download update package from OMA-DM software management
server.
AT#SWMGETDP=
<status>
SELINT 2
Execution command confirms SWM client to proceed and download an
update package after receiving a URC
#SWMCHKUPD:
1,<totalPackageSizeInBytes>[,<description>[,<releaseNoteURL>]]
Parameters:
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 453 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SWMGETDP – Download update package from OMA-DM software management
server.
<status> - User action for confirmation
0 – Reject
1 – Accept
SELINT 2
Note: if successful, commands returns a final result code OK. Then, a
URC is received:
#SWMDLPRGRSS:
<accumulativeReceivedBytes>,<totalDPSizeInBytes>
where:
<accumulativeReceivedBytes>: current size in bytes of the downloaded
portion of the package
<totalDPSizeInBytes>: total size in bytes of the package
Note: when download is done successful, the following URC is received:
-
#SWMRING: 2[,<description>[,<releaseNoteURL>]]
Note: the command raises an error if issued before AT#SWMENA=1.
Note: if #SWMGETDP issued when the delta package has already been
downloaded, the command returns “OK” and no action is performed.
AT#SWMGETDP=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the <status>
parameter.
Example
AT#SWMCHKUPD
OK
#SWMCHKUPD: 1,1024,”Description of update package”,”Release Note
URL”
AT#SWMGETDP=1
OK
#SWMDLPRGRSS: 0,1024
#SWMDLPRGRSS: 1024,1024
#SWMRING: 2,”Description of update package”,”Release Note URL”
5.1.6.20.7. Install software update package - #SWMDEPLOYDP
#SWMDEPLOYDP – Install software update package
AT#SWMDEPLOYDP=<stat
us>
SELINT 2
Execution command confirms SWM client to install update package after a
URC
#SWMRING: 2[,<description>[,<releaseNoteURL>]]
Parameters:
<status> - User action for confirmation
0 – Reject
1 – Accept
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 454 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#SWMDEPLOYDP – Install software update package
SELINT 2
Note: if the update requires a device reboot, the device will be rebooted
silently.
Note: when a FUMO update is done, a URC is received
#SWMRING: <notificationId>[<description>[,<releaseNoteURL>]]
where:
<notificationId>
4 – Firmware update successfully deployed
5 – Firmware update failed
Note: the command raises an error if issued before AT#SWMENA=1.
Note: if #SWMDEPLOYDP is issued before the delta package is
downloaded with #SWMGETDP, the command returns “OK” and no action
is performed.
AT#SWMDEPLOYDP=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for the <status>
parameter.
Example
AT# SWMDEPLOYDP =1
OK
(after device reboot)
#SWMRING: 4,”description of update package”,”Release Note URL”
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 455 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.21.
Device Management (OMA-DM) Commands
5.1.6.21.1. OMADM Configuration management - #OMACFG
#OMACFG - OMA DM Configuration parameters management
SELINT 2
The set command is intended to allow the end-user to handle the OMADM
AT#OMACFG=< pdpId >
[,<unused_1>[,<unused_2> AT&T parameters configuration.
[,<unused_3>]]]
Parameters:
< pdpId > - PDP context identifier the AT&T OMADM client should use on
the module. Range: 1-5; Default: 1
<unused_1> Default: 0
<unused_2> Default: 0
<unused_3> Default: 0
AT#OMACFG?
The read command returns the parameters current value.
AT#OMACFG=?
Test command returns the supported range for #OMACFG command
parameters.
Example
//get the current values
AT#OMACFG?
#OMACFG: 1,0,0,0
OK
//set a new PDP context identifier value
AT#OMACFG=3
OK
//read the currently set value
AT#OMACFG?
#OMACFG: 3,0,0,0
OK
//test command
AT#OMACFG=?
#OMACFG: (1-5),(0), (0), (0)
OK
5.1.6.21.2. Enable OMA DM - #ENAOMADM
SELINT 2
#ENAOMADM – Enable OMA DM
AT#ENAOMADM=<enable> This command allows the user to control some features about Open
[,<unsolicited>[,<account
Mobile Alliance (OMA) standards-based Device Management (DM)
type>]]
functionality. OMA DM is used to remotely provision new subscribers,
configure applications and network settings, manage software, and
retrieve device information over the air.
Parameters:
<enable> - is no more used to disable/enable OMA DM functionality.
<enable> parameter is managed and saved in NvM to maintain the former
AT&T client’s behaviour.
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 456 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENAOMADM – Enable OMA DM
SELINT 2
<unsolicited> type of notification
0 - disabled
1 - enabled (factory default); the ME informs about reception of DM
events related to ongoing session through an unsolicited code
#OMADM: <event>
Where <event> is one of the strings
"UIE_SESSION_DM_NI_STARTED" - A NIA session has started
"UIE_BOOTSTRAP_GET_PIN" - Request PIN code
"UIE_BOOTSTRAP_GET_NSS" - Request NSS data
"UIE_UI_ALERT_INFO" - Shows the end-user a UI Alert information
message
"UIE_UI_ALERT_CONFIRM" - Shows the end-user an UI Alert
confirmation message
"UIE_UI_ALERT_INPUT" - Shows the end-user an UI Alert input
message
"UIE_UI_ALERT_CHOICE" - Shows the end-user an UI Alert choice list
"UIE_FUMO_CONFIRM_UPDATE" - Prompts the end-user to confirm
update installation
(Only for Verizon products)
"UIE_SESSION_STATE_NOTIFY_UI",<message> could be associated
with the following <message>:
- “Started”, when a NIA message is taken in charge by the OMADM
client;
- “Complete”, when the OMADM session has completed its scope.
- “Aborted”, when the session started but the connection
management resulted in a fatal error and the OMADM session fails.
It is issued along with an internal code.
"UIE_SESSION_NOTIFY_NIA_DROP",<code> – Alerts the user that a
NIA message was received but discarded because of <code> reasons:
- ‘1’ reports that the device is in Roaming;
- ‘2’ reports that the device has no network coverage
- ‘3’ reports a generic error
(Only for AT&T products)
<account type> - is used to change the server to connect to (if
necessary)
0. AT&T Production
1. (reserved)
2. (reserved)
3. (reserved)
4. (reserved)
5. (reserved)
Note – valid only for AT&T -: the command only works for #ENS=1 (see
#ENS command). It is consequent that, once the OMADM client is active,
#ENS could not be disabled.
Note: the values <enable> and <account type> set by command are
directly stored in NVM and do not depend on the specific CMUX instance;
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 457 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENAOMADM – Enable OMA DM
SELINT 2
the value <unsolicited> is stored in the profile extended section, and it
depends on the specific AT instance
Note: it is in charge of the user to verify if a IP context must be defined
before the enable command is issued; the context, if not already
activated, is activated by the command
Note: OMA DM Client is enabled by an incoming AT&T NIA SMS
message. The SMS reception should activate the client if any other
OMADM campaign is not concurrently ongoing (i.e.: SWM client could be
active but it is not managing any delta downloading/deploying), and at the
end of it, the OMA DM client is automatically disabled in order to restore
the starting condition. There is no real correlation between the OMA DM
client status and the <enable> parameter.
AT#ENAOMADM?
Read command reports the currently selected parameters and DM engine
status in the format:
#ENAOMADM: <enable>,<unsolicited>,<account type>,<engine
status>
Where
<engine status>
0 – DM engine stopped
1 – DM engine running
Note: in Verizon products, <account type> parameter is shown even if it
is meaningless.
Note: <enable> parameter is shown even if uncorrelated to the effective
client’s status.
AT#ENAOMADM=?
Test command reports the supported range of values for parameters
<enable>, <unsolicited> and <account type>.
Example
//starting condition
AT#ENAOMADM?
#ENAOMADM: 0,1,0,0
OK
AT#SGACT?
#SGACT: 1,0
OK
//after AT&T NIA SMS, and during AT&T campaign management
AT#ENAOMADM?
#ENAOMADM: 0,1,0,1
OK
AT#SGACT?
#SGACT: 1,1
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 458 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENAOMADM – Enable OMA DM
SELINT 2
//after the AT&T NIA Campaign end
AT#ENAOMADM?
#ENAOMADM: 0,1,0,0
OK
AT#SGACT?
#SGACT: 1,0
OK
----//NIA received during an SWM campaign (in “idle” status)
AT#SWMENA=1
OK
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 1,1
OK
AT#SWMCHKUPD
OK
SWMCHKUPD: 0
//a NIA message is received, client switch is managed
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 1,0
OK
AT#ENAOMADM?
#ENAOMADM: 0,1,0,1
OK
// after the AT&T campaign’s end, no unsolicited are shown
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 1,1
OK
AT#ENAOMADM?
#ENAOMADM: 0,1,0,0
OK
-----//during an SWM campaign (not “idle”)
// now is still ‘idle’…
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 459 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#ENAOMADM – Enable OMA DM
AT#SWMENA?
AT#SWMENA: 1,1
SELINT 2
OK
//… and now is no more idle (a delta is present. From now to end of
deploy, SWM client is not idle)
AT#SWMCHKUPD
OK
#SWMCHKUPD: 1, 22096,"Firmware,20.00.402.0A012_bis,UpdPkg_LE910_EU_V2_1G_20.00.402.0-A012”
// any incoming NIA messages are rejected unless the SWM client status
is ‘idle’
AT#ENAOMADM?
#ENAOMADM: 0,1,0,0
OK
-----//Correctly managed Verizon session
#OMADM: "UIE_SESSION_STATE_NOTIFY_UI","DM","Started","0"
#OMADM: "UIE_SESSION_STATE_NOTIFY_UI","DM","Complete","0"
//Aborted Verizon session
#OMADM: "UIE_SESSION_STATE_NOTIFY_UI","DM","Started","0"
#OMADM: "UIE_SESSION_STATE_NOTIFY_UI","DM","Aborted","24577"
// dropped NIA message, due to roaming state
#OMADM: "UIE_SESSION_NOTIFY_NIA_DROP","DM","NIA sms
dropped","1"
5.1.6.21.3. Host ODIS parameters management - #HOSTODIS
#HOSTODIS – Host Odis parameters management
SELINT 2
AT#HOSTODIS=<Param>,< The set command is intended to allow the end-user to handle the Host
Action>[,<Value>[,<Instanc Odis parameters for AT&T OMADM client.
e>]]
Parameters:
<Param> - this parameter should be used to select the parameter to work
on:
0 is for the Host Manufacturer;
1 is for the Host Model;
2 is for the Host Software application version;
3 is for the Host Device Unique ID.
<Action> - this parameter should be used to select the action to be
performed on the chosen parameter:
0 is to perform a “set”;
1 is to perform a “get”
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 460 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
#HOSTODIS – Host Odis parameters management
2 is to perform a “reset”;
SELINT 2
<Value> - only valid in case of <Action> set to 0, it should contain a string
with the proper value.
<Instance> - instance of host details settings:
1 – instance ‘1’
Note: Host Manufacturer, Host Model and Host Software application
version do not change after an OTA firmware upgrade.
Note: “GET” operation not allowed on Host Device Unique ID.
AT#HOSTODIS=?
Test command returns the supported range of
<Param>, <Action>, <Value> and <Instance> parameters.
Example
//get the currently set values (i.e.: host Model)
AT#HOSTODIS=1,1
#HOSTODIS:“HMOD1”
OK
//set a new Host Model value
AT#HOSTODIS=1,0,"Model #4 - 2nd version"
OK
//read the currently set value
AT#HOSTODIS=1,1
#HOSTODIS: 0,"Model #4 - 2nd version"
OK
//reset the Model value
AT#HOSTODIS=1,2
OK
//read again the currently set value
AT#HOSTODIS=1,1
#HOSTODIS:“HMOD1”
OK
//test command
AT#HOSTODIS=?
#HOSTODIS: (0-3),(0-2),64,0
OK
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 461 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
5.1.6.21.4. OMA DM Send PIN or NSS - #OMASENDPIN
#OMASENDPIN – OMA DM Send PIN or NSS
AT#OMASENDPIN=
<data>
SELINT 2
This command sends a response to an UIE_BOOTSTRAP_GET_PIN or
UIE_BOOTSTRAP_GET_NSS event (see #ENAOMADM command).
Parameter:
<data> - string corresponding to the requested PIN or NSS data
AT#OMASENDPIN=?
Test command tests for command existence..
5.1.6.21.5. Device ID write - #UNIQUEDEVID
SELINT 2
#UNIQUEDEVID – Device ID write
AT#UNIQUEDEVID=<Devic
eID>
Handling of Device ID parameter (developed for ODIS AT&T
requirement).
Set command writes the Device ID in persistent storage
Parameters:
<DeviceID> - Device ID: up to 16 alphanumeric digits ID assigned to the
device.
String type.
Example
AT#UNIQUEDEVID =abc1234567890123
OK
// Read command not supported
AT#UNIQUEDEVID?
ERROR
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 462 of 464
2018-10-11
LE910 V2 SERIES AT COMMANDS REFERENCE GUIDE
6. DOCUMENT HISTORY
Revision
Date
0
2015-11-03
Changes
Preliminary Version
Document template and AT commands update
1
2016-05-10
2
2016-05-30
Alignment to first mass production release 20.00.xx2 (AT$ commands
to be added in rev.2)
Adding GNSS AT commands, modified description of +CEMODE,
#SWMBOOTSTRAP, #CODEC. #UNIQUEDEVID
Applicability table update.
Added LE910-JN1. Updated Storage Table.
3
2017-12-01
AT#FILEPWD typo correction, +CGCONTRD title syntax,
#CESTHLCK description correction, +CFUN update
Added +CGSMS, #APPSSLCFG, AT#FWSWITCH, #I2CCF, #CMAR,
#TXCAL4G, +CMAR , +CMGL, +CMGR, +CMGW, #IIDIPV6,
#MTUSIZE, #SEKEY, +CCHO, +CCHC, +CGLA
Typo corrections.
Applicability table update: AT#PDPAUTH on AT&T
4
2018-05-30
Removed AT#RXDIV command not supported
Removed 3G support for AT#RXTOGGLE
New document template
5
2018-10-11
#FTPAPP, #TXCALEDGE, #ISMSCFG removal
Par. 3.2.2 update
80446ST10707A Rev. 5
Page 463 of 464
2018-10-11
[01.2017]
Mod. 0805 2017-01 Rev.6
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement